Original subtitles

Hello friends hope you had a really good

start of 2025 I Amit chandak a Microsoft

data platform MVP and a powerb community

super user I also chief altic officer at

caner I welcome you to this video learn

powerbi yes it is a full video of 20

hours in 2023 I released a similar video

of 11 hours and 30 minutes I'm taking a

next step to bring you even bigger and

better content we are going to cover

visualization Texs and power query in

details I'm hopeful this video will help

you to enhance your journey of power bi

in a great way start this journey with

me and I will take you through a Content

which consists of more than 140 plus

videos which has been recorded and

edited throughout

2024 you will find some of the uis has

changed over a period of time but I've

taken care that I have Incorporated the

new UI at the right place so let's begin

this journey learn

powerbi and data analytics industry is

continue to grow and it creates lot of

opportunities for business intelligence

data analytics and visualization tools

powerbi is leading the that weave today

with the emergence of Microsoft fabric

it has taken next step in that Journey

so learning powerbi as a skill can be

really useful and I have done an attempt

to make sure that I cover all those

aspect in this particular video I would

also like to take this opportunity to

thank each and everyone of you who have

watched the previous video where over

last two years there were more than

200,000 views and 4,000 like you have

really appreciate that video you have

asked many question on that video and

based on that I have created many other

videos the channel now have more than

850 videos and you can take full

advantage of those videos more than 500

videos are only on powerbi and there are

more than 80 plus videos on Microsoft

fabric including English and Hindi so my

advice would be to watch all these other

videos other than this course to take

the full advantage of powerb there are

detailed videos on each and every

function of Dex and power query on my

channel and you should also watch other

than watching this full course I wish

you a very successful power ba Journey

with this video and hoping that this

video will make your powerbi journey

really easy in case you have some

questions you can ask them in comments

but with that let's begin our journey in

20125 to learn powerbi and take a next

step in your data analytics career so

friends the question arise why powerbi

powerbi is leading business intelligence

Analytics tool and for last many years

every business intelligence analytics

industry reports put powerbi as the top

leading tool in terms of feature and

capabilities with the launch of

Microsoft fabric an integrated

environment where powerbi is also part

of it which has capabilities of having

lake houses warehouses realtime Antics

all together on integrated platform as a

powerbi developer you have a leap to

take my recommendation is with the help

of this video you learn powerbi and then

take the advantage of various other

videos on my channel to learn Microsoft

fabric 202 4 is expected to be the era

of Microsoft Fabric and you have a

pivotal role to play as a powerbi

developer and enhancing your skill to

the next level to the Microsoft fabric

becoming a Microsoft fabric developer so

let's start together this exciting

journey of learning powerbi taking the

analytics experience to the next level

for the end user and then take it to the

next level using Microsoft

fabric so let's understand what is is

powerbi powerbi is a business

intelligence and analytics service that

delivers Insight from analyzing the data

powerb is a collection of software

Services app and connectors that work

together to turn your unrelated sources

of data into coherent visually immersive

and interactive Insight it can share

those insights through data

visualization which can make up reports

and dashboards to enable the fast

informed decision power ba scales across

and organization and it has built in

governance security allowing business to

focus on using data more than managing

it in the today's datadriven world

powerbi stands out as a pivotal tool in

the data visualization and business

intelligence it is not just presenting

the data it's about unlocking the

insights and for decision making so

let's begin this interesting journey in

the world of powerbi so whether you're

beginner or eager to dive into the data

visualization or a professional looking

to update your skills this video is a

gateway mastering powerb together let's

transform the way we understand the

data so the first term is data itself so

data is a set of values of qualitative

or quantitive variable means something

which we want to measure against

something which we want to measure and

it's not only about data it's about

quality data see in business

intelligence and data analytics we use a

term garbage in garbage out what does

that means if you if you don't have

quality data you'll not be able to get

quality analysis and that's really

important here and that might require

transformation and powerbi is capable of

doing the transformation then we have a

term data analytics data analytics is

the process of examining and analyzing

the data sets in order to draw insights

conclusion and make data driven decision

making so we are talking about data

driven decision making it involves using

statistical and analytical techniques to

extract and interpret relevant

information from data and can be applied

in wide range of fields and industries

so basically we are driving out the

information from the data we are taking

decisions which will drive our

businesses we have another term which is

business intelligence and business

intelligence refers to decision making

now according to o.com the term business

intelligence bi refers to the technology

application and practice for collection

integration analysis and presentation of

business information the purpose of

business intelligence is to support B

better decision making now here we are

talking about collection of data

integration of data analysis of data and

presentation of data power ba can do all

four means it can collect data from

different sources it can integrate them

it can analyze and present also it could

happen that most of the time this

collection and integration is happening

outside maybe in a data warehouse and

Analysis and presentation is going to

happen in powerbi now data could be

structured semi- structured or

unstructured most of the time we are

going to deal with the structure data

and this structure data can come from

rdbms and sometime it may be also

available in Excel files or csvs where

targets and budgets are commonly kept

now ideally we should move them into the

data warehouse or a common storage so

that they can be managed properly but in

any project you will not have 100% data

coming from rdbm you may have some data

coming outside now semi- structure data

and un structure data would be dealt

little bit outside the powerbi or maybe

converted into some useful information

or data and then maybe U given in power

ba for analysis now you will come across

the term tables and fact now table is

basically a collection of related data

entries and it consists of numerous

columns and rows so there are rows and

columns and it contains data now table

could be a fact table or table could be

a dimension table fact table is the

table which containing the majors or the

facts facts means truth about your

organization my sales my purchase my

inventory number of employees their

salary all these are the facts of your

organization they are the truth about

your organization that are used to

analyze data as well as Dimension Keys

against which they need to be analy so

it will also contain the dimension Keys

against which you need to analyze this

data you will also hear this term major

matrices kpi and then you will also hear

the term parameter filter Dimension so

what is measor so something which you

want to measure measure for your success

of your organization and then you will

measure it against something against

time against geography against customer

against vendor against items articles so

you say I have done good sales sales is

a major or matrices what is what do you

mean by good have you done good against

your competitor have you done good

against last year have you done good

because your margin has increased all

these questions are there and such

questions we will be trying to answer

using business intelligence and data

analytics so these are the terms you

should be hearing time and again then

there are two kind of matrices lead

matrices and lag matrices lead mattress

is something which can indicate what is

going to happen lag is something which

is actually analyzing what has already

had happened sales is basically

something already has happened but is

sales going to decrease how you are

going to know so it's basically size of

your funnel how many opportunities or

leads you have if your leads are

decreasing your opportunities are

decreasing at 1 F day your sales will

decrease so there are lead indicators

and that is how the prediction happens

so somebody's saying okay downtime is

coming or how this is coming because

they look at the lead in mates and once

lead and mat is going down we know that

the lag mattress is will follow it soon

these kind of metrices you should also

remember in your analysis what you plan

to analyze now you will hear about

relational schema star schema and

snowflake schema and star schema is very

common term which you will hear while

you are doing your analysis now without

going into lot of details of this one

let me explain you one quick example in

typical in a relational schema what

happens we try to store information in

such a manner that it doesn't repeat at

all so let's say if I store state in a

city table what would happen the state

name will repeat for many cities so

instead of storing the state name what

I'll do I'll create a state ID and state

name in a separate table and I'll only

store the state ID in the city table so

if the state name changes or updated I'm

only updating one record so in such a

manner we create a set of table using a

process called normalization and

relational schema or the oltp system

online transaction processing system

which are our base core erps or CRM they

typically follow relational schema back

because of which they are able to handle

thousands of transaction or millions of

transaction in a day so this is

typically how a relational schema looks

like you might have a sales table sales

might have a detail sales might join to

city and state it might join with time

and time may be further classified as

date month quarter year there could be

Separate Tables or one table it could be

joining with customer customer can join

further with customer group CS detail

can join with item item can join with

brand category subcategory and all so

many tables could be there what what

happens is then this is relational

schema we have a dimensional schema

there are two dimensional schema which

are pretty common one is Snowflake and

second one is star schema now what

happens in case of snowflake schema you

can still have subdimensions like I

combined sales and sale detail here I

combined also customer and customer

group but I still have item and brand

means item table is there and it's also

connected to Brand you can also have

city and state means still separate out

table time is one combined it maybe

previously also combined I also combined

but when you come to Star schema what

happens is that you do do not have any

join between Dimensions also so no fact

join with other fact no Dimension join

with other dimension and the distance of

information is one so I want to know

brand wise sales item wise sales the

distance is one one joint I want to know

statewise sale one joint I will get

State I want to know customer group wise

one join with customer table I'll get

that information so I can have many join

but all these joins are just one step

apart that's what the star schema and in

that one fact will not join with fact

Dimension will not join with Dimension

so these are basic few concept which

should be aware and you will hear all

these terms time and again so let's

begin this journey of learning powerbi

to start this journey let's first

understand Microsoft powerb ecosystem

this ecosystem does not include

Microsoft fabric ecosystem I have

knowingly excluded that which we can

discuss in a separate video of Microsoft

fabric you can watch the introduction

videos in Hindi and English on my

channel explaining the various

components that Microsoft fabric

provides you so the Journey of any

business intelligence analytics tools

start with the sources so what kind of

sources we can have for powerbi the

usual sources are external sources like

Excel databases Etc then we will discuss

later on about these remaining two

sources you import that into the powerbi

desktop for databases we do have option

for direct query what is Import in case

of import the data would be residing in

the powerbi and we will be creating the

model into the powerbi and we will be

creating measures and would be analyzing

the data also so powerbi own meta as

well as data in case of direct query we

create the connection we do not import

the data but we create the metadata we

create the model we create the

definitions we create the relationship

we create measures we create

visualization finally analyze so power

VI will have model power VA will have

visualization but will not have data

that is direct query mode now once you

create your power bi report on the

desktop with help of transformation

using power query and measures and

calculation using Dex and finally

creating visualization using powerbi you

can publish this file on powerbi

service powerbi service is the ecosystem

where you are going to share this report

and do the collaboration with other user

powerb desktop is a development tool it

does not have security you can create

roles to apply the security on powerbi

service but unlike Excel where it is

password protected that's not powerb

desktop powerb desktop all the

information is available you can

restrict what you wanted to load but the

entire information is available so once

you are done with your development on

powerb desktop you publish it orto the

powerbi service now if you are using on

promise sources you need on promise

Gateway way that include on promise

databases like SQL server or Excel

sheets you need on promise Gateway if

your sources are Cloud you don't need on

promise Gateway they can directly be

refreshed on service remember in powerbi

desktop you have a refresh button to

refresh the data on the service we can

schedule the data set refresh

automatically to happen 8 times for pro

48 times for premium users when when it

goes to powerbi service the report which

you publish the PBX which we have on the

desktop it get divided into two parts

one is data set or what we call a

semantic model and another one is report

the data set or what we call a semantic

model it can also act as a source again

and you can create report paginated

report and dashboard on top of it you

can take it back to the powerbi desktop

and again create a report which you can

publish you can re use it on the report

developer paginated reports can be

created using this data set and that can

be published again on powerbi service

known as paginated report so it means

once you create the data set you will be

able to use that it again and the

connection this time we are going to

create when we use the data set is known

as live connection reports will have a

live Connection in this case you can

finally create a powerbi app and

distribute the content and this is

really helpful when you want to

distribute it to the large number of

user you can combine multiple reports

along with the dashboards and share it

with user you can create create multiple

audiences and share different set of

reports with them now let's talk a

little bit about two components of the

powerb desktop so one of the component

of the powerb desktop was power query

power query is used for data preparation

data cleaning and data transformation

Dex is used for creating complex measure

calculations which help you to finally

create the

analysis so what happen is in power

query whatever you transformation you

create remain with that file but what

happens if we have to do same kind of

transformation again and again how do we

keep its record across various users or

various files so to address that power

ba has come up with the online version

of power query and that is known as data

flow in powerbi world we use data flow

gen one or data flow in Microsoft Fabric

World we use the next version of data

flow which is known as data flow Gen 2

data flow Gen 2 is the online version of

the power query and you can use it for

data preparation data cleaning and data

transformation now data flow Gen 2

stores the data but it cannot create a

data set so you have to bring it back to

the powerbi desktop and then create your

data set after you create the data set

without creating a visualization you can

publish that data set you can use that

data set back to create the

visualization and this is one of the

pattern we use now in the data flow we

may not have all the heavy tables

Dimensions or the small table which

which have lot of transformation can be

part of data flow so have the dimension

table or small table having lot of

transformation in the data flow take it

to the powerb desktop merge it with

other fact tables create relationship

create measures create all the complex

calculation which you require without

creating a visualization publish it and

create a powerb data set or what we call

a semantic model so the term which we

are using now for few months is semantic

model create your semantic model and use

that in the live connection on powerbi

desktop or in powerbi service itself you

can create the report and visualization

same can be used in power P now now you

would have understood why I kept PBI

data flow

here then what is this one Lake and what

is this almost very similar icon what

happens is basically in Microsoft fabric

we have a direct Lake connector in

Microsoft fabric most of the things

resides on Lake where whether it is the

structure data or unstructured data we

save it using lakehouses or warehouses

and lak houses and warehouses create a

data set or what we call a semantic

model the data set or what we call a

semantic model directly gives you data

from lake houses and warehouses and it

doesn't need a direct query it is a best

possible merge of import and direct

query so there is a new connection type

which is direct Lake connection type so

when you connect to the one L Lake you

get a new kind of connection which is a

direct Lake connection semantic model

created on the lake houses or warehouses

or the custom semantic models created on

lake houses or Warehouse so in this

manner you can use the direct Lake

connection and you can now create the

reports using the direct Lake connection

and then publish them it again to the

power

ba there is one different version of

powerb which is known as powerbi report

server which can be installed on premise

there is a special IAL version of

powerbi desktop available for that that

is known as powerbi desktop optimized

for report it is usually 3 to 6 month

behind from the current powerbi and it

also does not include preview features

there's a whole list of comparison what

you don't get available on the Microsoft

side powerbi desktop or powerbi we get

11 releases per year other than January

every month we will have one release so

your powerb desktop keep on updating

every month but that's not true with

reports or we have only three releases

in a year and because powerbi does 11

releases it's really important that you

keep eye on blog. powerbi.com and always

keep on monitoring the latest update

because feature keep on changing fast

one of the reason of creating this video

again that we have got quite a few new

features and there is so many changes in

the UI that it could not have been done

without creating a new new video and

that is why we again created this entire

video for you to learn the powerbi on

the latest version which has been

released in December

2023 so now let us understand the

process of creating a powerbi login one

of the best method is that admin of the

tenant should use admin.

microsoft.com if you have your own a

registered domain for that domain you

should go ahead and register yourself to

admin.

microsoft.com and once an organization

able to register and admin on admin.

microsoft.com you will be able to create

users and able to assign the licenses to

them so let me go ahead and showcase you

how you are going to do that on admin.

microsoft.com so first of all log to

admin. microsoft.com

I'm assuming you already have the admin.

microsoft.com access and you are admin

if not then this step need to be

executed by your admin the admin need to

go and register a new user and under the

user management either you will click on

the users active users and you should

get that option add users or on the

homepage you will also get it so click

here on add a

user you will get let a popup here you

start giving details of the user

Amit

Amit will display name let me give a

username here Amit

C so I'm creating a new user on the

Microsoft portal usually you can share

this password to another email ID which

could be the email ID of that person the

personal email ID or the manager's email

ID or the admin's email ID then go ahead

and press next button

and in the next button you can assign

the licenses right now what I'm going to

do is I'm not going to assign the

license to this particular user I have

the only thing which I can assign here

is the Microsoft fabric free licenses I

don't have any pro licenses to assign to

it usually the organizations will have

Pro

licenses in my case in this tenant I

don't have Pro licenses so I'll not be

able to assign so I'll say create user

without product licenses and press on

next then it will ask for additional

options which I'm going to

skip these are the details anything I

want to edit right now I can edit it and

finish adding post that this user need

to log in and change its password right

now it is showing us the password which

is this user is going to

get so right now it is showing the

details along with the password which

this user is going to get for the first

time this user need to log to app.

powerbi.com or any other Microsoft

application and reset its password if

you have enabled two Factor

authentication that also need to be

enabled and by executing this exercise

on app. powerbi.com the user will be

able to claim the Microsoft fabric free

license or the powerb free

license if your organization has not

disabled

that I'm going to show you the next step

how user in this case when we have not

assigned him the license we go ahead

reset its password and going to get the

Microsoft fabric free license which is

available for all the users in this

particular

tenant admin has registered your login

and now the time has come to log to app.

powerbi.com in the first login it may

ask you to reset the password as as well

as set up the two Factor authentication

if that is the requirement from your

tenant side or from your organization s

so let's jump onto the app. powerbi.com

open app. powerbi.com

once it is open enter your email ID

which has been provided to you by your

admin once you give that email ID post

that you can click on submit it will

take you to the next page and ask for

the password you have to give the

password which admin has provided to

you enter the password and click on sign

in after you enter Because admin has set

up your account and you are loging for

the first time you need to reset the

password by giving the new password and

click on sign in

then press next on the next screen now

you need to set up the Microsoft

authenticator or any other authenticator

which you want click on that and

next then you need to scan the code and

you will be able to set up your

authenticator provide the six-digit code

from your authenticator here and then

again press

next your authentic is successful once

the authentication is successful you

should be able to sign in to app.

powerbi.com once you log in you should

be able to see a free account for you so

authentication is successful let's go

onto the right top the user details

click on the user icon you should be

able to see your email ID and the type

of license what you have

here here you can see I have got a free

account and Microsoft fabric trial is

also available for me in this manner you

will be able to set up your account so

now let's understand powerbi licenses

typically powerbi licenses can be

divided into three

categories free license Pro license and

premium license premium has two part PPU

and premium capacity with the emergence

of Microsoft fabric you have more

options to know the information about

powerbi licenses what you can do is

search for Power bi licenses on the web

and you will get the product pricing for

Microsoft

powerbi now when you go to the pricing

depending on the country which you are

in you can see the

pricing and what I can do is in instead

of in I can make itus

so now I got the US pricing so depending

on Country you can change it and get the

pricing so first of all Microsoft

powerbi in free fabric account you have

a Microsoft fabric free account there

you can get the free Microsoft powerbi

Microsoft powerbi desktop is already

free you have you can create a powerbi

free account Fabric and you can get it

then we have the powerbi pro license

which is basically the user based

license which is $10 per user per

month and you can publish and share

report powerbi Pro is included in

Microsoft 365 E5 also and you can buy it

using the credit card also then we have

powerbi premium per user premium per

user include the features that available

in powerbi Pro additional feature in the

powerbi premium there are few premium

capacity features which are available

here and you can buy it it is $20 per

user per month so double the cost now

when you further go

down it talks about the capacity

basically because of the merge with

Microsoft fabric this is power be

premium capacity can also be used for

fabric so that is why Microsoft fabric

power be premium capacity SKU the skus

which start with P1 so those SKU you

have do

4,500

4,995 which is P1 capacity include all

the features available in power gain

access to rest of the Microsoft fabric

workloads as a unified product use Auto

scale to respond to occasional unplanned

outage and spike in the capacity by

automatically adding one Vore at a time

per hour so if you want to Auto scale

then there are separate charges now when

you go to Microsoft fabric capacity

which is f64 equivalent of P1 you get

licensed to your organization access for

Microsoft Fabric in unified product

experience that uses the same compute

capacity and

storage smaller entry level start from

F2 so the capacity start from F2 in

powerbi the premium capacity only start

with one which is equivalent of f64 but

here it start from F2 Microsoft as your

consumption commitment

eligible and gain access to full

Microsoft fabric workload through

unified product experience

capacity that is also there then we have

per month f64 SKU P1 equivalent

Microsoft capacity pay as you go this is

pay as you go this is very similar to

the f64 but you can shut down this

capacity pay as you go and this is

basically you kind of hourly capacity

which you again these kind of capacities

start with F2 so F2 F4 f8 F32 f64 these

kind of capacities are available then

when you further go down it talks about

E5 powerb desktop which is free you it's

available Microsoft powerbi

for mobile powerbi embedded when you

further go down it compares the feature

of powerbi with powerbi free account Pro

account premium account and premium per

capacity if you go down

here look at

this

comparison so create reports with

desktop available everywhere publish

report and share collaboration

see you can't do the collaboration

without having any license so you so you

at least need Pro license for

collaboration then Advanced Ai and data

flow data M xmla endpoints are only

available in the premium feature all

user can consume bi without paid per

user license is only available with

premium capacity P1 or f64 onwards so

viewers viewers don't need license from

those capacities onward

access to all Microsoft fabric workload

including data factory data engineering

data

warehousing data science realtime

analytics and data activator is only

available with P1 capacity or f64

capacity premium capacity memory size

limit for you will very get very small

memory size limit for free account 1 GB

for pro 100 GB for PPU and 400 GB for P1

premium capacity refresh rates for

powerbi data sets 8 per day for pro 48

per day for PPU and 48 per day for

premium

capacity maximum

storage powerbi native storage when you

are using powerbi then this is

applicable 10gb PPU 100 TB and premium

capacity P1 100 TB data security

encryption available everywhere one L

Storage one L B CDR storage one Lake

cache one networking only available with

premium prium capacity or Microsoft

fabric capacities there are additional

notes and comments I will also provide

the link of this one into the

description so those who have looked at

the older pricing now you will see few

difference in the pricing and these

differences have came because of the

availability of Microsoft fabric and

fabric capacities previously without

having a premium capacity you cannot buy

a capacity that's not true in case of

Microsoft Fabric World you can buy a F2

Capac and start with that and you can

buy priv Pro licenses and can start

using the all the features of Microsoft

Fabric and

powerbi

so now you have lot M options to buy

capacity because of Microsoft fabric

allows you to to have capacity as low as

F2 and the pricing start very low you

can check out the prices on Microsoft

fabric page for that

let's understand various options to

install

powerbi there are two very common

options to install powerbi download and

install so you can go to the powerbi

site or you can search on the internet

download and install

it what is the advantage of this you can

control the installation version you can

decide when to upgrade

it is supported on the most of the

versions of Windows and you don't need

Microsoft store for that so if the

Microsoft store is not there you don't

need it but what is the

disadvantage see powerbi updates

almost once in a

month if you don't update it is fair

chances that you will be lagging behind

and sometime I've seen users are as

behind as one year and it is is really

difficult from that stage to upgrade

it you will miss out on the feature and

new launches because you continue to

work on older version and you might have

a better solution available in the newer

version which you may miss

out the second way to install powerbi is

use Microsoft

Store you don't require admin privilege

for the installer to install this one so

if the Microsoft store is enabled you

can install

it as the power ba releases new versions

it will get automatically updated so you

will get

it what is the disadvantage of this

frequent update sometime what happens is

when the new release comes in it has its

own changes which has come in and some

certain things may break because of that

all of sudden you will start seeing

those those

changes now this is a better method

because everybody in the organization

would be on the same version if you

download and install not everybody would

be in the same version but yes there are

methods where the it can install or push

the powerbi version on all the desktop

that can also be controlled using it so

that is one more method where it can

control what version you have and then

they can keep the entire organization on

the latest

version to install powerbi I have opened

my browser and in that I have used the

search engine and searched for download

powerbi after the search I got few

results and the first result is the most

appropriate result for me which is

giving me link for HTTP power p by.

microsoft.com us downloads depending on

the country and language you can get

different links once you click on this

link you will get this page which is the

powerbi download page scroll down on

that and use Advanced download

options once you click on the advanced

download option you will come to the

download page which will allow you to

select the language and the download

option if you go further down it will

let you know which version and when that

was release so right now when I'm

recording in the latest version is

published in December

2023 and the version is

2. 1

24

2124 do1

052.0 if you further scroll down it will

tell you about the uses of powerbi

desktop and most importantly is the

system requirement what all are

supporting operating system and

installation instruction

you can also search for how to install

powerbi and you will get link of this

document I will share the link of this

document in the

description and if you go down it shows

you the various options to

install the link is also available on

app. powerbi.com and we can can install

by download and what are the different

requirement so I can go back to the

download page and download powerbi but

this is not the mechanism I'm going to

install as I've already told you there's

an

advantage of installing powerbi using

Microsoft store so I'm going to use that

but just for your reference I'll click

on the download button button and use

64bit because I'm working on a 64bit and

click on

download once it is downloaded you can

doubleclick on it and follow the

installation

instruction powerb desktop download of

exe file has been completed and if I

click on it it will open the installing

a

window I can select a language and move

forward it will ask for the

permission and it will start installing

the power B

desktop and it will give you the

visard so you can press on the next

accept the

agreement next you can choose a

location next and click on install

button I'm not going to click on the

install button because I'm going to

install the version which is provided by

Microsoft store so you can install if

you want the downloaded version the

advantage of this that you can control

which version you want it to have on

your

desktop but in any case make sure that

you are not 3 to 6 month behind in the

release I'm cancelling it

and now let me search for store and open

Microsoft

store in Microsoft store I will search

for

powerbi once I search Power bi I get few

option

powerbi powerbi desktop power powerbi

report

Builder powerbi is powerbi app which is

same as

your iPhone app as well as your Android

app it is Windows app what we need here

is for our learning is power ba desktop

and I'll click on

get it will start downloading I double

clicked on it it I can see the install

button I can click on the install button

and it will start downloading it and we

install powerbi

desktop on my Windows

machine it may take little bit of

time the the advantage of this method is

every month Whenever there is a new

release powerbi desktop will get

automatically

update once the installation is finished

we will go ahead and start

powerbi

desktop continuing installing

powerbi has has installed and time to

open I can click open in the Microsoft

store or I can search

powerbi and open powerbi

Desktop let me click on

open power VI desktop is opening up

and let let me give you a quick overview

of powerbi desktop powerbi desktop has

opened and it is showing me welcome

screen some of you will not get the

welcome screen because you might have

enabled powerbi home from options and

setting option preview feature that we

will discuss in some time when you open

the powerb desktop for the first time

you'll get this welcome screen the get

data option

on the left hand side and recent sources

you might not have recent sources for

the first time but as you start creating

content you will be able to see recent

sources and also be able to see some of

your reports under this left hand side

section open other reports so what we

will do now is we will cross this screen

and enter into the powerbi desktop you

can start the Journey of the powerbi

desktop by signing in into the

appropriate

account or you can start your

development and when you want to publish

you have to sign in now before I tell

you how to sign in I would like to show

you what all we have on the powerb

desktop and some of this what we are

seeing is because of the settings I have

done on December

2023 and one of the setting which I have

done is available from December 2023 3

if you go down into the release notes of

December 2023 you will find that we have

been offered option when we opened it

for the first time is choose the pain

Arrangement that works for you you can

always customize the setup later by

going to settings keep current setup use

more classic pan setup I like this

classic pain setup where I have the

build visual I have the visualization

type

and I have used update setup now the old

setup which was there was because of own

object interaction which is still

enabled in my case and I will let you

know about that

setting those who want to follow this

video and want to learn I would

recommend them to use this option update

setup in case they are getting it but I

will let you know how you are going to

get some more options in your options

and setting where you will be enabled

these

things even if you have not chosen for

them for the first time so let me jump

back onto the powerbi desktop and give

you an overview of powerbi desktop on

the powerbi desktop on the top we have

this ribbon which contains the menu item

for file home which is currently open

insert modeling view optimize help and

external tools we will use them as we go

forward inside the Home tab you can see

get data using which you will be able to

get the data from various sources and we

will start our journey by getting Excel

Source at Excel workbook we have a quick

connector data Hub again we have quick

connector

powerbi semantic models data Mars lakeh

house warehouse and and kqal databases

equal server we can enter the data we

can use data verse as a connection and

we can use some of the recent

connection transform data is there to go

to Power query power query is used for

transformation of data and then you can

alter your data source setting or you

can modify some of the data source

setting using data source setting option

those of you who has enabled on object

interaction will get this visualization

option but if you don't see this option

it means the on object interaction is

not enabled when I'll go to the preview

feature I'll let you know more about

that in the insert tab again you have

the visualization insert option along

with the more

option then you have key influencer

decomposition tree narrative page report

power app power automate text boxes and

Etc all these are the visualization

which you can insert into the powerbi

desktop or the components which you can

insert to make or beautify your powerbi

desktop report and once you publish it

it will become the powerbi service

report under the modeling tab you will

get quite a few options right now some

of these options are disabled because of

the reason we have not added any data

once you add data depending

on what is available one or more option

will be enabled so manage relationship

once you want to create the relationship

new major once you have the data quick

measure to Quick create measures new

column to create new calculated column

new table is available back because we

can start our modeling by creating a DEX

table new parameter we will explore this

option later to create dynamicity in the

content and then we have language and

linguistic schema options in the view

options you have the theme which is one

of the first thing we are going to do

then we have the page view and the

mobile layout then we have grid lines

snap to grid lock objects etc for

various options on the top you have

various pan options which you can use to

enable and disable various panes so like

for filter

pane I can enable or disable it using

the filter

pan so as you can see now there is no

filter

pan I have enabled it again similarly

you can see the data pane here the build

visual pane here format pan here and

then you can customize by clicking here

or you can add by checking it here so

both of them are going to do the same

job let me enable The Bookmark tab I got

a bookmark Tab and as you would have

noticed the moment I pressed this and I

got this I this is also enabled so let

me disable let's say format

pan so there is no format pan available

let me disable the data pan now there is

no data pan we got the data pan we got a

format pan here now we got a selection

pan also and as you can see the

selection is enabled here

also and to get the selection pan you

can click some of the panes will open in

a mode where they are not expanded so if

they are not expanded you can actually

click on the pan here and expand it

similarly we have performance analyzer

pan again on the top and on the

left and once it is open and if it is

not visible you can click on the left

hand side to check it out performance

analyzer help us to analyze the

performance of the visual and we can see

the timing and we can go ahead and

analyze that in a better manner syn

slices is another pan which we can open

to sync these slices the feature we will

explore

later I'm collapsing all

these and take my focus to the one of

the pane on the left hand side which

contains the various views the report

view which currently we are on then we

have the table View model view and

recently we also got Dex query view now

table view right now would be empty once

we have the table and which is which can

be seen on the right hand side on the

data view we will be able to see some

table and data table table view or the

data display is dependent on which kind

of

mode usually all the import mode tables

are available in case of pure play

direct query and live mode we might not

even get the table View then we have the

model view where we will be able to see

our model and the Dex query view where

we will be able to run the Dex query

inside the Dex query View and inside the

relationship view both views contain

something known as model and this will

help us in creating calculation

groups calculation groups were

previously created using external tools

like tabular editor

but now we can create calculation group

inside the powerbi desktop and we will

explore that

also before we go into the options and

setting just let's quickly look at which

version of powerb are

on I know we have installed a particular

version but in case you wanted to check

because there are monthly updates

ongoing and you want to know which

version you are on click on file go to

about and you will be able to see which

version of powerbi desktop you are

on what we are going to do now is we are

going to

enable the preview features or I'm going

to tell you what preview features I have

enabled so when we take this journey you

are on the same page where I am now now

as power beer releases almost One

release per month some of these features

will change over a period of time from

the public preview they will went to GA

and there would be no options for that

in public preview there might be option

in some other setting for enabling and

disabling and same way there will be

some new features which are coming in

which will appear in the preview

features so first of all let's go ahead

and explore what all we have inside the

options and setting an option to go

there you need to click on

file options and setting

options and you will get a popup and in

this popup you have options like data

load and inside the data load you have

type detection like detect type and

header of unstructured source according

to each file setting means the file

setting is going to decide whether we

need to do it or not background data

allow the data previews to download in

the background according to each file

setting means it is depending on the

file setting parallel data loading when

you load the data into powerbi via

import mode or direct query mode each

table is backed by power query these

query are evaluated simultaneously

instead of one by one so how much

parallelism you want you have enabled

that typically we keep this enabled

autod date time intelligence but I

personally don't prefer it but at least

I would like to show you what does that

mean so I'm keeping it right now clear

cach a data management cache if you want

to clear you can clear from here or you

can change the size if you have a pretty

big file I will recommend you to keep it

from 8 to 10 GB like 81 9

2 Q&A cache for the

Q&A and folder artifact cache if you

want to clear that then you have option

for power query editor display the power

query setting Pane and display form up

bar is default enabled data import enabl

web table interface is enabled data

preview I have enabled show white spaces

and new line correctors and if you don't

enable it you will not see it display

preview content using monospaced font is

disabled parameters Al always allow

parameterization in data source and

transformation dialogue as of now it is

disabled but we can enable this feature

which will allows the

parameterization and formula enable M

intelligence in the formula bar Advanced

editor and custom dialogue and there is

the information given here changing this

setting will take place when you next

time open the powerquery editor so it

means some of these settings will not

apply as soon as you press okay you have

to open the power VI again me you could

close it and open it

again Direct query sap Hana as relation

sources now we are not planning to work

on sap Hana so we'll leave it as is

scripting right now I'm not updating any

R script option also not updating any

python script option whatever options

you are seeing is because I already have

installed python on my system security

option this is another important option

now in this option there are few

important things which you should do

here is one of the thing is if you want

to enable the argis and field map visual

make sure they are enabled similarly

authentication browser you should always

choose use my default browser unless it

stopped working sign in experience use

updated signin experience you can use

that approved adfs authentication

Service you have not approved any

authentication Service so there is no

option coming in then for privacy I'm

keeping combined data according to each

file privacy setting

in the regional setting I'm keeping my

default Windows setting and language it

it means it's going to follow my windows

display language setting and I'm going

to keep it like that in case you want

you can use the model

language updates I'm not going to change

anything here uses data you can disable

this feature if you don't want to send

any data to

Microsoft diagnosis right now I have not

enabled

tressing or crash T collection but at

few places the diagnosis is on is

basically query diagnosis enable in

report and query editor diagnosis level

Aggregate and detail additional details

are also

enabled review feature and one of the

most important feature which we are

talking about shape map visual is

enabled here as you can see Q is enabled

connect external semantic model shared

with me is enabled modern tool tip is

enabled Park line is enabled metric is

visual is enabled quick major suggestion

is enabled field parameter is enabled

inhance lowlevel security editor is

enabled on object interaction is enabled

powerb home desktop is not enabled which

I'm going to enable

now

similarly also I'm enable set

sensitivity label on PDF is enabled

Dynamic format string major is enabled

save to one drive and SharePoint is

enabled enhance publish dialogue is not

enabled I'm not enabling that

also how bi project. pbip option of

saving is enabled new card visual is

enabled new button viser visual is

enabled model Explorer and calculation

group authoring this is this is the new

model view which is available in the

relationship as well as the text view we

have enabled that text query view you

have seen we have enabled that summary

with co-pilot visual is enabled improve

Q&A with co-pilot is also

enabled I can press okay here but let's

have a quick look at save and Recovery

as of now I have set up the store Auto

Recovery information every 10 minutes

but if you have a really big file please

make sure to increase it otherwise it

may slow down if because it start

automatically saving the reports inside

the report settings these are the

important things which we have also seen

when we were viewing the December

release notes display smart grid line

aligned suggest a visual type by default

is enabled inbit visual menu always

allow show all in the visualization

type and then the pain switchers always

show the

pain Switcher always show build menu

visual in the panes which are always

open in New pane these are the option

which are already selected here other

than that I am leaving accessibility and

Page alignment as is now these are the

global features which we have looked at

it as you can see they fall under the

global feature there are file specific

features which is there inside the

current file and one of them is data

load and as you can see in the data load

detect column types and header for

structure data sources so it's going to

detected import relationship from the

data sources if it

is if it is supported on that Source it

will be imported update and delete

relationship while refreshing it can do

that auto detect new relationship now

this is the feature you will realize

when I am going to load the data into

the import mode it's going to get the

relationship and this is the reason for

that that's going to Auto detect the

relationship again I can disable time

intelligence at the report level which

I'm not disabling right now I'm going to

show you what going to happen in that

case and post that will come and disable

that if required background

data allow data previews to download in

the background we keep it parallel

loading of table is default we taking it

from the global level and Q&A I'm not

changing anything here Regional Regional

setting I'm keeping is default privacy

default Auto Recovery is disable auto

recovery on this file if you want you

can disable able but I'm keeping it

default publish data source setting I'm

keeping everything as default sap

variables right now I'm not enabling

direct query connection to data set this

prevents user from creating direct query

connection to the data set on the

desktop if you change the setting you

need to republish your report to save it

discourage direct query connection we

don't want to discourage it so we will

keep it query reductions keep the

default settings and query reduction uh

instead of adding apply button to each

slicer it is recommended apply all

slicer slicer button to each page and

that we are going to explore instantly

apply basic changes add

apply button to all basic Fielder so

this we can use to you know what happens

is the moment you select anything the

visual get refreshed we have apply all

slicer button and or we can use apply on

each filter but what we are going to use

is we going to use the default setting

and if needed we go comeand explore and

Report setting these are few of the

report setting like use of the modern

visual header is enabled hide visual

header in reading mode is by default

disabled we keeping it export data allow

the end user to export data current

layout summarized data from the powerbi

service and powerbi Report service I'm

going to keep it because it allows you

the currently out means as whatever it

is looking like in powerbi service it

should be going in that particular

manner so I'm keeping it filtering

experience I'm keeping both of them

tagged and this is also default allow

user to change the filter type enable

search for the filter pan cross report

drill through right now we don't need so

I'm not enabling it personalized visual

is something we can allow on the report

level modern visual tool tip is enabled

and we'll keep it tool tip Auto scale

tool tip size affected by the canvas

size this a preview feature so let's

enable it default summarization for

aggregated Fields always show default

summarization type means if the field is

numeric field or aggregated type we will

have a default summarization and that's

where it is asking for query limit

simulation if you want to simulate which

kind of capacity you have shared

capacity premium capacity SQL Ser

analysis Services aor analysis Services

custom limit no query limits I'm keeping

it auto as of now this is 1 GB shared

capacity

uh as of now I'm keeping it same but in

case you want to see if you're on a

premium capacity or you want to go to

premium capacity how it is going to

behave so that you can enable it I'm now

going to press okay button on the bottom

right and once I press this okay button

on the bottom right I might have to

restart my power bi desktop to get all

these features

enabled so this is a quick overview and

now I'm pressing

okay and it is asking that it requires a

restart so I'll restart my power via

desktop and come back again to

you so let me give you overview of the

data whatever data I'm using for this

particular video and most of the videos

on my channel is available on

GitHub some of you has complained that

you are unable to download the data from

GitHub so so this year I will also

provide the data on Dropbox and I'll

share the link in the descript

description data primarily is a sales

data or the retail data which we are

going to use the GitHub contains lot

many other type of data which we are

going to use like for power query I have

pyot dat. XLS there are many other files

which are used in different videos

available there so whenever you watch a

video and if there's a file required you

will get that here on the

GitHub this time what I've also done is

I loaded some icons I taken the help

from AI tools to generate some random

icons and then I loaded all those icons

on the GitHub so that you can use those

icons when you are creating your

visualization to make your visualization

look much

better

so you can take the full advantage of

the data available from my

side so let us quickly have a look at

what all data is available at the GitHub

all the data which I'm going to use in

this

video is available on

github.com slamit chandak PBI

slav

bi on GitHub you have various file one

of the most important file which we are

going to use in this video is sales data

used in

video do XLS let's download this Sal

data used in video and keep with us we

will need it to understand the data

click on this file sales data used in

video and once you click on this you

will get an option here to download this

file so you can download it we are also

going to

use P tata. XLS for power

query you don't need to download these

file FES you can download for

understanding the data but I'll tell you

a technique you using that you will be

able to use these files without

downloading now for understanding of the

data you can download these files some

of the users have complained last year

that they are unable to download from

the GitHub what I'm going to do is I'm

also going to give you a Dropbox link

into the description form where you can

download these

files download of last year's data is

available here and for this year also

I'm going to load the PB as well as

the PPT used for the video CSV files are

available here and some of the icons

which I'm going to use in the video are

made available here

I will add the GitHub link also in my

description so that you can download the

data from there before we move forward

let's understand what is there in sales

data used in video which is the primary

file we are going to use let me give you

the overview of the data which we plan

to use

first this data is the one which will be

used as the primary data throughout the

series

this is a perfect star schema which

already

contain pack and dimension table so

First Dimension table which I have is

the item table which contain item id

name brand ID category id subcategory id

brand and

subcategory so the first table which I

have is item table and item table

contains columns like item id name name

brand ID category id subcategory id

brand category and

subcategory as this is a dimension table

Item ID is unique and would be used in

my sales fact which I'm going to show

you a little bit later the second

dimension which I have is a customer ID

contains customer ID age of the customer

city state and name of the customer city

and state here are the city and state of

the customer customer's address it is

not where customer is ordering its data

customer may be in travel while it is

ordering or ordering for the relative so

this is not the same this is the

customers Master

data the third dimension which we have

is the geography table it contains City

ID city and state and this is the order

City or the sales City uh which we have

in the

data now let me explain you the fact

table the fact table is a retail sales

data every line represent a single order

only

means every line contains only one order

and one order don't have multiple

lines and this is my sales table sales

fact which I'm going to call

here for

this is this is sales table all the

sales fact for our current

analysis and it contains order number

the order number which is unique for

each line item id repeating referencing

item Dimensions sales date on the date

on which the sales has happened delivery

date the date on which delivery has

happened customer ID referencing the

customer master table or customer table

City ID referencing the geography T

table quantity which has been sold for

each line price which is size

of that particular item on that date

cost what cost we are inquiring for that

and discount percentage as you can see

we have not calculated the cross amount

the net amount the discount amount also

the discount percentage is an absolute

number it is not .12 it is actually 12

when we are doing the calculations we

need to take care now in this data what

we have to do is we require some of

those calculations and those

calculations will be done either as a

calculated column which is at the row

level or as a measures which is

basically aggregated level which we will

understand in some time in

powerbi so what kind of analysis we want

you to do on this data in this data we

can do many analysis like I can find out

my top cities top

customers top brands top C categories

top

subcategories I can analyze where I'm

getting more discount or margin for

which item I'm getting that for which

cities I'm getting better

discount on which cities by giving less

discount I'm getting more margin all

these kind of analysis we can do using

this data now because it's a learning

Series where we run the feature and then

implement it might not be possible for

me to explain all the possible outcome

for this one but at the end we will try

to create a report to give meaning to

this data and we will publish it for our

ad user let's now talk about the type of

data loads before we bring in the data

into the powerbi desktop usually we talk

about three modes import mode direct

query mode and live mode but with the

emergence of Microsoft fabric we have

got a new mode which is also known as

direct click mode import mode in which

in case of the import mode you actually

load data into the powerbi and powerbi

is going to keep the data with it and on

that data we are going to build a model

so powerbi is owning the data the model

the relationship the measures and then

you publish such models on powerbi

service when we publish the file there

are

two files created

on the powerbi service one is data set

file and another one is a visualization

file the data set file or what we now

call as semantic models contain the data

as well as the model information major

definition

Etc in case of direct query we usually

connect to the

databases which are typically

rdbms not all the rdbms are supported

there is a list available on the

Microsoft side which all databases are

supported for direct query in case of

direct query powerbi only owns

the semantic model or your relationship

your measure definition your calculated

columns it owns that when you publish

this you will get a data set file or

semantic model file onto the powerbi

service but that will not contain data

it will only contain the model

information in case of live query the

live doesn't mean the real time data it

is basically when you use SQL Server

analysis services or powerbi data set as

a source in such case what happens the

model the semantic model or the data set

owns the data and that is not owned by

the powerbi that is either owned by a

previous powerbi data set or SQL Server

analysis services or a your analysis

services in powerbi we only create

visualization yes we can also create

some additional measures if

required when we publish such files we

don't get a semantic model or the data

set on powerbi service in case we are

publishing a file which is connected to

a previous powerb data

set so so the new report or the

visualization file will

also point to the same data set direct

lake is the new mode which came in it

provides you best of the import and

direct query

mode for Microsoft fabric lak houses and

warehouses semantic

models for direct Lake Microsoft has

done changes in the analysis

services so that it can query the Delta

par format files and give you a import

mode

performance so whenever you are going to

use Microsoft fabric you need to ensure

that you are using direct Lake mode

there are times when it fall backs to

direct query and you should try to avoid

such cases where it can fall to direct

query because Direct C performance

cannot be compared with direct query

performance let's load the data onto the

powerbi

desktop I have opened the powerbi

desktop again and time has come that we

import the data onto the powerbi desktop

out of the mode which is import mode

direct query live and directly mode we

would like to use the import mode here

now those of you who have downloaded the

Excel files I'm going to tell you how

you are going to load the data and then

I'll tell you those of you who prefer

the URL mode how you going to do it so

those of you who has downloaded the data

can use Excel option under the Home tab

to upload the data to the powerb desktop

the same option is also available in the

get data and if you click on the more we

can see what all options we have on

powerb desktop we have more than 200

plus connectors for powerb desktop to

connect on various sources these are

categorized under file sources like Exel

TCH CSV XML Json file folder PDF

databases most of the common databases

like SQL Server Oracle IBM gb2 IBM

natisa my SQL database post database

cbas teradata sap Hana Amazon red shift

and many more including the most common

like slow frak also have Amazon AA and

we have few other connectors Microsoft

fabric which has been launched in May

2023 and generally available from

November 2023 the connectors are

available for semantic models data flow

dat Mars Warehouse leak house and equ

databases Power Platform connectors for

power data flows data services data and

data flows a your connector for aor SQL

a your signups analytics a your database

Services a your blob storage a your

cosos DB and data Explorer a your dat Le

gen 1 a your dat Le Gen 2 as your HD

insides a yourd spark and other as

services online services we have so many

of these including SharePoint online Bas

Microsoft Exchange online D 360 5 Etc

and we have few other connector which

which include the web connector and one

of the connector we going to use when we

going to bring in the data from the

GitHub now those of you who has already

downloaded for them go to the Exel

workbook search out where your data is

my data is inside the powerbi data and

there I have s data used in video and

once I select say data used in video I

can press the open button to get the

data once I click on the open button it

will show me a popup and in the popup I

can preview my tables but unless I press

this check box I will not get the data

on the powerp desktop we can check all

these four files this has the same data

we have explained you a minute back also

if you have few tables in your Exel Mark

as a table you will get those here now

we have two options to explore low data

and transform data when do we will use

low data and when we will use transform

data in case we don't want to transform

this data this data is in final shape

which is true for this data we will

directly use low data but if this data

require transformation or this data is

too big we want to reduce it before

loading we will use transform data in

the current case the data do not require

transformation also the size is not so

big that I have to reduce it before

loading into powerp desktop so I'm going

ahead with the load data option I can

click on the load data and it will load

the data so this is the option for those

of you who are using the Excel those of

you wanted to use GitHub first of all go

to the GitHub and find out the URL which

you want to use to get the URL scroll

down open this file says data used in

video XLS now some of you would like to

take the URL from the top but don't do

that go to this button raw don't click

on that right click on this button use

copy link once you copy the link come

back to your powerb desktop and now use

get data web option I've already shown

you all the option categorization and

here you can put this URL you can check

out the Advan option but right now I

don't need so I can continue with the

basic option press on okay it should

open the same popup again which I have

explained you while I was loading the

XEL file I click on the cheat boxes to

make sure that I'm loading the data for

all these four table it does not mean

that you have to load the complete data

in one go you can load data in multiple

goals also I'm going to press the load

data in this case and load my

data it will show me a popup for the

data loading and this is also one of the

way when you can check the data is

loading it is in import mode because

it's going to show you amount of data

which is getting loaded data is loaded

onto the power bi desktop and on the

right hand side data pan you can see the

data tables those tables are customer

geography item and sales now we can go

ahead and take two steps from here one

we create the formulas which are missing

in sa State table for analysis or second

is we create the model we are going to

create the model and post that we will

try to understand a little bit about the

Dex formulas and that is where our

technical stuff will start where you

need to understand the Dex and how you

can quickly create calculations which is

can be categorized either as calculated

column and major data is loaded and I

would like to create relationship before

I do that I would like to have a quick

view on the data using the table view on

the left hand side I go to the table and

as it is import mode I should be able to

see the data of each table below here I

should be able to see the count and I

can match this count with my Excel data

how much rows I have there versus how

much rows I have here to make sure that

we have the same amount of data what we

have at the source I can click on

geography to see the geography data I

have 100 rows there item 55 rows and

sales table having 30,000 rows all my

data is correct let's now create the

relationship on powerbi

desktop now let's jump onto the model

view and here we are going to create the

relationship but what we observe the

relationship is already there and I

explained you let me show you again

under the file options and setting

options we have an option in the current

file data load level which is auto

detect new relationship that is causing

this in case you creating a really big

model where you don't want to do this

you can uncheck that let me close the

property and the data pan and try to

understand if these relationships are

correct or not so let me showcase you

what is the exact model I need on the

PowerPoint

slide so just a overview of the model

which we are going to create here uh

which is available in the Excel file

which you have seen is that we we are

going to have a sales table which is at

the

center and it will have geography

Dimension which is available in the

Excel sheet item Dimension again

available in the Excel sheet and the

customer Dimension again available in

the Excel sheet we're going to create a

date table in the powerbi desktop and

going to utilize it it's going to be a

perfect star

schema

where fact is related with Dimension and

dimension is related with fact in a

perfect star schema the two Dimension

don't have any relationship between them

so although I have City available in

both geography and customer they will

not have any relationship between

them so they will not have any

relationship between

them because in a perfect star schema

Dimension don't join with any Dimension

fact don't join with any fact so we will

utilize this model for most of our

discussion but yes there would be places

for some of the examples this model

cannot be used and that's where we are

going to use very specific files and

specific table or the models to achieve

those

objectives now we have looked at the

model we know this model is not as per

our expectation first of all there is an

inactive joint and we need to understand

why there is an inactive joint and we

have to also understand what are these

different kind of joints why there's a

one on one side and why there is a a

star on one side so the relationships

which is showing one and star they are

one too many relationships and these are

the kind of relationship we want in this

kind of schema the inactive relationship

here is because of loop what is the loop

here or what is the two path here the

relationship here which is inactive is

because of the loop or the two paths

table is joined with a customer table

one to many and again there is a one to

many relationship with sales table it

means this this is the first path

geography can reach to sales there is

also a direct path where geography can

reach to the sales and in this manner

there are two paths which are created

and because of that one path is inactive

let me delete these

relationship I'm going to delete some of

the existing relationship also because I

want to tell you how to create

relationship we have few options to do

that and let me delete all of them to

create relationship for you you can drag

the table wherever you want to have a

position where you can easily map the

tables

now easiest way to create a relationship

is click on any of the column keep your

mouse button pressed and drag it on the

corresponding column on the other table

so I am dragging customer ID of the

customer on the customer ID of the sales

and it created a relationship it did not

ask me what kind of a relationship

because it has identified but let me

double click on this and show you on the

popup also on the right hand side in the

properties pane which I have already

open you can see what this relationship

is but let me double click and show you

in the popup in this popup we can also

change the relationship column if

required the sales table is on the top

and the customer ID is selected the

customer table is at the bottom and the

customer ID is selected there and it is

many to one what does this kind of

relationship means many to one means the

first table is having on the man side it

means the customer IDs can repeat there

the customer table is on the one side it

means the IDS are not going to repeat

there in case in the future it repeats

it may error out it may not also work if

you have blank value in the customer ID

of the customer table it is fine you can

have the blank on the sales site the

relationship Direction is single it

means means the customer table the table

on the one side is going to filter the

table on the many side you're going to

create one relationship as both

understand that what are the other kind

of relationship one to one means both

the tables are having the data at the

same level it means I join customer

table with a table let's say customer 2

which both is having customer ideas

unique in that case I will have a one to

one relationship one to many means if I

have the customer table above and the

sales table below it would be one to

many it is just reverse of what we

currently have many to many means just

like sales table we have another table

where the customer ID is not unique both

the side there are multiple values we

create many to many relationship though

we avoid many to many relationship in

most of the cases they're especially

useful in few of the use cases and one

of such use cases is RO level security

so while we try to avoid many to many

relationship it is also helpful and

powerbi handles many to many

relationship pretty well so let me click

on okay after using that and make

relationship active means this

relationship is going to be active in

powerbi you cannot select more than one

colum so if I try to click on this using

control or shift I will not be able to

do it it means we create a single column

relationship but to create multiple

column relationship you can create a

concatenate

column to create such a relationship in

case of direct query you have been

provided a function which you can use

which is combine values to create such a

concatenated column you can create more

than one relationship and one

relationship can be inactive between the

two tables and we can use a function use

relationship to activate such

relationship let me press that's okay

now the second relationship I want to

create from a different option the

option is in the middle of the screen

which is manage relationship under the

Home

tab let me click on the manage

relationship and here you see a popup

providing me all the options one of the

option which I have here is new and I'm

going to use that to create my

relationship let me click on new and let

me select the table this time I'm going

to select

my item table as the first

table then I will select sales table now

it has automatically detected item id

versus Item ID I don't need to even

click and check those it is one too many

single directional relationship this is

what I want the table having the unique

values of the item ID is on the top so

that is why it is one too many again I

want this relationship to be active but

I'm going to make this relationship as

bir directional both let me click on

okay let me close it the third

relationship easy I'm going to drag City

ID to City ID to create it and on the

right hand side properties you can see

in case you want to change something you

can even change the relationship let's

say some other column if needed but as

we know the relationship is correct City

ID to City ID and this is single

directional and we want an active

relationship so we will say apply

changes you can also open the

relationship editor by clicking on the

button

below let me press cancel so my model is

ready as a next step I would like to

understand the difference between a

single directional join and a bir

directional

join and we would also like to

understand what happen happens when

there is a missing

relationship for two those two example

let's go ahead and try that out our

powerbi model is ready and here we want

to understand the difference between a

one directional relation and bir

directional relation to understand this

let's go ahead and create few table

visuals

now to do that first of all we have to

go to the report view on the left hand

side the first button is report view

here because I have already enabled the

build

visual I'm able to see

this otherwise on the Home tab you will

see these options in case you don't see

build a visual you can go to the view

and enable that from here build a

visual now let me click on the table

visual inside build a visual

once I click on that I'll get a table

visual I'm going to copy this visual

three times and put them

separately now let's look back at our

relationship so item is bir directional

and geography is single directional

customer is also single directional I

create one visual using CTI ID only City

ID I'm bringing in the second visual I

am bringing

in Item

ID and in the third visual I am bringing

in City ID from sales table

and item id also from sales table so

first table there is a city ID from

geography table in the second visual I

have Item ID from the item table and in

the third visual ual I have City ID and

item ID from the sales table I have

knowingly kept it on the ID so that you

can easily understand what's happening

here so let me click on the item ID in

the second table and as you can see it

has filtered the third table there's no

impact on the other dimension table let

me click on the city ID and as you can

see the city ID also filtering the table

visual as I've not pressed Control Plus

click the moment I clicked on other

visual it take out the filter from the

second Visual and it applies The Zone

filter let me go ahead and click on City

ID again it will remove the filter so I

will have all the cities and I have all

the item id let me click on the first

row of the visual which is coming from

the sales table what you can see here is

while the city ID from the city table

has no impact but Item ID is getting

filtered here when I'm fil ing this this

is because the joint is bir directional

a bir directional joint

means

fact can filter Dimension and dimension

can also filter fact or both side of the

relationship can filter each other while

in a single directional relationship the

table on the one side which is dimension

can filter the many side table

in fact now let's try to understand what

happens when there is no join or how do

we identify there is no join let me

delete all these visuals on

this and let me bring in another table

Visual and this time in the table visual

I would like to bring in item brand so

the way to bring in is that

I once the table is selected I can click

on that it will bring in and then I'll

bring inant quantity by default it

should take aggregation as you can see

it is using sum of

quantity so numeric values are by

default aggregated you have to

understand in powerbi the data is either

distinct or group by and aggregated so

even though my item IDs are repeating in

my sales table but if I put it from the

sales table they will not repeat here

they will just create a distinct

combination or group by and then if I

put a aggregated mejor or a numeric

majure that can aggregate that will

aggregate along with that group by as

you can see these values are different

and this is actually my

total and now let me go ahead and do one

thing which will tell you how do you

identify a missing relationship what I

will do is I will go to my model

view and inside the model view I can

delete this join between item and sales

table or I can deactivate it by using

make this relationship active I

can uncheck that and it will become

inactive and use apply this is as good

as not having a filation and once I go

back to the report

view you will see that the all the rows

have the same data when all the rows

start showing the same data as grand

total there are chances that we have in

active relationship or the relationship

itself is not

there the good thing with the inactive

relationship which is logical inactive

relationship or inactive relationship

which is not created because of loop we

can activate it using use relationship

Dex function in this manner you now

learn how to use bir directional

relationship and how you can find out

when there is an inactive joint now is

bir directional relationship is a good

thing so when should we use bir

directional joint and when we should not

use bir Direction so bir directional

joints are especially helpful if you

want the dimensions to get filtered uh

when your fact data is getting

filtered but when you start using more

than one fact so in case you have more

than one facts it can create Loops for

multiple paths what would happen you

will be able to reach a fact from more

than one place let's say you create go

to Dimension to fact by directional

another fact is again bir directional

then there are multiple paths available

in such cases you start creating

inactive relationship we should try to

avoid this is one more place where you

should avoid is basically when you are

using direct query now what happens in

case of direct

query there are queries which are

generated and sent to the source now

when you have have bod directional joint

it will generate more number of queries

and in that will put lot of strain on

your Source database so to optimize the

performance in a direct query mode we

try to avoid bir directional

relation so bir directional relationship

should only be

used if that is the only way you can

solve the purpose if there is no other

way to achieve the same thing like I

want to

filter the dimension data using fact we

can actually use in the slicer a measure

from the fact and check its value as is

not blank to filter the

slicers to reduce the slicers values

what has been used in fact that is

another alternative but if there is no

other

alternative by directional joint is only

fit for the purpose then only we should

use it now before I go to the next step

let me go ahead and activate this

relationship and apply

changes so that our model is correct as

you can see once I have activated the

join again I'm able to see the correct

Data before I take the next tab let's do

one thing let's add an image to this

first

page the image of this series and then

save this file because we have not saved

this file so in case the system crashes

or something goes off the changes might

not be fully recoverable though we have

used an option auto backup that may be

able to provide

us autosaved version which we can use I

click on this empty page let me click on

the format option and enable the format

pane once I get the format pane in the

Page

information I can scroll down

and in the canvas background I can

browse an

image I can take the image which I

recently download

it and reduce the transparency to zero

image fit is normal I can use a fit so

that it fits in and in this manner I get

my homepage with the image which is

my image of the series

now you might be seeing this build

visual is still there now Prov that what

I can do is I can add something really

small in this page so I can go to insert

and then I can let's say insert a shape

let's bring in a

rectangle and

let's do one thing go to

the

style fill off border

off and come outside now you don't know

there is a rectangle and you get the

image so let's save it contrl s give it

a new name uh it's going to save on a

default location and if you want to

change that click on the more options

below once you click on the more option

it will open and now it is showing me

documents on the top but if you go on

the left hand side little bit below you

will see browse this device let me click

on browse this device now it opens up

option and as you know that we save all

our files in data but not this time

we're going to save the file in our end

to end and I'll also create a new folder

for that right click in that new folder

we going to call it

data we don't have a data here but we

have a PB file and I'll give it a name

as n to and and what would happen during

this series there would be movements

where I I need to stop and start a new

file maybe I don't want to use it or I

want to save it a particular place

because I want to modify certain other

things or it is too busy file at that

moment I may like to shift it especially

when we are going to go to the power

query learning we might not use these

tables when we try to create the final

dashboard we might not require it so at

that time we might create a one more

version of this file so to do to create

the scope for that I'll call it n to and

one file and let me save it now for

saving now I have three options PB which

is power ba file pbit which is the

template file which was also available

previously to create the template and

powerbi project file which is a new

option available with the GitHub

integration this is one of the most

suitable options you have but we will

continue to save it as a PBX and save it

so now over powerbi file is

saved before we go into the depth of

calculated column and

major one of the reason we say is that

you know when we want to do role level

calculation we can prefer columns to you

know make sure that it increase the load

time and if the data is pretty large the

runtime calculation at the row level

could actually proven be costly but if

it is not costly then go ahead and

create a

now what is this Ro level calculation

and when would I use Ro level

calculation and when I should not use Ro

level

calculation there are few places where

you can simply take this decision that I

need a ro level calculation whether at

the new calculated column level or major

level or whether I don't need it there

is a place where I should not do ro

level calculation I should create a

mejor or what is that kind of scenario

so when whenever we have to multiply we

have to use the row level calculation

whether we use calculated column or a

measure but when it's a

division the division should always be

first Aggregate and then divide it it

means it should be a measure let me give

you one example for that so I have these

items I have quantity and price now what

is gross quantity multip by price is

basically this formula so this is 50 70

80 and

90 now so I'm multiplying at each row

level and then finally I'm summing it up

here as

290 is this is correct or should I

simply sum of the quantities average of

the price I definitely know if I Su of

the price it's not the correct so it's

going to

be 70 * by

4.75 which is 3325 so which one is

correct we know here two 2 990 is the

correct

answer it's not

33 2.5 that's not the correct answer

whenever there is a multiplication we

should do it at the row level and then

we should add which actually we call it

sum of a multi by

b means false you multiply now in

database we can do this sum of a * by B

inside the sum function that is not true

in power bi when we creating a major and

major is one where we do have

aggregation built in there we need to

use expression function to do a mtip by

b or we can create a calculated column

which contain a multip by b means in

this case cross and later can create a

measure on top of it now there is a

reverse case the reverse case is when I

want to find out price using gross and

quantity so how do I find price so

simply I'll divide Cross by quantity so

I got five I got seven I got four I got

three what's my average price my average

price is nothing but the total of gross

divide by total of quantity it is not

the simple average of these four which

is

4.75 which is a simple average of these

four it's not 4.75 390 / by 70 is 4

.14 this is my correct

data it means whenever you need to

divide you first need to aggregate means

sum of

a divide by sum of

B

so what does this means is in case of

division it should be sum of a divide by

sum of B is first you aggregate

and then you divide so in such cases we

should only use measure because

calculated column is going to do the

calculation at row level and post that

the aggregation can happen in a measure

but in case of measure we can aggregate

them separately and then divide or in

the same measure we can say sum of a

divide by sum of B table and

column in this manner in some of the

cases we can take a call where should we

use a measure or where should we use a

calculated column remember on a smaller

data where the roow level calculations

can be done in a major and not making

much impact we can still use major for

RO level calculation but yes there would

be some time because of the performance

region we will prefer half of the

calculation in calculated column and

then use

measures need to create calculations and

these calcul ations are divided into two

parts calculated columns and measures

now calculated columns do the

calculation at the row level

and they are

stored in

the data set semantic model or the file

all the calculation you are going to do

you will be able to see what new values

are getting calculated into the table

View and you will also be able to see

that when we save the file the size of

the file

increase on the other hand the

calculation done using the measures are

only definition and getting executed at

the run time the calculated column which

we would like to create right now are

gross

amount which is nothing but sales

quantity multipli by sales

price the second one which we want to

create is Discount amount which is

nothing but sales gross amount which we

already calculated multiply by the

discount percentage now discount

percentage here is an absolute value so

we have to divide it by 100 gross amount

multiply by discount percentage divide

by 100 and one more column which we

wanted to create is cogs amount which is

nothing but sales quantity multipli by

sales

cost once we reach the measure I'll

explain you what all measures we

need I on the powerbi desktop and from

this Itself by going to the data view I

can create new column so I can click on

the sales table and in the table tools I

will have option for new

column

but but I have an intention that when I

create calculated columns calculated

columns are getting added up to the

tables and will be saved along with that

table so I would like to see the values

getting generated and that is why I'm

going to use

the table view to do that so let me go

to the table

View and before I start

creating my new columns I would like to

note down the size of my file so that at

the end I will able to tell that the

calculated columns are getting saved

along with the data table and they are

adding up to the

table size and majors are not going to

add the size they are just definitions

so let's note down the size right now we

have

1,623 KB size for this file and after

some time you're going to come back and

check this after we have created our

calculated column and saved the

file so now let's start creating new

calculated column I have told you about

the table tools once you click on a

table you get table tool new column

option but the option is also available

in the column tool if you click on any

of the column you will get column tools

and in column tools also you have option

for new column or right click on any of

the table the second option is new

column right click on any column third

option is a new column using any of

these options go ahead and create a new

column

in the formula bar above you can see the

column

creation so you can see now the formula

bar where we can create the new column

let me go ahead and increase its size I

have press control and used the rolling

of the middle Mouse button to increase

the size now I got the column it has two

parts left hand side is where we I'm

going to give the name and right hand

side where I'm going to give the formula

these line numbers are not going to play

any role powerbi is going to

automatically add that so the First

Column I want to create is gross amount

and what is gross amount it is

quantity and it starts suggesting you

can use that it's always better that you

take complete table name column name so

let me type down the table name sales

quantity star

sales price so we should always take

fully qualified names when we are

creating the columns so sales quantity

multip by sales price is the cross

amount as you can see in each and every

Row the data has been created and the

column values are visible in the table

view you can also see this column added

on the right hand side into the table

with an icon which is showing this is a

calculated

column now let's press commit here or

enter it will come out now let's go

ahead and create a new column you know

all the four options I can see column

tools open in front of me and I'll click

on new column there and add another

column the next column I want to add is

cogs

amount and cogs amount is nothing but

say is

quantity multip by

sales

cost now finding out a cost of item is a

really big challenge for some of the

organization if an organization can

achieve a cost measure nothing like that

and Cog is not just purchase price it's

purchase price plus rate plus inventory

carrying cost and any other cost you

wanted to load on the purchase price to

get the cost of the item various

organization develop various kind of

methods to arrive at the cost of the

item and that's from that we are

calculating cogs so that we can get

margin I would like to create another

column and again I'm going to use new

column from the column tool and that is

Discount amount now discount amount

column needs the calculated column gross

amount and I can type sales gross amount

to get the gross amount so table name

shown as a table name and sometime you

will show see the table name is coming

in single codes if the table name

contain white spaces or a reserved name

it will come in the single codes

otherwise it can come simply as a table

name and in the square bracket we have

the column name multiply it by sales

discount percentage and as the discount

percentage is absolute I need to divide

it by 100 it should become decimal

number so as you can see the data type

and let's talk about the column tool now

here in the column tool we can see the

name the data type the decimal number

the format which is generic and then we

can say it's amount we can use dollar

symbol or any other symbol percentage

comma separated we can change the

decimal place and number of decimal

place right now is auto similarly we can

use the summarization which is by

default sum for the numeric column if

you don't want to summarize it by

default we can use tone

summarize data category data category is

especially important when we use

geographical data I'll go ahead and show

it to you s by column is required when

let's say if I have column like month

here and I want to sort it on something

else I can use sort by column which is

not needed right now we will use it when

we create the date table before I go

ahead and create my Majors I would like

that if there is any renaming required

of the tables and column I should go

ahead and do that so as you can see in

the customer table there is no renaming

required geography table there is no

renaming required item table there is no

renaming required and sales table also

there is no renaming required but

for you

to explain it to you let me go ahead and

rename this column Quant Qi and I

already created calculated column on

that now I want it to rename so I can

double click and rename or I can right

click cck or rename let me call it q u a

n t t y

quantity and let me check the new

columns which I've created have they

taken up the correct column name or not

so the gross amount column has already

taken up the correct name same way I can

rename

my tables geography item and customer if

required column tool is the one place

where we can change these property the

another place where we can change the

properties is the model view and inside

the model view the properties we can

also change the properties and here we

can see the

properties like name we here we can I

can change the name then snow names

hidden if I want to hide data type

percentage format thousand separator yes

and no decimal places and in advance it

will show me sought by column name data

category and Su now I would like to

change the data categories would like to

show you example of data categories I

will go to City column I'll scroll down

and show you the data category and here

I'm going to call it as

City same way for State I will go ahead

and I will Define the data category as

state or Province it is not that this is

available here if you go to the report

view or the table view also you can go

to the state and inside the data

category of column tools also you can

Define the data

categories now we are done with the

renaming and the column creation we have

created our columns I would like to save

this file and see is there any

difference in the

size of our file so let me drag back the

folder and as you can see the size of

the file has

increased in this manner we can conclude

that calculated columns

are going to become part of the table

data they will be calculated at the load

time and will be saved inside the file

and going to increase the size of the

file they're also going to increase the

load time now we will understand the

major majors and then look at the

difference between majors and calculated

column the time has come that we should

go ahead and create Majors let me tell

you the definitions of the majors which

I plan to create the first major I want

to create is gross which is sum of gross

sales amount from the sales table second

major which I want to create is the cogs

sum of sales tables cogs amount another

major discount sum of sales tables

discount

amount then I'm going to use the

measures which are already created to

calculate net which is nothing but cross

minus

discount same way I'm going to create

margin which is nothing but net minus

cogs I will create two majors which

should be Majors only because they are

percentage measur

and they need to be calculated using

divide function which handles the divide

by

zero discount percentage equals to

divide discount by

gross and margin percentage equals to

divide margin by net so these are all

the measures I'm going to create so

let's go to the powerbi and create

these so now let's go ahead and quickly

create the measures and to create the

measures uh let me first go to the table

View and try to create a measure and can

I see the

calculation just like calculated column

in the table view so let me create my

first major to create that again I can

take the help from the table tool I have

an option for new

major also I have the same option in the

Home tab for new major also on the right

click of

a table or a right click of a column

similarly once you create a measure you

will also have an option to create a

major right now I'm going ahead with the

right click on a table and new

measure again in the case of measure we

will get this formula bar where left

hand side is the name and the right hand

side is the

formula this is what we call a measure

or a Dax measure because we are going to

use data analytics expression here to

create our measures so first measure

which we are going to create is

cross in the cross measure I'm going to

use the Dex function some some functions

can take one column name and the column

name which I want you to take here is

sales gross amount and this is the

reason I was adding amount at the end

because finally when I create a major it

should show me name only as

gross as you can see the gross major is

created in the sales table and I can see

the major icon but when I scroll into

the table it's not appearing inside the

table so Majors will not appear in the

table like calculated column second

thing is even if I click on the item

table and I I go ahead and

use new major and this time I'm using it

from table tool it would be able to

create a major so this time I'm going to

create C and CA equals to sum

of

tailes cogs

amount so I'm creating a major cogs

which is nothing but sum of cogs

amount and as you can see I'm able to

create this measure inside the item

table does it make any difference for me

let me go back to the report

view in the report View From The Bottom

near to the page one there is a plus

button I'm going to press that plus

button and add another page and in this

page and in this page from build a

visual let me add a table Visual and

check out what I'm getting to do that I

created a table visual enlarge it and

let me bring in brand from the item

table dragon drop onto this

visualization and bring in

Gross and

cogs and you can see both of them

working fine now without going back to

the table view I can continue to create

my Majors here so the next major which

I'm going to create is Discount major so

click on any of the table and say use

new measure from the table tool and name

is and let me enlarge

it

discount which is nothing but sum of

sales discount

amount the next major I would like to

create is net and then in the net majure

I would like to

create from the two existing Majors so

left hand side the name right hand side

cross the major and I don't need to

table name ideally speaking you should

not use table name when you are using

major because we can change the home

table of the majors and I'm going to

explain you that in a little bit of time

and then I can separate the discount and

I created a major which is net in the

same manner I can create a major margin

Again by clicking on new

major and you can press and enter or you

can press this commit button to commit

this formula the moment you click

outside it get automatically

saved now we would like to create two

measures which are division type and now

discount percentage which

is Discount divided by gross and margin

which is margin divided by net which is

actually the net margin are the division

type formulas and they cannot be created

as column as we have discussed when

taking our example division should

always be a measure now before I do that

let me show you how can I add that these

to the table so click on the table and

just simply click on the check boxes and

those will be added to the visualization

now let's create one more new major

again now I'm able to see the major tool

because right now the major is selected

and the major tool is canot

only do a job of

creation of a new major but it can do

the formatting also and right now right

now you can see the formatting is not

there but what I'm going to do is I want

to format multiple measures together

definitely I'm going to show you because

the formatting going to be compulsory

for the discount percentage from the

major tool but we will go to the data

model view and from there we will use

the properties to change them in one go

so let me click on a new major

again and this time I'll create a major

discount

percentage and I'm going to use a

function divide divide functions takes

three argument numerator denominator and

Alternate result so numerator is

Discount amount which is Discount major

I can directly use a major here and when

I'm using major it means sum of discount

amount denominator is gross which is sum

of gross amount so I'm using aggregated

one I don't want to use alternate result

what is the benefit of using this divide

function divide function will handle

divide by 0er so I don't have to bother

about it let me press enter or commit

and this will be committed and I can add

this to table user as you can see this

is coming as a ratio not as a percentage

just like your Excel you might have used

or if those of you not used go to the

major tool when you click on a major

major tool should be open and from there

you can mark it as a percentage column

by clicking on this percent icon it

should show a boundary here and this

boundary means it has been

selected as you can see we are able to

see percentage and now what I'm going to

do is a quick Copy pcee for creating the

margin percentage

major I can go here again click on item

or sales and from the table tools or

from the major tool whichever is visible

I can create new major and this time I'm

just going to paste the definition

margin percentage is equal to divide

margin by net enter and my Majors is

created so my base set of

measure using which I can explain you

the visualizations are created but as

you can see these measures are created

across various

tables and some of them are not

formatted what I'm going to do for that

so first let me solve the

formatting I have to indiv do if I go

here I have to individually do I can

can't select with the shift more than

one so for that I'll tell you go to the

model view and inside the model view

with the shift or control you can select

multiple measures so I'm selecting all

those amount kind of a

measures and let me uncheck the margin

percentage all the amount kind of

measures are selected first of all I can

change their home table right now I'm

not changing it I'll tell you the reason

later but

I will go here in the format and I can

call them general or currency let me

keep it General let me keep it thousand

separator and decimal places let me keep

it one for all of

them Advance uncategorized everything

should remain uncategorized let's go

ahead and check what is the difference

this action has made in the report view

so I'll click on the report view left

side and as you can see all of them got

formatted pretty well

here now left out is margin percentage

we can go back and do it from model view

or we can also do it from column tools

so we click on the margin

percentage and we can mark it as a

percentage format column from here now

it has become a percentage format two

decimal place by default we can change

it if required go back to the report

view add this into the

visualization and check out what we are

getting so we are getting a two decimal

place percentage

number so in this manner we can

modify the major properties using Major

Tool or the property pan in the data

model

view you might have noticed that the

till

now I

have increased the font when I was

creating the formulas of the formula

pane but I never changed the size of the

font of the table though it's a really

small font for recording and the reason

I was not doing is because I want to

handle it using

the

theme utilizing report themes allows for

comprehensive design alteration across

the

report this include adoption of color

schemes it's an implementation of fresh

visual Styles once a report theme is

applied it sets all default formatting

for every visual in your report ensuring

consistent and unified experience we

want to get a unified corporate

experience and the reason why I don't

prefer to change any font or color

without using a theme because once we

change it sometime it is really

difficult to apply themes on that and

that is the reason why in spite of

having a small font I have not changed

it now the theme which I'm going to

create is more suitable for the video

purpose but what you should do is if

you're doing a customer project or your

organizational project find out top 10

organizational

colors and using those top 10

organizational color and your

organizational font you should create

your theme let me tell you how to do

that go to the view tab on the top

and inside the view you have these

default

themes you can choose a starting point

like darker or

lighter based on your organization

preferences which is most nearest or you

can start with anyone let me choose this

third one once I choose that you can see

the fonts are still forther smaller I

can play around choose one which suits

best so I think this this accessable

city park is something which is more

suited to me and now I'm going to go

ahead and modify this if I further

scroll below I have options like browse

themes where I can browse the theme

theme Gallery I can go to the theme G

customize current theme to customize the

current theme which I'm going to use now

save the current theme to save it with a

name so that later on I can browse it

and how to create theme to go to the

documentation

so let me use customized current theme

option as of now and in this customized

current theme the first option which I

get is the name and the color where I

have the color now this team as a name I

can change this name if I want or I can

go ahead and choose some little bit

different colors so what I'm going to do

here is I'm going to choose a little bit

darker green for the first bar and let

me change this yellow color a little

bit there color seem fine negative

positive and neutral I'm seeing an

opportunity to change it little bit so

let me change the red green seems fine

neutral let me make it a little bit

different

blue and Divergent color I am fine with

that I go to the Advance now this is

really

important choose the

different elements of your visual like

XIs grid line text box color font what

are those in each categories for that

click on this learn

more and it's going to open a page for

you and in this page this is basically

the theme page which I'm also going to

provide to you if you scroll down little

bit below it is going to tell you if you

change the first level what is going to

change label background color trend line

color text box default color table and

Matrix values and total color data bar

access color card data labels these is

going to second level is going to change

light secondary level text classes label

color Legend label color exis label

color third level X is grid line cover

color table and Matrix grid color slicer

and header background color multi row

card outline color Etc fourth row legent

dimed color card category label color

multi- row card category label color

then background is going to change the

background color secondary background

color and table

accent there is more information also

given here how to set up themes and what

are the different components of that you

can take advantage of this particular

article I will also share the link of

this into the description let's go back

I don't want to change any of these as

of now I'll go to the next item which is

text and here I'm interested in so

everywhere I see a font I'm going to

increase It by Five Points now I don't

want to change the font family but I

have options to change it similarly I

can change the font color which I'm

currently not doing for title again I'm

going to make it little

bit larger 17 and let me change the

title color let me make it

blue make it a little bit darker blue

which is going to be very near to

Black cards and kpi again card is 45 is

to already pretty big so I'm not going

to change it tab headress I'm going to

make it as 70 and the reason I'm

increasing it by 5 pixel you might not

have to do that much is because I'm

recording a video and in that video I

would like these things to be visible

visuals background I don't want to

change if I want I can increase

transparency to

100% of the visual background so that

they take the background color it is

mostly useful when you have a background

which is of darker color so that you

make all your backgrounds as transparent

so that they can come on that particular

back ground and you don't have to set a

background for the visual but if you

don't want that transparency keep it 0%

borders borders are off but if you want

borders by default on the visualization

you can switch it on I don't want that

by default so I'm keeping it as off and

if you switch it on you can change the

color and you can also decide the

radius header header background color

border color

transparency uh if you want 100%

transparency you can use icon colors I'm

not going to change that I'm going to

keep it as is tool tip is the label text

color label text value drill text icon

and background color this is something

which these days we are going to use

white but if you remember earlier we

used to use little bit yellowish color

so I'm going to make the tool tip little

bit

yellowish page wallpaper transparency I

think I already changed transparency at

one place but I'm going to keep it as is

similarly P background transparency is

100% if you want you can make

transparency is zero so that it takes

the whatever is there on the background

let me leave it default as is filter

pane the filter pane which is being

given on the page on these things these

are going to apply the filter pane the

background color the transparency the

font and the icon colors the title font

I'm going to increase it to 17 header

font size I'm going to make it as

14 checkbox apply Color when you apply

something on checkbox you want to CH

that color it's right now the teal color

I'll continue with that available filter

cards color format filter cards haven't

been applied yet background is white

transparency is

0% font and color icon color it same and

I'm going to make it 14 in the font

filter applied card again I'm not going

to change anything there I'm just going

to change the

font size so I'm done with my changes

and let me apply and the moment I apply

it you can see the font size have

increased if I need further bigger font

I can go ahead and do it but it seems

good enough for me to use it as of

now now the next step is saving this

theme we will go back to the view again

open this theme portion go down and

press on save current

theme and let's call it as or

theme one

so the theme is saved how do we test

this so let me go ahead to the

files

open and I have saved one

file other than this end to end click on

it in the versions I'll open this end to

endend version till columns in this file

I'll add a visual and in that I'll try

to apply this theme so let me create a

visual quickly here

and let me go ahead and put a theme so

how do we do that go to

view down arrow key on the theme browse

the theme this time this time I'm

browsing the

theme in the data I have a theme 1. Json

I'm going to select that once I come

back and this theme is applied I get a

message

file successfully added I can press got

it and as you you can see the theme has

changed the font size and other things

would have also changed now as we

progress further into the visualization

we'll see impact of

those now we will learn how to enable

the dark mode we are going to look at

the settings to enable the dark mode

which has made its way to September 2024

release so let's jump on to the release

note first and this is powerbi set

September 2024 feature summary and if

you scroll down one of the first

announcement which you can see is that

you can now choose from a variety of

themes powerb desktop including the most

requested Dark theme you can personalize

your data visualization experience to

match your preferences and working

environment if you further scroll down

you will see IND the content in the

journal by popular demand dark mode is

now available on powerb desktop

and when you click on this you will see

how to enable it so you have to go to

options and settings Global reporting

setting and personalization so let me

showcase you that and while showcasing

we will take two kinds of file one which

is using a dark theme on the

visualization and one which is using

lighter theme in the visualization so

let me showcase my file to you this is

my first file which is using a white

theme

and this is my second file which is

using the darker theme and these are the

powerbi report themes now we would like

to change the overall desktop theme so

for that I'll go to file options and

settings below

options and click on options options

popup will open inside the options popup

inside the global go to report settings

and inside the report settings come down

inside the

personalization you have option dark

light use system setting so I'm going to

use dark here click on okay as you can

observe all the menu items the right

hand side data Pan the left hand side

pan everything is now using Dark theme

my model viewer is also showing the

darker theme now if I go to this file

now because I have applied on that file

maybe I have to open this file again let

me open this file again and this file is

already open but what I can do is

basically uh I can open it and you will

see this power bi desktop Opening screen

itself has changed now this file is

opening again and it has open on the

different window it will bring it in and

as you can observe that your powerbi

desktop is in the dark theme now

everything which belongs to power VA

desktop other than your reporting canvas

area which can have its own reporting

theme every everything is using do theme

so do theme has been applied here on all

the files globally you can look at the

data view all your tables all your icons

have changed these are your icons these

this is your table data view model view

already shown you Dex query view

Everything Has Changed to darker

them I opened a new file with the dark

one I have closed all my power ba

instances which were running before I

applied the Dark theme and I have opened

a blank new file with a dark theme where

I'm now going to open a blank report let

me click on the blank report and now

here I would like to get the data and I

can use a powerbi semantic model for

that let me bring in one semantic model

and we can use this calculation group

semantic model which I was using for

quite some time so the semantic model

has loaded into the powerbi and as you

can see all the UI you can observe they

have been adjusted with reference to

dark mode the model view is in the dark

mode the Dex squarey view is in the dark

mode and we can see all the uis are

perfectly fine with the dark mode so you

have seen that we have chosen the dark

mode and the impact of the dark mode is

mostly on the menu items it is not

related to your report theme if you want

to change your report theme basically

powerbi report you have to still have to

go to view and there you can go ahead

and choose use a dark theme and then

your report canvas will also use a

darker theme or whatever theme you have

selected so you can have your report

canvas theme or report theme which is

separate from your powerbi desktop

darker theme that is different from this

one so you can choose whatever theme you

still want for your reporting canvas or

your powerbi report so go ahead and

explore this dark mode we would like to

learn now how to create a table visual

before that let me tell you how to

rename a page so the page name is here

in the

bottom you can double click on that and

you can change it so I'm calling it as a

main page now near to that there is a

plus button and I'm going to create a

new page using that one so I'll click on

that and this is a new page and let me

double click on this one also and call

it as table because I'm going to create

a table visual on that to create a table

visual either from the Home tab insert

visualization I can use it or I have

already enabled the build visual in case

you are not seeing it you can enable it

using the view and then further by

clicking here on the build a visual so

you should be able to see this pain from

any of these places you can use the

table visual so in the build a visual

I'm going to click on the table

Visual and it will add a visual on the

page which which I'll click on the

visual and drag it down and make it

little bit

bigger once I've done that if I have

clicked on it I can see the check boxes

on the data pane which I can click to

bring in the data or if it is not

selected then I can drag and drop so let

me drag item brand either on the visual

that's First Option then let me drag

category inside the columns which is is

below the Builder visual

visuals and third option is because now

this visual is selected I can actually

go ahead and add some major by simply

clicking on them so you can drag it on

visual you can drag it on the columns or

you can check the check boxes and add

certain

things now what are the options

available here with the table visual so

let's have a look at the options of the

table visual ual so first we would like

to see the options inside the three dot

so in the three dot we have export data

option using which you can export the

data into a CSV

format on the three dots we have another

option to us table which is pretty much

applicable for all the visuals and it

will show as it as a table in case of

table visual it is already a table so

we'll continue to show it like that and

there is a button back to report which

which we can use come back to the report

this especially helpful when you have

multiple Visual and you want it to see

in table then the next one is remove we

can remove this which we don't want to

do automatically find cluster is an AI

option which we are going to explore

later then we have option Spotlight sort

by we can choose a sort by column like

brand category and cogs and the format

option right now you can already see the

format pin is open because this is how I

have set up my panes because of which

it's open if it is not open you can use

that option now let's go back to the

swort option let me say sort on brand

now you can see that it has been sort in

on brand on descending now I can go

ahead here again I will see the option

for ascending and descending and I can

click on sort

ascending right now it is sort

descending now table visual is one VIs

ual where we can have multiple sorts so

now it is already sorted if you want to

change here from here also you can click

and

change if you click

on the name of the brand you can see the

Sorting is changing now press the shift

button and now you can sort the category

but I don't want to sort category by

name I want to sort the category by

cross and let me click on it so what

does it do is by default for number it

sort by descending so it is sorted on

column one's brand and sort descending

on

Gross so first sorting was on brand and

second sorting is on the gross so double

sorting is possible you can have

multiple sorting using the shift button

now when you click on this because of

the on object interaction it is start

showing which property you can change if

I click here which property can change

if I click here

if I click on the header it started

showing the column header text so in

this manner the on object interactions

allow you to change the particular

Properties by clicking on that

particular set now let me click on the

table and let me take you through all

the visual properties one by one for the

table visual size and style is the first

property now you can see the height and

width is based on what I've created and

then the lock aspect ratio in case if I

use use the lock aspect ratio if I

resize the table it will maintain the

same ratio which I've taken currently

which I'm not not planning to do right

now horizontal and vertical is the

position it will change the moment I

move the table up and

down next comes the padding the padding

is from the top bottom so this is the

padding I can reduce it as per need

background right now the background is

on and there is a color I can go ahead

and change this

color and because the transparency is is

100% I have to reduce the transparency

to see the background color so the

background color is the color which is

behind the table I can increase little

bit of transparency to keep

it if I switch off the background

color there will be no background and I

will be able to see the page background

color I enable it again the next option

is visual border right now it is

disabled I can I can switch it on you

will be able to see a border now if you

click outside let me click inside it

and let me go ahead and and change the

rounded corner so that you can

understand what's happening there so now

you can see the rounded corners for this

table you can see a border as well as

the rounded

Corners in case you want a shadow you

can switch it on and it will start

showing the shadow you can decide the

shadow color and you can decide whether

it should be inside or outside and where

it should be it should be bottom bottom

right bottom left various options have

given which you can choose I would like

to keep it bottom right only that's the

most suitable option for a

shadow right now there is no title but I

can enable the title so let me enable

the title and I can double click here

and give the title so there are two

places where I can do it I can give a

title from here or I can double click

here in the title itself and I can give

a title so let me call it as

table

Visual and as you can see whatever I'm

typing here it is also appearing here in

the text the FX means I can use a majure

here so if I need a dynamic title I can

create a mejor and I can use inside it

right now it is using heading three I

can changes as per

need similarly I can use bold italic and

underline for it I can use a color

background color is right now nothing I

can choose it again I can use FX means

function means I can use measure and let

me showcase you at one place so if I

click FX here I I'm able to see field

value and I can choose what major I want

to display

here now there is a subtitle option

right now there is no subtitle which has

been used I can enable the subtitle and

now I get a subtitle option here again

either I can type it here or I can use a

majure using FX or I can type directly

here we prefer on object interaction we

like to write on the visual so let's

say

information for brand

and

category for subtitles again we can

choose text colors now right now this

text color is not matching so I'm going

to change it out then you can choose the

horizontal alignment right now it is

left aligned this one is little bit

darker I can make it middle align so it

will go into the middle and to match it

also I'll make the title also middle

align so both title and the subtitles

are now middle aligned text wrap if

there is a larger text we can use text

wrap so that it get into the next line

instead of cutting it

down then we have divider which is right

now not off I can enable it and you will

start seeing a divider between the

header and

the table area it is solid one pixel we

can increase the pixel to understand it

better ignore padding is on you if you

want you can disable that next is

spacing spacing is customize spacing is

off if you want you can customize the

spacing switch it on and let me reduce

the spacing and as I'm reducing the

spacing you can see the impact between

the below area and of the above area

next is style

resets now right now the style is

different fa and which is the Shaded

style if I choose none you can see the

difference what is happening in this

table and I'm going to use few of these

Styles and showcase you what all they

can do border header this is one style

which actually I'm liking a lot

alternating rows this also seems good

contrast alternating

rows flashy

colors border and flashy

colors bold and flashy

colors

bars

condensed I'll keep it to default right

now and based on this when you go to

some of the features like especially

when you want to color the rows you will

get that option of alternating colors

right now because it is by default

alternating color and you go to grid so

right now the horizontal grid lines are

on so these are the grid lines which you

could make a note of

it these are hor onal and these are

vertical so let me off and on let me

increase the size little bit you will be

able to differentiate similarly vertical

are off I can on it and if I increase

the size you can use grid lines vertical

and horizontal it's not looking so great

right now but to explain to you I have

to do those changes now I may choose a

different color also

next one is border and let me showcase

you right now if you notice there is no

border for this particular section of

the table but let me enable it me enable

top you can see the border on the top

here same way

bottom left right and let me increase

the width a little bit you will be able

to observe B on all the

sides next one is options there is a

rope adding which you can increase which

will increase the padding between the

lines I'm going to decrease that to zero

and Global font if you want to increase

the font but we don't want to disturb

the font we would like to continue with

the font from the

theme now comes the important which is

values now we want to play around the

values values is typically these these

These are called as

values now you can see that I have the

text color and the background color

alternate text color and Alternate

background color and this is because our

theme is alternating color and just to

explain it to you let me change the

color so that you're able to make sense

out of

it and then alternating text color let's

only change the the background

color let's change the text color now

again rep text in case the text taking

more place we can use rep text in of

cutting

down so these are the values which has

changed next comes the column

header in the column header again this

is the area which is going to be

impacted because of the column header

let's make the column header as bold

metallic and underline color I'm fine

with that background color white is also

fine and do I want to make them left

align or centrer align as this is a

generic one I don't want to use there

are better options available to handle

it based on each column so we are going

to use that option right now let's leave

it let's go to the next option Auto size

width now what happens

is if you can go ahead and resize these

columns but what would happen if you do

certain

changes this may get back to its

original size

because of the auto size width so let's

say you use a filter or a slicer and

this may come back to its original size

if I don't want it to come to original

size then what I'll do is I'll switch it

off so that once I fix this width it

should not resize and that's where we

can use Auto size width

off then the next option is for totals

total we have value

values and we can switch off the totals

we don't want the totals and if you

switch it on now do I want to call it

total or do you want to call it grand

total again static in

nature uh you don't have an option for

FX text color you can Define and

background color you can Define then

comes the most powerful option specific

columns now here what you can do is you

can choose each column and for that you

want to decide you want to change

something which should apply to header

apply to total or apply to values like

this is one common question which you

ask that for the discount column I want

everything to be same I would like to

apply to header apply to total and apply

to values what I want to do here is I

want a text color let's

say

orange and I want the alignment as left

so for the entire category

column you can see the text color is

orange and the alignment is left and

even for the alternate color it has

changed so this is when you want it to

do it for complete column there is no

background color we can actually go

ahead and give a background color and

you now you can see because we I have

given a background color it is not

following that

alternative so in this manner in case

case there is a

requirement that you wanted to have one

single column from top to bottom

following something you can do that or

you may would like to say now don't

apply it to values I'm fine with

alternating colors I'm now only applying

it to header and

total next comes the option of cell

elements now cell elements provide us

opportunities for conditional formatting

the advantage in the table visual is

that we can do it on all the

columns we have something known as

Matrix visual where we will not be able

to do it on rows and columns we don't

have a concept of rows and columns here

everything is a column here so we can do

it on all each and every column and just

for the Showcase purpose I'll show you

one conditional formatting on the

background but later on we will come

back and do a deep dip on the

conditional formatting let me explain

you how to use conditional formatting

with one base example so I'll click on

the background color and it

automatically opens a popup which we

call the conditional formatting popup it

has three Styles gradient Rule and field

value base I'm going to use the gradient

style as of now that's the easiest one

value only values and total means it

will apply to total total only it will

only happen to Total I'll use values

only right now count of brand typically

it needs a measure or a calculated

column so I'll prefer a measure which is

net here I'll choose that and it is from

lowest value red and highest value is

green I can add a middle color but those

things we will explore later and right

now I'm going to press okay

button to apply this and as you can see

the conditional formatting has been

applied here and we can see different

different background colors depending on

the net value we can explore font

condition formatting which will happen

on the font icon which will show icons

web URL which will show web

URL the next one is URL icon for this

you need to have a column which is

having URL and you can convert it into

icon it should not show the URL so we

will use this inside the Matrix visual

for that we are going to add a URL in

our item table image size in case you

are using an image then you can use the

image height and width the image size

will only be app cable when I have the

image right now I don't have image so we

will take back these URL icon and image

icon later we have certain images which

we wanted to show IND visuals and we'll

take this up later accessibility refer

to row non select brand category you can

use these options so these are the table

specific properties which we

have there are generic properties which

apply to each and every visual like

header icons so header icons are these

icons which you are seeing can disable

these header icons but they will not get

disabled here these icons will get

disabled in powerbi service so even if

you disable here these header icon

you'll continue to see they will get

disabled once you publish the file you

can decide the color for these icon

border Etc now you can decide what icon

you want like visual information visual

warning visual error drill down drop

down drill up these are generic options

right now you're not seeing all of these

options whatever is applicable for this

visual at that particular moment you are

seeing it

but again if you uncheck some of these

options like filter option if I uncheck

you will see that still the filter

option is there again this will be

hidden once we publish the

file you can use reset to default this

option is available at many places helps

you to get to reset to default tool tip

right now you're not able to see the

tool tip if you enable it you will start

seeing a tool tip here

and if you disable it the tool tip would

be completely

off alternate text while loading what

alternate text you wanted to show you

can also use FX option for that advanced

option is basically responsiveness and

maintain layer order which is off right

now these are the properties used by

table Visual and as you see we have done

quite a lot around it what we can do is

some of these things we can say reset to

default so one of the property I've done

is basically

the grid I have reset to default

similarly style preset reset to default

title is fine sizing and style is

fine reset to default the text

colors column headers reset to

default values reset to default specific

column reset to default and as you now

observe we are almost at the very

starting stage yes I'm leaving

ahead what I've have done as a

background color and the headers so I'm

keeping them as is but in this manner

you can revert few of the things to

deset to default it helps you for

experiment and come back to the initial

position so we have now learned how to

create a table visual to multiple

sorting and do various kind of

formatting on table

visual let's start creating a matrix

visual so I'll add another page for that

using the plus button at the bottom plus

button let me double click and rename

Matrix you can also right click and

rename if you want to delete you can

delete duplicate you can duplicate if

you want to hide now when you hide it

here it doesn't mean that it's going to

hide here it's just going to show you uh

that it will be hidden but it will be

hidden only in powerbi service in the

viewing mode now to add a matrix visual

again we can have option either for from

build a visual which I enabled from here

which was not visible or you from the

Home tab you have the insert

option The Matrix visual is lying

here if you can notice and in case of

the top it's lying here one of the two

places you can use I'll click on the

Matrix visual here on the build of

visual Pane and bring it little bit down

and and make it little a little bit

bigger now unlike table visual we have

some different options like row columns

and values and once we add that you will

be able to understand what I'm talking

about and metrix visual has quite a lot

of option for display also so first we

focus on the display related options and

then we go through the other properties

of the Matrix visual um quite a few

properties of the Matrix visual is

similar to table visual but this one

property which you will find missing

here is basically sorting on multiple

columns that's not available here the

Sorting automatically get adjusted when

you have multiple

rows either on the value or on the

categories so let me start creating a

matrix visual a very simple Matrix

visual I'll drag a brand it will group

The everything by brand and then I'll

bring in the major

the

values I can actually also bring a

quantity

column and as you can see there's a sum

of quantity but if I try to remove the

aggregation I don't have any

option but if you go to a table

Visual and you try to add a quantity

column let's say inside a table visual

as a column you you do have option of

aggregation don't summarize it means you

can group it by quantity but the option

is not available in Matrix values the

values has to be aggregated so that is

why there is no option for no

aggregation

here don't aggregate is not an

option let me cross

that now you can add multiple Majors if

you

like I check that

you have one row you can have multiple

rows the moment you have the multiple

rows you will start seeing the plus

button now it depends on you how you

want to use that the moment you have

more than one you start seeing the drill

icons you start seeing these buttons

also if you press a button it will only

explode that particular brand and it

will make it

bold and if you want to go up you can

close these

buttons or in even in the Open Stage you

can use this button which is known as

drill

up the second button and right now

because it's only the row where we have

the multiple columns that's why you are

seeing is later on we'll see that when

columns have multiple we can do the same

stuff on the columns also now the second

button is drill down now what does drill

down down button does is let's say right

now if I click on the brand one it

doesn't do anything the moment I press

this click on drill down and now if I

click here on the brand one you can see

the brand one is getting

filtered let

me use drill up and uncheck this option

the next one is next hery level what

does it do it doesn't drill down it

simply take me to the next hierachy

levels and as you can see the totals are

same what we had previously it means we

are just seeing the next level come back

to the top level you can use drill up if

there are more than one level same thing

you have to use multiple

times while the next level take us to

the next level means it's take us to the

next available level which is basically

in this case the next level is like

this going

down the expand adds the next

level if I right now I have only one

level but if I have more than one level

I have to use expand multiple times it

starts showing both of them and that's

the place new Option comes in so now you

have expanded it the display is like

this this display is known as stabbed

layout the options in The Matrix visual

has changed so once the metric visual

will finish I will showcase you the new

options which has come very

recently you go on the visual format now

I have already have a format pane open

if you don't have again you can enable

if it is visible here you have an option

here on the three dots for the format

Pane and again in the view tab you can

enable it if you scroll down inside the

row

headers if you scroll down the options

you will see stabbed layout now right

now it is on you can increase the

indentation

here

okay now the second option or the layout

which is if you switch it off the

stepped layout if you switch it

off then it will give you this kind of

look and

feel so this is non sted layout and

sometime we use this now there are plus

and minus icons you have option for that

one is definitely you can change the

color you can make them little bit

bigger if they are looking small and one

more thing you can switch them

off now we had a pretty good Advantage

when they have we could have pressed

this plus button and open it let's go up

and see what happens now if I click here

I don't have button I can't go there I

have to use the next level by either

using the drill down or by

expand now let's further play around

with the Matrix

visual before I go ahead and make it

little bit complex by adding column I

would like to show you one property

which actually will become little bit

complex once I have the columns and from

using that only I would like to switch

how would we add columns to this Matrix

visual so let me remove even categories

from

here now if I go to the values scroll

down

[Music]

I have this option switch values on row

group rather than

columns if you this is right now off if

you switch it on you start seeing your

measures on the row previously they were

on the column

here now I can completely

remove any kind of row and

column to have a kpi

look you've seen the row look or I can

only bring in data on

columns to have Majors on the

row and the data on

columns again I can have multiple things

on my

column and once I have more than one

thing I have options like drill down if

I click I'll go there drill

up go to the next

level drill up expand both of them are

available in case of expand here in the

column we don't have a stepped layout

it's always going to be like

that so now you have seen rows

separately you have seen column

separately and you have seen Majors on

the row time to bring Majors back on the

column because we are going to create a

pwot table kind of a structure by moving

the

brand here and I'll tell you a new

option to add the data I'll click add

data here and now I'm not dragging it

from the data pane I'm simply going it

and adding it from here only so now we

have a pwat structure where we have

brands on the row and

categories on the column and the majors

are also on the column and you can play

around take the measures on the

row I can further complicate it and to

do that complication let me bring

in

brand here and let me dra categories

little bit below and knowingly I've

taken brand and category columns here

because they have lesser number of

values number of headers are limited now

I'll go and add state in the

row and see also in the

row now you will notice a difference

here the difference is drill down now is

asking where you want to drill down on

columns or on

rows if I use column and I expand it

I'll see brand and category together if

I change it to

rows and I expand it now rows are

expanded in this manner I can create

really complex structure

using the Matrix visual let me add

customer name to the

rows and if I now further expand it has

a pretty complex

stru but you can see there are too many

totals out here I don't want so many

totals how do we control the totals you

have multiple totals on the columns

multiple totals on the

row so what we are going to do here is

now we go to the row sub

totals we can disable them if we disable

everything is disabled including the

grand

total and let me to check that out let's

drill up little bit let's make our task

easy we don't have a grand total also

let me enable

it we have a grand

total now what I'm going to do is I'm

going to enable par rle level and it's

all right now all are there now I can

choose

State further expand it now state is the

first

level States control your grand

total is the totals of state that's the

highest one isn't it after that if your

total is grand total

City controls the total which you look

at the state

level and names customer names will show

you the totals which you see at the city

level I can go

ahead and decide which sub total I want

to see so I can choose the RO level I

say state if I don't want to see grand

total I can

off and let's look at the impact by

going up you don't see it that let me

bend it now the city level is added and

I'll switch off the grand total at the

city level you don't see the state

subtotals coming out here now it's only

this one there's no State sub tootal

what happens if you will up we still see

it but when we expand it we don't see

the state sub total in this manner you

can control not only you can control

let's say you want to have the sub

totals you can give the sub total some

name I can call it

and where I want it bottom or top I

don't have a control at the individual

role level but if I go to all I do have

a control first what I want to call

Total as and I can use top it means

first the subtotals will come and then

the individual split will come we can't

change that at the individual

level if I expand further I do get an

option to control things at the name

level or the customer name

level so this is the manner you control

the row

subtotals now let's try to control the

column

subtotals little bit up the column we

right now have only two of them and we

can completely switch off the totals you

will get rid of all the totals here

including the grand total we may like to

have grand total not others so again we

can switch it on we say per column level

first of all let's look at the all level

what options we have so at all level we

have total we can rename it uh we have

the values option and if I go to the

Brand level I definitely will end up

disabling the ground total which I don't

want I want go to the category level and

there I disable it I can give a

different name also if I want so let me

disable it now there is no sub totals

you will only see a grand total at the

end

values is disabled at the individual

level we have options for column grand

total for colors and row ground totals

for colors and

font Now quickly have a look at the

properties of the Matrix which which we

can use so as usual the generic

properties of the header icons whatever

you want want to disable and as I

explained earlier these properties will

apply to powerbi service than here but

just for an example let's change the

color of the background so that you can

see where it can be border color is

white I'll going to make it black you

see the Border also transparency then

icons whatever icons we need again if I

uncheck it the impact would be there on

service right now there's no tool tip I

can enable it tool tip is of default or

report page right now report page is

auto means it's automatically creating

that but we can have a report page which

we will learn later

in the tool tip you can control the text

size label color Etc as per need

similarly the background color if you

would have remember we have set up this

background

color when we have done changes in

theme alternative text and advanced

options are very similar at the visual

level let's look at all the options

Styles and size and style very similar

to table visual padding again how how

much padding we want background we would

we can switch it off we don't need a

background visual border we don't need

Shadow we don't need if you want we can

have a

shadow title we can add a title we can

added a title and then we can add either

from here or on the top we can call it

as Matrix

visual

enter font color background color

alignment center alignment a subtitle we

would don't not like here divider I

don't think we like here same as the

table visual spacing again we can

increase the spacing same as table

visual style presets same as table

visual we can have different like bold

header and all those but I think I would

like to stay with

default again grid horizontal grid

vertical grid border and options

whatever we want to change same as table

visual values very similar because we

have alternating colors we have two

options just like table visual to have

multiple colors options switch values on

row we have already experimented but

here how does it look like you can see

it looks allog together

different now column header is something

which is basically for the column

headers and to make it bold and italic

to differentiate you can see these

things are getting chap

here then we can do the alignment right

now I'm going to leave that options Auto

size width again whenever we do some

kind of filtering we don't want to

change it and if you have specifically

go ahead and done something you don't

want it to change switch it off so that

it doesn't change when you do the

filtering of data row headers these are

our row headers again make them bold and

italic so that we can see it now when

you go up still they remain bold

when you go to the next level they are

bold and when you expand them they are

still the bold because now we have

forcefully made them

bold plus icon we have removed it let's

switch it on so that we get

collapsible property at the end options

we have already used the step layout and

non step layout lets now switch on the

step play out so you can see the

difference again column subtotals and

row sub total we've experiment column

grand total you can't control the grand

total enabling disabling you can only

change the color and the font R grand

total again font and colors or

background no control on enable disable

now specific column here what you will

see is when we talk about specific

column we are only talking about values

we are no more talking about row and

columns unlike table visual where we

talk about each and every column when

you talk about specific column you are

only talking about net but there are few

additional options here header subtotals

totals and values means they can apply

to subtotals and values so you can

change the properties like I can say

apply to header apply to total and I

just want to change one property which

is basically alignment let's say for the

net value and I want to make it right

align so you can observe that the net

has been aligned right

decimal place I can change the decimal

place at visual level let me make it

zero so now n don't show any decimal

place at the visual level same way

display unit can be for formatted at the

visual level I can show it in thousands

and when I show it in Thousand I may

like to have decimal places in this

manner at the visual level I can control

the display

units next it's cell elements it is

forther condition formatting and one of

the limitations of the conditional

formatting which we have in the Matrix

visual that it doesn't apply to rows and

columns we have an additional option

here for data bar and the data bar

option actually is there on the table

visual also but it only come for the

values when we go ahead and explore

the conditional formatting in details we

will see this option

also again URL icon we need to have some

data URL to use this and if the URL has

been used in column headers or rows then

also we can have an icon for that again

image size we once we add some images we

will be able to see this for that we

will need image

URL so these are the various properties

in The Matrix Visual and one of the most

powerful display which is available with

us is Matrix visual

while it doesn't have the double sorting

but when you sort on now this is one

question which is basically on the

sorting and this is

little topic which typically

misunderstood by Manny so when you do

the Sorting on state it will

automatically sort the category and

subcategory in the same order but you

can go ahead and sort it on City and

then based on the city sorting

automatically the state sorting would

happen but when you sort it by net which

net it is sorting it's the column ground

total because we have used the column so

it will going to sort on the column

ground total but if you don't have the

columns definitely it would be that

particular column sorting so if I go to

the visual level and remove my columns

and now if I'm doing the net sorting it

is actually sorting on net I can go

ahead and sort on margin and cross but

if I have columns they are sorting on

the ground total of the

column so let me bring only category so

that you can see see that grand totals

you can go and sort the grand totals you

can either sort on the columns which are

there on the rows or you can sort it on

the ground totals of the

values and then you have the sort

ascending and descending option which

you can

use same options in the three dots as

other visual export show data as table

remove

Spotlight this is Matrix visual for you

power ba is ever changing and every

month it keeps on giving you new and new

featur and same thing has happened

before I could have released the video

or the series we got few new features

some of them are already covered as part

of this video or the series and I would

like to Showcase you couple of features

which has been added into the Matrix

visual so let me go back to the file

where we have the Matrix Visual and this

was The Matrix visual we have created in

the past let me open the properties of

this Matrix visual I have already

clicked on the right hand side format

and because of that the format pan is

already open and I already have the

properties open in the properties under

the layout and style preset now we got

few more layout the layout which we used

to know as stabbed layout is now become

your compact layout so if you see right

now it is the compact layout and I can

extend it further and you can see the

values are stepped out and there you

have the indentation which has been

given so basically in the compact layout

you have indentation using that

indentation you can move around the

things little bit and this is the format

what we use to call as St layout other

than that also couple of formats have

been added so first format which is

outline format if you look at the

outline format and there you have this

like a format which is sted layout off

and the total is above you see the state

total the total is here at this place

and then you have these detail level

data totals first the subtotals and then

we have the data now in this layout you

have an additional option that is repeat

r

and this was the one of the feature

which you are asking for long we want

these values to repeat like a table

visual we don't want them like a pyot

table where the values are non-

repeating we want the repeating values

and here the values are repeating as you

can scroll down and see all the values

are repeating now totals on the top and

values are

repeating now let's go ahead and change

the format to next format which is

tabular in the tabular format you have

have the same option repeat row headers

which is right now on and you are seeing

that the headers are repeating and the

totals have actually moved down if you

scroll down wherever something is ending

then you get the

totals and here in the total also the

names are repeating now if you want to

close that repetition repeat row header

you can switch it off once you switch it

off it is very similar layout which we

used to get in tabbed layout off so now

these are the couple of layouts which

has been added one is very similar

similar to the old one which is compact

layout which is very similar to the step

layout and non-step layout we got

tabular format as well as the outline

format now the changes did not stop here

we got something known as blank rows

what happens let's look at this data now

let me go one step up here so that you

can easily understand that and let me

click on add blank row after these

subtotals you got a break you got a

blank row and this is something you were

asking for long that you know give us

some place where we have this break

where we have some separation between

the parent and child there should be

some empty rows which we wanted to

insert and that the same feature has

been given now there is a color which

you can also apply here so use the color

on that particular row so that you can

enhance the visibility of your visual so

now this visual will give you a

different look because you have a color

now in the color you can also use

transparency you want it a little bit

transparent so increase the transparency

then there is an option for Border also

here so click and then you will get a

border now you have a border position

like top then you have bottom only at

the top only at the bottom or you have

top and bottom both so right now it is

like to both top and bottom so we parall

lines then the color definitely you want

to have the color to that so you that

color of the Border then transparency of

the Border can also be there next is

width in case you want to have little

bit wider width you can use that in that

manner you will have different kind of

visual experience now you can see this

visual the same Matrix visual is now

looking a little bit different and this

is because of these new changes which

has been provided to us which is giving

us much better look and feel and right

now powerbi is fusing a lot on providing

you such a new feature your visual

experience so these are couple of

features which has been added in Matrix

visual very recently enhance your visual

experience the visual we want to learn

now is the bar visual so let me add

another page by using the new page

button at the bottom and I will use the

bar the bar visual is actually known as

clustered column bar or clustered bar

chart both are available in

the build a visual and in the Home tab

in

the insert option so let me start with

the clustered bar chart which

is also known as horizontal bar

chart let me start that now the options

you have here and some of you might be

surprised why I'm not getting a add

button here because after the December

customization I've choose for build a

visual and because of that the on object

interaction option of having the columns

here has shifted to this place which is

more classic look but I like that more

so I have opted for that now let's skip

the y axis now and in the y axis as I

can add the data directly I will go

ahead and add item

brand now

now second is x-axis where I will go

ahead and add a measure now here in case

of

the clustered bar chart the Y AIS is

basically categorical axis and XIs is

basically a numerical axis so here we

are getting the values on x-axis which

is

this and we are getting the categorical

values here on the Y AIS it can use

continuous values we will see example

when we put across a date column then it

can use continuous

values now let me duplicate this and

I'll also tell you how can you change a

chart type so when you click on this now

what you can do is you can go to Builder

visuals and you can click

on cluster column chart which is not

selected right now and it will become a

cluster column bar now in cluster column

bar the x-axis is brand because you are

seeing the branch on the horizontal axis

and you are seeing the numbers on y

AIS now let's further explore it what

else we can do now before I go to the

properties let me tell you few things

about this visual so we can have more

than one AIS similarly we can also have

Legends and we can also use small

multiples and Tool tip on this now tool

tip you can add additional column by

default you can see the tool tip is

on I can click on the format and start

seeing that now before I change any

properties let me show you one thing

which is column and under the column you

see the color and in the color this FX

option is there which means conditional

formatting is available and you have to

keep noting that down for what all cases

the conditional formatting is available

or not let me bring in one additional

major here which is other than net I'm

also taking in cross as you can see

inside the color now there is no

conditional formatting option which is

available in the columns we have each

series and for each series you can give

color but we don't have any option for

conditional formatting like if I go for

net I don't have FX option now same way

here you can see the conditional

formatting option but if I add a measure

I don't see a conditional formatting

option also here so conditional

formatting only along with one major now

let me remove the majure or even without

removing the mejor let me see can I put

a legend so I expand the item and from

there I try to drag Legend category as a

legend I'm not able to do so with two

measures you can't have Legend so let me

remove the

gross and let me now drag category so I

can

have the legend with one single major

only so if you have only one major then

only you can use leg Legend you cannot

have both couple of measur and legend in

the standard bar visuals it is

applicable for both bar and column bar

again you can see that I am not able to

see the FX option if I go to category

one you will be able to see that I'm not

getting an option for conditional

formatting now instead of bringing this

category onto the

legend I can also bring this category on

the x-axis

when you bring bring on this on

x-axis as you can see it is broken down

by brand and then by categories this

option where it start breaking down and

you can individually work with each bar

we need a little bit bigger visual for

that so let me adjust these two

visuals to have more

space now you can see brand little bit

better so brand category and Brand C we

have and this is coming because of one

of the properties and for that it's

already showing exclamation signs that

you have to reduce the font so if I

reduce the font of xaxis I can get the

better data here now you see this is

concatenated label off so by default is

this concatenated label off but if you

switch it on you will see that the brand

and the category are concatenated

together so if you want them to

concatenate together then you need that

option you can off for concatenated

label off that's a better option here

you can see this is the

default ordering which we

have brand one and then categories are

ordered now this will work only when you

have sorted it on

AIS brand and category if you sort it on

net this is not going to work out in the

same manner okay so now you can see the

brands have started repeating so this

from the three dots always use brand and

access and concatenated label off if you

need that now this option was previously

not available here but now this option

is also available here and I can go here

and pull in

category and why I'm not seeing it let

me expand it and you can see the same

option concatenated label off is

available here but as you can see the

data is pretty small it's not visible

now labels which are we are getting on

the y axis right now there is no option

here to other than reducing the font

size I can do making them horizontal and

again it is you know showing me the

message that it

is too bigger in the size not able to

display the complete

value

now let's focus on one of these charts

for other properties now when we learn

the conditional formatting in some time

what we going to do is we are going to

give one single color for a brand or if

you have a category below we will try to

give one single color for the category

and you can have multiple categories

means you can have multiple levels also

and it is not that uh you have to show

all these levels in one go just like we

have shown with the concatenated level

off you can do the same way drill up you

can do and then you can say Okay expand

or you can also use the drill down

option you can enable and you brand 10

and you drill down with the filter of

brand T now you might have feel that the

other visual is also getting filtered

and this happens because of interaction

between the visual every visual interact

with another visual unless we stop it so

we will learn that art little bit

later now this is our Visual and in this

visual we can either expand and have the

labels together or we can have one level

and then we can go to the next level

same way as Matrix we can go simply to

the next level come back up we can

expand have them together or we can use

the drill down functionality when we

click on the bar it goes to the next

level now let's look at the

properties size and style properties

under the size position we know because

of the size it is coming height and

width then from where we are starting

lock aspect ratio if I lock it if I

change the size then it will keep the

aspect ratio see I'm whatever I'm trying

it is keeping the aspect

ratio now padding uh padding is

basically the outside right now I think

one of the side it is zero so that's why

there is no padding coming

in but we can change it

like see net is just now look at where

the net

is okay so 6 pixel 10 5 pixel 2 pixel

the differences similarly the right hand

bar if I give the right hand side

padding so how much padding is going to

be how much padding on the top so we

almost end up utilizing background is

the background color so you can have

some color if you want on the background

and then you have to reduce the

transparency to see that

color visual borders again same as table

we are not going to experiment with this

Shadow same as a metrix and table we are

not going to experiment it title we have

already explored and by default it gives

a title and um then FX means we can give

a major in the title which we will learn

a little bit later we can make the title

Center and then also in inside the we

have subtitles if you want to give it

again subtitles you have the FX option

means you can use the measure

there divider uh between the title

subtitle and the rest of the area you

can use

divider now x-axis we have experimented

in the title there is something which

you might like to use you might want to

switch off the title so if in xaxis if

you see now there's no brand written

here

now let me go ahead and switch it on on

and you will notice now there is a brand

written if you switch off the title

again you can play around with the

properties of this one and the color now

the color of this one is how is it going

to change is it going to change on the

grand total value or is it on the brand

value each brand value that we will

experiment and see usually it only check

the grand total value again FX color

means I can use a conditional formatting

measure for that once we learn that we

will try to use that now we'll go to the

layout now minimum category width you

can play around and as you can see the

moment I increase the minimum category

width the bars are little bit

wider now we can go to the y- axis and

in the y- axis you have this option of

minimum and maximum so you can change

the range and you can also use measures

here means I can have a measure which

will decide my you know Min and Max so

right now you it is automatically

deciding it's starting from zero and and

it is going to 1 million so basically

the range is in millions okay but you

can decide from where it should start

and where it should end you can devise

Sun kind majors and the tip is when you

create such mejor find out the minimum

value of for the brand whatever you are

using here take just some 10% less than

that and same for the high value 5% 10%

above the value here less than the value

and here above than the value now

sometime what happens you have values

which are pretty small compared to other

values which are pretty large so you may

want to use logarithmic AIS so as you

can see these numbers now see almost

same this actually helps when you know

one value is pretty large and another

one is pretty small you can use logic

scale inot range again you want to move

that on the top the now we have the

smaller value on the top and the larger

value

below so smaller to bigger on the invert

site now comes the values for the

values you can see the y-axis values are

switch on and switch off pay

attention you can use FX means you can

use conditional formatting uh

display uh Auto right now I can use none

no formatting now you can see the

absolute value you can say Auto it means

it will follow the auto atically what it

get best million forcefully million

thousand forcefully thousand I Leave It

To None or I can even leave it to Auto

let it decide usually it is better to

keep Auto which axis position now Y axis

can come on the secondary y-axis side or

on the what you call as right hand side

title now you want to give a

title to

the Y axis now right now the title is

net let's give something else net

net value so now we have title as net

value again you can use the color using

conditional formatting uh show style

show units only show title only show

both so units is in millions show both

so we can say net value is in millions

and that is much better option if you

wanted to try out because what happens

in case you are using this Auto it is

always good that it shows you you know

if it is showing the values in K and

millions that's a good idea to have now

Legends are off right now but when we

use Legends we can play around with

small multiple again when we use small

multiple we'll use now grid lines is

something it is showing that you know we

have the horizontal grid line but

because of the color you might not be

able to see so let me make make it a

little bit darker now you can see the

horizontal grid now they are dotted you

can make them solid or you can make them

dashed what you want width you can

increase or decrease depending on the

require so this is you know a horizontal

grid

now Zoom slider is something uh which is

really important especially when you

have large number of rows or huge data

then it will help now let's invert the

AIS before we understand

that so both we bought on the same place

it's not that it's not going to work

with that but

by we usually have a habit of seeing the

things in a particular Manner and it is

helpful in that so on the y axis as you

can see there is a scrawler

and if I bring it down it is bringing in

the Valu so especially if you have huge

number of data points and some of the

data points you are not able to see the

values this can help now slider can have

a label slider label so once you on the

slider label you have a label on this

side so one is fixed label and one is

changing label now the one label is

changing and one is fixed so that is the

advantage slider tool tip so once you

scroll down now it will have a tool tip

also how it is moving down so these are

few things you can play around with the

slider again it depends on what kind of

use case you have now columns we are

seeing multiple categories but instead

of color still we are able to see FX now

always instead of having Legend always

try to have the

AIS multiple AES now you will ask now

even if if I expand I I see all of them

in the same color isn't it when I expand

you see all the categories or brand in

the same color but when I was using

Legend they come in multiple color so if

this category is in the legend you will

see them into multiple colors so I can

have color for category one Category 2

category three but I can't you switch

this color with my own choice of color

manually I can switch but I can't keep

it controlled means the movement you

doing some kind of filtering or there

are additional values this category one

may get a different color or category

two may get a different color or based

on the other operation it may change but

if you keep it here because this

conditional formatting is enabled and

also you can see it is little bit better

where it occupies the space and we will

be able to use conditional formatting to

color that so once we learn the

conditional formatting we'll color them

in different one and you'll find this is

a better option than using Legend

wherever you can avoid the Legend So use

multiple axis expanded concatenate label

of whenever you can avoid the legend we

will understand that little bit more

border as you can see the borders if you

have have the border for

the I change the Border color a little

bit so that we understand where the

color coming in so you can see the bars

of borders and you can have transparency

for the borders there are few features

which has been very recently added and

one of the feature is basically this

transparency so and I waited for the

border to come because when I make this

transparency is 100% you can see that

there is nothing visible and now if I go

ahead and check this match the column

color

it gives the matching color okay the

color was actually green it gives me

matching color but that is actually

transparent and what I can do is I can

make it also 100% transparent so right

now there are bars but they are not

visible see I can see the tool tip

because of the bar but I don't see now

because of that there are multiple

things you can create so moment I think

I use the transparency a little bit I

will be able to see the bar similarly

for this one I can use a little bit of

transparency to give that transparency

kind of effect now the inner bar is

little bit transparent and the border

is border is not at all transparent

gives a different kind of look now both

are completely not transparent they look

into the this one so these kind of

combinations of having the

transparency and having this border

match color or border of its own color

can give you this combination you can

hide it so purpose of transparency we

can decide based on the what we are

going to do but anyway the transparency

if you look at it and but let's do one

thing let's call it as uh bar

one let's duplicate this page right

click and duplicate because this is a

newly released features and let's have a

look at it so now you can able to see in

a much better manner how does uh this

behave

so this transparency and Border um you

can see the advantage of those things

here now similarly you have the layout

now in the layout when you went here the

reverse order sought by value and

spacing between the category now spacing

between the categories is something if

you increase that as you can see is

increasing and so max width has one play

with us Max width was there uh which was

actually allowing you to do something

now again this is the second one where

space between the categories is allowing

you you know have smaller

bars now this reverse order and sort by

value is something which is not

applicable on this this is actually for

stagged bar chart and this is really

good property when I come to the stagged

bar chart I'll explain you so let me

increase a little bit width because

that's too

small and also I'm going to make this

border as none because I want the bar to

take the WID but I'm telling you with

bother it was looking much better I can

make it as a one pixel

okay now let's come down now data label

again something got added in December

data label is there for a few months now

but in December we have some enhancement

inside the data label so first of all

the position is horizontal I can make it

vertical so now this is one thing

overflow text I allow it means if even

if there is a chances we need to

overflow the text means overflow of text

means if it is not sufficiently coming

let's say if I do the position as right

now the position is AO I say inside and

now bar is very small See This Bar is

very small then it is Overflow now if I

switch off the Overflow if I highlight

here you can see the values are not

appearing here because right now what I

have done here is I have switch off the

Overflow text but if I enable this

overflow text you will be able to see

this value so this is the advantage of

overflow but keep it auto that it takes

some place right now it is outside but

if you want there are need like I really

want it outside only and optimize label

display is another thing where you know

you can have if you check that you have

the maximum width which you wanted to

give you can control that now new thing

which is now inside the data label which

allows me to now show

the title now what is this title the

title is basically the net and where the

title should come same as series name or

custom I want to give some other title

then I can add a title and You by adding

this title maybe I want to add the

category as a title let's let me drag

the category as a title

showing first category let me do one

thing let me go ahead go to x-axis and

completely disable

ex okay now I have a category and value

and you will say this is looking too

busy and let me only make it as a

category

visual so now what's happening there's a

category and there's a

value

so now let's go to the position we can

see

now so now we only I removed the brand

now only we have a category and the

value first category now first category

or last category doesn't matter because

because of the row context going to come

that we have transparencies means we can

make it little bit transparent we have

the color we can choose a color means I

can have a different color for the

category and the different this one so

now what is happening there is nothing

written here on the x-axis everything is

written there and now position is

something which we can decide where you

know the opt we can say okay inside and

or we can say inside base now everything

is written here inside base and because

I have chosen a color black that's why

it is coming so now we are getting title

along with this one

furthermore when you go down this is the

actual value the net value which is

getting displayed in the label what all

I wanted to play around with that and if

I go down here we have the display unit

which I can control I can say none so it

start showing the value now I even don't

need the y- axis actually

now I can go ahead and completely switch

off my ixis because I have the values

display unit decimal place Auto Show

blank as zero or show blank as hyphen

like if there is a blank value I can say

here show as hyphen which is previously

not possible now these are the

enhancement which has came recently and

some of them came as recent as December

now detail label is something which came

very recently in December 20 23 now I

can add one more label so I'm already

using category and net with that

and let me bring in Gross value also

here in this one so now I'm seeing gross

along with

that and then I can decide the font I

can decide the color you say okay let's

differentiate it with a different little

bit different color maybe this is my

gross transparency and formatting is

none decimal place Auto we want to give

a background to this switch on the

background and then we can decide what

one want the color and what is the

transparency we want

let's go to the layout

multi-line single line when I go to the

single line what I can do here is let I

don't want details to be there let me

switch off the detail now look it's

looking

much cleaner approach to have this and

and definitely we can play around with

the colors so now what is happening this

is something you would have wanted in

the past that you have the

categories and their label and I'm going

to convert this into all to a different

visual now let me go up and we we we

were playing around with the colors if

you remember let me create the

transparency now this is only Inside the

Box me switch off the

borders I'm only displaying the

values let me bring in the brand

back brand is low

okay now here in the label we can't

direct two we can't direct to otherwise

we could have done the brand but in this

case now what we can have here

is we can go ahead and enable

our

values so I have done few adjustment and

you can see the values now you may white

like to have you you know both brand and

category then how would you get that

brand and category values to you might

have that question in your mind like you

know when I'm adding this U title giving

me first category I'll tell you a very

simple mejor so I'll go to the item

Dimension I click on it and I create a

major and this major is going to work

when you have both of them together okay

so we'll call it brand at

label and this is nothing but Max of

item brand if you remember we were

taking first category item

brand then we say m per to give us space

m% space m per Max of item category what

would happen because item and category

are already in the AIS actually we don't

want to display them and I let me give

additional space Also here and maybe I

can give a hyph because I know I'm going

to display the value now I can instead

of this one I can bring in this

one what kind of label I created brand

category label Max of item brand and Max

of item category you will see how will

it work see item when the brand one is

in the my context brand one can only be

the maximum value and category one is in

the this row context so category one can

also be the maximum value in this manner

you can get these values and now you can

play around all these values and

everything now it can create all

together a different kind of visual

where you are only displaying the

visuals like values like this so these

are all the experiment which you can do

or I can reduce the little bit of

transparency to see these values and I

can play around with so lot of

combinations are possible just because

of this properties of transparency and

the data label customization which has

been enhanced over last few months so

you have lot of flexibility how you want

to display your bar visual stagged

visual wherever this is applicable now

plot and area background if you want to

image in the background then you can use

it then again you can decide the image

fit and transparency reference line is

something really important now what

happens sometime is basically you want

to plot a reference

line basically a line which is going to

give you a reference so I can add a line

now it asks me to choose a line so right

now I would I can choose a constant line

or I can simply choose an average line

so I prefer to choose an average line as

you can see this is my average across

all the values based on what net because

right now I'm only using using net now

the line properties you can change color

let me make it

black and transparency is transparency

0% so that is visible instead of Dash

let me make it solid position in front

or behind sometime you want it behind so

that it does not cross the bar from the

top

now focus on this location you are able

to see that white color iPhone above it

now I'll go and move it in front and now

you will observe

that that when it is in front you will

not be able to see that quite

complete what I've have done is I have

reset my data labels to default by using

the default reset to default and now so

that I can show you the reference line

and uh because there are too many

overlapping labels it was not able to

show and the one thing which I enabled

is now I've enabled the data label now

it is showing where should I show left

or right I can decide the position

whether I should show it here or here I

can decide the

position above or below under or below

again

positioning a style name or both data

value name or both I both average line

value display unit I can set to none and

decimal places auto before I take the

next step let me do one thing let me uh

remove some of the features which are

not required right now let me rename

this page to Bar two let me now explore

error

bars now error bar is on the series is

net right now error bar enabled by field

or by percentage so I used by percentage

and upper and lower bound I can set now

bars on or off I can use but definitely

I want the bars I can set the bar color

I can increase the width it little bit

uh marker shape I can

decide marker size size I can decide

border and color I can decide error

labels if I want I can enable the error

labels so it will show me how much error

label it is label from absolute or

relative numeric position or relative

percentage relative numeric we can do or

we can try relative

percentage and then finally we have a

tool tip right now which is on the tool

tip here what we are talking about is

the error bar tool tip if you switch it

off it will not show the error bar

information but this is not the overall

tool tip so basically if you go here now

it is showing the error Bar upper and

lower bound if you switch it off it will

not show it but this is only related to

the error bar the it is not the overall

tool tip the overall tool tip is

available under the property

pin now I'll switch off the error

bars so now we are done with our

properties now we can go to the generic

properties header icon same as other

visuals tool tip we right now able to

see the tool tip we can switch it off

there would be no tool

tip alternative text and alternative

options responsive and there is so much

you have for the clustered bar and same

can also be applied for the bar

visual there are multiple options

possible to display this chart using you

know xais y AIS Legends a small multiple

you can also add additional item on the

tool tip if you want let's say I want to

add gross I want to add discount for

that the tool tip need to be enabled so

if the tool tip is off you will not be

able to see but once you enable it you

will be able to see the tool tip now the

next thing what we wanted to do is we

would like to

explore few more Visual and then we

would like to come back to the small

multiple so let's try to create a

stagged bar visual now for that again

I'm adding a new page let me call it as

stagged we have two kind of stagged bar

visual one is known as stag bar chart

second one is known as stack column

chart I'll start with the stack column

chart and then later on I'll show you by

changing it to the bar chart properties

would always remain same now the stagged

bar chart the it will become a stagged

only when you use the legend before

using Legend it is going to be acting as

a single bar now once we use the legend

uh there is no option for having

conditional formatting um so as of now

when I'm recording this video there's no

option of doing a conditional formatting

and forcing is even by using alter rate

now in few visuals we will see once we

Deep dive into the conditional

formatting we will see that there are

alternatives where we can get little bit

of conditional formatting in some visual

but this visual is where we will not get

it means you can manually change the bar

color but not conditionally me you can't

have a major which can change your color

based on let's say this category should

look always red so that kind of stuff

you'll not be able to do so let's start

with it and there are a few new feature

which came in December 2023 and we'll

expl explore that and they are the

feature you were looking for it and I'll

tell you the advantage of some of those

so we'll start with brand which is on we

are going to put on the xaxis and then

we can have the y axis where we can have

value and I'm going to take net for that

and then we can have the category on the

legend this constitute

our te chart now while rest of the

property like size title xxs will remain

same and this concatenate label we have

seen in the bar visual how to use that

means

uh when you have more than one thing on

x-axis you can use it title layout Y

axis all these properties are going to

remain same you have the values of

display title Legends is compulsory for

you now because we the Legends are

compulsory in this one so let's

understand the legend positioning so

right now there are legends are on the

top left here this position we are

having here we can say it is top Center

they have changed the position to the

center top Center position now we can

move it around with let's say top

right and the one which I wanted to show

is center right comes here now depending

on the need we can place it but I think

as of now

either bottom center or top Center is a

better choice for us because we have

7even eight values and we would like the

width to be given now small multiples is

something which we are going to play

around little bit later grid lines if

you want to show the grid lines you can

have the grid lines on uh right now I

can the only thing I can do is I can

increase the grid Lines by a little bit

width and I can give them different

color so it's visible so I can have the

grid lines a zoom slider I already

explained you if you enable it you will

be able to zoom on the

excess so what I want to play around is

in the columns and in the columns as

usual the series is has to be um as

because it's um stacked bar chart using

Legend So individually you can change

the color of the series there is no FX

button right now you can use but there

are a few new feature came in here also

now one is transparency I can increase

the transparency here now I can have a

border I I kept I'll keep really thin

border here match the color I'll use

here uh transparency of the Border I'll

not keep very high let let it be there

and withd I would like to keep little

bit finer width only let me have two

pixels so that you can observe it now

before I explain you this reverse order

and sought by I'll tell you what was the

disadvantage previously what we have and

what it actually addressed here before

that let me show you spacing between the

categories so as you can see the width

of the bar is getting changed when I'm

doing that and the spacing between the

series now now this is something really

important it only happened between the

Legends so as you can see the moment I'm

increasing it is changing the width

between the

serieses so right now it is 3 pixel Max

I can have 5 pixel and then series

explosion note down what is happening

right now look at the

chart this is my area and what

happens it actually removes your y-axis

and allow it to go beyond the values

what it had now if you do such kind of

stuff definitely the labels is only

going to be the saor and yes powerbi has

enounced the label also again in

December

we the labels have been in us but right

now what I'm going to do is I'm going to

decrease the space between the series

I'll keep it minimal I'll also remove

the series

explosion now let me explain you what

this reverse order and sort by order

let's first understand what kind of

sorting we have in the dots three dots

so I made the adj just little chart so

if you go on the sort AIS you can either

sort on brand on N it's already sorted

on net I can maximum do is s on brand

now I sorted it on brand and then

internally it is sorted on category but

what you are asking for long is this

sorting you also want it based on the

values so this is the Sorting option you

have now they are sorted on values you

can see this is smaller this is bigger

this is smaller this is this is smaller

bigger bigger biger now if I say reverse

order the bigger would be down and the

smaller would be

up I'll further go down and what I'll do

is I'll go and say sort XIs on

net so now this is what you always

wanted from powerbi and now after

December 2023 it has been enabled the

value this value is the greatest value

largest

value so this is the largest value and

the values are again s descending inside

the stagged bar visual data label again

going to play a role because data label

we have seen in the bar how new

enhancement is going to help us out but

the moment I enabled you get this one

part of it now horizontal or vertical

I'll can make it vertical here overflow

text I can allow so that I can have more

I can add the title so I'll add the

categories here and overflow text is

helping me out here I can have series

name or custom if I want to have a label

let me keep it as series name now next

is value which I would like to keep net

though I have an option to change that

also I can go and make a gross value to

appear here

but I don't want that isn't it or let me

show you some percentage value let's say

margin percentage I'm showing a margin

percentage here and the formatting is

going to play the role so I'm not going

to say none so that I see the correct

value okay because otherwise it will

take the format of the original major so

let me go back to the net

value and I'll say Auto format because

otherwise the too much data here now

decimal place is Auto Now details is

something where I can add and this would

be especially helpful for those of you

want to like to show the percentage of

subtotal

here now right now you don't know how to

create that percentage of subtotal or

percentage of total I'm going to give

you a major and and we're going to

achieve that because the moment I enable

it it allows me to have that

gross and I can see that another measure

but I I don't need that measure I

actually want the percentage of

sub total now percentage of sub tootal

is something which I have not taught you

till now but what I'm going to do is I'm

going to give you a quick major here and

I'll tell you how to create that major

later so let me click on the majors

which is Drive majors and on that top of

that I'll click measure and create a

measure here which is percent

of brand what is my percentage of brand

is

divide net and when I want to divide the

net I want to calculate the net again

and this I'm going to explain you later

when we will show you how to create the

measur I want to calculate the net again

but this time when I'm calculating the

net I don't want to consider the filter

of category I want to consider the

filter of brand but I don't want to

consider so there is something known as

remove filters item category I'm saying

the remove the filter of the category so

what would happen while the net is for

that brand category

the denominator would not have the

category filter now this is a percentage

column so I have to mark it as a

percentage

also now I got a measure which is

percentage of brand and let me place

that and I have to go ahead and change

its data type as none and as you can see

this is 78% this is 16% now font is

something which we have to really play

around so and it's not only the one font

which I have to do I I'll make it

smaller for all of

them let me make it smaller for title

also so now you can

see uh that uh we have all these and now

you have the transparency and all those

play around with everything show blank

value as

Hyun then colors of each of these you

can

control if you want a background you

will have a background also and

background transparency you can decide

how much transp you want but the moment

you put background it because it take

additional space so some of the values

may go away and definitely you need to

make sure that um overflow is there so

that whatever maximum it can accumulate

it can accumulate and now I can make it

horizontal also sometime it may actually

look now depend if I don't want to use

title series name may be horizontal

looks much better so I think in this

case if I don't want to have those

titles and definitely because category I

already have a label I know which

category it is so in this manner I can

have it now the next thing which is

which I go down

here the layout which is multi-line I

can have a single line now I'll tell you

where you need single line so let me

duplicate this page and tell you where

you'll need it so let me duplicate and

let me call it

tagged

one and let me click on the visual and

make

it tagged bar now here if I

go I go down to the labels and this is

the place where I need it as single

line instead of multi-line I'll make it

a single line there is definitely

there's a difference which is very less

which you can adjust by giving different

colors or making it bold or italic so it

shows the differentiation between them

but this is something so the

sorting and the absolute value as well

as the percentage value is something

which was missing

altoe and which has been enabled in the

latest version of powerbi which is

December 2023 on which I'm recording and

now you can see how much difference it

creates now this visual is lock looking

all together different Visual and those

of you who has watched my video on

stagged bar in the past in the beginner

series those of you who has watched it

in the last here's full video go ahead

and compare that how much

differentiation it is created

so these are the property of the stagged

bar which we have played around so I'm

coming back to the first one again let

me click on it and let's see if we want

to explore some other properties also so

total labels is something again we want

to switch it on now total label is

basically the total which is and now we

have two more kind of stacked bar which

is 100% in the 100% it doesn't matter

okay the total only matters in this one

because how much is this total and how

much I'm percentage so 1.1 million is my

total and of that 1.1 million I am

around 68 million which is around 62

percentage and then again there are few

properties like you would like to have

you know color or a

background I switched on the background

then you can have a background color and

transparency right now it is auto

display you can say none if you want to

show the complete value or

thousands and split positive and

negative this one more option has been

given here so these are various

formatting options which can make it U

you know really look amazing and then we

have the if want image then we can have

plot background area and again you can

add reference lines plus button

reference line the only reference line

option we have in the stack bar is a

constant line so you can add a constant

line you can give a value now based on

the fil filtering the value will change

so better you use this FX button and

give a

major but right now just for our

understanding purpose I will give

it let's say

500,000 I got a line at 500,000 and I

can give a color and all those so

various reference lines are available

and we can use those now depending on

the visual these reference line keep on

changing those who are on the last

year's version those who have not opted

for these new changes there used to be a

separate section analytical pain and

inside that these options would be there

now these has been merged analytical

pain options have been merged inside the

visual properties only and then you have

the generic properties as usual they are

there as there are no differences I

would just leave them as is uh there is

nothing specific with the visual other

than you know you can switch in on or

switch off the tool tipe but a beautiful

tagged chart Visual and even the cluster

bar visual can be created ated with the

latest version of powerbi you have

learned about this stagged bar Visual

and it's 100% stagged bar visual there

is one more way these bar visuals can be

created so let me tell you so what we

can do is basically let's start with a

that column bar let me bring in brand

here on the

x-axis now what I can do here is and

what I said that you know staged is not

an staged unless you use Legend but

there is another possibility and what

that possibility is I can bring in

net as one of the major and I can bring

in margin so what is my net and margin

is my gross so this is basically my

gross and in this manner also I can

create a tagged bar

visual now definitely I can enable the

data label where I can get the values

and now if you have your margin

percentage and uh the net percentage

that could be another way to add few

more labels here but a stagged bar

visual can be created on two majors also

so if you don't want to use Legend

then you can create it on multiple

measures so either you can have multiple

measures or you can have Legend the

thing to remember here also is when you

use multiple measure also there is no

conditional formatting possible so in

case of staged you will not be able to

do the conditional formatting now one

more thing which we can do here is if

you want to make it 100% tagged column

chart you go here and it will start

showing you the percentage so these are

actually the percentage how much of the

gross the net is and how much the margin

is so so how much percentage the margin

is out of my gross and how much is net

so there are two options you can create

a stack B visual One is using the legend

and one is using multiple measur now I

can have more than one measure also so I

can actually can bring in cogs when I

bring in cogs basically net doesn't have

a value in that case I should have cost

discount and margin maybe these three

will contribute to

that in this manner I can bring in my

100% column stagged bar visual or tagged

column bar visual or tagged bar visual

or 100%

stagged bar Vis do so in this manner I

can have multiple such combinations with

more than one major also we would also

like to explore the 100% staged bar

visual so let me add a new page and let

me say 100p tag now again there would be

two versions one is basically the 100%

stack bar chart and 100% stack column

chart bar as well as column let me use

the

column and on the x-axis my favorite

brand on the y axis net and definitely

no stack is completed without a legend

need to add a legend and let me add as

category now rest of the things are same

but let's just quickly have a look at

xaxis do we have something additional no

Y axis do we have something additional

no Legend as usual the positions uh

small multiples we are not exploring

right now grid lines column let's comes

to the column and in the column we have

all the serieses where we can choose the

color border if you want to switch in on

the borders then we have the

layout and again this layout would be

more suitable we want it to have s by

values and reverse order we want the

highest value at the bottom and the

lowest value at the top space between

the

categories uh and space between the

series is something we are more

interested in it looks much

more flexible and maybe a little bit of

transparency in the color let's go down

to the data label again let's see what

all we have now so first thing is

series uh horizontal or vertical here we

can have it vertical uh position is auto

I prefer that overflow text let's allow

it so we can have I think horizontal

would be better here isn't it we could

get a value I was more worried about

this value which will go away in the

vertical horizontal is much better

option here I want to add a title and I

while I can showcase you what happens

when I add the title but this something

I'm not interested in as long as I have

the legend label but yeah value now here

it is always already a percentage so I

can add the

net now once I add the net it is

something which is uh not looking great

so let me go ahead and choose something

here I remove the decimal places and let

me make it a little bit smaller so now I

can see the net value here so net value

and how much percentage it is and what

is happening here seems like detail and

this value are changing automatically

along together they should have been

separate but seems like some issue and I

can make it tyun when it is not

zero let's give a little bit of

background so now what is happening both

the visuals the 100% stacked bar visual

as well as the stack visual can show you

percentage as well as the value now it's

your choice which one you wanted to use

you want to choose the 100% stack bar

visual or you want to choose the

normal bar Visual and then want to show

percentage I told you how to get a

measure for that which we will learn

when we go to the percentage of total

later and then multi-line or single line

have single line but if you make it

single line then make it vertical that's

look much better but it's going to take

a lot of space so I'm going to make it

horizontal and multi-line that is much

better in this

one now if we duplicate

this on this and we change it to

100% tag bar chart there we can go ahead

and make this data label out as instead

of multi-line we can make it single line

now it looks better

here plot area and background same thing

again reference line same thing we want

to add then we have only one option

constant line we can add constant line

if you want a value let's say 0.5 50% is

the one where I wanted the value to be

appearing and in this manner we can 100%

stack bar visual again the uses of the

stack bar visual will depend on your us

whether you need 100% stacked bar visual

or simple stacked bar now going to

create the pi visual so let me add

another page and in this page uh from

the build visual I'm going to add the P

Visual and we have a very similar visual

donut visual also so at the end I'll

just show you the donut visual so let me

click on the pi visual now when you have

the pi visual the options you have is

the legend value details and Tool tip a

pi visual can be created with a set of

Majors or Legend plus major so I'll tell

you first how to create a pi visual only

with measures this is something which

you might need I'll create with the

cogs

discount and

margin

okay the cost of goods sold discount and

margin I've have taken three Majors so

basically what I can do is I can take

net discount and

margin in this manner I can create a p

visual which can tell me how much each

of these things are getting contributed

and you are getting percentage so only

with the help of major I can create this

is one way of creating a p visual let me

move it aside let me add another P

visual now we can have another Pi visual

which basically I'm going to use Legend

This Time so let me use Cate as a legend

and ideally speaking because there's no

scrolling you can have in the pi visual

you should use only Pi to 10 categories

Max 15 categories in the pi visual more

than that it's overloading of Pi so I

drag the category and now I can drag a

majure now values you should avoid using

percentage column in this one because it

is further going to calculate percentage

of total of that so that's not a great

idea to

have so Pi visual has been created with

Legend uh can we have more than one

Legend so let me also drag brand on top

of it and as soon as I add brand the one

is the drill down structure has came now

I can go to the next level it is brand

wise come up I can expand both brand and

category would be available here so this

is one manner second is this brand

instead of having it in the legend I can

have the brand in the details I can

click on add data instead of dragging

and dropping

it and I can have it here now in this

case you can see they are not getting uh

different colors there is a distribution

of brand is coming inside the same color

of the category in this manner also you

can create it so this is one way and

let's keep them side by side so that you

can differentiate so this is one way

where and I'm where you have it and let

me duplicate it so and this is the

second way where we actually have the

brand as the second legent and we expand

it and you have this and you expand it

so these are the two meths here

everything is going to get different

color and here we have the same color in

which the brand split is there and when

you use the tool tip you'll be able to

see now let's play with the label now so

if you see by by default the detail

label is on and if you see the detail

label right now it is showing data value

and percentage this is same true for

here but if you go here you can say all

the labels and here you will be able to

get the brand name also so which brand

is there so within the category which

brand is there now

a same way if you go here and if you

enable all labels then you will also get

the the name major name and the value

and the

percentage now we'll keep the simple

visual let's me create one more copy and

here let

me remove the brand here and as you can

see we can get category the value and

the percentage value and we have the

various options like only data value

only percentage of total value or only

category level or all the details and

then right now it is outside you can say

inside and now everything can come

inside so you can always use prefer

inside or prefer outside so you can say

prefer inside or you can say prefer

outside so it will try to adjust some of

the things to get more values now this

is the detail label and inside the

values again you have the font you have

the color which you want to use

background is auto if you want on or off

you can say background is

on then display units is auto you can

say use none now this is for the value

so basic Bally then you have the value

decimal places because if the value is

an auto format about how many decimal

places it need to have then percentage

decimal place value also you can control

now it is one decimal it is two decimal

so all those you can control now

depending on the space the label may

come little bit less or more and then

dot dot dot might start coming then

there is something which is also known

as rotation now rotation is basically if

you see right now it's starting from

this position let me highlight that for

you right now it is starting from this

position now if I do the rotation here

here the position starting position is

changing now you can see that it is

starting from here

now same way I can completely rotate it

and if I rotate it 360 it will come at

the same place so this SK can be helpful

from where you are starting now let's

look at the other properties uh we

similarly we have a size and this

horizontal position property padding is

something how much padding we have in

the space which is available inside the

chart background on or off we can switch

it on and off or if you need background

we can change the color or we can change

the transparency if we have the color we

can increase or decrease the

transparency based on that is visual

border if you want a border now if I

come out none of them has border only

this one has a

border Shadow if you need Title the

title is already there we can have a

title and then we can have a subtitle

then divider and spacing as usual same

as other visual Legends again we can

have the position top right top left and

Center depending on the place you have

you can adjust it because right now I

created a little bit rectangular so I do

have a position in the center left or

center right that I can use then the

title again the title is right now

category you can change it to whatever

you want or or you can disable the title

here then slices for each slices you

have the color again the P visual use

Legend So in the slices you have the

color which you can choose you can

manually go ahead and change it uh

conditional formatting is not supported

but I will tell you later that you know

there is a work around to support

initial formatting in pi visual now

detailed labels we only option we have

is the label is detailed label and we

have certain set of options which we can

use then value and percentage formatting

we have done so this is py visual for

you so uh you can create it with Majors

you can create with Majors Legends

multiple Legends Legends and details all

those thing you can try out and finally

you can also have a donut instead of

this one so you can have the donut

instead of having the pi Visual and the

properties are almost similar so we have

title Legends inside that we have

options slices detail label we can have

rotation now sometime what we do we keep

this as a transparent and behind that we

keep a value in a card Visual and we

start showing that value so it start

showing like there is a value in the

middle that we can do and if you want to

add something additional on the tool tip

let's say margin percentage you can add

it and you will be able to

see let's add margin percentage we have

added margin margin percentage I'm

adding so you can have n number of such

uh things on the tool tip which you want

and then as usual the generic properties

you can switch off the tool tip and it

will not show the tool

tip let's experiment with a new visual

the visual which I want to experiment is

the three map visual so I'm going to add

a new page and let me rename it as

threee map some of the pages I'm

renaming even after closing down the

video for that particular visual so you

might find that some of the pages has

been

renamed so I click on tree map now tree

map is kind of a horizontal P the only

thing is it doesn't show you the

percentage so we have a category but

unlike P we don't have a legend concept

here we have the concept of category

details and values so first let's start

with category so we can say brand is my

category and net is my

value and then we can enable the data

labels so it starts showing the values

if you go down in the data labels it is

showing what values it's showing so

value display is Auto and you can see

the values are out here can see these

values you can not it down here now and

make it none so that you can see it in

the default format similarly you can

play around with the other properties

like font face bold italic underlying

Etc to make the labels appear little bit

differently now let's say in case I

wanted to have more than one level I can

go ahead and add category also and then

we have that option like next level only

on category or we can expand it so we

have both brand and category and in this

case you will get different different

colors now going going to the color you

have option like FX here so at least so

whenever you are using the categories

you can color it means you have the

single category uh then you can have the

brand colors using using the conditional

formatting so you can control on that

but definitely when I'm going to use

detail will I get that option or not so

let me remove category from here and let

me add category on the

details so once I add the category on

the details now you can see the FX

option is no more available for you to

do the conditional formatting and the

brand itself is cut down into multiple

categories and I'm getting the option

for categories and the values now here

in this place because I have now place

where you know a lot of values are there

so it's better to have a you know Auto

display so that you know the display

becomes smaller or maybe we can reduce

the font also and category labels are

also there these are the category labels

and we can reduce the font of the

category label also so the uh category

as well as detail label will become a

little bit smaller if we use the

category label here that's controlled by

here and then we can choose the color or

we can leave it whatever it is so these

are the various option again if you want

to have additional information on tool

tip you can add it on the tool

tip then we have size title Legends as

usual so Legends are off but you can add

the Legends if like Legend is nothing

but your category display so here you

are seeing that but definitely the

position seems to be very important here

this not conveying much of the message

so left center right is place where I

can put it it taking little space but at

least I'm able to see all the labels so

legend legend have a title here

if you want to switch off the title you

can switch it off there's no title here

now then we have data label which we

already explained and the value label as

well as the category label which we have

already explained so this is our tree

map visual let's now explore the line

visual I'm adding a new page and let me

rename it as

line so line visual is given here in the

build Visual and it is also available

here on the top insert in the homepage

from any of the place we can use it CLI

click on the line visual it will give

you a line visual let me make it a

little bit

larger we can have x-axis y AIS and

secondary y-axis now we have not used

the combo visual where we can have

secondary yaxis but line visual has been

enhanced in the past to have secondary

yis but here now there are limitations

like when you can use secondary yaxis

but so when you have multiple measure

you might not be able to use it when you

have Legend you might not be able to use

it so we have to explore that out first

start with very simple visual now unlike

some of the tools which doesn't allow

you align the non-time series visuals

means it's always need to be a Time

series kind of a visual in power B

there's no limitation in powerb I can

create aine chart just like a bar chart

so let's say I can have brand on my

x-axis and I can bring in net on the Y

AIS and I can have a line visual which

is very simple and again if I need more

than one line I can have that but line

visual is definitely more suited for

Trend so let's bring in date for that

I'm removing that and from the sales

table I'm bringing in date now as you

can see right now date is showing an

hierarchy and this is what we call Auto

time intelligence because of the auto

time intelligence thing showing the

hierarchy so there was an option in the

starting if you remember was Auto time

intelligence which we have not disabled

if you disable that that will not come

also right now we have not created a

date table but when I going to create a

date table and I'm going to join these

with date table if they are joining with

a table which is having a date this

column again going to join with a key

column then it will lose the date

hierarchy

so in case you wanted to continue to use

date hierarchy you can duplicate if this

column you're planning to join so let me

bring in that into the x-axis and as you

can see it is showing me a date

hierarchy now if I want to keep date

hierarchy it's fine I I will see these

options like you know drill up and drill

down so it can start with ear and then I

can you know further go down by press

drill

down by going like this or and drill

up or I have option to

expand and finally at Day level this is

what I can do or I can click on this

Arrow instead of date hierarchy I can

use simply sve date when I use the sve

date you will see you are still seeing

the same value but now you don't have a

drill up or drill down option so that

option is not available with you you are

getting is a continuous visual now what

is this continuous visual now this

continuous visual is possible both in

case of bar as well as line now this

continuous access is coming in x-axis we

have a type continuous and categoric now

when you have a date or you have a

number you can get this option

categorical and continuous access also

get this minimum maximum range in terms

of dates also which we have seen in the

y axis in terms of value we have the

minimum maximum range in terms of the

date now I can make it categorical and

now you can see all the dates and now we

have to make the access a little bit

bigger or we can change the format of

the date so right now the format of the

date is like such a big format I can

make it as a short date now I can see

each and every date and now because

visual is too big powerb is

automatically giving me scrolling it

can't fit in you remember when it was

continuous it do try to fit it into the

single page I can make it continuous and

categoric now the option of continuous

categorical is limited to date and the

numbers right now you're saying this is

coming in the ascending order but you

can use this invert AIS it will actually

start it in ascending order actually

when you have the continuous AIS you

don't have an option option to sort it

on the using the three dots so you can

use this invert access option now you

can go to the values inside the values

the values are right now on on the

x-axis if you want to hide those xaxis

value you can use this now again the

display is Auto and then you have a

title you want to remove the x-axis

title now you don't see any sales date

here on the

bottom now there's a sales date

similarly for y axis you have minimum

maximum range logarithmic axis if you

need invert range if you want to invert

the range on the top and 70k this case

at the bottom the direction has

changed let me invert it again again the

values you want to show the values or

not you can switch off the X's you can

pay attention to the Y axis there's no

values now again want to display unit

and everything title again we have the Y

AIS title we can disable the title

secondary yaxis this is important now

let's see we have two measures does it

allow us the third measure on the

secondary Y axis I try to drag the

discount on the secondary axis

and as you can see we have the discount

on the secondary y-axis but when we have

a legend let's say I try to bring in

category now I can't bring category on

the legend I remove the secondary yaxis

and I try to bring category on the

legend I can't bring it I can only have

the category as a legend when I only

have the one major let me try the

category along with the one major I have

the now categories at the legend but can

I have a secondary y-axis when I'm using

Legend so let me try to bring in Gross

on the secondary axis I can't so the cas

is when you are using a category you

can't use the line on the secondary

yaxis while if you're using a combo

visual like clustered bar line visual or

cluster stack bar visual you would be

allowed a line in the secondary yaxis

along with Legend but that's not allowed

in the line visual so that's the

limitation but yes if you have multiple

measures uh you can still have one of

them on the secondary Y axis let's bring

in multiple measures and try to see what

all secondary yaxis has to offer to us

and I'm bringing in cogs on the

secondary y axis and in case it doesn't

show you the secondary ya axis sometime

it happen that it might not show you so

what you can do here is basically enable

the values of the secondary yaxis so you

I have added the secondary yaxis so you

will be able to show usually what

happens is we columns like margin

percentage on the secondary Y axis which

have all together different range so

they create a different meaning now this

could be a really complex chart if we do

those things things we should try to

keep them as simple as possible so I

have removed one of them now again

because this line AIS is continuous you

have a lot of information out here then

we have the Legends as I've shown you

you can either use Legends or secondary

ya Axis or multiple majors and then

small multiples we'll check it later now

in the Legends when you are showing uh

the Legends can also be for the major

display it's not only the legend we can

check their change their position so

right I moved them into the

center then the text font you can change

the title you can switch it on and

switch it off like add Legend title I

can say it's

net by

date small multiples options are not

enabled because we are not using small

multiples grid lines in case we wanted

to have grid lines can increase the

width of the grid lines as you can see

now I think we need to use little bit

darker color to make them visible

we can have the vertical grid lines if

we need again we need to have color

darker color so we can have vertical

grid lines also

here Zoom slider to zoom your xaxis and

y axis now these are both continuous

axis so in both the axes you can have

the zoom slider and as you go down you

will be able to see

the dates

here so this is the advantage of Zoom

slider especially in the continuous AIS

you will be able to see the exactly

going down to the drill down to the

level and as we have already seen on the

y-axis you actually goad and see the

values on the y- axis by going

down now secondary Y axis also if you

need so Zoom slider I can have on the

secondary yaxis also slicer label and

Tool tip is few things which you can

enable and based on that

it's as you can see now there are two

set of information one which I initially

had and one which is is changing

over so all these things you can use I

going to disable the zoom slider as of

now now for each lines you can have you

know what color you want and everything

again conditional formatting is not

supported but uh uh if you go to the

color you will see the margin and net

you can have the colors even if you use

the one major like right now I'm only

using one major on Y axis still there is

no conditional formatting enable but

instead of conditional formatting you

have a color dot which you can get and

that you can get when you come back from

the bar visual by doing the conditional

formatting on bar visual which we'll see

later now there is something really

really interesting you can have the

markers you can switch on the markers

here and you will start seeing markers

marker properties have been changed and

once we are done with the line and the

scatter visual I will showcase you those

now you can play around with the size of

the marker and you know the shape of the

marker but there are more things which

you can do here is basically what you

can do is you can go to your line style

and here like right now the line style

because there's too much of data if I

choose the line change the line style

linear or smooth or stabbed stab

actually you will not be able to

actually see what means stab layout but

what you can do here is you can decrease

that width and ultimately you can

actually make it zero it will become

like a DOT chart now what you can do is

instead of doing it for both the series

what you can do here is you can go to

let's say margin and margin I have a

line and and I don't have a line for

let's say net so there's no line for the

net but there is a line for margin in

this manner you can play around now you

can make it completely dot visual or you

can have a DOT and especially like if

the majors are very nearby I can have

line one of the line without marker so

what we can do is marker right now is

for all the series I can go to the

margin now because I have the line in

the margin and I can say show marker off

so now what is happening here is the

margin is only having the line and there

are Net series which is only having the

dot now this is the play around you can

do and this is especially going to be a

little bit helpful when you create the

visual like line stack bar Visual and

line clustered bar visual where you can

make your line to

disappear and you can leave just leave

the

markers so that can create more

combination again the marker colors you

can control and change the marker color

depending on like right now I'm based on

the series I can change but you have

when you select all the it's not there

one functionality which is there show

all now if I switch it on on a

particular date I can show a different

color of marker that flexibility is

there with

us now this would be too many outside

the dot now but on a smaller data it

will do going to make a sense uh that we

have a different

color but let me switch it off but you

have that kind of flexibility here on

the smaller value then the data label we

can switch in on the data label and the

data label have all things like we can

have title also along with the data

label the values can be controlled we

can have a different value basically in

the label so I can have a different

value of I'm not using gross here but I

can use a gross in the value so the

gross will get added in the label

instead of net and then I can add a

detail I can have another column in the

detail it will start showing two values

in this case we can have a complicated

value display and then then again single

line or multiple line I think in this

case it's better to have multiple line

because you have too much of information

but again uh we have to control the

density uh here because the line chart

is too busy can duplicate

this here let's go back to the

visualization and make it

as date

hery and let's scoll down only one now

this is the place where you can have you

can play around much with the labels we

have the gross value you have net value

so we are displaying the net values then

we can add the details in the details we

can add

the discount percentage value I'm adding

a discount percentage also so I'm add

adding these values and you can see

these values

here then we can have a background to

these labels and now as you can see here

when I see the margin the percentage

seems better but not along with this one

so let's go down and and we go to

discount percentage p and we will say

none so it will follow that format and

if I go to the values again I can say

none so it will follow the actual

format this is net and discount net and

margin this is net and discount

percentage this is also net and discount

percentage so the two labels are shown

for both the serieses and if you want to

control that in instead of each one you

can choose one particular series for

which you want to decide whether you

want to have a title or not so like see

I've added a title only for the below

series now in the values do I want to

have this net value or not and do I want

to have details let's say I don't want

to have details in the Net

series I don't want to have background

or I want to have background with a

little bit different color in the Net

series so that I can do I have a

different color background or let me

change it a little bit different so in

this manner what's happening I can

control the label of both the series

separately and I can display different

kind of information for each series now

series labels if you want to switch it

on so series label is something which is

shown at the end of the line if you see

here we have seeing margin and here we

are seeing net now there is no line we

have made the line width as zero that's

why though the last value is appearing

here so at the last value these series

labels are shown now again you can

control like you know what you wanted

for the net value so you go to the net

value what color you want and what do

you want a background so I given a

background on the net there is no

background on the margin percentage

so this is one thing basically when you

have multiple lines at the end of the

line you want it to show what the label

of the line and you want toase the

information

there background again I have enabled

and then you can change the transparency

plot background area we have seen we can

add the image here again reference lines

there are multiple option now x-axis

constant Line This Is Something xais

constant line is going to appear when

you have

the number numbers or the dates and like

on a particular date I wanted to have a

line and I can add multiple such lines

so this data is from 201819 so I can say

Okay I want a March 1 March I wanted to

have a line you can see there is a line

on the 1 March I can get and then you

want to have let's say one more line you

can add one more line and now you can

click and see this is my one line This

is my another line here again I choose

XX constant line then in the line I'll

go ahead and give a value so

I'll go to again 2019 let's say December

31st I got another line so I can have

these multiple kind of lines and then

definitely color line font actually

shaded area on so that particular line

can have the area before that line is a

shaded so what we can do is we go to the

Shaded

area and this is before or after I can

do what I can do is I can make this

color a little bit more transparent

and now let me do one thing I click on

this particular line the one before it

now I again switch on the Shaded area

now before and now you can see this is

I'm able to differentiate between this

area and this area just the way I have

done the shading in this manner I'm able

to loate and now what I can do is I can

also change the color a little bit and I

can increase the transparency also now

you're able to see the two shaded areas

so this can help us to give the Shaded

area between the lines so you can

utilize this this is especially useful

when you are using the kind of visual

where we have the x-axis constant line

those which are on Dat date and those of

which are on the number you should be

able to get these now again you have the

data label option here label is for the

lines so you can have the so whenever

these lines are there you can see there

should be some data lab this is the data

label the date which is appearing on

which date actually it is there now

right left above data Value Auto all

these things are there so if I disable

the data label you will see that now the

line is not showing what date it is but

I can have the data label

enabled I can say right hand side have

the one data label and this is for each

line so I enabled for the one line and

now I go back and enable the data label

for another line for both the lines I

have the data label then we have error

bars we have already experimented with

that if you want you can enable those

error bars and then you have to choose

up bound lower bound and all those and

then finally you have find anomalies

which is not enabled right now based on

what our selections are we rename this

as line one so these are the various

stuff you can do with the line visual

let's have a quick look at the area

visual area visual is very similar to

the line Visual and we have two kind of

area visuals one is area chart like line

visual with the Shaded and then we have

a St DDI chart so let's explore these

two so I'll click on area chart on the

build a visual or I can click the same

in the insert portion of the Home tab to

get

it I'll add brand from the item

here and net major from the base

majors and as you can see I got a chart

where I have a shaded portion below

again I can have multiple columns on

x-axis I can have a secondary y- AIS I

can have a legend and similar kind of

limitations what we have seen on the

line chart would apply also here so

let's quickly see what happens when we

put a legend when I put a legend here

you will be able to see multiple line

now usually when you create area visual

with the date access then you will have

continuous data even for categories and

in such cases this visual will look much

better because you will be able to see

continuous lines for each categories now

in this case because each brand does not

hold every category you are seeing those

discontinuous areas and it is not

conveying the message you wanted to

convey using this particular visual so

in this case because not all brands have

all the categories doesn't look so great

we will take a example later now

similarly I can also add a major on the

secondary AIS and test it out so I go to

drive measure and put margin percentage

on the secondary AIS and now now you can

see there are two area charts and one of

them is appearing on the secondary

axis I can also go ahead and enhance my

x-axis by adding another category now

moment I add the category the default

option is concate label off which we

have seen in the line visual also and

sort ascending but we can go ahead and

change the setting if

required if you don't want this expanded

we can actually use the drill up button

and

can go up to the hery we'll see only

brand then we can either do drill down

we can go to the next level by looking

at category or we can have expanded mode

like we got

initially now I'm going to open the

format pane on the the right hand side

pane because of my settings I'm able to

see format pain here and we can go ahead

and look at what all options are

available here size and style are the

common options which we have padding of

the visual uh inside this one how much

we want like from top and bottom we want

to reduce something we have background

if you want a background I we can switch

it off if there is transparency which we

need which is 100% if you don't have

background it will also act like a

transparent one visual Border in case we

need the Border shadow in case we need

Shadow these options we have explored in

other visual same as other visuals we

have title again you can use a measure

inside the title you can set headings

font you can also have a subtitle you

can use the divider to have a line

between the title subtitle and the

visual and you can change the spacing

between the line and the label and you

can customize spacing if required xais

on x-axis you can disable the values if

you want like I don't know to say

whatever it is you can have visual like

that you can enable that then you can

only disable the x-axis title which is

category is only missing if you pay

attention here I'll enable it

again same way for y-axis you have

options like minim and Max where you can

use measures because FX button is there

you can give static values you can make

it as a logarithmic scale if your values

have too much of difference usually we

use logarithmic scales let say one value

is pretty large and another are pretty

small then in such is logarithmic scale

and give us a better fit visual which

will be able to showcase the smaller

values little bit larger because of

logarithmic scale we can invert the AIS

the smaller values on the top the larger

value

down then we have

values which we can hide on the y axis

if you can see now there is no values

which is up here near to the net there's

no values here again we have option for

font color which we can

change again color

of the values can be based on a measure

title if you want to disable the title

you don't want to show the title you can

do that secondary AIS if we have

secondary AIS we can set up the

properties for that if you're using

Legend what position you want the legend

then text of the legend you can have

font title of the legend you can enable

disable smart M multiple we'll try in

little bit later grid lines in case you

need grid lines you horizontal grid

lines is enabled but if I vertical grid

line again I have to make them little

bit larger for you to

see this is vertical grid line

for the access have zoom slider which we

have already explained in other visuals

but we can have a zoom slider and once

you have the zoom slider you will be

able to zoom the

values then we have line option again

area chart is definitely an extension of

line chart with the shade

but you can go ahead and play with the

Shaded area at transparency here as you

can see I'm using margin and net again

just like line visual I am not having

any option to conditional format

it and then again stroke which is

something which you can play around you

can make it zero so there would be no

line in that case I have done it for

both and then transparency you can

increase or decrease or you can go ahead

and choose individual line let's say if

I choose net and and for net I can have

line there is no shaded area option for

individual it means the Shaded area

transparency can only be handled at the

all level not at the individual series

level then we have markers just like

line visual we can enable the markers

we'll get dots in the above one as you

can see we don't have the line but we

still have the dots then we have the

size of the dot which we can increase or

decrease then color if we want to change

the color from the default one data

labels if you want to enable the data

label this chart is having too many

values it is looking busy so you can say

okay I don't need it for all the cies

you can disable it for one of the series

position you can decide Auto above under

then you have the leader lines we have

concept of leader lines which we will

explain you a little bit

later under the data label we can enable

or disable data label by margin so let's

say for net I can disable the data label

I for margin I can continue to have the

data labels and there's some is really

interesting that is leader lines so I

can enable that to see those leader

lines you have to at least give 25 to 30

as a minimum offset then you will will

get a noticeable lines so as you can see

I have set the value at 35 and now I can

see these lines and as you can see these

lines move your values little bit up in

case of the label and that's allows you

to see these values in a much better way

this feature actually creates a visual

connection between the each data point

and its corresponding labels and because

of this feature you will have better

experience as you can see values little

bit away and then there is a connection

you can have the values under and above

as you want like if it is under then the

leader lines will go down and if it is

above the leader lines will go on the

upside in case you want title on the

label you can have title but in this

case because I have too many values it's

look busy but these are some of the new

enhancement which has come where we can

have title where we can have value and

values could be a major

driven Valu so though it is margin but

actually I can go ahead and put discount

percentage I'll start seeing discount

percentage so these what we are called

the major driven label then we have

details if you want to add details you

can add another major let's say I now

along with margin I want to add discount

I can add it and then I have formatting

option transparency and all that and in

the layout we can want to show them in

single line or multiple line all those I

can

decide so right now I'll remove the

details we don't need it for this

particular visual similarly you have

series label if we can enable the series

label and as you can see the series

labels are available at the end if you

want you can disable particular series

label let's say I want to disable net

and as you notice now that there is no

label for net there is only label for

margin percentage you can can play

around with the values you can play

around with the background if needed

then we have the plot area background

where we can have image if needed and

the reference lines as we have added in

other visuals we can also have reference

line here and those reference line could

be of y-axis constant line Main Line MAX

Line average line median line percentage

line these lines keep on changing based

on the visual you are using I've named

it as area quickly create a stagged area

visual I click on a new page and here

I'll add this tagged area in this tagged

area again there are two ways to create

either I could have x-axis and legend or

I can have multiple measures so let's

say I wanted to have X brand on the

x-axis and then I can have

net on the y axis and along with I can

have let's say

margin let's say create an equalent of

gross or in case I don't want it to have

the double I can use Legend also to have

this Ted area this will not look great

again for this purpose I need to have

something like date here for looking

really good so let me go to the sales

and let me bring in sales date here and

once you have the trend you can see that

it looks much better and let me remove

and make it only a year quarter as you

can see now it looks much better area

visual again we have the similar kind of

format properties which we can play

around because I'm using the date Fe

field I am getting the access as

continuous option I can also choose for

a categorical option where I get the

categorical values I can change add

remove titles on the y axis I can play

around with the range I can in the text

font title same way I can play around

with Legends and red lines Etc same

options are available for this visual

also again because I'm using Legend you

don't see any conditional formatting

option anyway we don't have any

conditional formatting option in the

area visual

later when we go to the conditional

formatting I'll also let you know how

can you color dots in case of line and

area

visuals and if there is a shade

transparency you want to control you can

do that we can little bit control it

like this or little bit lighter you can

increase the transparency or you can

decrease the transparency manner you can

create area and stacked area visuals or

charts now let's discuss scatter visual

in the scatter visual what we are going

to do is we are going to discuss the

scatter visual right now when we go to

conditional formatting we will learn

about the quadrant part of it and also

regarding the markers what we are going

to do is marker properties we have a

separate video on marker properties

there we are going to explore marker

properties in detail so I'm going to add

a new page and on that new page I will

add this scatter visual scatter visual

is available here in the middle click on

that now scatter visual have many types

the best way to create a scatter visual

is having both x-axis and y axis as a

measure but there's a possibility of

having a scatter visual without having a

measure on XA so let me first give you

that example so I will take brand from

item I put that on xaxis and then I take

a measure let's say margin percentage

and I put on y- axis this kind of become

a DOT chart in line chart if you only

have the markers and you don't have a

line you will get something like that

another Advantage which we will get over

the line marker here is I can go ahead

and have here a size for that what I can

do here is I can put gross on the size

so you can have smaller and larger

bubbles so this is one way you can

create it then I have play AIS tool tips

now play acces might not applicable for

the current scenario what we are going

to do here before we move forward and

move to the scenario where we have both

xaxis and y axis on the major let's move

them

around now we have a CER visual on brand

and margin percentage can we swep can we

have brand also on Y axis so let's try

that out let me remove the brand from

the x-axis and margin from the Y AIS and

let me see if I can have brand on the y-

axis no I'm not able to have it so it

means the possibility of me having a

brand on the y- axis is not there let me

remove the size again and try so brand

on the Y AIS so that's not possible I'm

not able to do now what I'm going to do

is the next thing which I wanted to play

around is having x-axis as a major let's

say discount percentage Y axis as a

major and that is margin percentage so

we have the majors now major cannot give

me a a dotted chart for that I need it's

definitely something which gives me

those series for series I can drag in

City out here City on the values if I

drag you will be able to see the dots

again for size I can drag in Gross here

onto the size and for size we have the

format where we can you know play around

and you know make the size smaller or

larger so marker is that for that and

usually when you have these kind of

stuff I have find out that minus 27 28

or - 30 is a little better suitable size

so let me go to- 27 so now this is a

little better size in terms of what we

want it to have and then we have

different kind of shapes which we can

take in the marker so marker can control

this size and the bubble and we can have

different kind of bubbles also now do we

want it for all categories or single

category that also we can play around so

that is with the size now you can also

have the conditional formatting done on

these Bubbles and for that you have the

option available under markers only if

you go to the marker color you can see

the f sign here it means I can use a

measure out here that we'll explore

little later in the conditional

formatting I can have a legend and once

I have a legend then I will not be able

to change the color of the marker using

conditional formatting so let's say if I

want to have a category as my

Legend you can see for each category I

have color but inside the color of the

marker now you don't have any option to

change the marker color dynamically

using the conditional formatting but it

allows you to have the both city as well

as the category in one particular Visual

and have the data at the city category

level or you can have City Brand level

State Brand level at that level you can

have data so you can add more detail by

using legend or you can also do let's

say we drag the category inside the

values

only so I dragged it and then we can

expand it the moment you have more than

one value in the values again the same

way you will get the expand option as

you were getting previously in case of

bar visual Pi visual or L visual so here

expand is a better option for us we can

definitely go to the next level or we

can go do the drill down but let's go

and expand this now you are seeing the

city and category but is still the FX

option is available as you can see the

color of the marker is still available

now with the FX option means I can do

the conditional formatting I will be

able to change these bubbles using the

conditional formatting logic so that

give me little flexibility to have more

than one granularity and then I can use

the color these are some of the play

arounds you can do with the scatter

visual now to take this neck forward

let's see can we add a play access most

suitable play access is basically a Time

range but right now we don't have date

table so but we would still like to see

if we can put State on the play Axis I'm

able to put that and let me play around

so for each state now you can see that

I'm able to see the data and you can do

the same with the time ranges month here

dates and everything and it will play

for all the values one by one so I don't

have to do anything I just to play we

have created the visual we have seen how

to add the play AIS now let's remove the

play

acces also remove the category just keep

it on the city and let's start exploring

the visual properties so we have size

and style basically it is dependent on

what size we have what location we have

based on that this can be changed this

is just the positioning which we have

then the padding basically the space on

the all four side s es background right

now we have background on if you have a

background off it will take the color

from the background of the canvas right

now when I when it is on it means the

visual can have its own color and you

have to reduce the transparency to see

that color as you can see if I'm

reducing the transparency I am able to

see the color I can have the 100%

transparency or I can switch it off even

if I don't want to have along with the

transparency

then I have the visual Border in case I

need a border for the visual so if you

click outside the visual you will be

able to see the border and then for

Border you can have the rounded Corners

if you want and you can have width if

you want to increase the width of the

Border I actually don't need a border so

I'm going to switch it off then you have

title as usual for every visual you can

have a title the title can also come

from a major so if needed we can have a

from Major the headings from nor noral

heading two heading six we can have any

headings we can decide the font and the

font size Bard italic and underlying for

our titles we can decide the text color

of our title let's say other than black

if I want to have some other color I can

have that I can have the background

color also for the title means only

title will have its own background color

as you can see then we can align the T

title left Center or right depending on

the need and if the title is too long we

can also use the word rep property by

default it is on we'll keep it on we

have seen this subtitle property now you

can have a subtitle other than title the

moment you enable it it create an

additional row where you can have the

subtitle you can have a text or you can

use the FX function FX it means you can

have the subtitle based on a measure you

can have the heading normal H1 H2 H3 H4

then you can have a heading two adding

three heading four whatever heading you

want on font size bold italic underline

you can change the text color again

alignment left center right or rap text

I don't need a subtitle so I'm going to

disable that then we have a divider

divider if you remember is going to come

between the title subtitle and the

visual so title subtitle is one party

and the visual is one party then we can

have a color we can have the style and

then we we can increase the width of the

line so that we can see the divider

between the Visual and the headers I'm

reducing it now again I'm also going to

remove the divider then x-axis

properties because we going to use major

so you can have minimum and maximum

range you can have logarithmic scale you

can invert the scale if you need inward

scale means the numbers will come from

bigger to smaller so if you can see now

26% is before and then 24 then 22 and

then 20 if I revert it it will start

from 20 to 26 so that is possible here

this is xaxis then we have the xaxis

values where you can go on the font

color now the color can again come from

based on the conditional formatting we

can bring in but we have to remember

sometime the x-axis labels only work on

grand total so we do have to check that

out and then display is auto we can

change the display as per me value

decimal places because it is a major we

can have value decimal places so blank

values is off but if we need it we can

add it title xais title if you want to

disable x-axis title you will not see

discount if I enable it you will be able

to see discount so the play around is

here for the

title the discount is going and coming

back same way Y axis again Y axis is a

numeric axis so you have the minimum and

maximum for the range logarithmic scale

invert AIS again this AIS can also be

inverted and this is going to be useful

sometime when we specifically create the

quadrant it could be really helpful when

we actually want high and low to be on a

particular quadrant then it could be of

real help so margin as you can see now

the scale is inverted we have from

smaller to larger on the scale in a

reverse manner same way we can play

around with the value font font size

bold italic underline we can use the

function to color means we can use

conditional formatting then we have have

the value decimal place because it's a

number then we have switch AIS position

means we want primary AIS which is right

now on the first y-axis margin is there

I switch it now it is on the second

y-axis you can see it on the right hand

side back on the left hand side show

blank values in case you want to show

the blank values title again the title

margin percentage you can observe it is

written but if I disable it it is not

there again enable it is there same way

we can if you need it we can have grid

lines right now horizontal grid lines

are they are they're pretty light right

now if we want we can increase its width

and it will be made visible as you can

see now but I'm not very found of that

so I'm going to reduce it vertical is on

again we need to increase the width to

see them again not very intuitive in

this case so I'm going to reduce it

again so these are the properties of

basically AES now let's move to the zoom

slider Zoom slider will actually give

the sliders on the axis you can have

x-axis slider and y axis slider and then

you can you know scroll them to get the

values this is really helpful when you

wanted to have the sliders then if you

want to have the slider labels and Tool

tip you can also have that we have

played around with that in the past

markers we have seen basic marker

properties we have seen the marker type

I can change it to different type of

markers

then we have uh range scaling Auto

magnitude data range we can say Based on

data range so you can see that you know

the dots are little up from lower to

higher that is more suitable actually

compared to any other thing color by

category on or off so that is marker

property which has came new we'll

discuss a little later then border for

marker has also came we'll discuss that

later now category labels is something

which is label if you want to display

basically the value labels and now we

have city so we are seeing City label

now when we have City category let's say

what happened when we have the city

category and we expand it what would

happen there now you can see City and

category label coming together we need

to be very selective in case we wanted

to enable the category label

specifically on scatter visual which is

having lot of values it may not be the

best thing to have then you can have the

category label can have background so

that they look little different and once

you have the background then you can

have background color transparency Etc

then you have the plot area background

if you want to put an image you can do

that then you have reference line and

this is really important because that is

where we want to create the quadrants

here before I do that let me go ahead

and disable the category labels

quadrants basically we can create by

using the average lines but I'll tell

you the average lines are not most

suitable so let me go ahead and add an

average line and as you can see this

average line comes in Middle but the

best most most suitable would be the

constant line and use the same measure

but right now I added the average line

and the series is discount percentage

let me add one more average line and

then this line is also going to be the

average line and for this one let me

choose the series as margin percentage

as you can see both these serieses are

available here but if you use the

constant line you will find out the

difference of to do that let's go ahead

and do one thing let's remove the second

average line and then keep for the first

one on the discount and on the line is

fine let's enable the data label for

this line so we have option for data

label so I got this data label and let

me add one more line and this time I'm

going to add a constant line so I select

the second line I'll go here on the type

and I'll select the x-axis constant line

because it's on the ACC by default it

will come on zero so I'll go to the line

which is on

values which is zero I'll go to the FX I

don't want a constant line but this

gives me an option to use conditional

formatting UI which actually is the

major selection UI for me and here I

select discount percentage by default

one major would be available for you to

selection and usually it is the x-axis

major or the major which you are going

to select for first time so I've

selected that line and constant line

don't work together that's what my

observation is so what I'm going to do

here is I'll go to this average line now

remember the value

13.11 and I'll go to the constant line

and let me enable the value first of all

the data label we will see that value

but this is right now not working even

using FX I'm going to go ahead and

delete this average line and the moment

I deleted you are able to see the

constant line using the mejor which is

actually the correct average that's not

the simple average in this manner I

usually prefer this constant line let me

keep this and then we have the

properties like FX value the color so if

you go to the reference line you have

the constant lines then you have min max

average median and percentile line which

is most of them want to decide their

values by themselves you don't have any

intervention in between in constant line

you have the flexibility to provide the

measure then you can decide the color

right now I am having a color which is

matching with my marker color so I can

change it transparency dashed line style

is dashed solid dotted or custom I can

have let's say custom then we can decide

what kind of line we want then we have

the width width of the line right now is

solid and you can see width is three

that's good enough positioning in front

or back means is it should be in the

front of your markers or back side of

your marker that you can do data label

we have already seen we have enabled it

now the data label could be on the left

hand side or right hand side vertical

position is about or under so we have we

have the horizontal position left and

right and we have vertical position

which is above and under depending on

the need so if we put under here it will

go through the down and the same things

will look a little differently when we

have the y axis constant line the styl

is data value by name you want the name

and both if I want name as well as value

then display unit is auto I can change

the display unit here so these are the

various values around the reference

lines and that is really important here

now then we have the symmetrical shading

if you want you can switch it on and you

will have the symmetrical shading upper

portion Shing lower portion heading

upper shading lower shading or depends

on the visual the it may have some part

because in my visual right now the

symmetric is coming this place the

reason is both of them are not starting

from zero if they start from the zero

this will make sense but most of my data

is in the middle starting around 20% so

that is why this is not the and this

maybe because I'm taking the data at

City level if I take a little different

level it may be a different case I'll

switch off the symmetric shading right

now then I have a ratio line I can

switch it on you can see a ratio line

now you want you can have a color

transparency style width Etc to that so

this is overall just a brief overview of

scatter Visual and how you can design a

scatter visual there are play arounds

with the you know quadrant colors and

all those that we are going to discuss

in conditional

form markers has been enhanced in

October

2024 so let's have a look at what marker

announcement has been

done in this part we are going to

discuss the marker enhancement which has

been specifically done around the line

Visual and the scatter visual Microsoft

powerbi has done lot of enhancement in

the visualization and some of those

enhancements we have not discussed so

far so what I'm going to do in today's

video I'm going to take you through one

of such enhancements on the markers in

October 2024 so let's look at the

release notes of October 2024 so this is

October 2024 feature summary and if you

scroll down here inside the content you

will find out marker enhancements so let

me click on the marker enhancements to

go down and look into the details so

let's look at the release notes in

details marker enhancements reamping the

rendering of column bars ribbons line

area charts and marker is a top priority

these element form the foundation of our

core Visual and will eventually impact

other areas by provisioning more control

our report creators can enhance their

storytelling and help users easily to

interpret data in October 2024 update

markers for line chart C chart and

anomalies are Improv improved with this

revamp this update introduced new

options that offer greater customization

and flexibility explore these new

options and maximize their potential

marker for line and cluster chart can be

customized now in two ways categories me

each and individual category like you

have gen Fab Mar or brand one brand two

brand three when you have only single

series or basically you only have xaes

let's say when your chart has no series

The drop- down menu displays category

you can customize each data points

marker based on the selected x-axis

category you only have the categories

you don't have the legend or multiple

majors in that scenario now series when

the chart displays Legend the drop down

menu displays the series The Legend

series you can customize the marker for

the complete set of data points within

the selected C overall you can change

there you can hide and show the marker

for a specific data point category by

toggling show for this category option

please note the marker toggle has been

moved under show for all series new

format settings have been added to the

marker for each line T catter chart and

anomalies including shape shape of the

marker continue to offer control over

their type size additionally rotation is

now available for all shapes and size

except for the circle shape rotation

shapes as the variety of shape type at

your disposal which is particularly

convenient when multiple lies are

required unique shape

color changing the color of the marker

has been a convenient control now you

can also modify the transparency of the

marker for a specific category series or

all markers border this is the new

feature border for the marker has been

introduced allowing you to add borders

to specific marker category series for

all markers Additionally you can fully

customize the marker borders by

adjusting their transparency and the

width so these are the features which

has been released some time back first

of all let's look into the detail is

what we are going to learn today so we

will learn how to enable the marker how

to do changes at categories or series

level how to change color size and

transparency of the marker how to change

color size of transparency of the marker

B and this can be done both at the

series level or categorical level for

both marker and marker border so that we

are going to understand today in details

so let's jump onto the powerbi and

explore that out so I'm here on the

powerbi desktop and I would like to add

a new page to start exploring the

markers so on this new page first of all

I would like to add a line visual so

item wise net so this is the visual I've

created item wise net and let me enable

the format if your format is not visible

you can go to the view from there you

can enable it after that on the if it is

still not available here check out the

rightmost side is it disabled from there

or it has been minimized from there

these are the places where you are to

look

for now once I go inside right now I

have a single measure I have only one

series I go down to the marker and here

you can see that I have option for

categories I can choose individual

category or show for all categories let

me enable show for all categories now I

can choose the shape so let me choose a

little different shape let me choose a

triangular now I can increase the size I

can change the rotation let me rotate it

by 90° 92 let me write down 90 so I

rotated it by 90 color I can change the

color right now it's very similar to

what I have on the line I change the

color then I can go to the Border Swit

on the border now you can see a small

line uh match with the series color will

start matching with the series color

uncheck this and go ahead and change it

manually so let's say something like

this now transparency first of all let

me increase the WID so that you can

understand transparency

later I think five point is good enough

now look at the transparency when I

decrease it you can see the transparency

and I can completely wipe it off so

there will be no bottle one way to hide

is you completely make it transparent so

it will go away so now what I have done

here is I have done the transparency on

the shape and zero transparency on the

border so you are seeing like empty

markers so this is one another way you

can get like empty markers where you

have no color inside or you have the

transparency which is 100% for the

inside this is for the overall category

or overall the complete x-axis series

but I can go to individual and I can

check it let's say brand8 I can go and

change it so right now it is showing the

same properties but what I can do here

is I can let's say choose a different

marker there so instead of triangle let

me choose a circle so you can see now

there is one Circle which is available

it is an empty circle because I have

100% transparency at the marker level I

can reduce it now only this point is

having color because the transparency is

not there so individually I'm

controlling one particular category in

this manner I can do this action let's

see what happens in case we add another

measure so let me add a gross measure

now so this is a net measure now I add a

gross me the moment I do it you see

everything has been replicated for both

the serieses gross as well as neet if

you go here now you have the only

control over gross on neet the category

control is not in your hand but whatever

you have done previously is there so it

means in case you want individual things

to be done at the start of the line or

the end of the line now it is static in

nature as of now but you can do that and

then change your series or then add the

series now here I can go ahead and let's

say choose gross for gross I can go

ahead and change the type to square

everything is changed to square other

than see look at this

brand moving ahead I can go ahead and

change the transparency for the gross to

zero so that I will get color inside my

squares each series have its own type

and can have its own color also now I'm

changing the individual one but brand

Aid which we have changed previously

using category is still remain so that's

a good thing we can do it previously and

then do it also go ahead and change the

Border color so in this case I can

choose different color and I can also

change the width of the marker you got a

different look and feel for your markers

this will enhance the visual experience

of your line now let me tell you one

more trick for that we have to go and

adjust the line width you can go ahead

and reduce the line width to zero so

that line disappears you will only see

marker now this is for all the series

you can choose individually which series

you want what I can do is let me have

the width three and let me go to let's

say gross and make it zero there is no

line for the gross there are only marker

and it could be helpful sometime you

just wanted to show the markers you

don't want to show the line and then you

can selectively enable data label also

and go to the series let's say gross is

on and net you can switch it off now

you're only getting the labels for the

gross what I would like to do here is I

would like to play around with the

legend means I would like to have not

the major series I want to have the

Legend series to do that let me add a

new page and in this new page I'm going

to add one more line Visual and this

line visual I'm going to have it on

month year xaxis is month year from item

Dimension I'm going to take category as

a legend and let me take a major as that

on the y- axis now as you can can see

for each series I have a line I can go

to the markers and as you can see I have

a series for each series I can have some

kind of a marker or I can enable the

marker for everything now I enable the

marker for everything I go to the

category one I disable the marker so

there's no marker for category one now

you can check it out here there's no

marker so now let me go to category two

and for category two let me change the

markers as triangles and let me also

make them little bigger same way I can

go to category three and I can change

the marker to square and and I can also

make them little bigger can go to

category 4 and choose X as a marker and

make it little bigger also I can change

color for some of them if required let's

change the color for category 4 to the

Violet for x and then I told you the

trick you can hide some of the marker

using transparency or you can hide using

goow for that series there are few

options and you can have border if

required in this manner you can play

around with this now what let's do one

thing let's also experiment on the

scatter visual that's one of the very

common visual which we use so let me add

a new page and in this new page I'm

going to add the scatter visual let me

add to access which is my discount

percentage let me see the drive measures

the discount percentage and the margin

percentage on two x's let me add City

from the geography table as values I

have got a good number of cities scatter

visual shows markers what we can do is

we can change the marker completely for

everything or we can change it for each

category now as you can see I already

have the marker open so for all the

categories I can have you know something

so first of all I would like to increase

the size so I let me make them a little

bigger now I can go to a particular City

let's say I want to highlight a

particular City so I can choose a

particular City in the category so let

me go to Los Angeles and let me choose

different shape for Los Angeles I have

choose it in a triangle now you can see

one triangle into the

middle let me do one more thing is

basically uh right now the size is not

govern by something so let me govern the

size by gross so size is now govern by

gross now this is too big for size so we

need to reduce the size so we go to the

all now you got to reduce the size here

so we go to the size whenever I use

gross I usually take any value between

-25 to -30 depending on the need now

let's go back to the Los Angeles now I

what I'm going to do I've chosen the Los

Angeles again and I'm going to

change the border so border is switched

on right now it's matching color so I

switch off the matching color I want it

little different color so that I can

highlight it and let me increase the

width now you can see the Los Angeles

there with this one and color

transparency let me reduce it to zero

and I would also like to change its

rotation so let me change its

rotation I change the rotation to 97° so

it's looking like Arrow right now here

in this manner what can happen here is

basically you can go ahead and do very

special specific stuff on your markers

you can change the shape for each

category or series you can change the

rotation color transparency of the color

you can change the Border color

transparency and width and these are the

various features which has been released

as part of October

2024 so why don't you go ahead and try

them

out the next visual which I want to

discuss is be the funnel visual so let

me add a new page for that funnel visual

is especially use in case of sales when

we have lead opportunities and

conversions now again there are a couple

of ways you can have it one is basically

if you have multiple measures you can

use the funnel visual in that let me

drag

cogs

net

gross we also drag margin here you can

treat this as your opportunities leads

conversions this you can treat like you

know you know total leads you have how

many of are opportunity how many are

them of hot leads and finally how many

are converted something like that in

this manner you can get it now in case

you don't want that you can have

category let's say those opportunities

are not in terms of the majors it is in

terms of the values values in the rows

let's say let's treat category as one of

them and I bring in category here and as

you can see now we have Category 2

category 4 category 1 and it

automatically you know adjust into that

as that method otherwise what you can do

is you can go to the set acces and you

know you can say I want to certain

category so it can give it but it's not

going to make sense unless your

categories are sorted in that particular

manner like opportunity leads H leads

and sales

Etc if you are simply using numeric

value should sort it in the best way and

then you can have sort ascending and

sort descending to make sure the kind of

visual you want to get whether you want

to get the funnel or you want to get a

pyramid based on that you can take

action on this visual again if you want

to look at the property of this visual

you have title subtitle divider spacing

data labels on and off so you you can

see the data into the middle of it you

can switch it on and off you have inside

Center and outside and as an

option now you have data value

percentage of first that is really

important percentage of previous then we

have data value and percentage of first

and data value and percentage of

previous these options are available I

think percentage of first is something I

want to keep and for that I would

actually like to have it s

descending this looks much better to me

values a value font and color you can

change decimal places you can control

you can control the percentage decimal

places in case you want to have

background you can have a background I

have a little bit lighter background

there on the backand side now I made it

it little bit more darker so you can see

it now category labels the labels of

category 1 2 3 4 here it is category but

it could be anything else if you don't

want that you can switch that off again

I'm switching it on then we have display

conversion label

option that is the top and the bottom

lines if you are seeing so basically

this is 100% And it 24% got converted

that's what this means is but if you

don't want to display that you can

disable that so this is for chart mostly

useful in sales and finance based on the

requirement you can use this visual to

enhance your visual experience let me

rename the page before

I switch to the next

visual the next is not a visual the set

of visuals which is basically

the maps which I wanted to explore and

we have few Maps out here and some of

them are dependent on settings and the

login especially map and shape map

visuals they are controlled by the

preview settings and the security

settings so let me showcase you the

settings quickly once again so I'll go

to file then I go to the options and

setting and

options and I have preview feature where

I have the shape map visual if you can

see which I have enabled then you have

to go to the security settings and

inside the security setting if you

scroll down you have to enable RGS map

and field m map visual now I have not

logged in and if it gives a problem on

my tenant settings you also need tenant

settings to enable the map and when you

are signed in it do create an impact so

let me first start with the map visual I

click on the map Visual and in the map

visual I'll add State I have two options

only state and city so let me start with

the state state is part of my geography

Dimension I drag it here and with that

I'm going to drag

net it creates bubble for me and the the

moment I drag the net that controls the

size of the bubble and then we can do

little bit play around now because this

visual have a legend and if I drag a

legend it will also create a pie chart

you can create a pie chart in case you

need a pie chart and then let's look at

the properties quickly we have the size

properties then we have the background

visual border Shadow title these are the

same properties subtitles spacing

Legends on and off in case you are using

Legend if if you're not using Legend

then that on and off option is not much

useful then we go to Bubble and as you

can see we have the size property which

we can play around we can decrease or

increase the size now depending on how

much is your range you can choose this

size then rendering is

magnitude data range and auto there are

small small differences in that then

color now because because I used Legend

I'll not get option for conditional

formatting but if I remove the category

from The Legend I have the option for FX

means I can do conditional formatting or

I can change the color manually also

then if I go down we have category

labels if I switch it on it will allow

me to show the state labels or the

category labels I can have a background

or I can switch off the background to if

I want to show only names I can have

color for the map now if you go if you

want to have a heat map you again have

options for heat map and you know

gradient zero how should it look

gradient 50% and gate 100% how should it

look and then you can increase or

decrease the radius to Showcase uh the

heat map here this play in pixel you can

attend meter and transparency all these

things you can control I'll switch off

the heat map there is something known as

map setting so right now the map setting

is road but I can have aial this is how

it will look like dark

light gray

scale and

Road and we have the option for show and

off show label off label so you see the

labels I'll let me highlight you which

labels let look at these

labels and if I switch it off you will

not see the country

labels then we have few controls like

auto zoom which is enabled so if I go

here I can zoom

or it will what happen if there is some

value get selected by some some slicers

or something then also it will

automatically Zoom so let me add a

slicer externally and try to select

something let me add it City slicer the

moment I select a city because of that

state got filtered and you can see that

that got highlighted and this is because

of the feature of auto zoom then if you

want you can have zoom buttons if you

click on Zoom buttons you'll get this

plus and minus which you can use for

zoom

in and you can change the position if

you want to zoom

here then there is a lesso button if I

enable lesso this is really interesting

feature what does Leo select does is

basically I can press the control button

and then I can select multiple

values and to what does it do for that

what I'm going to do is basically let me

click here on this visual make it as a

table

Visual and let me few cities here like

using control and drag and as you can

see the values are changing let me do it

only on Hawai here you can see only this

value if I click back in the any space

it will go away I selected two of them

again click on empty space it will go

select few of them here on this side you

can see the values are changing so this

is the advantage of leso Select

basically with the control you can do

the selection you have to enable the

lesso select and geoc coding is

basically what kind of geoc coding you

want if you want different cultures you

can use

those so this is what we call as map

visual let me add another visual which

is basically the Bui map visual now in

the field map visual we have location

Legend latitude longitude so in case you

have latitude longitude you can use I

don't have so I can use city or state

but this is not a visual for City let's

see can we get it I drag the value here

for the shading no this is not the

visual for that this is a visual more

suitable for States so I can put State

and I have already drag one major based

on that it is giving me color it's going

to give one tool tip but if you want to

have the shading basically what you can

do is you can go

here in the fill color you can use the

conditional formatting

here you can use okay and you can get

the conditional formatting here then

this one and all those controls and

everything is applied here now if you

want you going to use a legend and if

you use Legend you might not get the FX

option in the color so let me use a

legend of category here now this option

might not be really useful you do have

the color but it always end up showing

you only one category we create

something known as topper um first

topper and second topper kind of where

we can find out every category which is

topper in each state and there we can

use this filter that out that only top

categories are there so we see rank one

and then it would be more beneficial for

us to have this kind of visual so this

is the fill map visual for you next

visual which you want to explore is the

shape Visual and the shape map visual is

one visual where you can also have your

own shapes coming in so I'm bringing in

state but if you go here into the map

settings it is showing that it's a US

state map but if you have these are the

other state maps which are also

available but you can also bring in your

own Maps

or you can browse the map type you can

have your custom map and you can browse

the map and you can use that so right

now we are using the USA map St

we but you can have your own map and we

have similar kind of setting here but in

this one you have the color saturation

already available so one of the ways you

use color saturation secondly you use

the fill color so if you go to the fill

color directly without using the color

situation you can have FX button and in

the F button you can use let's say

gradient and you can click okay so it

will give you the conditional

formatting it will give you the gradient

based on that and also you can use the

conditional formatting like rule based

conditional formatting or field value

based conditional formatting here but

what you can also do here is you can

have color saturation you say no no I

don't want to control it let power ba

controls it you can put net into the

color saturation the moment you do it

you will not get that particular option

means now you have the gradient which is

you can choose the color and based on

min max value it's very similar to the

gradient what we have there but if you

don't use the color s situation you more

flexibility to use conditional

formatting where we will also be able to

use um rule based conditional formatting

or measor based conditional formatting

which is field value

base then for the blank areas no blank

areas on or off I use off then you don't

see the blank areas here you this is

white in color and otherwise you want to

show it or you want to show it in black

color you can decide how you want to

show the blank areas if you want to use

Legend again Legend would be not very

useful if unless you plan to show the

top ranker or second top ranker we need

to take example of what does you mean by

top ranker and second top ranker what we

need to do is we need to create category

ranks and then we need to filter the top

rank and that we will do once we learn

how to create rank index and then later

on we'll come back to conditional

formatting then we will learn how to use

that so this is shap ape map Visual and

really powerful in case you want your

own custom shape you can go ahead and

try that out the next one which I want

to use is

Azor Azor map visual has recently been

enhanced and one of the thing which you

must remember that it requires a sign in

so now I need to sign in before I use

and it need to be enabled at my tenant

level so let me sign in

I have signed in into my

popup let's remove this and try to add

it

again it give me a disclaimer

Also let's try to add some location to

it those of you who used your map visual

in the past or seen the past

video the location is something which

very recently got added so let me add a

location here but this visual is coming

out as one of the powerful visuals that

we can have here then we have a size

which we can bring in using net here by

default it has given all the same size

now I have the size so let me go into

the property of this visual so you have

the map setting where you have the style

different kind of style like

Road

hybrid

satellite

gray scale light

Tera

blank lanks

accessible high contrast

dark high contrast

light these are the Styles available let

me keep it a road

only then you have view auto zoom o on

and you can have different options if

you want to disable the auto zoom like

you know you can observe the difference

the moment I remove the auto zoom it

actually comes in and then you have the

buttons which can control it but I think

auto zoom is a better option so I'm

going to keep it but yes you will get

the zoom buttons you will have the reset

options up and down options and some of

the options are available on the visual

for users to change

it then you have the controls so word RP

can enable disable style picker so if

you in the top if want to use see this

is the your style

picker and I I can disable it so you

can't change it on the Fly Like if I

give this you can change it on the fly

but I'm going to disable that navigation

buttons you

have I disabled that selection and

switch on and off selection button Geo

coding is auto I'm going to keep then

you have

the layer settings which is minimum and

maximum unselected disappear you can

have Legends in case we are not using

Legends as of now here uh we'll see the

field

map not applicable right now bubble

layer is a category label so we have the

heat map option in the heat map option

we can play around with the radius and

when heat map is enabled we can switch

off the bubble layer so that we only get

the heat map layer in this case there

are multiple levels so we can disable

this

now we have the color option where we

have the color of the gradient right now

which is applicable in this case if we

switch off the heat map then that color

option will go bubble layer is on right

now in the bubble layer you have the

cluster bubble and then the color and

then we have the size of the bubble

which is minimum and a maximum we can

say minimum is five and maximum we can

also control so we'll have little

smaller bubble range selected is data

range or magnitude or Auto we can keep

it data range your auto a shape

transparency we can control inside the

shape so I'll make it little bit

transparent color you have the

conditional formatting option we have

conditional formatting options and we

can do conditional formatting based on

gradient color rule based or field value

base let me try based on gradient as of

now based on the margin percentage uh

it's rule based right now I'll make it

gradient based so that I can easily do

it or I can say based on certain rules I

can have those values so this is

gradient BAS

color so this is all all I'm doing for

bubble then bubble can have border or

not you can decide right switch on

Border switch off border you have the

zoom option then you have the options

which is pitch alignment Viewpoint or

map labels are below or above right now

I don't think we are showing

labels you can enable the category

labels now you have the

labels and labels can have background or

cannot have background and you can add a

heat map layer as we discussed now if we

go here can put let's say Legend I'll

put category as a

legend the moment I put the legend you

can see the pie charts the labels are

too big we need to disable them I'm

disabling the category labels you can

see the pie chart better as soon as I

add the legend you cannot have the color

using conditional formatting so that is

gone you have the border and the width

of the Border if you want simply you

know a totally covered P you can have

the transparency if you want you can

increase the transparency of the

colors you can CH change the size again

we can start with little bit smaller and

going to a little bit

larger you can control the size you can

control the shape transparency again I

want lesser transparency in this case so

these are the various options you can

also use with the Azor map visual map

visual is coming as an stronger option

compared to all other visuals and you're

getting a lot of enhancement on that so

start exploring that it may give you

options which you have in other visuals

so it could act as a replacement of

those visuals the next uh visual which I

want to discuss here is card visual very

simple visual so let's add a new page

and from the build a visual I'm opening

the Builder visual pan this time I

closed it so I opened it by clicking on

build a visual

and in the Builder visual we have this

is card visual we also have a new card

visual which we'll learn after we learn

the major because we wanted to create an

icon measure for this and this visual is

also available here in the insert of the

Home tab so let me click on the card

visual we do do have a multi row card

Visual and the new card visual but let's

focus on this so in the card visual

let's drag a major and you can have one

mejor only at a time so I drag net then

if I try to Dr margin and it will

replace margin so I can have only one

major so I'll have net here now I'll

open the format by clicking on the

format and we have the size and the

position which is coming because we

draged versus what we how much size we

have given padding is for the top and

bottom if we want a tight fit text then

we can reduce the top and bottom spaces

background we can switch off we don't

need a background and in casee you need

a back ground and along with the color

like you want your background color to

change let's say my margin is positive

then it should be green and red then you

can do it using that then we have visual

borders uh in case you need it shadow in

case you need a shadow on and off as

usual we have tried out in the pass

title now sometime you may like to have

title or you know want to have a

category label like let me switch off

the category label so you can see the

net is not available now here so there

is no net value here when I switch off

the category label so instead of that I

may like to have a title which is known

as

net and I may would like to do it is

Central align and then I can have my

card visual like this now you have the

title now you can have a subtitle here

but I don't feel a need for giving but

you have an option for that having a

subtitle then divider in case you need a

divider between subtitle and the value

and then when I go to the call out value

that's why I created a little bit of

space because in the call out value I

want to use none so I can change my

format here and decimal place I'm also

going to make it zero my major do have a

decimal place but I can change the

number of decimal place text WP in case

it is bigger then we can have a text WP

then category level as we switched off

but if you want you can have category

level then you need to give a space

according to it I think both are not

needed you can have the font italic

underline in case you need that again uh

we have FX like basically the name

should change based on on the

conditional formatting let's say if the

net is passing some value we want to

have the label have changing its color

or call out value changing is color so

you can see these FX option is there in

the call out value this is there in the

category value category label it is

there and as well as in the background

also this same thing is available title

also it is

available text color background color FX

option and background also we have FX

option in means all these we can use

conditional formatting to change these

color so what I'm going to do here is

I'm going to disable again the category

label this looks much better and what I

can do is I can copy paste this and in

this new one instead of net I'll bring

in Gross and it has taken the same

properties so this is a trick that you

create a card Visual and set all the

properties and then duplicate it for the

s similar measures and use that in such

cases you will require lesser changes in

the new card visual which are coming in

and you will be able to use same set of

properties in multiple card visuals

finally go ahead and change it and now I

can use gross as a title here in this

manner you will require lesser amount of

work to format all your card visuals

there are certain time we can do multi

select some of the common properties are

visible and you can change those so that

is also you can do a faster formatting

so this is the card visual for you the

next visual which I want to discuss is

the multi row card Visual and what I'm

going to do is I'm going to add that on

the my card visual page so I opened

again my card visual page and this is

the multirow card visual here in a

builder Visual and it is appearing

here I can make it little bit bigger now

as the name suggest it's a multi row

card visual so one thing which comes to

my mind that I can have multiple

measures okay so let me copy paste it

duplicate it and let me see can I have

brand or category also as one of the

field I can have category 1 Category 2

Category 3 category 4 these kind of

values and so I can have a field as well

as a measure along with that so let's

start formatting the and see what all

the formatting options we have the

movement I used categorical field it

seems like I'm getting only vertical

here I was getting horizontal also so in

the first one let's add few more and see

is this is the the style or can we

change it seems like it do can do some

kind of adjustment but let's see how

much control do we have I clicked on the

first one and I'm going to change the

properties of the first one again the

background is something which I don't

require visual border again we have

learned in the past we don't require

that shadow we don't require title is

definitely you can if you required you

can call it

kpi

kpi or

kpis then again bold italic underline

text color you can do subtitle if you

require divider in case you need a line

between

these spacing then let's go to the card

so card we have a style which is top

bottom

left right these are just alignments if

you look at it so you have styles your

background your padding padding between

these things asent bar bar is something

which is available here basically and

want to remove that you can can remove

it and let me do a little bit of

adjustment here and that's where the new

card visual is much better here compared

to this one because as you can see not

much options are under control on the

design in case of uh the kpis and that's

where the new card visual is going to be

a better option which we discuss in

sometime now let me go here uh in this

one and as you we have size visual

border Shadow title call out values then

category labels is something which I

would like to disable now if I disable I

will not see gross and anyway here I I

don't want to see gross again and again

in this one but if you I want to have

category label I can have conditional

formatting that can change the color so

here we have the conditional formatting

options on call out values and call out

value is nothing but your actual value

so I can make it bold so that you

understand this is what we call call out

value category label youve seen this is

what you call category

label and we have conditional formatting

available at the call out value level

and category label label here I don't

need the category label so I'm going to

hide it but definitely we can use

conditional formatting so we can go

ahead and say okay we need the

conditional formatting based on let's

say discount percentage and we have

discount from 0 to 25 maximum or 35

maximum and we'll say okay and as you

can see the text has color but all the

colors are very nearby tell you a better

way to know the range so go here and add

the discount percentage so you can see

the entire discount percentage is

between 22.8 n and

23.4 so what I've done basically I set

up the value between 225 and 235 and try

to keep it but as our values are pretty

nearby you will see that you know most

of the values are having color which is

very near to each other because these

values are very nearby or we could have

actually done what on the margin

percentage if you take margin percentage

basically uh you have we have a little

bit bigger range but for categories we

don't have so these kind of challenges

can come if your ranges are very nearby

so in such cases you can use use field

value base or rule based and call out

explicit color which can differentiate

that we will learn little bit later as

you might have seen that I added

discount percentage and margin

percentage also I can add here at this

moment it is really important to know

what category label it is and I have to

now enable the category label if I want

to show it so in the previous case the

category label was not uh required when

I only have the one value but now

because I have multiple of them it is

required that I have the category level

multiple purpose so some of those

purpose may not be easily served by the

new card Visual and one of those purpose

is this purpose where I have a category

and I then I display these multiple

Majors below it and this kind of display

is something very specific to the

multirow card this is multi card visual

for you so the next thing I want to

discuss uh filter pan with you and

before going to the next visualization

which is basically slicer I would like

to discuss filter pain with you because

how filter pain applies and house slicer

is going to be a little bit different

from that this is something I want to

explain what I've done here is basically

from different pages which we already

created this is Matrix visual this is

the tagged bar visual this is p Visual

and this is table visual these are the

same visual which we have created in the

past some time back in the other pages

and from there I copy paste it and

resize it let me open the filter pan now

now let's try to understand what is this

so now when the no visual is selected

you see filter on this page and filter

on all page and you don't see any value

inside it but if I click on a particular

visual in this case when I clicked on

the pi visual you do see category margin

margin percentage as the filters which

is available means

both categorical variable and the

numerical variable which is basically

the majors Majors as well as the fields

or the columns are available for

filtering when I click on the table

visual you see what is be added so

typically what has been added is by

default available in the filters of that

particular visual we can definitely go

ahead and add a few more values now let

me come to this particular visual in the

category Visual and if I want to filter

something I go ahead and filter this now

as you can see there is no impact on the

other

visuals I'm filtering a value and there

is no impact on the other visual when

I'm filtering from the visual level

filter so visual level filter only

impact a particular visual then the

second thing I'm seeing some Majors also

like margin margin percentage here in

this visualization so let me go to this

column

net and let me say the value is

what are the options I have so in the

net I have option is less than is more

than is blank Etc so what I'm going to

say here is basically if you see I have

values which is basically 1.3 million

1.7 million 1.8 million 2.5 million so

let me say value is greater than and I'm

going to write down 1.5

million so this is 1.5 million value

basically and I say apply filter so now

you can see the it is getting filtered

based on the value one most important

thing which you have to remember that

you can only use major filter the filter

on a measure in the visual level filter

only so you can only filter measure at

the visual level now there is one more

which you can use here and for that what

let me do is let me simplify this table

visual I go to the table Visual and open

it build and from there I'm going to

remove category I'm trying to simplify

it and when I go to brand

actually instead of basic filtering I

can do the advanced filtering just like

I have done in the text majure where I

used Advanced filtering not the basic

filtering so the basic filtering is

basically the values I can select brand

one and I can also select brand 10 Brand

11 that's my basic filtering the values

filtering then you need Advanced

filtering so in advanced filing I can

have contain uh does not contain but I

have very similar so I can say Okay

contain one and apply all those which

contain one will come

now as you can see in the contain I can

have contain this or this there are only

two options but if you need multiple

contain what you need to do so in case

you need more than one values in the

advanced filtering what you do is go to

the basic filtering let's say I need

three conditions so check out three here

and then go and say advanc filtering so

you will get three conditions there and

now you can say is and does not start

with or start with so and and or

combinations you can create so we can

say is brand one or is brand 10 or is

Brand 11 that's the three values

basically in or multiple selection means

that add otherwise we can say

or contains or start with we say or

contains let's say

two either it is brand one or brand 10

or it contains two we got a different

combination in this manner you can have

multiple conditions and and with the

Eraser with the help of the Eraser here

you can actually remove it so now you

understand the basic filtering selection

of values Advanced filtering you have

lot of options and the options would

change based on whether it's a number or

whether it's aing data type you can have

like contains does not contain is not

blank blank is really important because

is blank or is not blank or empty values

when you don't have the values it is

going to help you out now the Third Kind

of filtering which we wanted to discuss

is the top end and the that is because

of which I actually I also removed the

category because I want to explain you

this easily so you have something known

as top end filter in the top end you can

specify I need five now five based on

what let's say cogs discount margin

margin percentage let's say net I'll

bring in net here now remember right now

you are not do net here but I still

based on the net I want to filter and

I'll say apply I ask for top five and

you might be surprised why it is not G

toet price the reason for that is this

quantity because the sales quantity is

unsummon summarize so I'm going to

remove it and now you're only going to

see five properties I don't have net

inside this visual but still I can do it

so this is top five based on net I can

change it based on margin percentage or

this percentage that percent I can only

have one one such thing because if you

say I want let's say State also here you

can add a state as a visual level filter

but if you now wanted to do let's say

top end you can only apply one top end

filter so you can't apply more than one

top end filter if you want that kind of

stuff where you have more than one top

end filter then you have to go ahead and

write down a top and major or you have

to write down a rank and then you to

filter it so top end and the major

filters are visual level filter

properties so visual level is something

which only filters that particular

visual see anything I'm doing on this

visual is not impacting any other visual

you might have seen the entire exercise

which we have done there's nothing

changing in other visual now what we're

going to do is let's go ahead and

continue with this these visuals will

keep as is so this is filtering on

category this is filtering on brand and

what we going to do is on the page level

filter now I'll go to the page level

filter and let me bring in a brand on

the page level filter this is Page level

filter and I select brand one now

there's no brand one here we don't know

which whether in this category brand one

are appears or not we definitely no

brand appearance here and their Valu

should change I click on brand one now

the brand one does does not appear in

that particular set of categories so it

disappeared here brand one why you're

getting brand one here the reason is the

moment I filter the page

data my top five got adjusted to that

and because I only selected brand one I

can get top five in that when I add

let's say Brand 11 brand 12 brand 13

brand 10 brand two I get a new top five

based on my selection so that's where

the top end filter is working and that's

why we have brand still there and you

can see other places we have more values

and these values continue to change

anything which you apply on the page

level is going to filter all the content

of the page now one of the limitation

which the filters have and that's where

we are going to have slicer that I I

can't stop the filtering of this visual

when I apply the page level filter so

either I do visual level filter which

filters the visual or I filter all the

visual I cannot stop my filter to

interact or stop the interaction between

a filter

of the page level or filter at the all

page level which is below I cannot stop

its interaction with any of my visual

which is available in my page now at the

page level filter we have basic

filtering and advanced filtering in

advanced filtering because I selected

multiple values it's giving me this

option but I can erase it again based on

what I select I selected this on brand

so I can have contained is not blank is

not blank is empty does not contain so

let's say do not start with b and we

don't have any brand which which is

doesn't start with B all the brands

start with B so we will not have any

value we'll do one thing we'll remove

this filter all together on the brand

and let's bring in state from the

geography at the page level filter and

here Advanced filtering is little bit

interesting because then here we can say

let's say start with n New York

NE you can say we got New York as the

state level and then there are few more

State like New Jersey and New Mexico

which start with new so it's also

possible that the categories are not

having that kind of data so they are not

getting the values so we are able to

filter the values so not now what I'm

going to do is I'm going to erase these

values and let's go to the all page

level what's the difference between this

page level and all page level so we

understood that visual level is only at

visual page level is going to filter all

the visuals on the page but if I bring

something at state

level and let's say I select laska it's

filtered the everything in this one go

to other page

this page is also

filtered what this page this page is

also filtered so everything is Alaska

here we said no no no how do I make sure

that it's only the multiple page level

which filing so we filter Arizona here

and then we go back to the filter pane

page and Arizona is filtered here you

say it may possible that the page level

is filtering also on all the pages not

this one so let's experiment let's go to

the page level filter again this is

filter on this page and let's go to the

basic filtering and let try to filter

let's say Alaska and Arizona now this

page is Alaska and Arizona but if I go

to this Azor map and you can still see

all the values okay you say very good

all the and you don't have a page level

filter also here you can you can see

this there is no page level filter this

all page level is all fine okay let me

go ahead and un check this and let's

select Alaska I select Alaska come back

to the filter pan and I see only alasa

value here remember we have two values

selected Alaska Arizona but the all page

level filter is restricting it to Alaska

so we are only getting the value of

Alaska and the cities of

Alaska in this manner what is happening

is basically we are able to filter at

different level visual level page level

and all page

level with this now we will go ahead and

learn

slicers now slicers are at the page

level but there is a feature sync slicer

which can make them available on

multiple pages so we have to learn that

we will now explore slicers what I've

done basically is I already created a

page where I

have taken the visuals from the older

page and when we was doing the filter

pan these are the same set of visual

which were there I removed visual level

filter from the category uh pie chart

and I kept visual level filter as you

can see top five brand on the table

level and I created a little bit of

space here so that you know we can use

the slicers now with we will use one

property interaction here which I'm

going to Deep dive into the details

later but we will be able to understand

the slicer functionality better if we

understand that how the

slicer Behavior can be changed using

interaction to add the slicer we have

two slicer options both available in

Builder visual as well as homage insert

so we will open the homepage insert and

if we scroll down we will be able to see

both the the slices the new slicer and

the old slicer as of now we'll start

with the old slicer and then we are

going to go to the new slicer also if I

enable the build visual region again we

have the new new slicer here and we have

the old slicer here they are not at this

nearby place they're little bit far away

but you have the two of them here the

first thing which you want to do is we

want to use this old slicer and so if

you click on empty space and click on

the new slicer you'll get it in empty I

would start by filtering the brand so I

can simply drag in a slicer and then I

can drag in a value field value here and

I can get a simple like this one and

this is basically categorical because of

that the slicer has come like this and I

can actually select values like this if

I click on another value it's going to

remove the previous value and select the

next value now if I want to select

multiple I can click with control we can

change this

Behavior with control I can select

multiple values control again control is

present right now when I'm doing all

these so this is the first look now

there are tons of format available with

this one also and then we can create the

hierarchical sler also so basically

let's look at the properties and then we

have to do multiple versions of this

slice survey so this is size and style

and padding which is very common

background we have seen visual border

and Shadow these are the things we are

not bothered about title is something

which if you want you can add it now

brand already is available as a slicer

header which I can remove if I want

title Now understand there is something

known as slicer header the moment I give

it it comes as a brand here and then

there is a set of properties for that if

I don't need I can create a title which

is separate than slicer and the title

can also be a function driven okay so I

can write down brand and then I can get

it based on a major and then there's a

conditional formatting also available

let's say in this one I want to write

down the set of selected values on the

title so I can do that we will once we

learn little bit more about the majors

we will be able to create that kind of a

function which can give all the values

on the title then we have the slicer

setting now this is really important

this is something which we right now

seeing we call it as a vertical list you

have tiles basically the tile will

comeing something like this and that's

why I kept little bit space here and

make it so you have the tiles here and

then if there are more values there

would can be horizontal scale we have

the horizontal one so this is style

previously this was known as orientation

horizontal this is style and if I click

here as usual it's going to filter the

values and with control I can click on

multiple

Val so this was previously known as and

if you watched the last year video this

is known as orientation horizontal then

we have a drop down we can again adjust

it so drop down is something which you

will not see the values as Styles as

well as the vertical you will have a

drop down and when you open it you will

be able to see the values you can create

Slicer in any of such ways so let me do

one thing let me duplicate this

one and I'll change it to

category so instead of brand let me go

ahead and and this is really good

feature you go to the arrow and then you

go ahead and change it it get changed

and this one we can I'll keep it as a

tile okay so smaller value tile is

better option let's look at the

selection option so we have a single

select means if you make it as a single

select single select here is not going

to make any difference but the only

thing is even if I press with control

it's going to keep the single value but

if you go ahead and do a single select

here let's say on the this kind of

visual which is drop down or tile what

would happen so what we let's do one

thing let's have one more here make it a

littleit small let's adjust the brand

here and let me do one thing let's

create little bit more space deleting

this

visual your brand let's duplicate this

copy paste and let's create a little bit

bigger visual here and this I'm going to

bring in from other dimension so let me

bring in state here I removed everything

and now I'm going to drag State and

definitely because the previous property

it retained it dropped down I'm going to

change it to Vertical list what happens

when I make them single select what is

the difference so here we don't see any

difference because even if we click with

control click the only thing is

selecting one value the look and feel is

having no difference when I go to drop

down so this is right now my drop down

and if I go to the selection and make it

as single select on you can see it

becomes radio buttons it becomes radio

button and there is only one value you

can uh select so if you want to select

mult all and single select brand then

you can watch my video Single select

with all that will help now what I'm

going to do is I'm going to switch off

the single select and I'll go to the

brand Visual and now here I'll make it

as a single select as on and once I make

the single select on you can see that

this is how it looks like so the

vertical list and

the drop down has similar kind of

feature we I'm again going to make it as

a toggle of the single select off and

these properties have changed over a

period of time in last one year so those

of you are watching the older videos and

maybe think it's l bit different yes in

2023 we have lot of these UI changes lot

of renaming has happened with the new

format pan with the on object

interactions the consolidation of the

properties has happened in the different

places so that's why you will see all

these things with a little bit different

name like we have this single select

option now if I toggle this option I

will not be able to see multi select

option and select all option these are

few of the changes which we have got as

part of the

2023 before I tell you more about multi

select let me case you how to use select

all so I can enable the select all and

in this state visual you can see now I

have the select all option and once I

click on the select to I will get all

the values selected what I can also do

is I can click on select all and it will

uncheck all the

values in the same manner I can go to

the brand slicer and again there I will

be enabling to select all once I enable

the select all it will be start showing

me select all option inside the brand

and I can check and uncheck all the

values using the select

all

and how do I erase the values so let me

make it a little bit bigger so if you

are not using slicer header then you

will not get this erase option see if I

want to erase if I have slicer header

then I'll get so the disadvantage of not

having this slicer header is that you

will not get it title is not going to be

a great option for us header seems to be

better option because we got a eraser

button we know the title is not a better

option so I remove the title and now I

if I select more than one values with

control and then I can erase it so I can

clear it off so that's the advantage of

having the slicer header there is one

option which we have not discussed and

that was multi select with control and

this is not visible completely so I can

make it a little bit larger so you can

see this so multi select with control is

the property which um if I disable it

which is right now on then what would

happen is basically if I now select I'm

not I have not pressed control but still

I'm able to do multiple selection if I

don't want to select anything then I

have to either press select all and

unselect all or when I selected multiple

venue I can use eraser

button come back and erase all the

values so same way you can have this

multi select here again we have to

enable the slicer header if you need the

Eraser so I enabled the slicer header

and then I can enable this one and I and

disable the title now I can select

multiple values without pressing control

and use the Eraser button to remove all

the

values but otherwise if you select let's

say if I selected these three values now

if I press control I continue to select

the same number of value so I click

again on that value to uncheck it so in

powerb typically the selection is when

you click first time it get checked and

when you click on second time it get

unchecked so in this manner you will be

able to check uncheck value and had

different kind of styles options on the

slicer now let's look at the other

properties like you have the Border

background padding icons all those

things you have adding icons and

background and values so now let's go to

the values let's check what options we

have in the values by clicking on this

state so that everything is we have a

bold value we have italic we have

underline if you want those we can

change the color but I do usually don't

prefer it because I would prefer these

things to change by theme uh there's a

border option so you can have a border

top bottom right if you want you know

values to have a border then you can

have it top you want you can on the top

left you want you can have that right

you want you can have or you can have

all of them then you can choose the

color for the border and then you can

have background right now there's no

background but I can go ahead and put a

background if you need it or we can

simply give a white background or we can

say reset to default so it will go back

to the original value now this is what

we had when we have one value let me go

back and bring in the build a visual we

can have this slicer having more than

one Fields also let me bring in city

that's where we start calling it heral

slicer so now you have the hierarchy and

you can open it and you can see the

multiple values now I can either select

the complete State like this or I can

open like the California I can open and

then I can select individual value from

the California so both is possible and

based on that it will work now remember

we

have check the option select with

control so that is why the moment I'm

clicking it is selecting multiple values

and this is useful when you have the

related values and you say okay if I

select state I want to select all the

cities this gives you flexibility to

have more than one into one slicer

instead of having dependent slicer you

can have this so typically what happens

is usually people say I want slicer one

to filter slicers to definitely if they

are from the same Dimension slicer one

do filter the slicer 2 but in this case

you have the values inside the the

second one so you have a better control

over it let me show you that example

where slicer one will the slicer 2 so

contrl C control V copy pasted it and

I'm going to remove state from this

slicer and let me go ahead here check

all and let me click only on Alaska so

City slicer is getting filtered by the

state slicer which is city state and I

can remove City from here now you see

only Alaska is selected and Alaska do

filtering the cities which we have now

Arizona is also giving Arizona City here

so slicer do filter each other when they

belong from the same table but if you

want that I I want one values inside

another one like a hery then you can

drag both of them into the one Visual

and then you have that kind of a tap

down selection which you can do and you

can select the complete state or you can

select single cities and pretty useful

especially when you have the month year

quarter all those things it is really

useful now what we have seen till now in

the slices was only the categorical

slicer let now let me remove this city

slicer and let me make space for the

date slicers I go to the sales table I

bring in sales date here and it created

a table visual automatically let me

click on the slicer the moment I click

on the slicer because this is date is

having the her is created the Hier

slicer for me and as usual I can you

know do those kind of selection which is

month year quarter and I can either

select let's say quarter q1 2018 I don't

have data I have data in Q4 of 2018 so I

can click there and can get some data

now here we know date because right now

it's getting hery and once we connect it

with date table it will not get later on

but we have an option where instead of

date hery we can actually go ahead and

say that we don't want to use the date

hery we actually want to use the sales

date itself it created this list visual

but there are more options now so I'll

open the format now again and let me

close few of them so it's still remain

bigger now if I go to the slicer

settings you have vertical list tile but

there are new options like between can

have date range

between we can have before before this

date so anything before three 0 2020 now

I have all the data before that but what

I can do here is basically I can go

ahead and ose this data and as you can

see little bit change in the data is

there there and if I scroll the more the

lesser the values are coming

similarly I have the after

slicer we have the drop down we the very

important thing which we have the date

other than the drop down is relative

date slicer you can say last one day

month year now my data is ending in

2020 so if even if I say one year it's

not going to come out and it is always

run based on today so I let I have to

say use three years in last 3 years I

don't have anything in last 3 years also

four years I have something last 4 years

from and look at the date based on the

date it calculated those last four years

the relative date so relative when you

go to this relative slicer when you

drill down to the year then there is an

option relative year or the calendar

year so now when I say calendar year you

can see the complete 2019 is coming when

I said relative it actually the rolling

four years which has come so in this

manner you can use relative date slices

also so you have option for days weeks

months quarter year and all those so

definitely it can help you like when you

say I need month calendar rolling four

months for the calendar or let's say

last 1

month now this is last one month but you

have option here next the next one month

and then you have this when you use this

there is a little bit different option

from next because you don't have the

calendar and this one differently this

is the reality so we only have the month

or day so this day this week this month

this quarter this year so you you can

use this and this is one of the best

options you can have in the date slicer

remember one of the problem with the

slicers that we cannot

default it based on a function means if

you ask me can you default it on today I

can't do

it there's no option actually can you

default it on the first value no I don't

have any option you have seen the

properties we don't have any option

let's go to the values even we don't

have an option here we do have an anchor

date option here we we don't have an

option here also in the values where it

can default using some major or a

function so relative date slicer can

help it you can initialize it on last

one month this month last week this day

this year this is one way and it will

automatically keep on changing and this

is really helpful but if you want to

save it on Max month on Max this and

that that's not good so best way in case

you wanted to save it on the this month

last month this year last year calendar

year or relative year you have to use

relative date slicer that's going to

give you that flexibility to save it if

you don't want to use it then we have to

create a column which is going to give

us values like today this month next

month and using that we have to

initialize which we will learn little

bit later when we create the date table

so you have the

slicers you know the different kind of

slicer and also you know the challenges

with default value and how relative date

can help here now there there are

certain time when you will have

challenges when you select certain value

and the value is not there can you

select the first value no it doesn't

happen like that so first value

selection last value selection little

bit more Dynamic default value selection

for the slicer is not available as of

now we may see these kind of future very

soon for the number slicers if you want

to create a number slicer you also will

get a between and all those options so

let me quickly show you a number slicer

and so let me go here and and bring in I

have quantities which are only three in

number and not

getting okay and let me create make it

as a slicer so I go to build a visual I

make it slicer I have only three values

It Is by default created a between

slicer then I can have the less than

quantity or equal to quantity greater

than quantity so I can say Quantity

greater than one I can say consider only

those rows where quantity is greater

than two the values are changing so we

have between before and after for this

one

so number slicer date range slicer

categorical slicer same slicer going to

work for all of them you just need to

change few

property we will now discuss the uh new

slicer so new slicer is available either

in the insert

menu under the slicer option or in the

build visual it is also

available I have enabled the build

visual now it was not uh enabled so I

enabled the build Visual and inside the

build visual this is the ler new new

slicer which we are going to explore

powerbi has changed a lot over last one

year the new slicer has been renamed as

tile slicer over the course of time you

can find it along with other new slices

on the build window you will see tile

slicer text slicer and the list slicer

text slicer and list slicer are added

little later after this video has been

recorded but we will cover them little

later so let me add a new page let me

close the reasons which are not

needed and in this visual first of all

I'll add the new

slicer now in the new slicer I'll need

the column so I can go to

the add data I can press the button add

in the add data and I can

add want to add

brand and the moment I add the brand it

gives me buttons for the brands like

this now by default it's giv me a 3X3

kind of a matrix I can

goer by clicking on

the format more options I can play

around with size as you already played

around padding border visual border and

Shadow are common one we can give a

title if

needed so title is already available as

a brand and then we have the conditional

formatting available for color and

background title can be aligned we can

have a subtitle divider and spacing this

is same for all those and we go to the

slicer setting we have option for single

select select all option you want to

select all option that is also available

here so those options are available

we'll see when we want to use the select

all option and in the shape we right now

it's a rectangular shape but we can have

rounded rectangular shape like this so

they are now rounded rounded

rectangles then rounded Corner we can

remove the little bit of rounding by

making it less or you can have custom

style means you will be able to decide

how much the top corner should be like

if I make top Corner round little bit

you can observe

here then this is top left corner then I

can have top right

corner now you can observe here in this

manner I can control but actually I

don't want to do individually so I'll

keep it like customize option off and

I'll keep rounded rectangle and then we

have the tab both top all those options

are available we can play around with

that now we go to the layout this is

important one right why we are seeing

this 3x3 because we have three rows and

three columns the max number which you

can give here is 10 so you can have 10

rows

or you can have 10

columns what I'm going to do is I'm

going to say row is

one I'll have columns as 10 now let me

try because I have 13 Brands so can I

give let's say 15 you can't give 15

let's try 11 you can't give 11 so you

can maximum have 10 after 10 there would

be a pagination for overflow so you can

have continuous scroll means you can

have a scroll or you can have the

paginated I will make it

paginated you want vertical means this

Arrow would be here you can see there is

an arrow here I when I went down and if

I went up there's a

down so I can keep it horizontal because

I'm keeping it like this then I can make

it little bit smaller like this

now brand header look title looks little

bit bigger so we can make it little

smaller now usually I don't change the

font as I told you in the past but in

this case I'm manually changing it or

maybe I'll just switch off the title I

don't need a title actually so I'm I

have removed my title so now these this

is my brand now what I can do is let's

create a visual and we can copy paste

one visual from the other pages so we go

to the slicer page and from there we

copy this visual contrl C come to this

page contrl V now if I filter brand one

I'll get brand one you can click on any

of the brands now let's go to the lier

setting and single select is by default

on I'm going to switch it off and I'll

also add show all so now with the

control click I'm able to select

multiple and I can say select all also I

say select all it is all selection is

there and in this visual we have lot of

settings around you know H selection and

all those so when you go to the buttons

here way down you have the default

setting you have the H setting you have

the Press setting you the selected

settings so you have so many settings

out here we we can do those settings

then you have the call out value Val so

call out values is by default default

I'll change the color so that you can

know which what one what is call this is

the call out value the value which is in

the middle is the call out value I'll

and the best way to do is and then I can

make it middle align so you can again

see the difference here let me do the

alignment little bit here so that you

are able to

differentiate now pay attention the

small small adjustment are there when I

change the alignment unit of display I'm

keeping as whatever it is and then show

blank as hyphen iph there is a blank

value and then there is a label option I

can switch it on and I can add another

column let's say I want to add

category so you can have little bit more

information in these buttons you can

have additional values so this is one

option now we will remove this option

label right now we don't want a label

and I switch it off so that it doesn't

take even a space now the option which I

want to explore is images the default

stage over stage selected stage we can

have different different places where we

can do this we can say add images field

here we can use a field for images now I

need to build a field because I don't

have but what I've done for this is

basically I have created few Mage which

Ive loaded to my GitHub account I won't

like to show you that

first so in my GitHub account I have

this icon folder where I've created few

icons which is 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

the these are just numbers and I also

created few images here so I have brand

images which is from B1 to

B16 then I have category images which is

13 then I have few human images also

which are faces we can use for customer

so I'm give you the link and you will be

able to use it so what I'm going to do

here is I will go to brand and this is

known as B1 B2 B3 so I can go to any one

of these you can copy this and replace

the blob with the raw go here and you

replace blob with the draw and if you

open the you will still be able to see

the image I want to use this but

understand one thing I want to make this

little bit Dynamic so I'll tell you how

to create such a column so I I'll go

back to my powerbi and in powerbi I'll

go to the table View and inside the

table view I click on the item table the

item table is already open I'll click on

that and you have this option for new

column under the table tool when you

click on the table you get the table

tool and inside that one you have an

option new column I'll click on the new

column and I'll call this column as

brand

URL now in the brand URL I'll give this

URL but it would be same I want the

after B the changes should happen so I

close my string at after

B now I don't want this one coming from

my image I want it Dynamic so between

the two strings I can concatenate by

them M perent but from where I'll get 1

2 3 4 5 6 I put 2 m% and between the 2

m% I can again create one more and I'll

here I'll take brand ID so what would

happen with B without space brand ID

ment again concatenating the string ment

concatenate the strings do PNG now let's

see what we get so we got a URL here and

this URL should work similarly I can

create a category URL we have category

C1 C2 C3 and the folder name is also

different there but let me go ahead and

add a new

column paste this and let me call

it category

URL I'll do some changes here first of

all this is not brand this is category

and this is

C same way I can develop a logic for

human for customer I only have 20 images

so you may have to develop some logic

that you keep on using those 20 images

these cannot be brand ID here I need to

put category ID

so these are my two URLs so now this is

category C1 C2 C3 C4 and this is brand

URL now for both these column what we

have to do is click on the column in the

data category you have to call it as

image

URL this is image URL okay same way for

category click on category Ur and into

the column tools you should get column

tools and inside the column tools go

ahead and change this data category to

image UR

both of them are now image Ur now let's

go back to our visualization we got the

images inside the image field I'll click

on add

data item and I'll click on brand URL

now you can see images here now we need

to do a little bit of adjustment I'll

I'll make I made it little bit larger

but I can go ahead and decide the

transparency saturation blur

position position could be

left position could be right

and we need a different kind of slicer

for that so this we will keep top or

bottom only set as background we can set

it as a background so this is setting

for the default one you can change the

setting for the hover pressed or

selected you can change those things

settings but I'll keep it default what I

would like to do now is I would like to

add another slicer so I'll add a new

slicer here and in this slicer the new

slicer I'll make it little bit vertical

after I add the column so in this one

I'm going to use add data I'll go to

item and I'll add

category I have the categories the

settings which I want here is basically

I'll go to the slicer settings uh I

don't want single select I want multiple

select I don't want show all option and

I'll let you know why I don't want the

show all option I go to the shapes I

would like it little bit rounded so

rounded rectangles and I'll I'll reduce

it to it's say 15 I don't want to round

it one also no custom option layout I'll

go in here I'll say five rows and I

don't want too many columns I only want

one column space between the card I'm

going to reduce little

bit then overflow is continuous scroll

no I want pagination and vertical

pagination or horizontal let's keep it

horizontal so right now we don't have

any kind of overflow so we can keep it

scroll also continuous scroll there's no

need basically we have given the five

now we'll go to the call out values

we'll keep call out values as is as of

now let's go down and in

label if you want the label we can

enable but label what happens you can

add additional field which we don't want

here we don't want subcategory or

something like that I'll go to images

and here I want to add an image so I'll

use

add data and inside the data I'll go to

item and I'll use category now I got the

categories here this is first category

why it is first C we actually need a

major but we are using a column so we

can only use First

I'll do a little bit of adjustment and

now what could happen basically here is

actually might not need values like

category 1 2 3 4 5 in your organization

it might be possible but looking at the

color of the brand or let's looking at

the logo you are able to decide and that

is the use case I want here so I

actually want to switch off the values

now there are only icon this is category

1 this is Category 2 Category 3 this is

category 4 Category 5 this is what I

want so I with the logo itself I'm able

to to decide I'll go down the button

properties now let's look at button

properties fault H pressed and selected

values we can do different different

settings right I I'll keep it on default

padding you want white padding narrow

padding we can use narrow paddings

border I don't like but border on this

button at least I don't want a border so

I'll remove border these images are good

enough we come to Shadow let's have a

little bit of Shadow here but the

challenge with the shadow if you want to

have Shadow here it takes a lot of space

and then you have outside or inside

Shadow based on that it is going to give

you the shadow so while the option is

pretty good but because I need a lot of

space I'm not going to use the shadow

option glow is another the Shadow and

glow options are something which

actually require a little bit of space

and then you need to go ahead and you

know choose the colors and all those

so for that outside and inside is the

option Center bottom center right top

right and all those options are there

for the glow disable that as ENT bar is

one option where you will have a bar in

front of it so every line you can see

there's a bar this bar if you need then

you can enable the ascent bar which

which also I don't need and let me say

reset to default so I I have reset it to

default the only thing which I don't

need is the Border in this manner now

you can see that we have a different

visual experience here we don't have

even names and in this case we have the

names and the selection is highlighting

you might have this is actually multiple

select we have to check and uncheck we

can have select all it's all selected

and deselect all and in this case you

can only see a boundary basically very

so when you use these kind of stuff

maybe we would like to change more

properties when it is selected so what

you can do is here it is default when it

is pressed do you want to do something

okay so want to increase the

transparency or you saturation something

you want to do when it is press so let

me increase the transparency and press

now let me go ahead and press

it then when it is selected so I'll go

ahead and say saturation is less and

then transparency is more saturation is

less these are the seating in this press

so now when it is pressed it looks

little bit different so these kind of

stuff can help you now when I'm

selecting you can see the

difference so these things especially

when you are only dealing with the image

you need that because so when it is text

you will be able to identify because of

the text highlighting but you need it

when it is only image you need some kind

of change in the Highlight as well as

the saturation so that you can identify

that there is a difference when we are

selecting or pressing it so this new

slicer allowing you to give a visual

appealing experience and as you can see

we can use images to make it be more

intuitive let us now discuss the newly

released feature of tech slicer Tech X

slicer was released in November

2024 so let's jump onto the release

notes this is the powerbi November 2024

feature summary and then we scroll

little down you will find inside the

content we have a new visual the visual

is texer and it came as a

perview now let me click on that and

we'll reach to the notes these are the

notes of the new visual the text slicer

introducing the new text slicer now

available in our core visual Gallery

this oneth brings the arrival of the new

text Slicer in powerbi offering new

possibilities for both users and

organization how to enable you have to

go to the options and setting options

preview features and text slicer visual

you have to enable it using that I'm

going to Showcase you that setting the

Tex slicer works by allowing user to

input specific text that act as a filter

targeting a design data feed by entering

the design text into the slicer input

box the slicer effectively Narrows down

the data set to display only relevant

information that contains the enter text

the functionality is particularly

helpful for handling large data set

where quick and precise filtering is

essential for Effective data analysis

and presentation

now how to create you will get this new

text slice and you can drag it to the

canvas to filter the data set add a

field from the data model to the to the

Field Val to establish the text slicer

functionality allowing it to filter the

data set based on the user input simply

add text to the slicer input box select

apply icon or press enter the slicer

immediately filters the data had

displaying the visual results the new

text slicer introduced powerful

customization filtering tool for powerbi

improved user experience and unmatch

customization so let's jump onto the

powerbi to explore this feature out I'm

here on the powerbi and before I explore

that feature of text slicer let me

showcase you how to enable this feature

go to file options and setting options

it will open a popup inside the preview

feature when you scroll down you will

see new text slicer visual feature you

have to enable that click on okay if

you're enabling it for first time as I

already enabled I'm going to click on

cancel you might have to open a new file

or close and open the file to get this

slicer inside your

visualization I'm back onto the powerbi

report View and let me add a page to use

this visual so let me click on the plus

button and here what I'm going to do is

first of all let me create a a visual

want to create a table visual brand wise

net brand wise

net let me converted into a table visual

now I would like to add the text

slicer here in the text lizer let me add

the brand from the item into the fields

by bringing the into the

fields here let me type one and press

enter and as you can see all the branch

that contains one has been

filtered I clicked inside and I'm now

entering 11 and let me press enter now I

am getting data only for Brand 11 or

everything which contains 11 again go

back and let's say WR 10 and let me

click on this Arrow which is apply

button I'm getting everything which

contains 10 and in this case it is only

brand 10 and we use nine and arrow

apply I got brand n same way I can

filter other things on the three dots

you have the options like export data

show as table Spotlight sorted sending

descending and format you have a clear

button to clear the selection you will

get all the values now I would like to

create a dependent slicer on this text

slicer which will get filtered and based

on that slicer I'm going to filter the

table visual ual or other visuals let me

add one more

slicer let me add brand to the slicer

and make it as a list

slicer if I go ahead and try to filter

one in the text slicer it will filter

both cable visual as well as the brand

list slicer but I only want it to filter

the brand list slicer and based on that

I want to filter the table visual for

that we have to use edit interaction and

feature or click on the any of the

visuals and go to format enable edit

interaction this case we have to disable

brand text slicers interaction with all

other visuals other than the brand list

Slicer in this case there are only two

but let me add few more so that you

understand it better let me control C

control V I create two visuals now this

visual is filtering let me Al so change

this visual to

category let me disable B text slicers

interaction with this new visual also

brand Tex slicer as of now is only

interacting with the brand list slicer

and it is not interacting with any other

visual on the page as of now so let me

start playing around with this let me

end two the TX slicer as of now is only

filtering the brand list slicer and when

I filter the value in the brand list

slicer it is going to filter the other

visuals in this manner I am able to

create a dependency of a search on a

slicer and then I'm able to use that

particular slicer which is filtered by

the search to filter my other visuals in

this manner I able to create a search

experience along with the list

experience let me enter a value one and

click on apply and once I do that I will

only be seeing value which contains one

in my brand values and using those

values let's say I can select brand 10

and 11 and that will filter my

visualization so what is happening here

is I am able to create of dependent

slicer on my text slicer and then I'm

able to use that dependent slicer to

filter my values of all other visuals TX

slicer as of now support only one f

means either I can have brand or I can

let's say drag category and once I drag

category it will only filter category it

cannot filter brand and category

together so I can have one at a time in

the past on the similar situation when I

use the text filter which is a very

similar slicer to the text slicer we

have concatenated the values of all the

columns of a table into one column and

then we have used that particular column

to fill filter the values I'll go to the

table view I go to the item table and

here I'll create a new column click on

any of the column and you will get the

column tools and inside the column tools

click on new column once you click on

the new column in this new column we can

append multiple Columns of the item

table into one column and then we can

use that for filter so let's create an

column appended

column and here we can have

brand

m% is m%

category

m% is m per a now we got a combined

string I could have added all the

columns but right now just for

Simplicity I added only few columns now

let's go back and inside this text

slicer instead of brand let's add that

appended

column and let me do one thing now let

me enable the interaction this visual

let me start filtering out now as you

can see with the category one what it is

all fitting I have added this new column

A pend column Here and Now what I've

also done is I have enabled the

filtering on both the visuals and I'm

going to remove this visual now I don't

need this additional for understanding

of this so let me remove this now let me

start filtering let's say I enter a

value let's say 10 when I enter 10 I see

both brand 10 as well as brand 2 I'm

seeing brand two because 10 can be

anywhere it can be in brand it can be in

item so in this case it is coming

because of item we can add a new visual

on item name and we can see that these

are the items which are getting filtered

because of 10 it may be anywhere in the

string broad category or name

anywhere in this manner you can work on

multiple columns but that's still a work

around hopefully I get supported with

multiple columns will be able to use

that so this is all about the new text

prer why don't you go ahead and try that

out

now we will discuss about the list

slicer the list slicer was released in

October

2024 so first of all let's have a look

at the release notes of October 2024 so

I'm here on October 2024 release

notes and if I scroll a little down I

can see one of the feature is new list

slicer and this is under

preview so let's click on that and we'll

reach to the feature so first of all we

have to enable it so to enable it go to

options and setting option preview

feature and list slicer visual we have

to enable it let's look at the release

notes major enhancements are upcoming in

the image support label additional

conditional formatting option and

improve default style specifically

designed for erical layouts please note

new visual is in the early development

and we won't recommend using it in the

production permanently however this is

excellent opportunity to experience the

capability of this new slicer provide us

the feedback for the further Improvement

so it is still in the preview feature

the new list slicer can become hcal when

more than one field is driv into the

field data well this action will

activate additional formatting settings

specific to antical data some of the

advanced new slicer level customization

offering are selection shape layout

overflow St style selection icon expand

collaps icon and button style these are

the few attributes which has been

released with the new list slicer so why

don't we go ahead and explore it out and

for that I'm going to use N2 n12 file so

I'm here on the N2 n12 file and I'm

going to add a new page to explore this

visual so the new slicer I have already

added but let me tell you how I added it

go to file options and

setting

options options and setting popup has

now opened up inside that preview

features and inside the preview feature

you have to enable the list

slicer and then you can click on okay so

that you can use it some of the feature

require restart so you might have to

close and open your file again as I've

already added I'm pressing on cancel so

I'm back on my layout let me add the

list slicer it looks like very similar

to the normal slicer so let me doag item

R and you can see there is a single

select list which has been created here

now let me do one thing before I go

ahead and add certain additional stuff

let me enable the format for it in case

you are not able to see the format

option on the right hand side to enable

the format page you can get it from the

view view

format and then on the right hand side

you have another format option once you

click that you should be able to see the

format page once you see the format pen

you can start working on the properties

if you're visually selected so we know

the size and style very simple based on

your location and the size they can

change

then we have the padding padding uh

right now I would like to keep as is I

don't want to change it background in

case we want it to have a background

color we can change it and if you change

the color we need to make it a little

less transparent so that we can see it

but right now I don't need any

background color so I'm going to disable

it visual Border in case you need a

border and if you want to have the

Border you need to increase the light

and come out of the visual there you can

see the visual border

again I don't need visual border so I'm

disabling it in case you need Shadow for

the visual you can enable it you can

observe the

shadow below the visual and then for the

shadow we have various option like

outside and outside where bottom right

bottom bottom left right Etc again I

don't need Shadow as of now so I'm going

to disable it title we already have a

title as brand but we can use a major in

the title we can have different headings

like heading 2 3 4 on normal right now I

keep it as is we can have font color we

can have font name size Bard italic

underline and the text color for the

title we can also have a background

color for the title and the alignment we

can keep it let's say cental align or

the right align or left align Tex rep in

case there is a bigger title it should

wrap out every visual now can have a

subtitle so we can have a subtitle if

needed if we enable it we'll get

additional space for subtitle then we

can have a divider between the visual

and the title subtitle right now I'm

going to disable that also spacing

customize spacing if you want to

customize the spacing between the titter

and the divider but right now I don't

want to change it I can even reduce it

further to save some space now comes the

important slicer setting it is a single

select slicer you can see the radio

buttons I can make it multi- select by

unchecking the single select and now I

can select more than

one now importantly this visualiz a show

all so you will say that is there with

the slicer when we have the multi select

but even if I enable the single select I

have the select all is this property

only specific to this one or added to

normal slicer let's check that out right

away let's bring in the additional

slicer the normal slicer put Brown

inside it and let us see is that

property also changed for this visual we

go here to the slicer setting and we use

select all and then we enable single

select so you can see in the single

select we don't see select all in the

normal slicer but in the list slicer we

have single select along with the select

all so let me remove this normal slicer

or the old slicer and we can now enjoy

select all but does it work work to

check that out let me create a visual

brand

wise net

major now let me do select all

everything is working let me deselect

all brand one brand 10 Brand 11 brand 12

one more thing which you might have

noticed if I do select all and if I

uncheck brand one only one is getting

unselected so we have one deselection

feature also here so these are some of

the properties so let's go back to the

format pan again of this

slicer we are on the slicer settings so

we have played around with that now we

are very happy with the select all

option also then here the shape

rectangle shape rounded rectangle snip

uh snip tab both these are the shapes

which are available so I'm going to

leave them as is I'm not want to chck

but I would like to go to the layout

layout is fixed number of button is on

number of button sh is it and I can

uncheck that it it creates a little

compact UI space between the button if

you want to increase the button space

between the button you can do that but I

think right now it is fine indentation

now reverse

indentation now this will play a little

better role when we have more than one

intend the butter container that also

will play a little better role when we

have more than one when we create the

hercal slicer call out values the values

which we have if you disable the call

out value you not see anything we need

to have the call out value it means

these are the color for the values like

brand one brand 10 so font size bold

italic underline color transparency

alignment like we can make them right

align penter align left align all these

properties are display unit is Auto and

show values as blink and then we have

the layout vertical

alignments also there then we have a

selection icon which we can enable or

disable definitely we need the selection

icon what happens if we don't have

selection iton I click click on Brand 11

Brand 11 selected brand 12 but I'm not

able to see so better to have a

selection icon then I have buttons this

is also little important because the

buttons are not visible unless you start

grading a Bott once you have bot you can

see the you know buttons then you can

have fill or don't fill you can have a

shadow you can have blow you can have

Ascent bar on the buttons so with this

property you can create a button land of

a UI but definitely if you want to make

it as a button then you need little more

space for each one of

them so if I want to let's say have

Shadow now you can see if I made give it

little more space then I can have the

Shadow or you reduce the number of

buttons then you can also have these

things so I will disable that but these

are the various property you can play

around now let's take the next step by

bringing in one more

field to the slizer and let me bring in

category once I bring in category you

can see that I can open the arrow there

will be nothing on the select on but for

each brand I can have next level and I

can do the right now it is single select

we can switch off the single select to

make it multi select that's one more

change which has came in last one year

where if you uncheck the single select

it become multi- select so in this

manner you have these properties and now

you can play around the little more

properties here on the layout and on the

icon so especially expand icon now if I

go here and play around expand icon I

can go to the layout look at where is

expand icon right now it is on left look

at that Arrow now it is going to

WR look at the icon

here same way alignment we can play

around THS and the spacing all these

things we can play around with this list

license some important properties have

come in and powerbi is paying a lot of

attention to the visual property so here

what we are going to get is basically a

new visual experience which with lot of

properties which we can play around and

make it suitable for our use case now we

have quite a few kind of slicer we have

a normal slicer the we have the list

slicer which is previously known as the

new slicer or the button slicer then we

have text slicer and we also have the

list slicer so why don't you go ahead

and try the list slicer out we have

learned slicers and we saw slicer apply

on a page but in case of filter we do

had an option where it can work on all

the page and we have something very

simiz sync slicer is a process in which

we can sync a slicer on one page with a

slicer on another page now usually We

sync the slicer

which is having the same name or the

same table on the other page at little

bit later I'll also show you a way where

you can sync the slicer which do not

belong to one table means the slicers

are coming from two different tables and

they can have two different names also

but they are of same type like

City so let me add this page and here

there are certain slicer which are

applied and I have this visual copy this

visual need page two so can I can I get

the category slic can I go ahead have a

category slicer and if I filter

something here can it do filter there on

this first of all this is a single

select kind of a slicer can I do that

there's something known as s slicer

there would be limitations what is

happening on that select category two

and if I go to this page is it going to

be

category so there are couple of ways to

achieve syn slicer I'm going to tell you

both of them so one of the way is from

menu options where you go to the the

menu and use the view Tab and there you

have the syn slicer option that you can

use and the second option is when you

copy paste the slicer you do get an

option to sync you have to click that

option to sync and then it will get

synced automatically so let's start with

the first option and then there is a

known as we have insert and in the

insert we have we have View and inside

view we have sync slicer so if I select

this slicer it is telling me that I can

sync it in the slicer and the page two

we have View and inside view we have

sync slicer so if I select this slicer

it is telling me that I can sync it in

the slicer and the page two let me do

that so one option is think and second

is visible I've done that now I go back

to the Category 3 category 4 I come back

on the page two I see only category 4

enlarge it the slicer are getting other

way and easier way to do this thing

slicer is copy it contrl C and crl V it

asked for saying slicer you I want now

you can see that I select brand one I go

here it is I'm able to sync the slicer

Pages this is sync this is the old

slicer and the copy paste or using the

sync slicer paint which is available in

the view we can do that but can we do it

on the model new slicer where is our new

slicer our new slicer and I do the same

let me contrl c go to the page contrl V

is asking for slicer brand 10 I filter a

brand 10 here I go to the other slicer

it should show brand 10 because they

belong to the same table if I go to the

new slicer page is also brand 10 so both

the old slicer and the new slicer can be

you think either by copy paste or using

view think slicer only thing you have to

do is click on a slicer know where it

should be visible so in this manner can

sync the slicer and then they can filter

the data across the

pages so now we would like to discuss a

use case which is syn slicer across

different fields and these different

fields could be across two different

tables columns so typically the SN

slicer is for the same field so let's

say if I have geography City on page one

I have a geography City on page two I

want to sync them but this case is a

little different I want to sync the

slicer which is across two tables let's

say customer City and geography City I

want to sync them they may not have even

name a city they could be little

different name so we want to sync slicer

across two different field that's what

the main objective is for this one what

has happened that I have used a little

different file that's very common file

which I use for abstract thesis series

the file at GitHub which you can also

get from my GitHub account the file

follows the same model which we are

following in the learn power ba series

you will be able to relate with the

fields which I'm using in this art of

the video also so how can we do that so

to do that let's try that out on power

ba file so let me open my power ba file

so I'm here in my power ba file and I'm

using the generic model which I'm using

in most of my other videos so here I'm

using my common sales model which I'm

using for most of my videos and this

model contains a sales table join with

the date item customer and geography

table one to many single directional

join from Dimension to fact the same

model we are going to continue here and

here what we wanted to try out is is

basically I would like to add let's say

from the customer Dimension I have a

city and let me convert this into a

slicer I have a customer slicer City and

I also would like to add a slicer from

geography table which is city let me

change this also to a

slices so I have two slices which are

basically on City on different one one

is on geography City another one is on

customer City so if I select one of them

as you can see there is no impact on

each other but if I go down and add

let's say some Visual and in that visual

I'll take data from item brand and and

take a measure like

net now if I select something let's say

I select one of the city from here you

can see the data is changing if I select

another one from here you can see

changes I select from both of them may

not get any data because mostly these

cities are kind of similar kind of City

whether this is this page or let's say

if I even duplicate this page they are

on this page I would like to have sync

slicer so I want to sync the slicer

either on within the page or across the

pages so how do I do that because if I

select a value there is no way I can you

know think with this and if I go to

let's say View and if I I go to sync

slicers as you can see I have do have

option where I can sync it with other

page but I don't seems to have an option

where I can sync these different one

with this as you can see I can see the

slicer here there are two slicers which

I can see across different pages which

is visible this one city customer city

as you can see it is highlighting that

customer city is available in those

pages and I can sync them by clicking on

the value so if I do

this if I sync it across the pages if I

clicked on let's say Atlanta here and if

I go to the duplicate page you can see

that Atlanta

values but how do I sync these two SES

on the same page which are from

different dimension let's look at the

details of the sync slicers

again in the syn slicer what I'm going

to do here is I'm going to go to the

Advance option I've unchecked the

syncing right now I go to the advance so

let me give it as a name City

Dy so I've given it as a name c Dy and

let me come to this slicer and also give

it as a name c Dy now this is cdy and

this is also cdy let me select one of

these now you can see whatever values

I'm selecting is also getting selected

on the other

slicer so now you can see that whatever

value I'm selecting here on the first

slicer is also getting selected on the

second slicer so there from different

dimension but I able to sync them now

can I sync them across the page so what

for that what we have to do is let's say

this is the slicer here I go and here I

so if I give the name as tore Dy it will

also get sync so let's say if I select a

value here check this value let me

select a value Austin here go back to

the first page you can see all these

three slicer are now showing the atin

value so I'm able to sync across page

which I was able to do previously but

across different dimension table or

across different table columns I'm able

to sync using syn slicer so the property

is lying in the advance once you rename

and give them a common name that is

where you have an opportunity that you

can syn slicer across tables with

columns coming from two different tables

so why don't you go ahead and try this

out we will now try to create combo

visuals combo visuals are the visual

where we

have basically either bar and line

together or stagged bar and line

together so couple of combo visuals are

there uh they can be found here in the

build visuals region or you can find

them here now line visual we have

already seen the secondary axis now the

thing which you are going to get here is

the secondary AIS and I'm going to start

with the cluster column

chart I bring in the cluster column

chart and here on the xaxis let me bring

in brand and on the y- axis let me bring

in

net now there is a line axis line Y axis

now what I'm going to do first time I'm

going to bring in Gross here

and you will find that the there's a

line y- axis but I did not get in a

secondary Y axis if you see both of them

get adjust yis there's no secondary y

axis

now this happens when you take the two

variables which are having the similar

kind of stuff it automatically put them

on the same one now what happens if you

need the secondary AIS I actually want

it to have so you go to the visual

format which is right now available here

otherwise go and click on the three dots

and format to get it in case you are not

getting it now you are not getting a

secondary Y axis we do see the property

of the secondary Y axis here and you go

and enable the values the moment you

enable the the values start showing the

secondary y AIS now because of kind of

values you have there was no need of

secondary ya axis it was not showing but

you can enable it let me disable it and

let me do one thing instead of gross let

me try to bring in

margin on the second line

AIS now the moment I bring in margin

percentage because I manually switched

it off it's not showing me so I will

switch it on and do but usually what

happens is basically when you have the

majors which are not of the same kind of

a range it will show you the secondary

yaxis automatically now what I'm going

to do here is I'll going to play around

few things and tell you what all you can

do now this is one thing which you can

have similarly you can even have a

legend and along with the legend also it

will work but Legend do not work for the

line so if you want multiple lines you

need to have multiple measures so like I

have I have margin on the line axis I

can have discount but the legend is not

going to work if you're looking for a

legend then it's not going to work on

the secondary y AIS it is true across

line

chart line clustered column chart and

line

tagged column chart it's through across

that so I'm going to remove it again

same thing we have one more thing which

we have done in the past instead of

having it as a legend we can have it

second AIS more than one and

both are them in the expanded manner

then also we can have it but again we

have the lines based on the majors we

know can't use legend for that now you

have the lines U then again you can use

different kind of formattings what we

are going to do here is first of all um

we will go to

the below and the there is section for

columns where we can do the formatting

for the columns and then there is a

section for the line where we can do the

formatting for the line now because we

are using only one to xais or we are not

using any Legend there is only one major

we get the FX option so that is again

the what you are showing on the primary

AIS even if you're showing the line on

the primary AIS still if ideally there

is this column contains one there's no

Legend then you will be able to get the

FX option means you can do conditional

formatting now if you want border we can

have the Border here I like to increase

little bit transparency this is too

darker so I actually wanted to increase

a little bit transparency to look look

and match the column color is something

which I want to use I also want to

increase the Border width so that it is

little bit wider so these are some of

the things we have done in the others

also and then if required you can

increase the space between categories so

that they are little thinner bar you can

use reset to default for a particular

category to make it now series is we are

talking about margin all or discount so

if all what are the options you have is

you can decide for both the lines

whether you want solid or dotted now

here I'm going to CH show you this line

smooth and sted so now I'm going to make

it smooth you see this is the smooth

line and this is the property I've not

shown you in the line visual because we

had too many values there then you have

the sted layout which is basically the

step one so let's do one thing uh

instead of all the series let's go to

the margin percentage we have the margin

percentage as the smooth

line so we have one smooth line and when

we have stepped line now width right now

is three but I'm going to do one thing

I'm going to go to markers enable it now

both the lines are markers what I'm

going to do here is I go to the margin

percentage and let me see do I need

disable no I need margin I need marker

for margin percentage I don't need

marker for the one the step layout so I

removed

the marker for the discount percentage

so there is no marker for the discount

percentage let me change it to margin

percentage I keep the marker and I can

have different kind of marker let me

take a different kind of marker this

time make it little bit bigger color I

am fine with whatever color it has but

what I'm going to do here is I will go

up and right now already in the series I

have margin

percentage I go to the line and I make

St as

zero all the value is there now what we

can do here is basically when we go to

the data label and enable

it now we have enabled for everything

now one thing is that only for this dot

this values is coming this percentage

value is only for this dot you see

carefully that for this dot the values

is coming I can completely remove the

marker also and keep the values also

sometime we do that kind of hiding off

line and just keeping the value let's

say I'm showing net and I want to show

the value of gross and I put a line of

gross and then I just keep the values of

gross and don't show anything on but I

can see the de values and all the data

level properties like title value this

is basically major driven so basically

what I happening these labels are major

driven labels now everything which you

want to do you can have a major me for

title you can have measure for Value you

can have measure for details so three

things you can have like not everywhere

I want to have titles so what I can do

here is basically when I go to data

label I can for the margin

percentage I wanted to have a title also

for margin percentage I have title in

the single line right now it is there if

you remember the property we have here

is when we go Below in the layout we can

decide whether it's a single line or

multi-line I can make it multi-line

uh now I'm as of now I'm only doing it

for Discount I can do it for all of them

in this manner we can do those changes

so this is our bar and line let me call

it with the simpler

name and let me duplicate

this same way what I can do is I can

click on this and convert it into staged

bar and line now when I convert it you

will might see only small difference

nothing much has changed but the things

will change the moment I bring in

category

here once I bring in the legend now you

can see the Legends also here and then

as usual on the column values you have

this thought order

reversal and you can have the space

between the

serieses now for line we

have markers and everything so you can

play around with the data label if you

want and then we have the series label

when we go down we have the CDs discount

and margin the labels are shown here

basically if I enable it now you can

decide for each series what you want the

position on right or left you want and

the value and the series color whatever

you want and word r if the series name

is pretty long you can have that you

want to have background so I enabled the

background but both the series color and

the background color uh need to be a

little bit different so let me change

the background color to different

you can see transparency I can

increase total labels again because it's

a stagged visual so you can have the

total label but it will look too busy if

I have that and then we have the error

bar options and where you can use

various stuff in this manner um I have

this tagged and line

visual as you can see that with the new

major driven labels and with the help

from the data label enhancement and the

enhancement which has been done for the

bar WID for the transparency and the

Sorting of the bar we got a new era in

the visualization of the tagged Visual

and the clustered column bar visual to

take them to the next level and as you

can see those of you have watched the

series in the last year you will see a

lot of difference in terms of what we

are creating here versus what we have

created last year visual level format

sting has been released in August 2024

and now we are going to discuss those

this part of the video I'm using a

little different file not the same file

which we are using for learn power ba

series I'm using the abstract thesis

data file but I'm using the same model

so you will be able to relate with what

I doing using the same fields which are

available in your learn powerbi files

which I have shared with you on the

GitHub so let me quickly jump onto the

August 2024 notes and in August 2024

notes if you scroll a little bit down

you get this new feature which is visual

level format things now you might be

knowing that visual level and

calculations have came few days back and

you would like to format those strings

and there was this challenge how do we

format how this option has came and

there are various things which has been

supported now so it is not only

supporting at the visual level but it

has been done in a manner that you can

do it at the model level visual level

and and the element level so let's

understand this feature first of all let

me click on that SC down for visual

level format strings let's understand

this feature visual level format thingss

are here providing you with the more

options configure matting and configure

the formatting originally bu for visual

calculation this has been actually bu

for the visual calculation the core

ability that the visual level format

strings provide is the ability to format

visual calculation basically it allows

you to format the visual calculation

which is basically when you create these

new visual calculation or visual level

calculation or me visual calculation are

not in the water you cannot format them

unless you are using them in data labels

or a specific part of the card and new

slicer manual basically what happens is

because we were formatting our measures

at the model level and then if you want

to format them further we were

formatting them in the data labels and

few places in the card which were nicer

other than that we were not able to

format and if you want to format your

visual calculation that's the option we

were using now we would like to go

beyond that and we would like to them at

the visual level with visual level

formatting string you can do that so

means you will be able to format the

visual calculations for visual level

format string however are useful even

without visual without visual

calculation they are also useful what

are the three levels now we can do it

model level we format this model level

you can set the format for columns and

measures in the model anywhere you can

use that column or measure the

formatting of the apply unless over

written by a visual calculation element

level form what is the visual level then

this is what is introducing here or

introduced today with with this release

notes you can set the format of the

string any column or a major or a visual

calculation that is on your visual even

they already had a format string in

cases the model level format string were

written visual level format string would

be used because this visual level will

have higher priority over the model

level now next come the element level

you can set the format for data labels

and specific elements of the new card

and new slicer visual this will be

pended including much more in the future

any format string you set here will

override the format string on the visual

add the model so now you will explain

you element level selected element on a

selected visual measures or column and

visual calculation both it applied

visual selected visual applies to measor

and columns and visual calculations

model it applies to all the pages and

the reports on the same model and which

one will impact it has been given here

so first is model level if you have the

visual level the visual level will apply

if you have the element level then the

element level settings will apply it has

been explained from where you can get

the model level so model L you can set

from the major tool or the column tool

or you have these properties under the

modeling from where you can apply the

model level setting for visual level you

can find it under the data format once

you open and select the visual when you

further go down you let's say you want

to set up the data label inside the data

label further you can go ahead and

change the formatting of your measure

using the format strings so this example

is been given now the total is shown as

scientific notation but only in the data

label not in other places such as tool

tip as shown below notice how the

element level formatting is used in the

data label but visual level model format

thing is still used for the other

elements in the same visual now we have

understood this feature detailed time

has come that we go to powerb desktop

and explore this feature out so let's

move to the power ba desktop and here

I'm going to add a new page and in this

new page I'm going to add a table visual

in this table visual let me bring in BR

let me also bring in and let me

duplicate it a bar visual because not

every property applies everywhere in the

bar visual let me go ahead and enable

the data labels also I'll open up the

property Pane and I will enable now the

data labels as you can see data is now

displayed in millions and this happens

because of the data label properties so

go to data

labels go down and then open values and

inside the values you will see the

display format is Auto and you can

change it as per your requirement so now

let's go ahead and custom on look at the

formatting of the major this click on

the major under the major tool you will

be able to see the formatting of the

major right now the formatting is joural

and all other values are set to the

default values so let's start by by

changing the format so I can click on

the format and start writing down my own

format so I would like to write down a

format hash comma hash HH hash and I'll

not give any decimal place or zeros

after that now if you see the other

things were disabled and if you look at

my net menue here now net has no decimal

place it has been formatted using the

million format let's look at the bar

Visual and in the bar visual on the tool

tip you will see it is following the

model format

we have to now discuss the label format

but before that let's experiment with

the properties of table visual I can go

to properties and under which I can

found data format I don't want to set up

for brand but I would like to set up it

for net which is auto as of now

following the model level formatting I

can click into the format and replace it

with a million format of hash comma hhhh

do0 so I will now get one decimal place

press enter to commit and now go back to

the table visual where we have done this

you can see one decimal place is coming

which is the visual level format

different from the model level now to

explore the additional properties what

we are going to do is we are going to go

to the bar Visual and try to set up some

visual level and elements level

formatting I go to the bar visual here

and in the bar visual I go to the

property and I have data format and I

want to give a data format now the

format which I given for the table

visual definitely not going to apply

here we will give the same format here

hash comma Hash Hash has do0 it means

one decimal cas you will observe no

difference in the data label but when

you go to the tool tip you see it is one

decimal place in the million format and

that is what we wanted so now my visual

is following the visual level format but

I'm missing a visual with a global

format so what I'm going to do here is

I'm going to add one additional visual

here so let me add a bar visual here and

inside this bar visual I will go ahead

and add net and brand from the item

table and now if you look at this visual

you have the global format now we would

like to go ahead and experiment with the

element level formatting so let me click

on the first bar visual which I've

created and go to the data labels in the

data label let's scroll down to the

values and inside the values we have

display unit you can select the display

unit as null and you will observe that

now the labels are also following visual

level format in display unit you can

also choose any other formats like

thousands

million

billion Etc you can prefer to choose

Auto format Auto is the one of the most

common format we use and once you are

using Auto format you can decide the

number of decimal places let's say you

can change it to one or two now I would

like to give a custom format the moment

I choose it it shows me the visual level

format let's start writing down now hash

comma Hash Hash Hash the million format

d0 and0 means you have to show two

decimal places in place of 0 0 if I

would have used Hash Hash it means the

digits are optional it means if there is

a one digit it will show one digit not

two digit after the decimal so let's

look at this line where we have 7.0 if I

would have used Hash Hash after the

decimal it would have only shown 7 not

70 dou 0 makes it compulsory to have two

decimal places we are now using three

different formatting for this measure

net so if I click on this measure net

you will see at the model level we don't

have any decimal places and if you go to

the tool tip of the second bar visual

you don't see any tool tip on the table

visual you see the visual level format

with one decimal place on the first bar

visual you see on the data label the two

decimal places means the element level

formatting and in the tool tip you see

the visual level formatting now we have

explored the format string feature at

Major level visual level and the element

level but the visual level format

feature has came for the visual

calculation so let's go ahead and

explore one visual calculation too let

me add a visual calculation on the table

visual the calculation I want to add

here is next next of the net I want it

means it's going to give me the next row

let me press enter and it is giving me a

calculation which is giving me Nest but

the formatting is not following any of

the format which we have done at the

model or the visual level we need to

change the format and to change the

format we'll go to the format pan format

pain properties and inside this we will

choose this calculation and now here we

can give a format what we want hash

comma Hash Hash has the million format

and as you can see the calculation is

showing without any decimal place but

net is following its own format which is

basically having one decimal place now

you have seen how to format a visual

calculation at the visual level we have

now learned how to format at element

level visual level and mod level so why

would you go ahead and try out visual

level format

strings let's understand what is Dax and

what I'm going to do is I'm going to use

the definitions which has been provided

on Microsoft Larn site so that we are

you know very near to what Microsoft has

given so Dex is data analysis expression

is a Formula expression language used in

analysis services powerbi and power

power in Excel Dex formula include

functions op ators and values to perform

Advanced calculation and queries on the

data in related tables and columns in

the tabular data model so in all these

analysis Services power VI power pivot

we use tabular data model so in the

table of data model to create the

formulas or the calculation we use Tex

and this is what we are going to use now

onwards a lot when we are going to learn

the formulas The Columns the calculated

column Majors tables RLS Etc so Dex is

used in Dex calculations Dex formulas

are used in Majors calculated column

calculated tables visual calculations

and Ru of security these are the places

where Dex calculations are used so first

of all what is Dex measure measures are

Dynamic calculation formulas where the

result change depending on the context

means if the your filter context is

changing then the results will change

majors are used in reporting that

support combining filtering model data

by using multiple attributes such as

power V report or Excel pivot table or

pivot chart measur are created by using

Dex formula bar in the model designers

and we'll go to the power VI desktop

this is where we are going to learn the

Dex measures we have the option to

create the measures we have it in under

the Home tab we will also get it in to

the table tools that's calculated column

the calculated column is a Col column

that you add to an existing table in the

model designer and then create a Tex

formula that defines that column's value

when a calculated column contains a

valid Dex formula the values are

calculated for each rows as soon as the

formula is entered the values are then

stored in the inmemory data model so

basically the Dex calculated columns

will be calculated and will be stored in

the model while the measures are

basically runtime which is going to be

executed when we actually use them onto

the visualization T calculated tables

calculated table is computed objects

based on the formula expression DED from

all or part of the other tables in the

same model instead of querying and

loading the values into your new table

column from a data source a de formula

defines the tables value so basically

you are not getting it from The Source

you are actually calculating it based on

the other data which is coming from

source so basically it can be based on

other table or time we may create tables

like calendar table which is actually

driven by completely by the formula only

calculated table support relationship

with other tables means yes do you are

calculating a table but still it can

have relationship with our tables

calculated tables are recalculated if

any of the table it pulls data from our

refreshed or updated so if it is taking

data from any table and that table's

data get refreshed it will also get

refreshed and updated visual calculation

the Dex visual calculation has been very

decently added to powerb a visual

calculation is a DEX calculation that

defined and executed directly on a

visual so it is only at the visual level

not beyond that so the scope of visual

calculation is visual visual

calculations make it easier to create

calculations that are previously hard to

create getting a simpler decks easier to

maintain and better performance so the

reason for giving this is basically you

want to have a simpler Dex like looking

into previous no R next Row first row

last row or even creating the running

sum all these are going to be really

easy if you use Dex visual calculations

Dex queries Dex queries can be created

and run in Dex query view of power ba

desktop and open source tools like Dex

Studio unlike the calculation formulas

which can be only created in a tabular

model Dex query can also be run against

analysis service multi-dimensional model

Dex queries are often easier to write

and more efficient than the

multi-dimensional data expression MDF

queries so those of you who have used

the multi-dimensional models you might

know that the m DX query is used and it

is real now Dex is easier again the Dex

query is basically we are trying to do

what we are doing in the sequel to write

down the select query here we are

writing down Dex queries now the Dex

query when you wanted to write down in

Dex query view or Dex Studio you need to

make sure that it returns a table and

you can also use evaluate function to

evaluate these queries just like select

does the job for you in the SQL World

evaluate is going to do the job for you

so to run the Dex queries you need to

use evaluate one should make sure that

the query should return return a table

so if it returns a table then it's going

to be displayed in the Dex query view or

the de view you can also use order by

index queries which we do not use in the

visual explicitely because what happens

in the visual we have a option to sort

on a particular column and we use that

option to sort we we do need to mention

that okay order by this column that has

been taken care by the visual features

data type what all data types de support

you can import data into a model from

many different data sources that might

support different data types when you

import data into a model the data is

converted to one of the tabular model

data types and these are the data types

it will be converted whole number

basically the number without a decimal

place so this is very similar to

integers decimal numbers Boolean text

date date and time valid dates are all

dates after March 1 1900 so if you have

a date before that then it might not

work currency and a blank these are the

various data types which you which are

supported on the Dex and you when you

are going to use that you will realize

that these are sufficient for our

calculations and you know working on the

so Dex variable you can create variable

within an expression using where so you

can create a variable variable is

technically not a function it's not a

function it is a keyword to store the

results of an expression as named

variable so basically you are going to

have an expression and that expression

will be saved as a variable it will be

given a name and that name can be used

further that variable can be passed as

an argument to another as an argument to

other major expression for example major

equal to where Max of Max State and then

you'll use the written statement and

then you're going to use it again like

in this case we are using calculate sum

of say gross am out filter all date date

of date equal to Max so I'm using the

variable and it is really important

whenever you are using a variable

whether you are using in a measure or

whether you are using it in a column you

need to use the written statement

written statement is only needed when

you are using variable if you are not

having a variable you could have used

simply let's say major equal to sum of

gross amount that will also work when

you're using Dex variable so you need to

make sure when you're are using Dex

variables you should use a written

statement to complete your measure or a

calculator column so these are the

various definitions I wanted you to know

before we move into the depth of the

deex now we will now go ahead and

discuss context there are various kind

of context in Dex and it is really

important to understand that now some

time when we are using these context we

may use only the word context or a

visual context or a row context we'll

also try to understand that so let's

understand the different kind of

contexts which are available in power ba

or in the tax so what is context context

is an important concept to understand

when creating the Dex formula context

enables you to perform Dynamic analysis

as the result of a formula change to

reflect the current row or the cell

selection and also any related data

understanding context and using context

efficiently are critical for building

High performing Dynamic analysis and for

troubleshooting the problems in the

formula so basically context is applying

everywhere and we need to understand

what are the different kind of context

and which context is applying back

formulas in the table or model can be

evaluated in different context depending

on other design elements what are those

Design Elements filter applied in a

pivot table or a report filter defined

within a formula relationship is

specified by special functions using

formula there are different type of

contexts B context query context and

filter cont context now let's understand

row context row context can be thought

as row context can be thought of as the

current row if you create a formula in

the calculated column the row context

for the formula is include the value

from all the columns in the current row

if the table is related to another table

the content is also included all the

values from other tables that are

related to the current row is basically

every row it will get executed and every

row has a context that is where the row

context comes in place for example

support you create a calculated column

quantity 1 plus quantity 2 let's add the

values from two columns quantity one and

quantity 2 from the same table this

formula automatically gets only the

value from the current Row in the

specified column so it's only getting

one row it is not getting more than that

so that is where the row context is

applied the row context also follows any

relationship that has been defined

between the tables including

relationship defined with the a

calculated column by using Dex formulas

to determine which Row in the related

tables are associated with the current

row related function can fetch a related

table based on the relation so basically

you you can say Quantity plus related

tables quantity so it is going to fetch

row by row that values so all these

places is row context so basically your

row itself is a filter of data it is not

going beyond that particular rows

calculation so it's not that if I say

Quantity 1 plus quantity 2 it going to

sum up all the quantities in the table

that's not going to happen we will take

example when it's going to happen but

that's not going to happen with the row

context is in place so Dex is multiple

row context Dex include function that

iterates calculation over a table these

functions can have multiple current rows

which each with its own content T in a

sense these function let you create the

formula that perform operation

recursively over an inner and outer loop

so basically you are executing on more

than one rules for example suppose your

model contains product table and sales

table user might want to go through

entire Sal table which is full of

transaction involving multiple products

and find the largest quantity order for

each product for any one of these

transac this is one example when you

want to calculate multiple rows of the

sales table against the each product

that's where you are using multiple row

contacts with the Dex you can build a

single formula that Returns the correct

value and results are automatically

updated at the time user adds the data

to a table so the Dex will take care of

the execution and you will get the

correct formula so one of the example

using earlier is like I want to find out

the first sales State when the customer

came to me for first time so this is

minx filter sales custom customer ID

equals to earlier customer ID so it's

going to look at for all the customers

in that table and go to find out the

minimum save date to summarize the

earlier function store the row context

from the operation that precedes the

current operation so basically it's a

multiple row context which is coming

into play in this case so let's

understand query context query context

refers to the subset of the data that is

implicitly retrieved from a formula for

example when a user places a measure or

the field into the report the engine

examines the row and the column headers

slicers and Report filter to determine

the context the necessary query then

runs against the model data to get the

correct subset of the data makes

calculation defined by the formula and

populate the values in the report so

basically what happens when you create a

visual so it has it might be getting

slies it might be creating filters it

might have the columns row columns or

column head

based on all those a query context is

formed and then you get the result so

this is what the query context is

because the context changes depending on

where you place the formula the result

of the formula can also change for

example suppose you create a formula

that sums the value in gross amount

column of the sales table let's say sum

of gross amount if you use this in a

calculated column within a sales table

the result of the formula will also be

same as the entire table because the

query context of the formula is always

the entire data set of the c table the

results will have gross amount for all

regions all products all years and so on

so if use the sum of gross sales amount

in a calculated column versus a major

your expectation of result should be

different in case of a mejor it is based

on the query context of what is present

in the visual in column headers Ru

headers or what is coming because of

filters and slices but in case of the

calculated column is going to take the

complete Sal table and go to calculate

however user typically don't want to see

the same results hundreds of time but

instead of instead of want to get profit

of a particular year a particular

country or a particular product or

combination of these to get the grand

total so this is what we want we

actually wanted to group the data this

is what we do in a powerb visual we

wanted to have the grouping of the data

based on particular year country Etc in

a report the context is changed by

filtering or adding or removing the

fields and using the slices for each

change the query context in the measure

is evaluated therefore the same formula

used in a measure is evaluated in

different query context for each cell so

basically your visual may have different

set of columns different set of filter

filters and slices and based on that it

is going to be evaluated in different

query context let's come to now filter

context filter context is a set of

values allowed in each column or in the

values retrieved from a related table

filter can be applied to the column in

the designer or presentation layer

reports or pivot table filters can also

be defined explicitly by filter

expression in the formula so we have

filters and slices we also have you know

filter expression in which we can use in

calculate or the expression function

that also can give us the filter context

filter context is added when you specify

filter filter con States on a set of

values allowed in a column or a table

using the arguments to the formula

filter context applies on the top of

other contexts such as row context or

query context so filter context is going

to apply on on top of the other context

such as row context and query context

that we to remember in tabular model

there are many ways to create the filter

context within the context of client

that can consume the model such as

powerb reports user can create filter on

the Fly by adding slicers or report

filters on the row or column headings

you can also specify filter expression

directly within the formula to specify

related values to filter tables that are

used as inputs or to dynamically get the

context of the values that are used in

the calculation you can completely clear

or selectively clear the filter of a

particular column this is very useful

while creating the formulas that

calculates Grant to so what would happen

now there is a filter context which is

applying and because the visual is

getting executed the visual rowes is

actually having a particular value

getting filtered now you don't want that

kind of filter happening because of the

visual Ro so there are functions like

all all selected using which you can you

know go beyond your context you can

completely clear or selectively clear

those particular columns filter context

and get a formulas which will help you

to get Grand totals so this is what we

understood about different context not

what you're going to do is you're going

to explicitly look at this row context

and filter context and when we go to the

visualization quite a few time we are

only going to talk about filter context

but by the definition you might see that

it is applicable on a larger context or

some other context but we'll try to

limit ourself to use few terms and I'm

going to explain you what are the terms

which we are going to use when we are

going to look at these context in the

visuals let's understand the difference

between the row context and the filter

context and also look at the powera file

to understand the different kind of

context we have understood few minutes

back so let me take you through uh the

next slide let's have a look at the

differences so basically the row context

as we have understood already is a

physical row of the table so basically

when you're doing a calculated column

then what essentially you're doing is

every row by row that calculation is

happening or basically row filtering is

applying on every row so you are only

limited by the data of that particular

row that is where we say row context is

applied now similarly when you use

iterator functions like filter sumx

average X add columns you can also

access the row context so like say if

you use in the sumx you use the sales

table then you're also creating a row

context because at that time you are at

the row of the table and you can do that

while creating a major also now row

context applies to one row at a time not

more than one row because we have multi-

row context if you remember for that a

filter context if you apply how can it

come it come can come because of the

slicers or the filter which are

available on the page it may come

because of the visual so visual has

every row and it row has a column or row

because of which the values are coming

and they are coming as a filter context

Dex calculations like when we use

calculate function we are giving filter

expression and those are also acting as

a filter context and filter context

usually applies to a set of rows now

let's jump out the power be file and try

to understand the row context first of

all if I go to my sales table in the

table view if you remember we have done

certain calculations and one of the

calculation which we have done here is

the gross amount when you look at the

gross amount what is this calculation

sales quantity multiply by price now

this is a calculated column there is no

aggregation here and this calculation is

going to be done row by row so here row

context is applying and you're only

getting a data of a row you're not

getting beyond that same way we have

cogs calculation which is again the row

by row calculation discount amount is

again row by row calculation but if I

come to sum of gross sales if you

remember we discussed in the query

context now here what is happening the

entire table is available when we are

doing this kind of operation and what

are the other Contex text apply now when

we are on a visual the other context may

come because of able visual or the bar

visual or because of the grouping they

are providing in the visual now here

there is nothing which is coming in for

that and that is why you are getting the

full total and that that is why you will

find that I am keep on mentioning this

whenever you are using aggregate

function in a colum it gives you full

table so you have access to full table

and to reduce that you have to use some

kind of a filter function or something

like we have seen the example of earlier

in multi row context so same example we

have here the first change date where we

are using this filter function and

earlier a multi row context so here we

are having this multi row context

basically what is happening your

customer ID equals to customer ID in the

full sales table we're finding out the

subset of the rows which are satisfying

these conditions in the sales table

where current rules customer ID is

equals to the customer ID of the sales

table and that subset of row you're

using to find out the minimum sales

state which is becoming your first sales

dates same way we have also calculated

the last sales date so these are you

know the calculation which is coming

from multirow Context now let's go back

to the

visualization and in the visualization

if you look at this visual this visual

is having row if you look at this row it

is filtering the data for that Row for

category one but also if you look at the

gross column this particular row it is

not giving this total like what we are

getting in the column because here the

categories filter context is applying on

this visual row and restricting the data

to category one so basically what you

call the data is getting grouped so data

is getting filtered for category one for

this particular visual row so here we

can say that you know each row is

getting a filter context of category so

when there is a category or there's a

brand each row will get the filter

context of those UNS sumarized column or

group by columns and because of that you

are getting that particular value for

each row so filter context is passing

now additional filter context can be

added from filters from slicers and then

that will further reduce your data for a

row so different kind of filter contexts

are getting applied on this one so now

what could happen you could go ahead and

add a filter or a slicer and can apply

to this particular Visual and that will

also give you the context so what

happens let's say I can go here and put

a brand let's say I mly put a filter as

a page and I can select brand one now

what you are seeing is this filter is

also getting passed to this Visual and

your result or your query context has

changed to get the results so now we are

getting data of brand one for this

Visual and in inside this visual every

rule like category one is getting data

for category one category four is

getting data for the category four so

the context is getting applied to each

and every row so now you might have got

a little bit of idea of different kind

of context and what would happen that

you know when we are going to go ahead

and look at various calculation we will

talk about that context and sometime we

might simply use the generic term

context but looking at whether we are

talking at the visual level or whether

we are talking in a calculation the

calculation could be in the major

formula you will be able to identify

that which context we are talking about

here which context is going to apply

when we use that particular kind of

calculation or when we are talking about

visual which context we are talking so

let's understand how we are going to use

various terms so whenever there is a

slicer or filter which is passing the

filter context we may simply use the

term okay the it is getting filtered or

it is getting filter context similarly

the visual may also pass the filter

context so we can say use the term

context filter context visual row filter

context or row filter context means when

the visual have let's say category or

brand and it is filtering the data for

that also there is a filter context

which is passing but we will K may use

to explain you better like okay this is

visual rows filter context is passing

now when we use Dex formula and we have

the filter because of that we may say it

is Formula filter context or simply the

context so this is how we are going to

use the terms uh in the upcoming videos

based on that it will be helpful for you

to identify which context we are talking

about so now we will understand Dex

query View and first of all what we are

going to do is we are going to go and

look at the release note of Dex query

view to understand it little bit in

details and we are just starting with

the Dex journey I might not be able to

give you complete

overview of what all Dex query view can

do so what we will do is first let's

understand the basic of what de query

view can do and later on we will come

back and explore Dex query view in

little bit details so let's start the

journey with the blog in November 2023

the feature of Dex query view has been

released an additional tab on the left

hand pan has been added for Dex query

View and this feature will allow you to

run Dex qu directly from Power VI

desktop you don't need external Studios

for that release notes of November 2023

talks about this feature but very

recently a detailed article has been

given on blog. powerbi.com or powerbi

microsoft.com

slus blog we are going to look into the

article as well as we are going to play

around with the Dex query view in powerb

desktops let's quickly have a look at

the blog as you can see as a first thing

the various components have been

explained so we have the data pane here

we have the quick measures option we

have the command bar here ribbon Dex

query view access via the fourth view

option the fourth view option which we

are going to check out in some time Dex

query

editor which is this portion and the

result grade which is the this

particular section and then we can have

query tabs we can have multiple

queries how Dex query view is going to

help us out H has been described in this

blog quick queries from the data Paine

to make it easy to create Dex queries

direct model author can use Dex query

view new measure authoring workflow we

will see how can we create new measures

directly from here CeX query of the

visuals create your own Dex

query now those of who who are from the

powerbi world and never used deck studio

uh you might not have seen the use of

evaluate now what happens when you want

to

evaluate a query in the Dex view or in

the Dex Studio you require evaluate and

then you write down evaluate and a query

a DEX query typically should return a

table so all every time we trying to

bring in uh xquery we try to return a

table and then you say evaluate and the

expression which return returns as a

table and that's how you get it now if

you want to create something new or you

want to Define Majors then you use the

Define keyword where you can Define the

majors now these measures are defined in

the context of that particular query so

let's read out the definition from here

evaluate evaluate which is required that

specific what data you want to see

Define which is optional that can

specify a measure or named Dex formula

to use in the Dex query this measure can

already be in the model or not if

already exists you can make changes that

only apply to the Dex query to try them

out you can also have the option to

update the model with these mejor which

we will get into more details later in

this blog so in this blog they have

shown you how can you save the changes

in the major and we are going to

experiment with that

also when we are going to take the

Practical examples now one example has

been given for a de query summarized

column is one thing which

returns table and that is how we can use

it if you go down more examples have

been given also equalent sqls have been

provided in this blog so that you can

understand what's happening out

here as you you can see the queries are

run using evaluate

expression select column is another

function which can return return you a

table with the selection of columns what

you want and we order by something which

we don't frequently use in powerbi

because we use the visual sorting and

visual sorting internally applies that

order by but here you can explicitly

call order by

function then show data preview in the

quick measure then it will generate a

query for you Dex query and you can run

that few more

examples then you have uh Define with

the references if you have a major and

you want to Define its references then

you have an option when you are running

the query you can see the def references

has been defined you can change the

definition a little bit while uh doing

the evaluation of that particular major

in the Dex view so as you can see some

of the majors have been changed and it

is asking do you want to update or

override those measures I may or may not

want that I'm just experimenting it here

by changing it what would happen so you

have a place where you can experiment

how your different measures or different

combination of the defination is going

to result in the data and then few more

things have been explained

here we have learned now quite a few

visuals and there are still few visuals

which are left out and we will take up

those visuals once we are able to learn

T and able to create more complex M once

we are done with that we will come back

and we will learn how to use conditional

formatting and how can we create some

other visuals and in those visuals we

need few calculations which are

dependent on some decks this time when

we are going to learn creation of new

major just like we created the majors

initially uh we can take help of a new

major which is available on the top

under the major tool or table tool or

Home tab but we are also going to take

help of this new feature which has came

in 2023 which is Dax query view view in

the Dex query view we will be able to

put the definition of an existing major

modify it and get a new major or we

simply Define a new major and and we

will be able to use it so Dex query view

is something very similar to those who

have learned SQL it's like in a SQL

editor or SQL Developer where you write

down the SQL statement and execute them

to get the query result so these are the

Dex queries which we are going to write

down here and you will get the results

so before we Deep dive into the majors

we're going to learn little bit about

this Tex query View and as I already

opened it you can see that there is

already in a statement top top and 100

customer we do have a table with that

name I'll explain you what this so

whenever we are going to do anything in

a visualization we are not going to use

this valuate function at the max I will

do this top and 100 now top end is a

function which can give top values 100

is the number of values and customer is

the expression or the table which I've

given so it's giving me of 100 customers

important thing which we have to

remember when we are in the Dex query

view is that whatever we are writing

down here when we are to evaluate it

should give us a table and there are

many ways we can get table we will learn

them as we go move forward now if we

look at what all options we have on the

top of the Dex query view we have

something known as format query so if

you write down a complex query and if

you want to format it let's say can we

format it further yes this is how it

will get formatted you want to comment

you want to write down something let's

say we have written I will learn Dex you

can go and comment it here you want to

uncomment you can uncomment or these

three lines are I want to uncomment I

can go ahead and uncomment in one go

comment then we want to find something

we can use find and find it here inside

this one you want to replace something

and then you have a command pet where

you know above the cursor below the

cursor you want to search something that

can help you I want to execute a major

how do I execute a major or get its

value in the de can remove this and you

can have multiple queries you have tabs

below to M run the multiple queries so

what I can do here is I can go to one of

the existing major and I can right click

and say quick queries I have evaluated

Define and evaluate Define with

reference and evaluate Define all

measures in this model now evaluate

means simply it will give me evaluate

expression Define and evaluate will give

me definition how it defined now so let

me add the Define and evaluate so it's

giving me a function summarize column

I'll explain you what this summarize

column means so let me evaluate this

first of all I can also evaluate this

without so basically what happens in Dex

query view that we need to evaluate and

then we need a table expression this is

how it works so summarize columns is

also going to give us table expression

what it does is you can have the name

and then you can have expression name

expression name expression you can also

add filters this is how summarized

column works now if the major is in the

schema or the model you can use it but

let's say I want to change this

definition of the major how does we

Define a major first of all let's

understand now this one so we first we

say Define mejor the table and the mejor

name the new major name or the major

name which you want and the definition

the expression basically so this is our

expression part this is the left hand

side measure name part this is how you

define it now can I have the two

definitions here yes I what I can do is

I can say multiply by two and I can keep

a bracket to give the preference

multiplication any way is going to take

a preference I can run this now you can

see that it takes the new definition the

local definition local definition would

be given a priority you can simply say

evaluate then you see the old definition

now let us say I want to Define my own

new major so what I can do is I can copy

and I'll say gross one what is my gross

one what was my gross actually my gross

was sum of sales gross amount this was

my gross so what I need to do is now I

need to add this measure and before I

tell you I I'll even tell you one single

function which is row what row function

can do is row function can actually take

a name expression name expression name

expression and it only gives me one row

summarize column is even more powerful

it can have a group buse also we have

not added the group by there so so let

me execute it first of all evaluate for

first time evaluated with net original

definition of net because we have not

used Define what I can do here is

basically I can add a column name static

column and I'll call this as grand total

because row is giving me only one row it

typically used also to create one row of

data row again but it gives me a table

name so expression name expression name

expression this is what the syntax is

name expression name expression keep on

going like this now third one is gross

we created here I'm not calling it gross

one I'm simply using gross and then I'll

use my gross one and gross one is only

local it's not being created till now so

I got it but what do You observe here

other than you know it's giving me the

data is update the model override the

measure update the model add new measure

these are the two new options which are

coming in it means if I want I can add

this measor but right now what I'm doing

I'm testing it so no need to do now we

have learned about this thing something

known as sum you already know this same

way as sum we have min max count count

majors are there now let's go ahead and

do this now I'm going to create it and

then we are going to use it there also

so let me say what is Max here and let

me call it as gross two then gross three

this is Min Min of gross amount then we

can have one more which is Count now I

don't want to count the see gross amount

I want to count let's say order number

and remember my order numbers are unique

so when I go to new function which is

distinct count which is going to count

the distinct values I'm not going to use

order number I'm going to use sales City

ID so what is my sum of gross amount

what is my Max of gross amount Min of

gross amount count of order numbers and

what are the distinct number of CI in

this and I need to add all of them into

my row also it cannot happen that I I

just get it and here I can use this

formatting now let's all this formatting

every row we get this and now you can I

can do that copy paste let me put a

comma also here and then start doing the

copy paste we need gross I'm I'm giving

a different name here okay gr Min is two

Ross three is a Max also not following

the order and if you remember I am not

given name here this is gross 4 so let's

call now gross 4 was there so we will

say count orders and this way will say

distinct cities distinct cities distinct

cities so correctly the name now let's

run it now you getting this now some of

those we can create a as a major so

let's say I want this update as a new

major and it is asking this change can

not be undone means once I create I

can't undo means I have to manually go

and delete it you can't use control Z

means is going to update the model we

are fine with that isn't it okay fine

again I say update so I used update

again let me create Min of gross also

and Max up and some we already have so

we don't need it actually we will learn

the sux function now in some time then

we will try to create it from here we

know a easier way here copy paste copy

paste and do it I would like now let's

take an example of this visual here data

is grouped by category so how can we get

similar kind of example in Dex query

view how can we get the group data we

will use summarize columns or summarize

now these two functions have the ability

to have group wise as well as aggregated

column together and using that you can

create a table which will give you

aggregated columns as well as Group by

columns so let's go ahead and try that

out so if you remember when we came

initially here we have been given a

function which was summarize columns now

look at the definition of summarize

column what does it says you can give

group bu you can give filter then name

expression name we already using name

expression name expression why don't we

go ahead and give a group buy how do we

give a group buy we need item category I

given a group buy then I have name

expression name expression and let's try

out evaluate this now I can't evaluate

it alone I need to have the Define also

because there are few things which is

not created as measur and we are getting

the similar kind of results here we

created additional measure there is

average gross if I want to add it and

without even defining I can put a comma

at the end and I can say average cross

comma and if I use that start suggesting

me the majors then I can use average

cross it suggest me as soon as I type it

let me run it oh my God in this manner

this summarize column everything which

you want to use here should finally the

valuate should return table say what

happens I'm asking about return table

return table what happens if I don't do

that let's say I simply write down

evaluate this average gross now it is

already available isn't it let's select

an execute it doesn't so it needs table

and start renaming it also let's say we

call this table one we call the first

one is test there's nothing there what

we're going to do is every time and

again we going to go here and create the

majors by just copy pasting by doing

little bit faster stuff and

understanding those things so now we

have understood Dex query views and we

also understood the basic functions

available with us what we are going to

do here is basically uh is there are too

many visuals in this file so at this

stage we're going to remove all these

Pages I'll remove them one by one and

now we'll start learning Dex with almost

an empty file

so what we have done is now we

completely created the mt5 by deleting

the page we'll save this file and we

will also now do a save as and in this

save as this time we are going to give

it as a n22 name also but we are going

to say this is the second file so that

you can different that's where we

started learning the data analytics

expression and interchangeably we might

use Query view as well as the new major

functionality here whenever we want to

use that we would like to learn about

these conditional statement if and

switch so while these can be used in

column and measure so initial example

what we are going to take is here to

learn these basics of these statement we

are going to use them in column but they

can be used in major when we'll do

conditional formatting we will come

across a situation where we would be

needing the if or the switch state so

let me showcase you the syntax and then

we can apply it anywhere so I'm here on

my table View and inside the table view

the item table is already opened I would

like to Showcase you that statement here

both the statements so if a statement

and what I would like to do very simple

thing I have five categories I want

category one and two in group one

category three and four in group two and

the last category in group three that's

what I want so let's start creating

group using the if statement in a new

column so again you clicked on a column

then you will have a column tool if you

clicked on the table you will have table

tool in both you have new column click

on the new column let me start calling

this column new column is group

one and I'll start with if statement if

what is my condition if category because

I'm creating a column I can simply use

the column name belongs to the table

without using the table name but ideal

situation is use table name column in

why I'm using in because I have more

than one value or I can use R statement

in what and in we give here in the curly

brace

category 1 comma double quotes category

two close so what what is the if

statement logical test what is the true

value and what is the false value now

because I have already created a True

Value I need to have another if in the

false value so I want to call this as

group one but for remaining values I

don't have else I again need a if what

if I need is I need to Loop the if so

here what I'm going to do is if category

is three and four then it is group two

so this is in the else of the first now

what is the else of the second if I'm

looping the if inside it so the false

state when it is false what is that

group

three I close this if is close but right

now let's focus only on this if so we

have a condition when that is true what

is the outcome when that is false what

is the outcome this is one now look at

the bigger if this is the condition when

it is true what is the outcome and when

it is false what is the outcome so true

false outcomes I'm closing the first St

enter I found there is some uh spelling

mistake so let me correct

those now this is correct Category 2 is

in group one Category 5 is in group

three Category

3 is in group two category 4 is in group

two Category 3 is in group two category

1 is in group one Category 2 itself is

in group one and below that category 5

is in group three everything is correct

now we use this group see this was only

two if what happens if you have so many

multiple ifs then it will become a real

big challenge isn't it to Loop such

things so we need something known as

case statement we typically know know in

the SQL very equivalent of that one and

we have something known as switch here

switch which is equivalent of case

statement now switch can be used in two

maners so first we will learn switch

where we can give a column and we can

handle each and every value of that

column so the first we will learn the

switch where we can give the switch

statement with a column or with a major

now here we have a column so we going to

give a column and handle each and every

value and then we will learn the another

version which is switch true where we

can give conditions like we have given

in if so let me start by creating

another new column and let me call that

as group two now here what is going to

happen is I'm will use switch now the

switch I can have expression expression

can be true then I have value result

value result combination but it can also

be a column or a measure so I'll use

category as a column now when because I

used a column or I used a variable which

is having value not true false I need to

now specify each and every value so

category one what is the outcome of that

group one now in this manner I have to

now repeat this combination so let me do

one thing let me move this comma from

here to here here so that I can easily

repeat it and let me remove it from here

so now what I have to do is category 1

group one Category 2 what should be the

Category 3 category 4 last one we can

leave for else which we can call as

group three now here we need to change

category two is one Category 3 is two

group two four is group two again so

this is switch statement with a column

or a categorical value or something

which is having a value not true and

false so we have one three same groups

should exist these values should match

there should not be any difference and

they are matching you can see so this is

working now this means if I have

thousands of value I need to write it

down thousands of rows but what happens

if I have a better matter to write it

down can I use something which where I

can give the conditions just like we

have given in the case of if because

think about numerical value where we

have a range greater than equal to Z and

less than5 or less than th000 will I

write down 1 2,000 values no I don't

want to I need something which gives me

the that particular so for that we have

a switch true version

and to make it a little bit easier I'm

going to copy this statement I'll click

on any column and again create a new

column we paste this statement I'll call

this group three and let me move it down

comment it double slash is for comment

we'll use these things so we start a new

Switch this switch is now this time with

true we call this as switch true now

what happens when you use switch true

your expression should return true and

false and then you have to use the value

so what is my first statement my first

statement is category in category 1 and

two then group one I don't need to use

if I simply need to use one statement

which gives me true and false if it is

true this is going to be my result so

this statement should return true and

when this return returns true it's going

to give me this result if it returns

false it goes to the next level so here

I don't need another if looping simply I

give the next statement and if this is

true this is going to take the next

result now after I give all these

condition finally I can give one

else and then I can close the switch

statement so how switch true works you

give a statement if it is true what is

my value another statement if it is true

what is my value and finally you given

else value True Values True Values

finally else values so if there are if

if if if okay please remember in such

situation the order is also really

important now what happens sometime when

you deal with numbers you have a choice

of writing down between numbers or

sometime you can simply say so let's say

I say if it is greater than 80 I can

give the next condition as greater than

60 because greater than 80 is already

covered in the first Cod and then I can

give greater than 60 in that order so

first is greater than 80 then 60 but if

I put first greater than 60 it covers 80

so it cannot you cannot have greater 80

after that so the order of these

conditions is also really important in

some cases so you to take care how which

order you are going to give it if I

would have handled a multiple condition

and there is some kind of um priority I

need to give Whenever there is a

priority which we need to give in switch

statements it always need to come before

remember that and based on that you will

be successfully able to create switch

statements enter another column created

and we got the values here same as what

we have got in the rest

tool now let's create start creating

some expression function and what I'm

going to do I'm going to go to the major

Table and there I'll create one of them

and then we will learn more and more

details on the expression function as we

go move forward we will try with some

basic expression functions first and

then we will go little bit detail into

this one but as we progress further into

the deck create more formulas you will

learn that we can do more powerful

things so let me create a table visual

on a new page I'll start with something

which we discussed initially but we have

not done if if you remember we have this

column if you remember we had this

column gross amount is nothing but

quantity multip by sales price we also

created a mejor on that and why this is

able to give a result got as usual we

are using sum of gross amount so result

inan and this is creating an implicit

measure gross is an explicit some of

gross implicit and we when we will learn

the calculation groups later it will not

allow implicit measur so we'll only need

to use explicit measure and that's why

I'm creating explicit measure so at some

stage you need to use calculation group

you always have the measures which are

explicitly soit measure and explicit me

do I need to create a column first and

then need to do so this is is not needed

that is where the expression fun and

expression function can be used both for

column and measure we learn how to use

that in a column also so first of all

I'm going to create a new major and in

this major I'll call it

as Pro level th X now when I put this

any expression function sum X main x max

X count X there is nothing for distinct

count as of now there's no expression

function for that for these is this is a

table expression now this table can be

as simple as table name it could be a

filter with Filter expression is going

to give table then there could be

complex table Expressions which will

include functions like summarize all all

selected all these kind of stuff would

be there and then we have an expression

the calculation or a major already

existing Majors could be there or we can

Define here now when you use Simple

table it's fine you can use set of

column and calculation inside that but

when you we are going to do the complex

measures when we have the table

expression itself is in complex then we

might have to use calculate few places

inside the sumx itself in the expression

portion that we will learn little bit

later so let's start with very simple

expression function here sales and we

are going to use sales in the table part

of the expression and in the expression

we will say sales price multip by sales

quantity it means I'm trying to create a

roow level calculation so what's

happening here this is my level and as

I've given the complete table the

table's row level is my row level so

this expression has to execute at the

each row level and and that's going to

be little bit costlier calculation that

compared to the simple gross which was

simply a sum and that is where we might

have to take a call should I create a

calculated column and then majure or I

simply create a mejor it's a really

small data so it doesn't matter much

here in this case it's going to give you

same kind of performance on a larger

data you might have to take that call

and if you look at the numbers all these

three numbers are same the than the

formatting we have done formatting on

the gross we can do on the gross row

also the results are same the ground

total is also

same grand total is also same now we

have used sux same way let's if you

remember we done Min of gross and Max of

gross we not don't want to take

everything so this was gross two was Max

if I want to achieve the same Max using

this one can I achieve so I copy gross

row Max and I can use max X here instead

of and Max X also having the similar

syntax and then we have a variant thir

argument Returns the largest numeric

value or largest string result from

evaluating expression from each row of

the table so you have this values which

right now I don't want to use simply use

this and let me add it to visualization

it's giving the same result same way M

so this is the simplest way to start

with the expression fun expression

function can be used as the col column

level also but we will that little later

so now let's create little bit different

version of expression function so what

I'm going to do here is now I'll create

a new

major and in this new

mejor I will use a filter I'll say

brand one

Ross and we keep on coming back to this

then I can use filter here filter

function I'm using filter now

the let me try to use item here I use

item I say item brand equals to Brand

one question close can I use sales here

I'm not able to use sales the moment I

use a different

table other than my table which is item

I can take anything from item here

I can I can count the item I can count

the brand I'm not able to get that so

what I can use here is I can use the

gross here major I can use a measure

here this portion I use a filter which

does not belongs to the table on which

I'm using the filter in the table region

if I in the expression if I use a filter

which is on a table on which final my

column is not there I want to do the

calculation then what I have to do here

is the major expression can be a major

Al and as you can see this is giving the

correct value but there's one more way

now not for the brand one let's say I

want to filter something as quantity or

something on the sales table itself if I

want to filter something on sales table

let's say

gross

sales

one

THX filter I can use

sales

item sales sales Item ID equals to one

close the filter and then I can use

sales quantity I can sum the sales

quantity or maybe because we are using

gross so we for us to know

price I got brand the item one is

falling in this category so I'm getting

this now not only filter I can give this

single value I can also make do a little

bit more complex stuff so the filter

expression could be really complex I can

have multiple conditions I can use in or

all those stuff I can do

we that we'll learn when we are doing

calculate but one thing I would like to

tell you before we move ahead with the

more complex functions is that I can

here I can say let's say sales

qy quantity sales

quantity greater than let me call it as

gross sales so now it's going to sum

everything which is greater than two you

remember we have done some kind of

visual level filter for that now there's

no need of visual filter I have actually

made it part of the EXP function so this

is very basic start of the expression

function do and as we progress further

we will learn more complex which we can

do so let's Now understand the

difference between filtering a data in

calculate with and without filter

function so let's say we want to give a

filter expression in the calculate

without using a filter function how

would we give let's say calculate net

item brand equal to Brand one we want to

use filter function how would we give

we'll give calculate net filter item

item brand equal to Brand one now when

the visual will contain brand into the

visualization you will see a difference

you might not see difference when when

item brand is not in the visual context

so you may not be able to see that

difference if we are having the visual

on category because at that time the

visual filter context is not filtering

brand it is filter ing category so you

might not see the difference so what's

the basic difference when we do this so

the calculate function without a filter

function you directly apply the filter

to specific column with the calculation

this modifies the filter context and

effect how the expression is evaluated

the calculate without a filter

expression applies filter directly to

the column altering the filter context

and impacting the calculation so it's

alter the filter context and later on

you will understand that it is basically

what it is doing it it is removing the

item Brands filter context in the visual

so is basically it is saying like all

item brand and then brand equal to Brand

one so your row of the visual which is

actually showing you brand 1 2 3 4 that

filter context of visual is not getting

honored and you are still getting the

data of brand one but it is going to

display played against all the brands

this is what is happening so I'll

explain you when we go to the power VI

that in such scenarios what this first

statement is equivalent of Now using

filter function with calculators allows

you to create a filtered table based on

specific condition so basically the data

is getting filtered this offers a more

flexible approach of defining the filter

context and customizing the calculation

in interacts with the data calculate

with a filter expression construct a

custom filter context by creating a

filter table based on specific criteria

and Returns value based on that so

basically your data itself is getting

reduced so basically what happens when

you use this filter function and let say

you use with the brand because the data

is already getting filtered you only

have the brands one data you're going to

see only brand once row so these are the

main differences and we have to

understand that with the example now we

will understand this calculate functions

little bit more in detail then we don't

use filter and simply try to filter the

data what happens then so we will bring

in our calculate page from here and in

this one had major bring this visual

copy paste now in this one I'm I only

right now bothered about how do we

calculated this brand one net that's

understand brand one net was so brand

one net was

calculate net we use a filter so when we

are simply using the filter function it

is filtering the brand one's data and

that is what you are able to see here

that you're only seeing the row which

contains the brand word data so the data

has been filtered to give us only data

for brand one in this case let's try a

different

way actually

we can also do we don't need a

filter without using the filter fun item

brand one it's call it

BR in the first case what was happening

when you use the filter the data was

like second

case and if I would have removed this

one and this one it's

actually only going to give me brand one

in this case if I bring in it's first is

going to bring all the brand so here

brand columns is filtering brand one

which means the filter is applied to all

the rows and there is no filter to the

table filter retains and interacts with

the initial filter context while filter

expression directly in calculate ignores

it it means that filter contexts on the

brand one overrides the other filters

which are inside the visual specific

especially visual rle as well as outside

the visual let me do one more variation

of this

I

go and put here category instead of

brand then there's no difference only

when I view it by brand when it is brand

uses a

filter without filter function it's

giving me the brand one value everywhere

this is something really useful when you

want want to use only brand one's value

or whatever you filter that value you

want to use across the values understand

this thing the filter of brand one has

been applied on the row every row is

only giving you brand one so what's

happening in this case is basically the

brand one is getting filtered and that

particular value is available now for

all the rows of the brands so whether it

is brand 2 brand three Brand 4 all the

brands are going to show you only brand

one's value so we have the brand one

value displayed against all the brands

because the column has been filtered for

the brand one now how can we achieve

otherwise in what it is equivalent of

can we understand it better to

understand it better let me tell

you equalent of which which will help

you to understand let's go back to this

one calculate

again what it is equivalent now we

already understood the all you

understand if I use all item brand here

what would

happen it would remove the context so

when when we are using this all item

brand what it is going to do it's going

to remove the filter context of item

brand means if you filter the data for

brand it will not apply neither it will

apply the Brand's context in the visual

so in the visual row if you have a brand

three brand four brand five that is not

going to be applied so this has been

entirely removed so what should I have

given if I simply say all item brand

grand total but now what I'm saying

after that is now let's put the filter

of item brand equal to Brand one what is

happening now you have all the item

Brands out of which you are only

bringing in brand one now what we going

to do here is we'll bring this

in let's bring it inside the

visual it's same as this one so what's

happening now that in the visualization

when you going to see the each row which

is talking about a brand it is not

filtering the brand because of all item

brand but it is getting the value of

brand one because what we have said all

item brand then filter the item brand

equal to Brand one so it is only getting

the value of brand one for each rows so

the filter context has been removed and

especially when it is displayed in the

visual so especially when the brand

itself is appearing in the visual the

visuals filter context of the row is

also getting removed and based on the

value which we have filtered here in our

measure based on that only we are

getting the value displayed so sometime

what would happen if you think that I'll

just simply say item brand equal to

Brand one or item brand equal to brand

one brand two brand three or I use the

or statement it's going to be same as

what I use in filter that's not it's not

same so calculate with Filter function

and without filter function are not same

remember this when you are doing your

calculation now we would discuss the

differences between all and all selected

let's look at the very simple syntax of

all and all selected so now this is net

all means net calculate net and all and

in all I can specify a column here and

table here this is without specifying

anything similarly net all using

calculate net all selected now what is

the difference in between these two so

basically what happens as we have

learned in the past we have something

known as filter context now filter

context may come because of slicers

filters or maybe because of the visual

visual row is Alo going to put a filter

context on the data now all is going to

remove everything we'll learn this with

an example all disregards the filter on

a specific column or a table to retrieve

unfiltered data for the calculation for

the every value it's going to that on

particular column or a table whatever we

have used there now all selected

preserve the user selection of filter so

user selection of filter that you have

done that filter context would be

preserved in the specified column while

removing the filter from the other

column allowing The Selective adjustment

so this is going to happen in the all

selected so what is in short we can say

that all ignores the filter context

including the filter and the the visual

filter row context means the visual row

which is going to put a filter context

that is also going to be removed but on

the other hand all selected is only

going to ignore the visuals filter

context which is basically because of

the row of the visual so let's

understand with an example let me come

up with brand net

visual make it as a table visual

duplicate

this create a little smaller visual with

category I'm adjusting the sizes in the

second visual I'm clicking on the brand

arrow and then I'll make it cut I need

like sers also and I'm going to use

Simple slicer here I'll use brand

slicer copy paste let me change this

with category

slicer copy paste and state

slicer I added three slices in this one

I'll use

State I have three slices let me convert

this one into drop

down instead of net I've taken margin

here so let me correct that

clearly here

net net is the measure we are going to

use predominantly in all of calculation

but let me sort it descending here now

what I want here is I want a grand do I

get a grand total we'll take help of

calculator let's create a new major for

the grand total click can click on any

of the major and get a Major

Tool and here we will go ahead and say

total net brand so we'll say calculate

this calculate we can use the Expression

also but we'll start with net now there

is function all which can help us what

does all can take all can take all can

take table or a column name what is

there in this column is let's why don't

we start with the column name that we

use item

brand I drag it here and here you can

see I'm seeing grand total let me put it

to other visual in other visual where

there is a category I am not seeing that

grand total on each row why it is

happening because here in the case of

brand I am saying all item brand and it

should remove the filter context of all

item brand so the filter context of item

brand has been removed and that is why

each row of the brand is giving me the

grand total but we have not told that to

remove the filter context of category

and that is why what You observe that

the filter cont context of the category

is not getting removed in the visual

rows so visual rows are still applying

the filter context of categories but the

grand total is not getting that filter

because in the grand total now again we

are able to ignore the filter context

now when I select brand 3 now what is

happening here is you are only able to

see brand 3's value when you see brand

3's value you will observe that in case

of the brand visual we are able to see

the grand total value external filter or

the filter which is coming is going to

reduce the visual to only brand three

but the context of the filter has been

removed from the visual Row the context

of the visual and the context of the

slicer filter has been removed and we

are getting ground total both in the row

where I'm getting brand three as well as

grand total while in case of the

category visual we are getting two

categories now we are getting two

categories because of the brand 3 again

because brand 3 contain two categories

but for those category the category

filter is still applying so because of

that category filter I'm getting the

data for those rows based on the

category but the grand total again I'm

able to ignore item brand I'm getting

the total one now if I add brand two and

brand three as you can see in the brand

visual I am getting both the rows I'm

getting the grand total which is is

ignoring the visual as well as the

slicer filter context and as you can see

in the category visual as expected it is

able to use the category filter context

in the visual but the grand total again

it is ignoring all the filter contexts

because in the grand total anyway

category is not available and I am able

to get grand total so we got total

Network what happen need both case of

category and item intr category and item

belongs to same table is it what I can

do here is I can go ahead and create

this majure again and this time instead

of item brand I simply use item what

happens I'll call it total net

item I'll bring in into the first visual

I'll bring it second visual now in this

case what you are observing that both

the visuals are showing the grand total

even the categories uh filter context

and the bran filter context from the

visual has been removed the reason for

that is basically basically that we are

using the item table so any which we are

using from the item table in the visual

will not be able to force a context

similarly the slices will not be able to

force a context and the visuals will not

be able to force the contact even if I

remove those brand two and brand three

now you will see all the values and in

case of all the values again we are

going to get the total for all the rows

because the the filter context of all

the brand and category has been removed

from each row and we are getting grand

total in the each of the visual but what

happens when I put the state filter

let's say I put the state filter on

Alaska now you are seeing that the

filter context is applied but the visual

Rose filter is not getting applied we

are getting the Alaska gr R why it is

because again the filter was on item for

the specifically for the second column

so it is ignoring the items uh filter

context but it can't ignore the states

filter context because we have not

talked about the state into our formula

so because we have not talked about the

State into our formula it cannot ignore

the filter context or the filter of

State in the visualization so

visualization will get filtered for the

state but it will remove the context of

brand and category because we have said

all item what can I do here here comes

my third all

formula and the third all formula is

when where we going to remove everything

now all can have multiple columns if you

want I can say sales or I don't say

anything one of the two things I can do

I'll have this two formulas in one go so

I'll say total net Els one major I can

have one more version of this one

without this one now because all the

dimensions are getting applied at the S

so most of the time these may end up

giving us the same result I'll bring in

net and let's not add it to the second

one there's no need of that now as you

can see when we have bought this total

net and total net sales where we have

used the sales table it is also start

ignoring the states context why it has

been started ignoring the states filter

context because the all has been applied

on the sales table so anything passing

to the sales table is getting ignored if

you apply the filters now if you apply

let's say brand filter your values will

reduce because this is going to reduce

the values in the filter but the rows

which are still remaining for that the

filter context the way all is removing

will still apply same way if you filter

category again you will get the data of

brand and category based on your

filter only that much categories or that

much brand but yes in the for the

individual row of the visual the filter

context would be removed complete filter

context would be removed but what does

it gives us it gives us the gr to this

is all for us let's learn about all

select for that what I'm going to do is

I'm going to duplicate it want to keep

everything as is removing the

filter and let me do one thing I'll keep

only this one because rest of the

behavior in case of all selected is

going to be same what's the major

difference between all and all let's

start now let me create this measure

with the all selected so what's the

difference between this all and all

selected so in case of all selected what

would happen here is basically all

selected is going to honor the filters

which we apply

but it is not going to honor the visuals

rows which are putting the visual filter

the visuals rows filter contexts would

be ignored but the filters filter cannot

be ignored so let's say if I put filter

on brand 12 you can see that the all

selected is showing me only the brand

12's value it is not showing me overall

value why because it is going to honor

the external filters or the slicer which

has been applied in within that boundary

it will show me the total so if I select

let's say brand 12 13 and 2 now it is

showing me total of these three for all

selected one so it is ignoring the

visual row filter context now let me

modify the other visual the same job

what I'm going to do is I'm to change

this instead of category I'll bring in

state here from the geography

Dimension let me go ahead and remove

these two and bring in

total a little bit more WID for this

what do you see so what you are doing

here is you are saying the ignore the

filter context of item not of state and

because you are not ignoring the filter

context of State the state values are

still filtering your visual rows and you

are getting the state level data I do do

this we go and ignore the context of

Sals table itself Sal item n it's all

selected I'm saying ignore all the

context which is coming to this this

I'll add this the first table I'll add

this table and we require a lot of

overlap now when I use the sales now

what happened the all selected applies

on these sales all selected now is going

to ignore anything which is coming to

the sales table and because of that now

you are going to get the total which is

of my selected values and it will be

displayed for each rows now in case you

apply a state filter it will honor that

also now so whatever filters you apply

that will be honored

irrespective of what dimension they are

coming so your grand total will depend

on the filter selection in case of all

selected and based on that particular

set of filters it is going to give you

the grand total you can have an all

selected without the sales table this

case we to give almost similar kind of

results because the sales table is the

base table where we applied or the base

back table where we applied so now you

have understood the difference between

all and all selected so there would be

times when we are going to use these

especially in time intelligence let's

say I want to create a PRI previous

period you might not select a previous

period because previous period might not

be in my filter criteria so let's say I

selected current one now when I selected

current month I need previous month I

need to ignore date tables filter

context completely and then bring in the

previous month's value so in that case

I'm going to use all but if the values

are available within my filter context

and I want to play around then in that

case what I can use I can use all

selected so let's say I want percentage

of total irrespective of my selection

then I'll use all or I need percentage

of total based on my selection I'll use

all selected I use I want my rank rank

based on the original values without

considering any filter I'll use all I

want rank based on my selection I'll use

all selected so these are the some

places where you will use all or all

selected depending on what exactly you

wanted to a a let's learn about remove

filters let me bring in state and city

here create it as a table Visual and add

a net Also let's have a filter MD space

click on filter we'll get it here

control C control V second dimension

take one from geography Dimension that

is State take one from item Dimension

that is brand we got our visual we have

certain values and let's make it as a

matrix in The Matrix visual build visual

we have the to now create a major net

all what would happen calculate net

all geography City

it we bring it here what we seeing that

look at this the state filter is not

getting ignored only the city filter is

getting if you apply some filter that

filter is

obeyed and if you're applying some

filter which is on state that is getting

obeyed because we said all of City not

of state or not of

geography take this and now we use

remove

fi this is something which we are also

trying which is also known as

exclude exclude level of details so we

are trying here is excluding the level

of details so the city is present but we

are trying to ignore that but we got the

remove filters now what is the syntax of

remove filters remove filters table or

column name so in this case we want to

use column names you can have more than

one column names we can have geography

City here to ignore this one

remove so same results we are getting

it's almost same I filter brand one the

results are same the brand one is going

to pass the remove cities here again the

state filter is going to pass to check

the cities filter what happens when we

apply cities it's almost behaving like

your all filter removing the contract

it's easy to remember that okay I'm

removing something now let's bring in

city as a

filter drag City here create it as a

slicer as you can see this is net number

is smaller and the all number and remove

filter number is bigger basically the

filter context of C

and we can have multiple columns as per

requirement so we can in the remove

filters we can use multiple columns if I

want to add State here I can add State

they are all from same table this is

what we call exclude level of detail

which can be achieved using remove

filters let's learn about all except all

except is something like you know means

ignore everything other

than all except so I copied a visual

from the other one and let me remove few

of things

here let me bring in

net so let's say I want to remove all

the filter other than it let's bring in

the filters

also I name the pages I want to create a

major which should IGN know everything

other than geography St we create a

major net

eight let say calculate calculate can

take various things now you might have

learned till now all except what does

all accept does it takes a table and the

column name table and the set of column

names so table name could be the table

for which you are going to give the

column and the beauty of this function

is it can take a fact table and related

Dimension the one side tables can also

be but we will start with geography

table is compulsory here and then we'll

see geography 8 what we are seeing you

only obey geography 8 no other filter

now we bring in here and as you can see

that it ignored the city filter in the

visualization okay very good it ignored

the CD

filter but what happens if I put a

filter of

brand filter of the brand coming from

other dimension is not getting ignored

what happens if I selectricity

here this filter is applied but the

state is getting filtered because of

this city the Texas is the only data

which I'm getting at the row level and

there it's ignoring the city filters but

overall it is Texas only and we know

anytime we apply a filter but in the

ground totally ignoring everything so

whenever we apply a filter or what we

can call external filter or slicer it is

going to reduce the value in the

visualization means your categories your

cities your city state category brand

subcategory are going to reduce on based

on what you have selected but now within

that selection further we can ignore the

filters even the filter which we have

applied externally its value can be

ignored while showing the value like I

will still be able to show grand total

or a total of a state or a total of a

city ignoring that filter but I can't go

beyond the set of values which is

defined by my slicer or filter you to

remember

that that's also fine so what does it

means that the filter from the other

dimension continue to pour in further

let's duplicate

this and here in this visual now me open

the build instead of C I want to bring

in I

category I want let's say use

category what do we see here there is no

total all except state it is still

considering the category it's not

removing that it's not removing category

so it's not the state total it State

total is only coming at the state level

in this visual but in this visual if you

would have the state total was coming in

why is it so because what we have said

here is that in the geography table you

only obey a filter now that's what it

was doing it worked for geography

Dimension state and city but it is not

working for the item Dimensions category

because our formula was only talking

about geography Dimension and geography

Dimension State there was no mention of

item category Dimension and and that is

why when the major we have used there

with the category is not able to ignore

the category filter in our visual ual

and is still giving the category level

data filtered based on the

categories proc is not how do I do that

and that is something which is famously

also known as fixed level of detail I

want fix it I only want that one how do

I achieve fixed level of detail in this

major let's go ahead and try that out

copy this and new

major and can all accept give me me a

fixed level of details I use sales here

sales and after that geography State and

that's what I told you also that all

except function you can give the central

fact table and then you can use one side

of the table in the

relationship you'll call it all

accept net all

accept let me bring in

this no

differences but when when I put the

brand filter you notice one thing that

my state totals are now ignoring the

brand filter filters are no more

considered look at this

total when I put the filter the

same let me go to the second

page let me put this here net all

Exel and now you see that this

portal is same and it ignored the

category

also it is like fixed level of details

so level of detail has been fixed at the

state level it's giving me the state

value and definitely state is in the

context that's really

important so in this manner all except

can help us ignoring filter now now you

can have multiple of them like in this

case if I simply would have wanted

category and it I could have done

that because it uses a central table

it's not like all or all selected where

you can't have from the related table

here you can

have item

category and you can get the result same

as this

one

why because it's going to obey the two

filters it's going to obey State and

category now it's obing the two filters

State and

category this is going to remain same

now let me filter the

brand now when you look at here this

total is different from this

one this is 90 these all are 90 these

are the my category 1 and category 4

total so remember 24,000 and

16,000 let me go back and remove the

filter of brand one you are having this

is category 1

24,000 category 16,000 these values

remain intact when I any filter now if I

add one more child

here this visual I'll go ahead and add

let's

say it

and explore that the next

level what you will see here is look at

this this category a total is still

intact because of all except category

state

level is it at the state

level city is getting ignore this is how

you use all accept so let's Now

understand the difference between

filtering a data in calculate with and

without filter function so let's say we

want to give a filter expression in the

calculate without using a filter

function how would we give let's say

calculate net item brand equal to Brand

one when we want to use filter function

how would we give we give calculate net

filter item item brand equal to Brand

one now when the visual will contain

brand into the visualization you will

see a difference you might not see

difference when when item brand is not

in the visual context so you may not be

able to see that difference if we are

having the visual on category because at

that time the visual filter context is

not filtering brand it is filtering

category so you might not see the

difference so what is the basic

difference when we do this so the

calculate function without a filter

function you directly apply the filter

to specific column with the calculation

this this modifies the filter context

and effect how the expression is

evaluated the calculate without a filter

expression applies filter directly to

the column altering the filter context

and impacting the calculation so it's

alter the filter context and later on

you will understand that it is basically

what it is doing it it is removing the

item brand filter context in the visual

so basically it is saying like all item

brand and then brand equal to brand so

your row of the visual which is actually

showing you brand 1 2 3 4 that filter

context of visual is not getting honored

and you are still getting the data of

brand one but it is going displayed

against all the brands this is what is

happening so I'll explain you when we go

to the power VI that in such scenarios

what this first statement is equivalent

of Now using filter function with

calculators allows you to create a

filtered table based on specific

condition so basically the data is

getting filtered this offers a more

flexible approach of defining the filter

context and

now we will understand this calculate

functions little bit more in detail then

we don't use filter and simply try to

filter the data what happens then so

we'll bring in our calculate page from

here and in this one add measure bring

this visual copy paste now in this one I

only right now bother about how do we

calculated this one one net let's

understood brand one net was brand one

net was

calculate n we use a filter so when we

are simply using the filter function it

is filtering the brand bu data and that

is what you are able to see here that

you're only seeing the row which

contains the brand word data so the data

has been filtered to give us only data

for brand one in this case let's try a

different

way

actually we can also do we don't need a

filter without using the filter fun item

brand one let's call it

brand in the first case what was

happening when you use the filter the

data

was second

case and if I would have removed this

one and this one

actually only going to give me brand one

in this case if I bring in it's first is

going to bring all the brands so here

brand columns is filtering brand one

which means the filter is applied to all

the rows and there is no filter to the

table filter retains and interacts with

the initial filter context while filter

expression directly in calculate ignores

it it means that filter context on the

brand one overwrites the other filters

which are inside the visual specific

especially visual rule as well as

outside the visual let me do one more

variation of

this I

go and put here category instead of

brand then there's no difference only

when I view it by brand when it is brand

uses the

filter without filter function it's

giving me the brand one value everywhere

this is something really useful when you

want to want to use only brand one's

value whatever you filtered that value

you want to use across the values

understand this thing the filter of

brand one has been applied on the row

every row is only giving you brand one

so what's happening in this case is

basically the brand one is getting

filtered and that particular value is

available now for all the rows of the

brands whether it is brand two brand

three brand four all the brands are

going to show you only brand one's value

so we have the brand one value displayed

against all the brands because the

column has been filtered for the brand

one now how can we achieve otherwise and

what it is equivalent of and we

understand it better to understand it

better let me tell

you equivalent of which which will help

you to understand let's go back to this

one

calculate

again what it is equalent now we already

understood the all you understand if I

use all item brand here what would

happen it will remove the context so

when we are using this all item brand

what it is going to do it's going to

remove the filter context of item brand

means if you filter the data for a brand

it will not apply neither it will apply

the Brand's context in the visual so in

the visual row if you have a brand three

brand four brand five that is not going

to be applied so this has been entirely

removed so what should I have given if I

simply say all item brand grand total

but now what I'm seeing after that is

now let's put the filter of item brand

equal to Brand one what is happening now

you have all the item Brands out of

which you are only bringing in brand one

now what you're going to do here is

you'll bring this

in let's bring it inside the vi

it's same as this one so what's

happening now that in the visualization

when you going to see the each row which

is talking about a brand it is not

filtering the brand because of all item

brand but it is getting the value of

brand one because but said all item

brand then filter the item brand equal

to Brand one so it is only getting the

value of brand one for each row so the

filter context has been removed and

especially when it is displayed in the

visual so especially when the brand self

is appearing in the visual the visual

filter context of the row is also

getting removed and based on the value

which we have filtered here in our

measure based on that only we are

getting the value displayed so sometime

what would happen if you think that I'll

just simply say item brand equal to

Brand one or item brand equal to Brand

one brand two brand three or I use the

or statement it's going to be same as

what I use in filter that's not it's not

same so calculate with Filter function

and without filter function are not same

remember this when you are the

calculation now let's learn earlier

function this function will allows us to

get the current row value so as you have

learned when we create a calculated

column and we do let's say sum of that

column it gives us the total of that

column but we always don't need it so

definitely we require filters now while

doing that filter we need the current

row value let's say I want to get the

customer first sales days or purchase

date for the same customer I wanted to

find out in the entire table what is my

first purchase dat so there earlier can

help us to check that out what we I'm

going to do is I'm going to go to table

View and inside table view I'll go to

the sales table by clicking on that now

I able to see my sales table now in the

past I have shown you when I done sux

sales gross amount it has given me the

total amount what I would like to do is

I would like to create a new column now

which I can do by clicking on column

tool because I already clicked on a

column so column tool is visible and

inside column tool I have a new

column let me make F little bit larger

control and middle Mouse button scroll

now the column which I want to create is

the first sales date basically what does

need I have a sales date in this row and

I have a customer ID but for that

particular customer ID this might not be

the first sales date I want to find out

what is my first sales date for that

customer ID there are couple of options

I can use but I would like to use Minx I

want to find out the minimum date filter

I want to filter the table how do I want

to filter this table sales table I want

to filter now complete sales table is

available as you know the this is a

column at the moment I say sales table

complete sales table available what I

want is I I want to look say sales

customer ID equals to what customer ID

so one way is I take the customer ID

value in a variable if I don't want to

do that then there I can use function

earlier if I use earlier I can again

give sales customer ID this means

current row customer ID the customer see

understand in the filter when I say

sales table the complete sales table is

available when I say sales table

customer ID complete tables customer ID

is available now I'm saying current rows

customer ID so I got the current rows

customer ID now the table only contains

the current Rose customer ID and from

that I want the sales tables sales date

minimum sales date so for this

particular customer the table is getting

only that portion of the table which is

equivalent of the current customer you

can see that particular partition of the

table I'm getting now and then I'll get

my minimum sales date from that

particular partition so let's do one

thing let's see is this date equal to

the current date because if this date is

equal then this might be the first

record we are in search where this is

not equal so this is not equal so we can

filter on this customer so the customer

ID 2954 we can filter on 2954 so number

filter equals

2954 and there are so many records and

if I now go ahead and sort a sending

I've done a sort ascending here or this

particular customer ID now let's look is

this date available for all these yes

the 1119 date is available for all the

rows that's the first now with earlier

you can have little more complex

calculations also it's not that you can

have the simpler calculation like this

let me clear out and take one more

example let's say you want to find out

what is my last sales date you know for

this customer this is my first sales

date but I may like to know what is my

last sales date isn't it what is my last

sales date now the last sales date

becomes a little bit more more tricky

and we need to add more conditions how

so let's add a new column and try to

understand what is my last Sal date now

look at this column first so in this

case what is happening when I'm

comparing customer to customer and I'm

taking minimum then I'll get the first

date next thing what I need to do I also

need to consider the sales date I want

to know that sales date which is before

current row sales date means sales date

is strictly less than the earlier sales

date and then I need maximum out of it

so customer is equal to the customer Sal

state is less than the sales state in

the current row and what ever data you

are getting from that data get the max

dat so let's copy this formula so we'll

get last sales or last purchase not the

overall last last is date and here let's

start writing down again so explain you

once more Maxx remember this thumb rule

when you go into the future typically

you will require the minimum so somebody

says what is my next sales date the

typical formula would have been Minx

greater than this

date I need Max but less than current in

that case it would be I need the last

date the last date is less than the

current row date but it is Max out of

all those so filter sales sales customer

ID equals to earlier customer ID means

current rows customer ID and sales

date is strictly less than earlier sales

Sal date now I got a partition where all

the dates are less than the current date

for the same customer now let's get the

max out out of those sales date so now

we got our formula for the current

customer the sales date Which is less

than the sales date at the max out of

that enter you can press enter or click

click on this button commit button you

will get this answer for few of the rows

you might not get it but for few rows

you'll get it so let's filter 2954 once

more equals

2954 now sort ascending on the date

already sort ascending now row was 19 so

we are getting 19 here and let me do one

thing we make it little bit smaller so

let me compare the dates now well so

1912 to 17 1912 to 17 Trail by one row

what we have done here basically we got

the data which is trailed by one row

here this is basically previous date or

the last in this manner you can use

earlier now there's one alternative

which I should also tell you that in

case sometime what would happen I'll

tell you when you want to use earlier

function you cannot use any calculation

here like I want last month or something

we need a EO mon function so on earlier

function doesn't allow you to do that in

such scenario I'll give you the

alternate of this one only by clicking

on again new column I'll tell you how

can you achieve this and in that case

I'm going to create a variable so

variable uncore cust means customer

equals to no need of earlier here simply

give customer ID and then you can give

underscore C and remember that whenever

I create a variable I used underscore so

that I can differentiate then you give

variable where where means what happens

in a formula or in a measure when we use

variable so this is the syntax let me

explain you so you used variable then

you use the variable name and then you

use the column in case of column it

should be column in case of major it

should be a major or it can be a filter

condition we will learn when we do now

second one is I want date so simply I

current rows date and then I can use

that as underscore sales say date now

when when you use variable you need to

write down a return statement so how my

formula is the name equals to variable

variable name and the variable formula

written statement and the formula after

the written statement again I don't need

earlier here I need underscore date now

Dex is not case sensitive so whatever

you small or uppercase combination you

can mix and match and do it and let me

press enter uh we have the same name we

it will not let me rename this as a date

one press enter or you can press the

commit button now we got the same

results that we had previously there is

no difference in this one you can use

function earlier so you have learned how

to achieve the same result with and

without earlier the advantage of these

variables is that let's say I want to

get the date in the last month I could

have used here F function EO month and

got the last month end date and I could

have compared with that with the last

month end date that is little bit more

flexibility I will get if I use

variables depending on the need you can

use earlier or you can use variable so

let's start learning the search function

so let me go to the table View and

inside the table view I'll open the

geography table so search function can

be used both in a column or a major so

first we will take the example of a new

column and then I'll also tell you how

can you use it in a major so let me

click on a column and I'll get a column

tool and inside the column tool I can

press new column create a new column and

in this column I would like to search

City I can use function search SE what

what search function does for us it

takes a text means the text which I want

you to search within the text it can be

another text or it can be a column in

which I want to search start position if

I don't want to start from the first

position I can give the from which

position I want to start the search and

not found value if I don't find a value

what should I return so basically it's

going to return return the index of the

first letter so let's say you search for

new and it find new starting from fifth

position so it's going to return return

five so what if it doesn't find you can

return return a not found value if you

don't want to return let's say zero or

something you can return return blank

but prefer to return return a value what

I want to search I want to search new

Now search is not case sensitive and

because search is not case sensitive

what I can do is I can write down new as

NW all cap then I can give a column name

I could have given a string where I

wanted to search this but here I'll give

a column name start position I want to

start from the starting so I can leave

it empty if I does doesn't find I want

to return zero it means I'm going to

return a position zero if it is not

found so that I can identify it is not

found but I can do here is I can go

ahead and do sort descending here and

sort descending means it will sort the

column on higher Value First there are

only three values which contains new so

these are the three values which

contains new and they are coming on top

now so this is how you use basically the

search function now what you have to do

to use it in a measure so simply what I

can do is I can search this and I can

use that as a result in my filter so let

me give you a quick example of a measure

I'll create a new page and in this new

page I'll bring in city and I'll force

this to become a table visual so once

you click on a visual and then you press

another visual type powerb automatically

changes it into that particular visual

now I need a measure so I need the count

of the Cities which contain new this is

my simple very simple requirement I need

count of the Cities which contains new

so cck click on a new major available on

the Home tab and major name is Count new

cities or cities which contain new but

to just to keep the measor them little

bit short I'm doing this calculate so

I'm saying I want to calculate count

geography cities I would like to count

the geography City filter the geography

table search what I want to search new I

can give in any case because it is not

case sensitive in what column geography

City column

and let me write down geography City

because I have City in the customer

table also so just want to confirm I

have used filter in the filter I used

geography is going to take geography

City but just for the clarity I'm

putting it here I don't want to give a

start position zero and I can say

greater than zero now there could be few

versions I'll tell you there's a

function count rows also available with

us so you can do it like this or I'll

tell you one more function which you can

achieve it easily let me create a new

major and instead of all these I can use

found rows and inside that I can give a

filter condition and I can create

another measure let me rename it as one

now you might be surprised why I'm

getting only three rows I'll tell you

the reason also what happens is any row

which is getting filtered by the filter

clause for which we are not getting a

result means the value for that is blank

and blank is not zero okay for value for

which is blank it will not appear in the

visual both the measures right now in

the visual is only giving value for

these three City

it is always the super set let's say if

I put net now and net has value for all

the cities so all the cities will appear

and we will get blank values for

so these are the quick example how can

you use a search in a major or in a new

column so let's now learn find we will

go to the table View and inside the

table view in the geography table we

will try to use it we have already used

search here the search and the find have

the same syntax the difference is the

find is case sensitive and also you

cannot use Wild Card characters in The

say search you can use Wild Card

characters but in find you cannot use it

again find is case 10 set so let me copy

this because I clicked on a column I'll

have the column tool available with me

and inside that I have new column which

I'm going to click and paste this and

I'm going to change this find and the

Syntax for the find is same let's

discuss that find and let me start the

parenthesis once I start the parenthesis

I got the synex find text the text which

I wanted to find within text I can give

a text or I can give a column name in

fact I can give a major when I'm

creating a major start position the

position from which I should start and

not found position if I do not found

what I wanted to return I can also

return a blank if need I use

this you can see I'm not able to find

any cities with new why because any W

new is capital new inside the city start

with the default position return zero if

not found is returning me zero because

any W is not available in any of them so

let's try n capital

ew now we will get the first three

values as 11 one because we are able to

find out new on the first position okay

so this is how we use find we will take

a quick example of a major also so I'll

go here on my report view I already

create page where I use search let me

call it search and find now and let me

add a quick major I'll click on the

major table and I'll get a table tool

because I clicked on the table this time

and inside that we have option for new

major I click on that and I'll quickly

write down a major find city find new

city let's say

and we'll use count

rows

filter

geography geography comma find what I

want to find new new should be in title

case where I want to find it in

geography

City starting position if not found zero

greater than zero it should always be

greater than

zero same result but if I make it an ew

capital or I change anything let not

even this I make n

small it will return all blank because

I've used filter and when filter doesn't

find that value it's going to return a

blank for that so these are the quick

examples of a new majure as well as a

new column now let's learn contains

string function contains string is

function which is not case sensitive

means whatever you want it to search

that's not going to be case sensitive it

cannot search for card anyways it's very

similar to the functionality what search

and find provides it but actually it

returns true and false it doesn't return

a position to you so let me start a new

column I already clicked on a column so

in the column tool I have new

column and let

me let me search

contain new I'll use

contains

string within text so first we have to

give which within what text I can give a

column or I can give a text I'll give

city as a column and what I want you to

find out I want you to find out new I'm

going to give it in all caps to check

whether it is case sensitive or not it

is actually not case sensitive as is

given in the description it's going to

return true and false whether it finds

it or

not it returns me

true for first three cities where

previously find and search for giving me

111 which is position so we can can use

whenever we need true false results

let's take an example in the report view

for major so I'll go ahead and copy this

major and try to simplify this I'll

create a new major I'm in Major Tool so

I can use new major and I'll now say

contains

new and here let's change

it simply let me try to write down

contains string first is within a string

so we need to

give geography

City

new so what we have done is basically

filter table geography and simply

checked true and false here and this is

what we need in the filter every

condition in the filter should return

return a true and false so this one

satisfi that condition so I don't need

to check equal to true or false that I

don't need it's simply written true and

false to me in this manner you can

create quick major and a new column on

contain string let's check out function

contains string exact now contain is

string exact is going to check for case

sensitivity the syntax is very similar

to contains string so let me copy this

contains string column I clicked on a

column and if it has a formula it will

start showing it in the formula bar

as I clicked on a new column I will also

get a new column option I can simply

click on that and cop and create a new

column let me paste this and let me call

it

contain exact

new and let me change this contain

string exact so I removed G so it's

starting suggesting me the syntax is

very similar within string find a string

returns through the string contains

another string contains string exact is

case sensitive it is Cas sensitive so

when I give new in capital it might not

return return any

true Everything Is false because new is

not present any W new in capital is not

present title case new is present in

first three so I'm changing that right

now in my

formula making it a little bit bigger

for you enter and now I'm going to get

true let me use this in the

report view by creating a major so I'll

copy this contains new major and because

I clicked on a major I do have major

tools available with me click on a new

major to get a new major contains

new contains

new exact and here instead of contain

string we'll use contain string exact

we'll keep it capital as of now all new

as all

caps and we'll not get any value so now

we will change it to title

Case press enter and we get the values

as three because there are three cities

only which contain any W in title case

in this manner we can create major and

column for contains thing exact now

let's have a look at three more Dex

function which is right mid and left and

to do that what I'm going to do is I

will go to this table date Auto I'll

going to create first a column and what

column I'm going to create here is

basically create a date which is in ddmm

and YY y format so I'll use format

function format date which is there in

this table

comma DD iy mm iy YY y y format now my

objective here is to extract out date

from this column and put it into date

function what I want to do is I want to

use the date function date function

require year month and date I want to

extract this and during the extraction

of this we will be able to use all three

functions left right and mid so let's

start again with a new column I already

clicked on a column so column tools

going to enable us or a new column me

quickly click on new column and in this

new column I would like to create a new

date again I'm creating a date just

giving a name new date I'll start with

the date function now date function

requires first what it require year

where is the year here in this date here

is last four characters of this and to

get the last four characters we use

right right is the function which you're

going to use what WR going to take is

going to take a text and number of

characters Returns the specific number

of characters from the end of the WR

returns from the end how many characters

I need from the end I need from the end

four characters the four characters

represent ear now Dex is pretty flexible

sometime when you return return text and

it use it as a number unless youate

creates an error it does do that autoc

conversion now month where is month

lying here so here in this string the

month is lying in the middle let's check

the number so this is the first position

second position third position third

position doesn't have month number

fourth and fifth position has the month

number I need four comma 5 okay or I

need four and two characters let's look

at the mid function which is going to

help us out so we need mid function here

let's look at the syntax of mid function

it has three arguments is requires first

argument is text in which we are giving

a column you can give a text also means

you could have given a hardcoded date

here then the start position start

position in our case is fourth character

it's not the third character it's not

starting with zero it's the exact fourth

character when you count from one 2 3 4

and then the number of characters how

many number of characters we need so we

need two characters so we'll use State

DD YY from the fourth I need two

character it should return a month now I

finally need day and day is present as

first two characters and first two

characters there is a function which can

help us that function is left what is

the syntax of left left function the

text we can give a column or a text and

number of characters we need how many

number of characters we need from the

starting of the string we

mmdd y y y y and there's a Tim stamp

also I can remove the time stamp I

clicked on the column I can go to the

format and I can choose a format I want

I can choose a short date so in this

manner you can use these three functions

right mid and left definitely you can

use them into a measure also and you

will be able to create the required

calculation using these one more thing

which we can do with this we can use the

Left Right function along with the sear

function to create the first name and

the last name now what we are going to

do for that is we'll go to our geography

table so in the geography table there

are only few cities which contains the

PO names like New Orleans new Las Vegas

and JY City for only few cities where we

have first name last what we'll do ins

whenever I contain one should only show

me first name whenever I have two it

should show me first name and last name

so last name would be empty in case I

have one word City so let's take out the

first name what's the rule for the first

name so the first name should come till

the place where we have the B as a

character so what we can do is we can

use the left function we use left and on

the city column and till what place

first few characters we should go we'll

say search and in the search we will say

the find the position uh so the position

of what position of space the moment we

get the space then within the text which

is City start position we are not going

to mention now I'm not going to mention

not find Value as zero because what

would happen if I press not found value

is zero let's understand this because

when we don't find the space it's not

going to give me the first name that's

what I don't want like in the new ark

I'm not getting any name but I need the

name because that's the first name this

is only name

what we say in such case is we use one

more function and we learn now a new

function which gives me length of the

text and I'm going to use the length of

the text so what I'm saying here is in

case you don't find it actually written

the length so what would happen you will

go till the last letter of that thing

and you are now getting that particular

City where we only have the first name

so first name is all sorted now we need

to work on the

so I want to use right what is the text

in the right I want to give I want to

give the city and I want to give the

number of characters so now number of

characters is from the end but when I

use the search function that's going to

give me the position from the starting

isn't it so if I say space comma space

within text City

starting position and let's say zero is

the not found position right now what

would happen the space is the starting

position is not going to work for me

because space is at the fourth position

is going to give me last four character

so what I need exactly I need length

minus the position of the space so what

happens when I do that now what happens

because if I'm returning a zero or the

city is where it has the for the cities

where it doesn't have the space it's

going to give me the last name also as

first name which I don't want so why

don't we return length there of the

city what we are saying is we are going

to return the length of the city in the

search when we don't find anything so it

will take us to the last characters so

length minus the last character is again

the length is zero so let's see what

happens in that so the last name goes

away so see it's almost the similar

search which we have used there now

definitely because we want the last

character so we use length so from here

we do and other thing what you could

have done you could have used mid

starting from the space and use the mid

and the length is number of characters

what you need but again that would have

number of characters again you to find

out using the length and the search so

right is the best choice in sear case so

this is just an implementation of you

know search and right and left together

so these kind of combinations will keep

on coming to you when you do your actual

project you can do similar kind of

exercise in Majors also this is combined

version of two thing functions let's

understand the function select columns

select columns function can be used to

create a calculated table with the

column renames and it can also be used

as a table expression inside a major

calculation I clicked on a table and

inside the table tool I have this new

table op option which I'm going to

click and I'll use select columns select

columns now the most important thing

which this select column does is it can

select a set of columns me you can t

filter the table vertically you can

reduce the number of columns which you

want so let's understand the syntax of

Select column select column takes a

table and then it takes the pair of name

expression name expression name

expression and it finally returns you to

a table so this name expression pair

means one is you can rename the column

so basically you can have a name of a

column and then you can give a column

you can give the same column multiple

time the name expression also means that

you can give formulas for a column so

let's say you want to say A+ B A multip

by B Cas which is statement or something

that also you can do means you will be

able to perform low level calculation

while you are writing down the

expression in select column and select

column is not going to group by or

filter it is just going to give you a

table with the set of expression renamed

as per your requirement now inside the

table expression you can use filter if

you want or after the select column

again you can use filter or summarize

whatever you want in this manner you can

use select column for various purpose so

let's say I want to bring in table now I

want to call brand with some some other

name let's say I want to call brand

name again let's say I want brand with

some other name brand two let's say

brand only I can do that then I want

Item ID I can give a new name item

identifier and I can use item id now I

selected three columns let's assume that

I only need these three columns so now I

got the item table my item table used to

have 55 rows I again got the 55 rows see

it's not summarizing or it's not

filtering here select column is not

filtering you can use filter inside the

table expression instead of item you can

use filter something there you can use

calculate table if needed but whatever

columns I'm getting I'm able to rename

that so what I would like to do now is I

would like to add some expression here

I'm making it a little bit large so that

you can see the table expression clearly

you would have remembered that some time

back we added some calculated column in

our item table so I clicked on the item

table and if you look at this group two

this is something which I wanted to add

there is a switch statement which is

categorizing the category into various

groups and let me go back to the select

column table calculated Table and there

what I would like to do is now I would

like to add another column which I would

like to call as group so I have given a

name and and now let me give the

expression the same expression which I

have given there now after giving that

expression let me come out and press

enter am I able to get that so as you

can see every role the calculation has

been done and I able to get group one

group two group three so you can see

that the category one is lying in the

group one but we don't have a category

but it is still calculated because it

was part of the original table so let's

add the category to understand that so

just before that now I am adding C

category and the category column from

item table while I have given a table

name in the table expression so I might

not require the table but it is always

better to use table and the column name

the fully qualified name and now you

will be able to see the category column

so you can see the category column and

you can see that the category 2 is part

of the group one Category 5 is part of

the group three now can I do some

calculation like multiplication or

something let's say I want to add let's

say item by brand I want to do very

simple stuff here is I want to multiply

the item ID by brand ID for our

reference purpose let's do that and let

me enter now again or I can press this

commit button and now you can see that

the item ID and the brand IDs are

getting multiplied actually the item

identifier is one in this row and the

brand ID would be 10 for the brand 10 so

I'm getting a value 1 * by 10 is 10 so

in this manner you can see that we are

able to rename a set of columns and we

are also able to write down name

expression name expression and enhance

our calculated table at the same row

level where the original table was and

able to get the data so still have the

55 rows but we have the additional

column in a new table using select

columns now sometime this helps there

are operation where you may be using in

the same table or maybe we need to

rename the column before we use it and

in such cases select column is pretty

useful especially when you do cross join

or you use generate function and the two

tables have the same column then you can

use select column to rename such columns

so in this manner you can use select

column to create a table which is cut

vertically it can be combined with

calculate table and filter to get a

horizontally filtered table or the table

which where the rows are also filtered

here columns are filtered let's learn

the next function which is summarize the

summarize function can be used to create

a new calculated table where we can get

the aggregated data it is heavily used

in measures to you know handle the

grouped data sometime to correct the

grand totals creating intermediate table

which can be further used for analysis

so let's learn first of all how can we

use summarize in a new calculated table

so let's understand what that function

is so first I'll go to table tool new

table I want to create an aggregated

what I want in my aggregated table is I

want the sum of items net sales item

wise brand wise category wise or let's

say City wise take two different

dimensions so we would like to create

brand wise net sales and gross Sal how

do we do that so summarize it we have a

function summarized what does summarize

function does first it takes an table

then it takes the group Group by

expression the group by expression

doesn't require a rename you cannot do a

rename and then name and the expression

means expression means the some the

column where we are going to use some

kind of aggregation for that you can use

an rename again in the table expression

you can use add columns select columns

calculated table filter whatever you

want you can do that so here what I want

is I want to summarize the sales data

what I'm going to use I'm going to use a

center table sales table because if I

use the dimension table I might not get

an access to the many side of the table

I'm trying to use a table which is fact

which is a central container and it is

related with tables like item and

customer and as you can see it is

started showing that so from geography I

would like to bring in state so I would

like to summarize my data on state item

brand State and brand and then I want to

calculate net net is already a measure

let me call it as and I can rename I

usually what I do whenever I create some

columns by myself I usually rename that

underscore to differentiate and I can

use a net major now I'm using net major

it doesn't mean that it's going to

filter with my slices value it's not

going to change it's going to be the

static value and if there is some

row and let's use the major gross then

can I on the Fly do a sum of quantity or

something so let's try underscore QT y

comma sum of sales quantity I want to do

on the Fly sum and now I want to create

this table so I'm getting 442 rows and

I'm getting these values so for New York

I have net quantity as 24,000

approximately gross 29,000 and quantity

as 84 it has no impact of filters and

slicer and this is true with all the

tables so let me go here in the filter

region here let me use something on all

pages isn't it so let's go to a name and

basic filtering customer one it's going

to filter on all the page customer one

but if I go to the table view there's no

change still you can see the value is

same 24,000 29,000 and 84 there is no

difference calulated column has no

difference when a filter or a slicer get

applied on the page it has no

relationship it is precalculated even

the measures if you are using in such

tables get calculated and evaluated at

the load time so they are static in

nature calculated table and columns are

static in nature so don't expect their

data to change using filters and slicer

as of now that is not possible so we

have used summarize here in a calculated

table there could be n number of things

you can do with using this you can have

some permutation combination with other

calculated table functions like

calculate table filter Etc and it could

be used in major and major we can can

drive few things so we will go ahead and

take a major case little bit later let

us learn a set function which is Union

and for that what I wanted to do is I

want you to bring in a new file from the

GitHub and that is the file which we are

going to use for few more operations set

operations

so the file name is upend and summarize

Group by and we are going to use in few

more operation as I said earlier we're

going to use this in few more operations

I'll right click on the raw copy link

and as we have done in the past we will

go ahead and use that inside our powerbi

get data

web and inside the web you going to give

this URL click on okay it should suggest

us two table data one and data

two data 1 and data two two Excel sheets

are there I'm taking both of them and

right now I don't want to do any kind of

transformation of data so I'll directly

load these

tables the tables are loaded

now I want to create a union of these

two tables whatever data they have so

data one has three rows item one item

two item three and data two has item one

item two and item four okay and they

have different quantities so because

they have different data I want a union

all usually the Dex function Union does

a union all so how would we do that we

want a new table again Union function

can be used to create a new calculated

table as well as it can be used in

measures as per requirement and in the

new table let me go ahead and

do rename as Union

table and we'll call Union table one

which is data 1 comma data

2 so we got a union where all the values

have been just added up so this is how

you can use Union function and we will

see more use case of this little bit

later let us now learn set function

intersect it can be used to calculate

calculated table and it can also be used

in Majors I'll go to the table view I

have two table data one which is having

item one two and three with some values

and table two which is again having item

one and two and also a new item item

four which is having a value eight and

these values are not matching items are

matching but the values are not I'm

doing intersect operation which gives me

common values is it going to give me

anything

let's go ahead and check it out so I'll

click on any of the table and go ahead

and do intersect operation under the

home table I can see new table I'll

click on the new table and I'm creating

a new table here but this can also be

used inside the major I'm creating a new

datable data 4 why not data 3 why data 4

I'll let you know intersect left table

and right table only two arguments it

can

take so let's give a table which is data

one and the second table right table

data two let's see what these two tables

have

common there's nothing common zero rows

are returning how do I check whether

it's going to work or not so let me do

one thing very one quick thing right

click on this table data one and copy

the

table then go to enter data under the

Home tab once it opens up paste it you

will get the same table it just got

duplicated I'm going to change the value

for item three and I'm going to call it

data 3 now you got your data 3 and press

enter or I can press load button now I

got a table data 3 which is having

something in common with data 1 the

first two rows of the data one is common

with the first two rows of data three

data 1 and data 3 has two rows common

now I'll go to data 4 and instead of

data 2 I'll use data 3 and press

enter and as you can see I got a table

item one as one item two as two these

are the exact common set of values

please remember the complete row set

need to match we also have functions

like distinct values and summarize which

can help us to get distinct values for a

single column or summarize for multiple

columns and that can also be used in

such cases to create a combination of a

column set before we use intersect so as

per your need you can can use it in a

table or in a measure let us learn the

set function minus don't have a minus

here we have accept and what the accept

does is something which is present in a

table and not present in the second

table so something which is present in a

not present in B I need that kind of

data now to do that what we are going to

choose here is data one which contains

one item one 2 and three with three item

three having value three data table

three where item three has a little bit

different value now let's start by

creating a new table as of now we can

see new table option under the Home tab

let's click on

that this table can be named as except

let's use the function except except

requir two tables left table and the

right table and it's going to give the

data which is present in left table

which is not present in the right table

Returns the row of the left hand side

which is not present in the right hand

side table this can be used for

calculated table table or measures take

an example later how to use this in a

measure so let's use the data one as a

left table and data three as the right

table we should get the item three row

with the value three because that is the

one which was there in data 1 table

which was not present in data 3 table

what happens when I change the position

now I should get the item three but with

the value six because that is the row

which is present in data 3 but not

present in data one one in this manner

you can use accept function this can

also be used to find out sometime when

you come across the cases when you need

a major something which is present in

particular situation and not present in

particular situations in such cases you

can use that accept function will help

in measures Also let's learn distinct

function and values function there are

two functions let's learn how they

behave what they give us so I'll go to

the table View and inside the table view

I have this item table and in this item

table I have branch and the branch are

only 13 but they're repeating in all

rows 55 rows similarly categories are

only five repeating in all I want to

know what are the distinct values I have

for the brand and item and I may want to

repeat that so let's go ahead and try

that out so I'll go ahead and create a

new

table and let me give it as a name as

Brands which is nothing but distinct

item brand it's give me distinct item

Brands can it give me distinct of a

table also yes it can give but for that

we need a table with repeating values

we'll take that example but before that

let's look at one more function which is

values again from the Home tab we'll go

to the new table function and create

categories category table and we'll use

values item category it can take a table

or a column name that's one of the two

things it can take when a column name is

given it return returns a single column

table with unique values when a table

name is given it Returns the table name

with the same column we have functions

can give us distinct values you use the

column example can I do with a table I

have two tables data one which is having

two rows which is common with the table

data three what I want to do here is I

want to see can I combine them Union I

have was able to do a union of those and

can I get a distinct so let's try to

have a union distinct table which is

actually the SQL Union can I have the

SQL Union let's go to a new table again

from the Home tab this time and we want

the union the SQL Union which is not

Union all usually the Dex Union is Union

all so we'll say Union of data one and

data three what is giving us it's giving

us the data which the duplicate rows

let's see can we use the function

distinct and the moment we give distinct

what does distinct function con take

distinct function so distinct can take

column name or table expression return

one column table that contains the

distinct values in a column for a column

argument or multiple column with

distinct unit combination of values for

a table expression argument table

expression argument we want to give

Union data 1 and data 3 let's see what

happens so now we have item one and item

two repetition on item three is having

one value as three and one value as six

and that is why both of them are coming

so with the distinct we are able to do

it can we also do it using values let's

do one thing let me tell you one quick

thing I can make it this one as a

comment copy so we remember both and use

values here now okay values function

except a column reference expression or

a table expression as argument one okay

it's not taking this one can it take

already existing table let's do one

thing so we have Union equal and let me

make it as only Union the union SQL

table we have still have the duplicates

now let's create one more new table we

have one physical table and now we are

going to use that another physical table

is distinct SQL as values Union equal

table so understand this thing when we

use the table expression it doesn't give

us the unique values so first you are

not able to use values with a variable

table and second it's not going to give

you distinct values for a table so for a

table distinct values we have to use

distinct but for a single column we can

still use values function for a table

it's not going to do it it has a

different purpose so in this manner you

can use values and distinct function as

per your requirement and you have

learned some of the differences we have

another function which can group the

values and that is known as Group by we

will learn a use case where Group by is

going to behave better than summarized

but to do this use case let me tell you

what use case I want so in this use case

what I want to do is I want to create a

new table using data 1 and data 2 and

without creating a third variable using

that inside a variable I want to

summarize the data I want to sum the

values so as you can see they have some

common rows with items is item one item

two are common in those so I want to

summarize that value I don't want that

to repeat Union function will repeat it

it's not going to aggregate that let me

click and create a new table and the

first time I'm going to attempt it with

suiz summarize Group by so let me create

a variable where underscore Tab and this

is a very simple table which I'm going

to create using Union data van first

argument it can take multiple tables so

data one and data two only two arguments

I want to give as you can see in the

syntax I can give multiple tables but

I'm only giving two tables here I have

two tables then shift enter return what

I want in return is summarize how many

columns I have two two columns isn't it

so what is my variable table and from

that table one column is Group by which

is item so I can use item comma I want

the sum so underscore sum of what sum of

underscore I can't use sum so I need to

use sumx underscore Tab and comma values

column and let me I got a sum column I I

got a group by column and let me press

enter what are you observing here it is

actually 22 it is actually the sum of

the complete column this table in the

sumx is not taking the row context it's

taking it as a complete column the

current row context is not available

while I'm doing the summarizes some same

as creating a calculated column it takes

the complete value of the column but

that's what I don't want what should I

do in such case so let's copy this code

and create one more table again under

the Home tab new table is appearing I'll

click on that and let me paste this so

this is Group by Group by so again the

table with Union but let's start with a

different function in the return and the

function which we are going to use is

Group by what does Group by takes it

takes a table expression Group by column

names name and expression for expression

so whatever number of Expressions you

have you need to use a name for all such

expression you need to rename the

expression where you going to have the

aggregate data same is true for

summarize also what is our table name

underscore tab gr by the column name is

item want Group by item comma I want to

do sum underscore sum comma sumx the

function I want to use and here instead

of table name I'll use current group

function and then I'll use the value

column and let me close this and try out

and now you can see the item data is

grouped properly because of this current

group functionality available with the

group by function which allows us to

group the data which is applicable for

the current Group by in the context so

in this manner you have observed there

is a difference between summarize

function and the group by function let's

now learn a function which is known as

generate series generate series function

can generate a table with a sequence of

numbers so let me click on any of the

table and from the table tool I'll click

on new

table I would like to generate the

numbers sequences from let's say 1 to

100 the function is generate series

what is start value start value is one I

can give I can give zero also end value

is 100 and increment by

one so in this manner I'm able to get a

table which is generating sequences for

me and it is giving me 1 to 100 now in

case you want to generate odd number

series you can just give it two here

because it's starting from one it will

generate a OD number series

it will have 50 values only because till

100 we have 50 only now if I want a even

number I can either start from zero or

two so that will create a even number

series now let me tell you I can create

a date table also along let me use

generate series the first argument start

value the second argument let me

generate it for 365 days and the third

argument as one again it's going to

create for 365 days I'll go and use now

add columns now add columns is is only

getting what the values column with 365

values comma name I'm create going to

create a column which is known as date

and what I'm going to date there is a

beauty about the date Dex date there's a

beautiful thing which we have learned

about Dex date that we can simply add

the numbers by using the plus sign and

it will keep on giving us the dates

added by that number so let me start

with 2018 comma 01 comma

01 and let me add plus now the generate

series is returning me the value column

which now I can use in this add column

expression after the

name and let me press enter and as you

can see we getting the dates generated

but there's a problem we are not getting

the first gener because it's going to

add the one also from zero to

364 days now we got all the dates what

we need in this manner you can use

generate series function you can use it

in table you can also use it in measure

there could be use cases where you you

need to generate a sequence inside a

measure and that is where you can use

the generate series function to generate

sequence of numbers and that can be

further used through some complex

calculations let's learn two more Dex

function generate and cross joint both

the functions can generate a table which

can be used in a calculated table or a

measure which basically do the cartisian

product is going to create the complete

combination of the values to take this

first example for Generate cion what I'm

going to do is let me show you item

table now item table has 13 Brands and

five categories so total combination is

65 but we are getting 55 rows here it

means there are some combinations which

are missing so first of all I want to

generate all those combination and the

second thing could be that what is the

combination that is missing out of these

are the things which we can do so let's

go ahead and find that out for that what

I'm going to do is I'm going to create a

new table and for that I'll go to table

tools and new

table and how do I create that distinct

combination of values so for that I need

to use the distinct function also so let

me use

generate function first of all what does

generate function do generate function

takes table one and table

two the second table expression will be

evaluated for the each row of the first

table returning the cross joint of the

first table with these results now this

evaluated for each row as a real big

important for that we have to take a

separate use case but we will take

distinct item brand as the first table

and I could have taken a bigger table

but because I want to create that

combination I'm taking a single column

table but definitely you can have a

table which is having more than one

column can also work out and then we

will use item

category we will use distinct item

category as second

table

so so now we have got 65 rows as you can

see it means these are the possible

combination now how do we find out what

is missing combination we have learned

one function

accept now except function gives us

something which is present in a not in B

so how do I get the distinct values I

can select all the values or I can do

very simple thing I can go and use the

summarized function what does summarize

function take it takes a table as an

argument first of all and then we can

give all the group by columns and then

the name and the expression for the

aggregated column but here we only need

the group by column that is item

brand and item category so these are the

distinct combination which is present

with us so now you can see there are 29

such combinations are missing so

basically it is not that 55 rows has all

distinct combination there are 29 such

combinations which were missing in this

case and let's sort it on particular

category sort ascending so for category

one it is saying there is no brand 12

and 2 so let's go to the item table and

validate that so we go to the item table

we select category

1 and you can see there is no brand 2

and 12 here it means we are getting the

correct

results we have done this using generate

so we see what generate does and what it

can do the same operation can also be

done using cross joint so we'll again

create a new table table tool is visible

so let's utilize the new table under

that and this new table would be cross

joint

again we can use this into our Majors

also by generating some tables so cross

join what cross joint required return

returns a table that is in cross joint

with the specified tables here you can

have multiple set of table the returns

the table that is in cross joint with

the specified tables now it is not

talking about the row that's very

important okay so we will use

distinct

item brand comma distinct

item

categories and we have got the distinct

65 combination

again again I can use that accept code

to find out what is the combination

which is missing so this is a cartisian

product which has happened 13 distinct

value five distinct value cartisian

product has been done by cross joint now

we'll complete that step and then

discuss what is the

difference

except and what I've done is I copied a

part of it let me use that again

summarize item item brand and category

is going to give me distinct combination

which I have done just a minute back I'm

bringing in that and I should get 29

rows same 29 rows I'm expecting here so

it means we are able to do cross joint

we are able to do summarize to get the

distinct value of more than one column

and then we are able to find out what is

missing in a particular combination the

same could have been done in a major now

what's the difference between two when

should I use cross joint and when should

I use generate whenever you need a

filtering mechanism you should prefer

generate and the reason for that is that

generate can work on the row Value Cross

join is not so let's take a new file and

I have loaded a new file for this

purpose so let me go ahead and bring in

one file so we'll use this file cross

joint versus generate it is employee

data you could have used the employee

file but I created a smaller version of

that so that we can easily use it and

understand that so let me click on that

we'll right click on the raw copy link

go back to the powerbi and in powerbi

we'll go to the Home tab get data

web paste the URL click on okay one

Excel

sheet with the name employee I'll press

the load

button employee table has has been

loaded

here so what I basically want is

basically I have a start date and end

date and I want to generate all the

dates between these so 1st to 15

February 1st January to 31st January 1st

January to 31st January 15 January to

31st January these are the dates I want

to generate all the dates between that

so let me try out this thing first using

generate Home tab new table visible

click on that what we need to do here is

basically

employee days dates one employee dates

one what we

generate generate function what is the

first table very simple employee

table what the second table the second

table is I need a calendar I need to

generate the dates between the start

date and end date can I get the start

date of employee table seems like I'm

getting end date of the employee table

T seems like I'm getting that and let me

after doing this let me

try let me press

enter and as you can see the data here

for the employee one we getting all the

dates in

January also we are getting dates till

15th of

February but for employee 2 the data is

ending on January for employee 3 it is

just 15 days of

data only those dates are getting

generated now how to do the same thing

in the cross join okay let's try again

click on the new table under the Home

tab is still

visible let's call this table as

imploy date

to cross

join employee table comma

calendar I try to get start date I I'm

not getting any suggestion so maybe I'll

forcefully write down so I copied that

code at that time it is showing me error

so seems like it's not going to give me

and yes I don't have a row context

available so I'm not able to use so what

I'm going to do here is I'll use Min

of employee start date and I'm taking

the complete table column now okay and

Max of employee end date what ex it is

doing is basically is giving me the

minimum of the start date and the

maximum of the end and

date and because of that let me sort it

on the

employees What's Happening Here is look

at the employee

second you will see the employee second

has the data in February

also employee 3 is having the January

data from 1

January and having the data in the

February

also which is not correct in such cases

what we need to do once we get this and

assuming you don't have common column

name otherwise you have to use the

select columns you have to use filter

here now the date column calendar

generate a date column so we have a date

column is greater than and equal to the

start date and date is less than and

equal to and date the dates which is

available in this table you're going to

use a filter function and the rows has

reduced from 130 plus 294 and in this

case you will see that the employ two is

no

more getting data in February same is

true for employe 3 very limited data so

youve seen that cross joint is going to

create a much larger data set in such

case and think about you have a very

large date range it can explore the data

and then we filter it which is really

not effective and think about that we

may have to do this as a major and in

case of major what happens is uh we

typically use a disjoint table and using

the disjoint table join also we can

actually for such filter we may or may

not always use generate and cross join

used there but yes as per requirement

and use them so what I've done that when

I was doing all those table operations I

actually saved the file as N2 and 3 and

I have kept that file aside now and I

came back to N2 and 4 for rest of our

operations which are typically related

to measures and now what we wanted to do

we want to learn few more me measures

and for that we need the help of some of

these table calculations and that's why

we learned so now what we are going to

learn is some of the use cases where we

need to use summarize and values they

can help us to change the level of

detail calculation like some of averages

or average of sum so basically what

happens you do a operation till a

particular level and after that you

change the aggregation so it was doing

sum and then I do the average same way

sometime what happens is we are using a

filter context of visual row and I'll

give you an example of what we mean by

use context we reuse a filter context in

the calculation and the grand total is

not going to be correct in such case on

also in such cases we can use summarize

and value sometime the way I'm telling

you may not work in such cases what you

have to do is you have to basically go

ahead and create a mejor first and then

create another mejor on top of that to

make it work so let's jump onto the

first use case where we are going to do

it I want to create average of so let me

create a matrix Visual and in this

Matrix visual I'm going to bring in from

geography table state and city I'm also

going to bring in a net measure as a

value let me expand it very simple you

have certain cities for which the values

is getting aggregated and that the same

sum is shown here but I don't want sum

at the state level I want an average how

I'm going to do that so let me start

with a new major and this new major is

going to be aage average of city net

this city I want to do some post that I

want to do average what I have to do

here is basically average X I can use

values or summarize let me use values as

of now to begin with values then let's

use geography City till this level you

have to do whatever aggregation I'm

going to do in the expression net and

then I'll complete this code and let me

bring in this new major as you can

observe here value is no more a sum it

is an average I would like to take one

more example here now we have a major

known as gross amount isn't it so let me

do one thing let me first create a major

with the help of values only and let me

call it as gross so average gross same

calculation what I've done for net and

you can see the average is happening I

would like to do the same calculation

now but with the help of a column where

I want to aggregate it into the

expression part of the average X

function so let me create a new major

again I'm going to take help from Major

Tool which is visible right now let me

paste this gross calculation and make it

gross fun and here instead of gross I'll

use sum of sales gross amount very

simple instead of measure I am going to

use the sum of gross amount expecting

the same result pay attention the result

is not same not same as this one and let

me bring in Gross for your reference

and this is the behavior of expression

function which I want you to note down

and to correct this behavior let's use

calculate inside this

calculation in the expression if you

need to do an aggregation if you are

giving a table expression table

expression and you are using aggregation

on the column then you have to use

calculate in the expression you cannot

do it without that let me do it right

now and now you can see the values are

are

matching that's great can we do the

similar kind of calculation with

summarize because values will allow us

only one summarize can allow us multiple

so let's say I want after two the

average should happen or after three

average should happen or the calculation

which are done which need a grand total

sub total correction might require

multiple columns then what should I do

so now let's try the same thing can we

do it using the summarized function we

have already used the value function let

me do one go ahead and copy one of the

calculat I'll copy this gross

calculation and I'll modify this so just

for my reference I'm copying it and two

and let's put this into the commands and

try to replicate the same the first one

we are going to do is aage X summarize

taes this is the center table geography

City till City I need the sum and then I

simply use the gross measure and let me

check the calculation out and as you can

see and let me move the gross

maybe at the start along with the net

now you can see this calculation is same

as this one so mean summarize can also

help us and summarize can take multiple

columns you give the center table the

reason I given the center table is that

if you are working across two tables

like item and geography then still you

will be able to do such calculation

let's say you need it after two columns

so there is a level of detail which you

have you know used it and post that you

have done it and it is not that if even

if I go let's say one step ahead and

let's look at this let me go up one

level now in this case right now there

is no City present in the calculation

the level of detail has been included to

take the average so if some of you

wanted to have a level of detail include

this is something how you do level of

detail include you have learned remove

filters that is exclude now this is

include now let's play around further

with this so what I'm going to do here

is can I do a sum of gross amount here

and is it going to be a little bit

different so we say sum of sales gross

so just like values do I need to use the

calculate function or summarize can do a

better job for me no I need to use

calculate so let me use calculate here

and I'm not creating multiple Majors

here you for your reference you can go

ahead and create it this is one but yes

I'm going to do one more version of this

one let me copy this and let me create a

new measure of another version which I

can create with summarizes actually

summarize can also include a calculation

inside the table so we have the Group by

columns and after that the expression

says that you can have name and

expression here what does that mean for

us you can have underscore one or I can

give underscore gross for your reference

and name and here I'm not using

calculate let me use sum and here uh

this is sum is ending this is uh

summarize ending comma underscore gross

and I knowingly give these whenever I

use such variables or such calculated

column which is inside the table

expression or as a variable or a where I

usually give them underscore so that you

are able to differentiate that I'm doing

something different and let me do this

is two is already available let me

rename it and press enter let me add it

to the visualization and our calculation

remains same what we wanted in this

manner you can use summarize also to get

these average of sum you can do same

thing with sum of averages or when you

want to use include level of details

this is what you can do so another

example which I wanted to do here is

basically where we use the filter

context of visual Road and our grand

totals are not correct and we wanted to

correct again values and summaries

depending on the requirement can be used

sometime they can be used like just like

what example I've given here and

sometime you may have to use the measure

inside another measure where you use

values and summarize so you begin let me

rename this as average of sum and let's

begin a new tab and this time what I'm

I'm going to do here is let me bring in

brand from item and let me create

something which uses the filter context

of visual row I'll bring in that create

a table visual so if you created a

visual and you want to change it just

click on that Visual and click on the

another visual type inside the insert or

inside the visualization Pane and you

will get that kind of visual now I want

to create a visual which use context and

how do you use context this is how you

use the context because after some time

we will have some time intelligence

measure which is also going to use that

so I want sum of brand one and I'm not

going to use filter here I will use if

Max of item brand now this Max of item

brand what's Max is going to take in a

row see in the row brand 8 itself is

available let's say there is a brand8

available and I'm using category so row

only contain brand8 and then I'm using

category then it can bring the within

brand8 whatever is maximum category is

going to bring in that but here brand

eight itself is present the max of brand

eight what it is actually it is brand 8

in the first row so in this row it is

going to be brand 8 the brand 13 that's

the only value available yeah if I use

category definitely there are more

values available then it can take a Max

and I'll call it as it is equal to Brand

one comma what value I want to return

net otherwise I don't want to return

return a value let me try this out I got

a major tons of major now we have you

see the value for the brand one is

correct but there's no grand total here

and this is what we call the

calculations error because of filter

context context have you used now this

is one example you may have many other

such calculations where context is

causing your grand total either not to

appear or to appear wrong because

remember the grand totals are calculated

again when you calculated the grand

total again there was no item brand

available and when the item brand is not

available you blank value how do we

correct that so let's try with sux

values item

brand comma if

calculation did not work out did not

work out let's use

calculate so the moment we added the

calculate the results have started

coming out so as you aware that when you

use calculate is going to appear and let

me remove the calculator and showcase

you again whenever you are doing some

kind of a calculation inside the

Aggregates make sure the calculate is

used and once you use the calculate you

will get your calculation and you know

the alternative is summarized and which

you can also use to correct such

calculations so we have learned how can

we use summarize and values to get

include level of details and how can we

use it to correct our grand totals let

me just copy paste for your reference

and add summarize here so that you have

an example to refer when I share these

files with you we'll use a

summarize sales comma item

brand and this is sum of brand one

though I'm calling it brand two so we

have both the measures available with

help from values and summarize we

continue with one more use case where we

can use suiz and values and the place

where we need is basically when we need

to count the distinct values B so how do

we get the distinct count of anything so

in the sales table items are basically

made not going to be more than so how

many distinct items I have in my item

basically what I can do here is I can

bring in item here and I can use a build

a visual Pane and change its aggregation

I will get a 55 is the count I'm getting

there's a function distinct count I can

use so let me try to create a major

first major

is this

count and we use the function distinct

count sales item

id let me bring it here this is 55 on a

larger data the distin count might not

give you the desired performance I'll

tell you couple of ways which could give

you a little bit better

distinct count we are going to use

again in this distinct count I'm not

going to use function distinct what I'm

going to use I'll use count

rows values now single column I can use

values we have learned that in the past

get the distinct values you can use

values let me bring in here get it okay

so you're getting the same values now

let's learn one more way which which you

can actually use on multiple column

somebody ask you what is the distinct

combination of city and item you have in

the how do you do that and in fact

somebody can ask that brand and state

combination how do we do that what we

are going to do here is we are going to

use

summarize so first let me give you this

one listing count of item only and then

we will create a little complex case so

here we got this now we would like to

know the brand and the state combination

now state is also not at the role level

and brand is also not at the role level

what is that distinct combination

present with us for that now let's go

ahead and try that out and this time let

me explain you I quickly changed in the

case of summarize we have done few more

examples already now this time what I'm

going to do is let me explain you the

complete calculation count rows let me

use count rows this can also be used

when you have a visualization with few

group buys and few Majors you can take

the complete combination of those majors

and group Buys in the summarize and can

count it so count rows summarize what

summarize needs table so Central table

I'm going to give geography state I'm

going to take and from item I'm going to

take brand remember the combination is

not available in the say table it is

available in the related table and I'm

bringing in the count for those distinct

count is not going to work the alone

values cannot help me out so summarize

can help in such cases so you can get

distinct count counts using summarize

function and count rows let us now learn

how can we get percentage of total we

start a new visual let me create a

matrix visual first of all and in this

Matrix visual I would like to bring in

state and city from geography table so

state city and my favorite major bring

city under the state now when you do

that when you go to this major and right

click you see an option percentage of

Grant total percentage of row total

percentage of column total let's look

what is percentage of GR total let's

look at the other option right

click show value as percentage of column

total no difference again it is 100% no

value is percentage of there's no row

total right now there is a no row so

100% so basically they are just giving

me percentage of Grant total so now let

me go ahead and show show values but

what happens sometime I might require

certain calculation where I actually

need percentage how do I do that we have

learned few function in the past and

they are going to help us out calculate

percent of DT net grand total of net I

want to use the divide function because

I want to divide the current calculation

by the total grand total I'll tell you

how to get the grand total so divide

functions make sure that divide by 0 is

handle okay if to divide by 0 so net

what is available in the current now I

need a grand total the grand total

should violate or should not have any

filter consideration and to do that we

have something first of all I'll use

calculate net now I can use all or all

selected now if you want to honor the

filters use all select you should don't

even want to the filter context use all

I want to use all selected let me not

give any table name or it independent of

the tables so typically it will apply on

your C you will say it was showing 5%

something because when you use

percentage basically right now A Rao and

to convert to the percentage you click

on this you will get the percentage and

now you are saying I need sub toal how

do I get for sub total Alaska it would

be like 100% because Alaska only have

one Arizona has more a couple of ways

let start with first way so the first

way which I'm going to use here in I'm

going to use divide and I'll call it St

sub tootal one and there are few ways so

first way is in the second calculator

which is the sub total which I want I

can use remove filters of city now there

are only two levels so I can say remove

filter of City geography City what

happens when I remove the filter of

geography City or when I use all

geography City th will be removed from

the context so this is exclude level of

details I mean excluding a level of

detail again I need to make it as a

percentage and as you can see now this

is 100% this is 100% only one city and

this combination is 100% and definitely

at a state level we are going to have

100% so this is one way so we have

excluded the de there is one more way

which we can use for that we'll go

little bit more changes here again the

half of the formula will remain same so

the first part the role remains same the

calculate remains same here what I'm

going to do is filter all all selected

geography I'm going to bring in

geography table and then I'll say

geography state I'm trying to bring in

the filter context of visual row

geography State equals to the max of

geography state I'm trying to bring in

the filter context of visual row here

whatever state is in the context that

only should be considered as a filter

you take the complete geography table

ignore everything on the geography table

but state is equal to Max space so

whatever state is there in the row that

is the only thing you to consider I

calculated another subtotal and let me

go ahead and make it as a percentage

column and you will see similar results

a little bit different approach but what

we have there done here is filtering the

complete geography table for the row so

I considered the complete geography

table for every row filter is applied

filter context of visual row been

ignored because of that on the context

has been ignored but we are saying the

geography state in this complete table

should be equal to the max of geography

State and what is this Max of geography

State the state which is available in

this particular Row in this row though

I'm seeing City but I'm Arizona is the

state present here in the row context so

geography State complete table I'm

filtering for the current date and

that's how it is getting calculated and

we got the percentage of sub total in

this manner you can calculate percentage

of up total let's discuss how can we

create a rank now rank we might need as

a major we might need as a column now we

have few functions to do rank we have

rank X only Rank and rank rank. EQ there

is function for that all now the

function which we are going to discuss

right now is rank X and we are going to

discuss the rank function later when we

will discuss the functions which are

very similar to SQL window fun they are

not same as SQL window function but in

few aspect they are very similar to that

so when we are going to discuss that's

where we are going to discuss the ram

function first of all let me go ahead to

my table View and in the date table I

would like to create a rank this rank

would be used later when we will do the

time intelligence what I want to do here

is I have this column Week start date I

want to create a rank on week start date

and the reason for that is typically

whenever you want to do time

intelligence if we don't have the

extended time intelligence function we

actually use the rank function start of

the week is one column on which I want

to create a rank I want to create a new

rank column let me click on new column

column tools is visible because I

already clicked on a column and let me

use this week start date column and

create a rank so I'll use I'll give the

name as Peak rank make it a little bit

bigger so that you can see it Rank and

you can see rank. EQ rank X and rank

three functions are there I'm going to

use rank X now the rank X function have

few arguments which are required the

first argument is table in case of

column it's going to be a table or you

can use filter function to return return

a table which can restrict it when we

create like rank subcategory rank if you

want to create you can have use the

filter function expression this is going

to be our column third we are going to

leave fourth is order by default it is

descending rank x is by default

descending and ties is Skip and dens by

default is Skip I'll explain you the

meaning of skip and dense in a moment so

we're going to use dense and Skip here

one by one and I'll explain the meaning

so let me showcase you so I'll start

with rankx table name is date table and

I'm creating it as in a column not

adding to the script we can add it to

the script later and then the column I'm

going to use is Week start date and I'll

leave it as only two arguments I'm

supplying right and let me do one thing

let me sort the dates on ascending order

we understand the meaning of ascending

and let me close date we have a pretty

big date skpt let me close that now

let's look at it so what's happening

here definitely we are why we are

getting the highest rank first of all

because it's a descending Rank by

default we actually wanted as sending

rank so whenever we create a rank for

the date column we actually need as

sending rank second I opened all the

distinct values and you can see the rank

has jumped this is because it is a skip

rank what happens in case of skip rank

let's understand this let me sort it

ascending here so for 7 days I have this

rank so the next rank is not two it's

eight so it's a skip the ranks which are

actually they repeating if it is one one

then next is three it's a skip if it is

one one and next is two then it is 10 so

two things I need to change here is

first I need the rank as ascending rank

so I need to give an argument by default

it is descending and ties We Know by

default it is Skip so I need to create a

dance Rank and let me press now you can

see on my calendar the minimum date is

having rank one and in spite of rank

repeating twice I don't have the rank as

three I still have it as two so dance

rank is a continuous rank the rank

numbers will be one to three in spite of

repetition that is what we call dance

rank so we have created a dance rank

here and we have created ascending so

rank X function is something we have

used to create a new column now let's go

ahead and create a rank magic so I'll

add a new page for that so let me create

a visual brand the table visual I'm

bringing in brand and net converting it

to table I want to create rank already

it is sort in descending I want to

create a rank on the same order what I

can do here is basically new major I'll

click on new major and I'll call it rank

net I'm going to use rank X all selected

now what is the difference between all

and all selected I'll showcase you in in

a short file all selected item bran and

net now I can give the other argument so

I can have in the table I need to have

all selected all all except something I

need here expression here need to be

major values we are going to leave order

I'm going to use descending because

mostly we all to create descending Rank

and ties I'm going to use Den here so I

can leave any argument after this one

descending by default it is descending

so I can could have skipped that and den

so it's giving you r 1 2 3 4 5 what's

the difference between all and all

selected for that let me do one thing

let me also bring in a slicer on brand

and let me build it as a multi- select

and show so I'll do select all as you

can see that the moment I am removing

something the rank is getting adjusted

if you see now the rank is still one 2 3

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 this is because all

selected it is considering only the data

on which the rank is getting created but

if you don't want that you say no no

even though I remove the data from my

context I still want my rank to honor

the initial data then I can use all now

you can see that the rank is having

jumps so we have number six this is

missing because we have unselected that

we have number nine which is missing

okay we have number three which is also

missing so this is how all work now

let's come to a really interesting

feature of the rank and let me explain

you for that first of all I'm going to

bring from the brand table the brand ID

into the

visualization and let me enable the

build a visual for that I right on the

right hand side there was an option I

enabled that and I'm going to bring the

brand ID why did all the rank became

one for reason for that is and to

understand that reason let's change it

little bit let me remove brand ID and

let me bring in actually category and

then you will be able to understand

better let me sort first on category

shift and sort on rank now you can see

inside the category all the ranks are

for the brand so the category is is

acting as a partition and inside that we

are getting the rank so the rank get

redistributed or partition on the column

which is not present in the rank measure

when I created my measure whatever

columns are not present if they are used

in the visualization the rank will

redistribute inside that you know

partition itself into that and because

of the same reason because brand ID and

brand are at the same level now category

has different different brand but where

bring in now again the brand ID each

brand ID has only having one brand and

that is why the rank is coming as one

one one one then how do we handle such

scenario one of the easiest ways and

because they're belonging from one table

you can simply bring in brand ID also

inside this one now in this case I

cannot use item table typically I take

an example of City ID and City there I

am able to use the geography table

because they are at the lowest level

brand is not at the lowest level so I

have to specifically call Brand ID item

brand now you can see the rank is again

correct both are participa but what

happens when you read rank on multiple

columns which are not part of the same

table so let me bring in brand again

into a new table and let me also bring

in state I'm bringing the state column

so let me do one thing let me first

bring in state here I'm doing a little

bit change and then brand and net now

what happens when I put that rank column

let me again make it as a table visual

again you can see the brand getting

distributed the brand ID is not present

brand is present it's getting

redistributed inside I can sort on the

state and then I can shift and sort on

the net and you will see the rank

getting adjusted but I need a continuous

rank so anytime I create a state rank it

will get distributed into brand rank if

I create a brand rank it will get

redistributed or partition on state I

need a combined rank they are from two

different tables so then how do I do

that so let's again create a major and

in this major which is rank net St and

brand eight and brand I'll use rank X

all selected now you know the difference

between those I can't use all selected

the reason are all because the moment I

do that I use geography State comma item

brand and you need to be careful because

I have state available in geography and

customer if I don't use the correct one

uh it's going to not work again

redistribution will happen inside that

and I'll try this out and this this is

giving an error because you can't use

this different TBL so to overcome that

what I'm going to use is I'll use

summarize function summarize all

selected on sales table sales so the

table which I'm giving in the summarize

is sales and as I'm giving a central

table then I can take the dimensions

table geography and item into that

summarize so here it is summarize and

all selected is compulsory here and then

net and then I can use the other two

parameter this sending and dense now let

me add this to the visualization now

here you will see the rank is again

distributed why because we have taken

customer that's what I was telling

because I'm taking the geography State

and I'm use this then it will create a

problem so let me go ahead and change

this State field from customer to

geography and now you can see the rank

is continuous okay in this manner you

will get a continuous rank across

multiple table column in sometime we

will discuss rank function rank function

is also better equipped than rank X

function for handling the ties now there

is a ways to handle ties in rank X but

that's really challenging so we will

keep that for rank function let's

discuss top end function now when we

want to get the top end there are a

couple of options we have one is

definitely we have a top end function

which won't give us and the second

option is basically at the visual level

itself let me bring in brand and net

into a visualization now as converting

to table visual assume you want top five

Brands by net what you will do simply go

to the brand into the visual level

filter and this happens in the visual

level filter you can go here and use top

and I need top five base is what I have

net in the visual but I can get in based

on margin percentage anything which I

want but right now I definitely want

base on the net so you drag the value

here and you use apply please drag a

measure and you get the top five values

very easy so whenever we need it we can

use that but we do have a function which

is known as top end and let me explain

you that function step by step I'm going

to use the new major for that so let me

click on the new major in the table tool

and the major I'm going to create is top

10 net and the function is top n Now

what is my n value n value is 10 so I

need n value I need table expression and

here table expression will be all or all

selected order by expression order

ascending or descending and this kind of

information is so let's start with I

need top here we already have so big so

13 values but I need only 10 values out

of that all selected item brand comma

order by expression order on net and

what I want descending and right now

I'll keep it only this one what happens

here is basically the top end function

actually returns a table the moment I

put it here it start giving me error H

you get an error calculation error

measure custom table of multiple value

it's basically table so what I can do is

I can use this as a filter in the

calculate so I'll use calculate net

first argument and then we will have

this top nend and press enter this seems

to be some challenge isn't it the value

top n and Branch seems like very similar

to the grand total isn't it it doesn't

seems to be filtering top end values

either okay let me do one thing in this

visual let me remove that's the first

reason after I remove the F filter now

again there is some challenge here this

value is not same as grand total I can

understand there a top maybe some of the

top 10 values and different now because

previously the top five filter was there

this is a sum of top 10 not the top 10

and nor it is filtering it for that what

I'm going to do I can keep values inside

this one or key filters so let me show

you both of them one by one let me use

values item brand first way reduce it to

top 10 and if I remove the net it will

actually keep it top 10 only and that's

the total for that if you don't want to

use values you have an option which is

if filters can take this filter argument

and basically keep the filter and apply

the values automatically in this case

and this will to give me the same result

so in a scenario when you have the

filter and you want to have the values

impact also you can use keep filters

keep filters can work for you I got now

top 10 net by using a major I can use

top end and I can get whatever top I

want but what happens in case I need

this as a dynamic is that if I choose

one give me one if I choose two give me

two if I choose three give me three how

can I create Dynamic top n for that what

we have to do is we have to take help

from the modeling Tab and in modeling

tab we have new parameter now we have

two kind of new parameters one of them

is a numeric range and another one is

field parameter now field parameter is

we're going to discuss after some time

numeric parameter was previously also

known as what if parameter so numeric

range I'm going to create it's going to

create a new table for me using the

generate series it's going to give me

the number so I can create a series of

numeric or field I can give it a name so

name is top and number I want it to give

minimum 0 Max 20 increment by one

default is five I keep this as checked I

want to add a slicer I don't want it to

leave for later and the advantage of

this one is basically is give me a

slicer where I can enter one single

select box so let me go ahead and create

that now what is going to do is actually

it's going to create a table for me

using the generate Series has created a

table using generate series and it gives

me this parameters basically coming from

them this is the column which is coming

from that it also create by default a

major for you which you can use in your

calculations and this table is a

disconnected table so whatever values we

are have going to have we need to use

that in our measure then only they going

to have you can use that various places

but what I'm going to do is without

disturbing this slicer right now I'm

going to place this value inside our

measure in the top and in place of this

10 now I'll use that top and major which

is already been created for me the

moment I do it you will see I only have

the five values because the default

value was five how did it get it so

there is something known as whenever you

wanted to get a value which is selected

you use the functions selected value and

the selected value is going to give you

the selected value it doesn't get you

can default it so selected value

function have being used here which is

returning us this value and definitely

whenever we need we can use this

function Al selected value functions

give us the selected value in the slicer

but it only gives one value if you have

more than one value then we need a

different operation usually we use

values or something we can handle in

multiple ways basically whatever is

selected is only available whatever is

not selected if you need you need to PR

fix to get that data so now I will go

ahead and change it to top let's say one

I only got the top one value what I can

do is basically I can remove net from my

visualization I click here I'll bring in

the build a visual and you take out net

from here now I only got one value three

top three top five top 10 in this manner

my visual will now respond to the top

end values Now understand one thing that

there is one more thing which you should

do now what happens like when we use the

top end here it's do you filter and if

you there are multiple measures all

those measure will get filtered based on

the top end of one particular C now

let's say you need top end of gross but

based on net or top end of margin

percentage still based on net in that

case you're not going to change the

second part of it and the reason I'm

telling you sometime what happens is I

have the top I have the top 10 items of

this year I want value of the prior ear

based on that so there's a prior measor

I have and I need the value for that so

see my top top n is still calculating

based on that but based on that top end

I am bringing in margin percentage now

margin percentage may or may not be the

top 10 in this case let me rename this

major margin percentage and bring this

into my

visualization and I would also like to

bring in margin percent and I change the

formatting percentage for margin top 10

margin percentage now I would like to

sort this visual on margin percentage

this is not not the top 10 margin

percentage the top 10 based on net

whatever I'm going to use here is what

going to decide my top it is not the

major which is going to decide so in

this manner I can get a major which is

basically top and off some other major

so this is topend function and dynamic

top end for you so let's look at is

filtered and has one value understand

that let's create a new page and in this

new page I would like to bring in brand

and category and in both the visuals we

will add few new majors and those Majors

I'm going to create I'm not adding any

other major because we want to

understand those two new major how to

understand that measure we also need a

slicer and that slicer I'm going to

create on brand I dragged the brand and

I clicked on slicer which is coming from

build my visual at this moment I can

also take it from the insert of the Home

tab do a little bit more adjustment here

now let's first discuss is filtered so

I'll create a new mejor using is

filtered is filter me basically is it

filtered or not in what condition is

filtered work is filtered so is filtered

item brand is item brand is filtered you

simply wanted to check this condition is

item brand filtered we got this measure

is filtered let me bring it here it's

giving true true true on all the rows

and it's going to give false false false

on all the rows of category so here it

is giving all true right now there is no

value coming from slicer it is still

coming from for True when the brand is

in the context is giving false when

brand is not in the context so basic

basically the filter is filtered is true

when the brand is in the context or the

brand is in the filter it is in the

context that it is true but look the

total is false it means it is not coming

from Filter total will be dependent on

filter so let me filter one brand the

moment I filter a brand this is coming

true this is coming because of context

and this is because of filter all the

values are coming here is coming true

because of the filter context but

sometime what would happen is if I don't

have filter I don't want this filter I

want to take a decision whether the

brand has been filtered or not I want to

display a value based on whether it is

filtered or not and that filter is not

the row filtering that filtering is the

filtering which is happening on the

filter so how do I ensure that I'm only

considering is filtered is filter from

the filter contexts of visual row is

filter is filter from the filter not

filter context of visual Row for that

I'm going to tell you one solution what

you have to do is you have to create a

new measure and we going to call it it's

filtered one and you can use calculate

all selected don't use all about

selected values and let's bring in this

mejor is filtered one now you can see is

filtered is false for row and it is not

obing the context let's bring in another

visual expected is false now let's

filter any value it is filtering and now

it is giving true and that is expected

if even if I select multiple values it's

going to be true so is filtered is able

to tell us yes it is only coming true

when something is getting filtered so

the second function which we wanted to

discuss is has one value right now what

happened if you remember when I clicked

more than one I'm getting through still

but I don't want I only want let's say

currency we only want to select one

currency if one currency is selected or

one country is selected then I will show

the data in that particular currency so

if let's say we are showing data of USA

India together I have to show in one of

the currency Global Currency so one of

the currency I'll call Global Currency

and when both India and USA are selected

I'll show it in the Global Currency but

when India is selected I'll want to show

the local currency which is rupee when

only USA is selected I want to show in

USD let's say Global Currency we have

decided Euro so when both are selected

we are going to show them in Euro so in

that case I also wanted to know that one

value is selected so I want to know has

one value so let me create a new major

and check has one value so has one value

first of all has one value item brand

does item brand has one value first of

all we wanted to check so it's running

true so it means context is playing a

role and the filter is also playing a

role so the filter context because of

that is coming false here it's true here

now let me filter a brand and because of

the interaction it's going to filter all

the values are still true the grand

total is false and most of these

categories have more than one brand let

me select one brand here everything here

is true because one brand is

selected let me select one more brand

now look at the data here this is still

coming true because the row only has one

brand this is false now here category

one has two brand so it's coming fine

both brand belongs to this this is

coming coming true because only one of

the brand appears this is coming false

because more than one brand are

applicable here this is coming true

because only one brand is applicable

here what's happening depending on this

number of values availability this is

also behaving so one value or more than

one value so now we will bring in the

measure just like we have done in the

case of is filtered using the has one

value all selected so okay fine we'll

take a decision based on has one value

one and we'll use calculate comma all

selected we'll say we only want the

filter to be honored we don't want R to

be honored and let's bring in this new

measure

also now what's happening here because

two values are selected it's giving

false

everywhere so now as one value is

behaving based on the total selection so

total is one then it is true nothing

false and more than one also false

everywhere it is false so in this manner

you will be able to take decisions based

on is filtered and has one value what to

use what not to use but remember one

thing that use has one value and is

filtered only if it is most necessary

I've seen sometime people unnecessary

check is filtered and has one value we

don't have to add a condition when it is

not needed it is going to unnecessary

add a calculation to it so like in the

row we know the things are in context we

don't need to check is has one value I

know the row is going to have a value so

you don't need to check we only need to

check when we want to change our

calculation in case of grand total let's

say the grand total we can use is filter

sometime we can also use is in scope

which we learn sometime later so is

filtered has on value find out is it

selected is it in the context in powerbi

you will find us always talking about a

date table and a calendar table why date

table or a calendar table a table with A

continuous dates is so important it is

because all the powerbi time

intelligence functions require

continuous dates these functions include

date add dates MTD dates qtd total MTD

total YTD and many other functions which

require continuous States and a calendar

table or a day table can ensure

continuous States we have also need to

make sure that we mark them as a date

table that will ensure that we have

continuous dates to generate a calendar

we are primarily going to use calendar

Auto or calendar function as we move

forward we will discuss the differences

between the two to start creating the

calendar let's first start with calendar

Auto calendar Auto is a very versatile

function it can automatically generate a

calendar based on the dates available in

your powerbi schema it also provides you

a parameter using which you can set your

financial calendar so let's understand

calendar Auto in more details and to do

that I'm going to use the table View and

I'll click on the table View and go

inside the table View and here what I'm

going to do is I'll click on any of the

tabl so that I have the table tool

visible to me and inside the table tool

I have option for new table calendar

Auto is a DEX function which can give us

a table now what I'm going to do is I'm

going to click on the new table I'm

going to give this name to this table is

date

Auto and I'll use calendar Auto for

calendar Auto will take this one

argument this calendar is going to

return us so calendar Auto is going to

return as a table table of continuous

States so it was automatically taken the

start date automatically taken the end

date based on the your financial year or

your calendar year and it's going to

return the continuous dates and

continuous dates are really important

for

for doing time intelligence because most

of the time intelligence functions in

powerbi requires continuous States and

we will learn when we add the columns

also like some of the function like

start of year end of year which we will

be used to create start date and end

date would also require continuous date

calendar aut of function you only needs

one argument which is basically the

physical month and date in case you want

to give a physical month and date in my

case I don't want to give because I want

to create a standard calendar month so

it's going to do that so and what also

calendar Auto does it based on all the

dates available in the model is going to

find out the minimum date and take the

start of the year now if you want

Financial year let's say Financial year

end is third month then it will start

the calendar from April it is 12 month

it will start January from January so

based on that minimum date less than or

equal to that date is going to find out

the year start date similarly go to the

max date and maximum across all the

dates and goe find out using that date

we'll find out either a date which is

greater than or equal to that particular

end date is the year end date now if

it's is a physical year let's say you

shoot March then 31st March is going to

find out and first aprile is the start

date based on which is going to be

calculated now here we don't want to so

we can simply say

calendar so calendar Auto will give you

all the dates and you can create a

calendar using calendar AO now this is

the first way let me sort a sending and

show you what date I'm getting here this

is the first date as you know my data is

it from the October 2018 and I'm getting

a calendar which is from 1st January

2018 my data lasts till 2020 so if I do

sort descending you will see that it is

going till 31st December 2020 let me do

one thing because my data is starting in

October let's say and ending in October

again let's say if I want to start my

calendar with October Financial year

what what is my financial year and month

which is nine so what happens when I

start with nine you press enter

definitely because my data has started

after the October 2018 it's still

starting from 10th 2018 but

interestingly where does it is ending

it's ending in 2021 because remember I

do have data in October

2020 so when I have data in October 2020

so that complete Financial year has to

be taken so and that's why it has

claimed till the end of this now post

that if you want to create additional

column you can create here or you can

use a function which is known as add

columns now we will create a date table

or a calendar table using the calendar

function now for that I will go to table

View

uh previously we created using calendar

Auto unlike calendar Auto where you only

need um the month and and it

automatically identify date the calendar

function cannot do it you have to supply

the dates let me click on any of the

table and I'll get a table tool and

inside the table tool let me click on

the new

table I click on the new table I'll give

this table name as a date

table and then I can write down the

function which is calendar now the

calendar function requires two argument

the first argument is a date and the

second argument is also date start date

to end date now it means we can start

with any date we can end with any date

it will not force us to go to the start

of the year it will not force us to go

to the end of the year but usually when

we start when we create we'll take care

of these things now sometime what

happens is we can find out with the set

of dates let's say there are few dates

only which are available then with that

set of dates we can also start so I'll

give you example of that so calendar

function takes these two argument but

what does calendar function gives so

calendar functions return returns as a

table and that table is a sequence of

dates and these dates are continuous

dates the remember that we require

continuous dates for most of the time

intelligence function and that is why

having a date and calendar table is also

really important which provides us all

the possible date between the set of

dates or the continuous set of date

which is comprising of all the dates

from the minimum minimum date and the

maximum date which is needed for our

data it is really necessary to have

include all the dates and have the

continuous States now in the calendar

table we don't include the time so in

case you require time also sometime we

create a separate

timetable so calendar function taking

two arguments and returning a table of

continuous states which we would be

needing to create create our date table

having the continuous dates so let's

start with the first date now to give a

date I can use a date function now date

function requires three argument first

is year second is month and third is day

three arguments which is required so I

want to start from 2018 my data is

starting from October but I'll start

from 01 first month

01 then this is my start date again I

need another date for the end date so

end date I can give again year month so

my data is still 2020 October so I'll

use 2020 12 and

1 so I did not edit one parenthesis at

the end but Dex do take care if you are

missing at the end it do end I can click

on the submit or press enter now you can

see I got a calendar I can use sort as

sending to see what all dates I have and

sort dat sending to see what end date I

have start date and end date we are able

to know now this the first very simple

way when you can create sometime what

happens you say no no I want to add end

it where you want to end it let's say I

want to add it today my calendar should

go till today so we can use the function

today so every time we refresh the today

will change and it can end on today's

date when I'm recording this is 1st

January 2024 so it will end on 1st

January 2024 it can end on any other

date sometime you might want to end it

on last date you can use this this one

or last month's end date let's say this

is this is something different then I

want to add last month end date for that

to get the end date of a month we have a

very good function which is known as EO

month EO month function doesn't require

continuous date remember uh other

function there is a end of month

function which require continuous date

but EO month function doesn't require it

just require which months and date you

need so today is the today's date and I

need today is month end then I can use

zero let me show you

that so this is the current month ended

but minus one gives me last month ended

plus one gives me next month's ended so

I can use these kind of stuff I may also

like that you know like to start from

the start month of the minimum

date and assume right now for Simplicity

I have only two dates which is the sales

date in the sales table so I have one

sales date where I can find out the

minimum

sales date I have delivery date maybe

ideally speaking delivery date can

cannot be less than the sales date but

assume it could be then how do I take

minimum of two so for that what you can

do is minimum of minimum sales date and

comma

minimum delivery

date okay so double minimum so minimum

of sales first minimum of delivery and

for both we can take minimum so minimum

function this is another behavior of

minimum function where it can take two

arguments so typical Behavior was

minimum function will take only one

argument one column but here it can take

Min of Min okay this will start from the

minimum date probably from the middle of

some month let's go ahead and check it

out from here now what I can do this is

two heavy formula so let me go go

outside this one and see if I can create

a variable go here I'll create a

variable Vore minimum so this will give

me minimum date which is 13th October

and I can create another variable or

I can come here and write down EO

month now you will say for the start of

month why you're using EO month I'll

tell you EO there's no function like s

so month or St month EO month is a

function which which I have with me so

if I give minimum and minus one is means

it is going to give me last month's end

date but the beautiful thing with the

Dex date is if you do plus one simply

you do the plus one it adds the days so

plus any number is number of days you

want to add so I got last months 10 a

and I do plus one which is going to

start from the current month you will

see start from the 1st October 2018 in

this manner so these are the various

combinations basically which you can use

to get this now I'll tell you one very

quick combination now this is going to

give you start of the year so minus one

St month of the

date so you

subtract the month in the negative

number so multiply your month for the

date by minus one and do plus one you

will always restart of the

calendar basically what happens in the

10th month if you do minus 10 so Min -

one is 9 and Min - 10 would be last year

December and then you had plus one means

you this year January in this manner

depending on the requirements we can

create different different dates okay

now we need to go ahead and add new

columns to this calendar or date table

and then we also need to join it with

our T table so what I'm going to do

first is we are going to add the

calendar months date and then we are

going to add some Financial months so

first we are going to add calendar

months like uh start of year end of year

start of month end of month start of

quarter end of quarter all those and

then we will go and do the same thing

for financial Financial we limit ourself

to financial year and financial quarter

ET we would like to announce our

calendar table or the date table and the

first set of columns which we want to

add is basically the month name the

quarter number the year these are the

columns which want

to now to start with that I would like

to add the columns so one of the ways to

add a column is that what we have

learned so far is click on the table or

the

column and then you use this new column

from the column tools of the table tools

but that's not extendable because deck

scripts are not the script which you can

you know find out and take if you create

columns if I need to take this table to

the another file I actually need to

create those columns again or to

overcome this we can use something known

as add columns function now first of all

all we need to understand what this add

column function is ADD column functions

allows you to add the column to existing

table which takes the first argument as

a table then you can give name and the

expression expression is the expression

which you want to generate your column

it could be a calculation it could be a

static value whatever you want it could

table and the name and the expression

another thing which you should remember

this expression if it is using some

column it is limited by the table which

you have provided in this case in the

add columns I'm going to provide the

calendar and calendar is returning me

only one column date

it means all my calculations would be

dependent on date any column which I'm

adding new column which I'm adding to

this table let's say I say column let's

say month year I added a month year

column that column cannot participate in

the next column calculation only the

tables column it means I created column

one and now in the column two column one

can participate that cannot happen when

we are writing down add column script so

let's begin this Journey so add columns

the first argument of add column is a

table and then we are giving a table and

then we going to add new columns and

this is also finally going to return as

a table add columns return as a enhanced

table which will contain more

columns so and to get additional rows

I'll press shift

enter or Alt Enter now I may have to

make it little bit smaller here so that

I can show you more columns or we will

use scrolling so one pixel

smaller now First Column which I would

like to add here is ear which ear I

belongs to very simple I have a year

function which can give me year of the

date and basically because I'm talking

about calendar here so it's easy for me

only column which I have here is date I

cannot give a table name here I need to

use date so I got my year then I want a

next column so then I need to give a

comma at the the end of this or what we

can do is here is sometime this is

little bit better let me remove this

colum comma also we give the comma at

the start of the line easy to comment

such

lines month number how do I get the

month

number so we have a

function month which will give us we

take only one argument date so I got

year I got month quarter I need quarter

quarter number basically this you

instead of month you can call it as a

month

number maybe we want to use month is Mon

and quarter

number so how do I get quarter number we

have function quarter and we'll give a

date only one argument it is requires

only one argument date it gives us

quarter

number and before we go forward let's

close this add columns by giving a

parenthesis at the end so

able

name

expression name expression

name expression finally close

parenthesis this is going to give us a

new table with the inas

number we got year number month number

quarter number here we simply calling it

C I need let's say month name and month

here we create that so I pr press my

cursor shift enter shift enter shift

enter now only challenge with this is

that this will keep on moving down so we

will have lesser things to see but we'll

do so First Column double quotes I want

to give the name name is

month and here I want it in the one like

Jan Fab March for that first time I'm

using a function which is known as

format

a format functions take can take three

argument value the value could be number

value could be date format which we can

give in Double C the format There are

rules for giving this format what means

what in case of number in case of date

that you can find out on the

documentation local name sometime we use

like uh is

it us or it is Great Britain English or

something like that that can also decide

what format you want especially useful

in case of date now we go to format and

first argument is the value and here my

first argument is

date now you can go ahead and now this

give the format and the format which I

want to give is M mm 3 m means month

name like Jan Fab March and 4 m means

complete January February March close

press enter and you get here January

February March you can see below

now if I give 4 M we will give January

February

March now this is a text column and

power ba we have a problem the text

column cannot sort by its name by I can

simply call it some month column will

sort automatically we will discuss the

solution for that problem little bit

later but before I solve that problem I

want to come to the next one double I'll

give double quotes double

quotes and here I'll give month

here now month year I want the column

month

year what is the calculation I again

want to use format

function and

date I would like to give here the

format as M mm hyph y y y y 4 y

month Jan Fab March April May three

digit and 4 y means year four year and I

press enter Because my last parentheses

already there now it gives me January

February March I got my month month year

also now this is my calendar and the

next column which I need basically is

the quarter 2 TR quarter we already have

a quarter number so I'm simply calling

it as quarter and this time what I'm

going to do is the format which I need

so here what I'm going to do format

function and the first argument is date

in the second argument I would actually

like my names to be y y y I want Q to be

written but if I give Q it will give me

quarter number I'll tell you if I simply

give Q

here it give me quarter number so how do

I get a q so I can use back SL Q means

ignore if I want hyphen in between let

me use hyphen and see hyph is not a

letter which format is going to identify

so it's leave as it is to identify Q so

I use back SL Q to ignore the Q and

treat it as a normal letter q and next

second Q I leave it as is so for every Q

you let's say you want to write quarter

then let's say T and R doesn't have a

meaning then you can give and if the T

and R has a meaning then you have to

give with every letter like

this but q and R doesn't have meaning so

I can leave it as

is now the format why have knowingly

taken this format this format is a

sortable

format the previous mon format is not

sortable what do you mean by sortable

format if I give y y y y and then give

quarter number every time I put it

automatically get sorted even if it is a

text now let's go to the visual level

and understand that so let me add a new

page and in this

page let me now create a table using

month here simply drag month here and it

will create a table let me drag quarter

here and as you can see the quarter here

which is only called quarter it seems

like an sorted position q1 Q2 Q Q4 q1 Q2

but monthier is not how do I sort month

here mon is not in a sortable format in

power ba we don't have a way to tell

system that this is month here and sort

it like date no we need something known

as sort column so I'm going to create a

new column here which I'll call as month

year

sort how can we get sort the one way is

I create y y y mm using the format which

is a sortable format so y y y 4 Y and mm

is always a sort table format for month

year or I'll tell you one more way which

I want it numerical so I say Year I'll

use I'll use function year year

date multiply it by 100

plus month

of date what does that will do

if this itself is a sortable whenever

you put it will got SED but how will

this month here sort will sort month

year so for that what you have to do is

me make it a little bit smaller click on

month year column either here in the

table view or here in the data

view click on that column you will get

the column tools and the column tools

should show your column which you want

to sort go to sort by column in the

middle click down and choose the column

on which you want to sort this column

you are going to choose the column which

you are going to choose is going to sort

your column now so monthe sort follow

the Sorting of monthier sort so monthier

sort is a column which can sort my

column

correctly it is done now if I go back to

the

visualization you will see that the

columns are sorted

correctly now we would like also like to

have one more column which is year week

and week of the year and then again

we'll add year week or we can only call

it week number but I would like here to

be ear week for that what I'm going to

use is ear

function on the

date again multiplied by

100 plus there is a function week number

date requir second argument also in the

week number the second argument can be

one means starting from Sunday it can be

two means starting from Monday again we

have argument from 11 to 17 from Monday

Tuesday Wednesday and so on 17 means

starting from Sunday and 21 is for ISO

so these are some of the arguments which

you can give the similar kind of

arguments also available for week day

and some of them might not be in

documented format means you will not be

able to see that these arguments are

available but you will be able to use

and when we will do Week start date and

week end date we will let you know right

now I'll keep it two so that I'll have a

Monday Week

start let me add week days here how do I

add weekday here and then we will

discuss whether our week number is

correct or not so how do we add weekday

there's a function known as week day but

it's going to give me numeric

here I don't need 1 2 3 4 5 I actually

need the names again week day have an

argument like uh 1 and two so I'll use

format on the

date and if you give date three times it

is m o and Monday Tuesday in the short

form four it is going to give complete

so I'm going to use 3 days now DDD in

the format function to get weekday name

and the reason why I r that let me let

you know that the first week this

calendar itself start on a Monday so

starting on a Monday and if the first

week goes till Sunday it means this is

Monday Sunday week and this is week

number

one then we have week number two again

from Monday to Sunday so week number is

using Monday to Sunday week and weekday

is verifying that well very first level

of our calendar is ready let us start

adding the new column like start of

month end of month start of quarter end

of quarter start of year end of year now

all these will depend on whether your

year is a financial year or calendar

year first We'll add for calendar year

and then we'll try to create our own

Logic for the financial year we have few

functions which can do this for us but

they have a limitation how to understand

that limitation what I'm going to do is

I'm going to change this calendar

statement a little bit so let me command

this particular line and put it again

now in I will not use EO month here and

I'll tell you why I'm doing so I'll use

minimum and then I'll it till today so

let me commit this change and you will

see my calendar is now starting on

October 13th let me check where it is

ending it should end on ending on 1st

January 2024 now let's try to use the

start of the month function now start of

the month function will not work in the

add columns start of month basically I

need a date on which this month has

started and I'll give date it is not

taking it so parameters is not correct

type so it basically need table name

column name we say okay fine it's not

working here that let me go ahead and

directly add it as of now the quickest

way is to directly go and write down a

new column and the new column will be

month start start of month function so

we as you can see we have start of month

start of quarter start of year start of

month I'm using it require only one

column The Continuous dates and I'll

give the eight date table and let me

press enter now ignore the first one if

I go to the November month it is showing

me the correct start date if I go down

any date after the October month it is

showing me correct dates if I go here

also you will see that it is showing me

the correct start dates of every month

except the first month why is it that

behavior so the reason behind this one

is that card of month require continuous

stes and it cannot go beyond the

boundaries of the date which is

contained in the column which has been

supplied so what happens if the month

start date is not available it will take

the minimum date available in that table

so because of that the start of the

month is happening at the 13th of

October same way when I take start of

quarter now start of quarter again has

the same problem for the first quarter

instead of from first October which is

the quarter start it will start from

October 13 again because it doesn't find

the 1 October minimum date whatever it

find before that it's taking that if I

use start of year you will see the same

issue again no 1 January it's October

13th which is the minimum date available

continuous

state from month start to month end and

let me use the function end of end of

month what happens now very happy first

month is coming correct but let's go to

the last value January doesn't end on

first isn't it doesn't end on first it

ends on 31st January not able to find

because there's no date which is

available after that so it's going to

end there okay what happens to the end

of

quarter you will see the same issue with

the end of quarter the last date what I

can do is s descending it will come on

the top as you can see the month is

ending on the last year same way for the

year if you try again the year will also

end on the 1st January so it cannot go

beyond the date it has to stop there and

because of this reason we are unable to

use start of month end of month if we

are not using a standard calendar

specifically if the calendars are not

starting and ending on the standard

month start date and month end date then

we cannot use it if your calendar is

starting on standard month start date

and ending on standard month ended you

can use these functions without any

doubt but I need to tell you the

Alternatives what I'm going to do is I'm

going to delete these things and I'll

tell you how to create it without using

these functions now you learned these

functions only one argument these

function required other than the end of

year and end of quarter end of year and

end of quarter start of year year

function and end of year function can

take another argument which is basically

year anded which can also be supplied to

get the financial again the limitation

is if you want to create the financial

year the calendar should start from the

financial month start date and should

end on the Financial month end date

otherwise the end dates would not be

correct so what is the alternate so I'll

tell you here so let me create start of

month and new column in the add column

I'll continue to add the column in this

add column and the what is the date I

want want start of the month and we'll

use function e month now e month gives

end of month and for the row in the date

if I give zero it will give current

abundant date so what we do is we go to

last month end date which is minus one

means last month end date plus one so

two argument it takes EO month first

argument is date second argument is

which month and date so minus one means

last month and date and then I'm doing

plus one in Dex you can simply add

numbers to a date to travel number of

days you want then we press enter and

now we got the start of the month and as

you can see this is correct but let's go

start ascending and you can see though

the calendar has not started on the

first date there still getting the

correct start of the month now end of

the month is simple we know that this

there is a function which actually

actually is for there for end of the

month let me write down that one end of

month EO month which months and date I

need I need the current month end dat it

is very simple for us just give a zero

enter and we got the end dat now we have

to check it for the largest statee we

have S this ending and if as you can see

here it gives us the correct month and

date though the month and date is not

present in the calendar or the date

table or the dates which are available

in the table which is we are using here

the date column itself doesn't contain

the dates which we require before I'll

go to the quarter because quarter

require a little bit of logic I'll show

you how easily we can achieve the start

of year and end of year now start of

year I'm showing you the calendar later

on we'll come and develop the logic

shift enter shift enter start of year

how do we start the year now we will use

the same function this one only Now

understand when I subtracted one month

from October when where did you went

September If I subtract two then August

what happens so if I subtract one you

are 1 month less so if I subract nine

where would you reach you would reach

January but if I subtract 10 where would

you reach you will reach December so if

I subtract 10 then you will reach end of

the month December and then plus month

will give you January so how do I know

the month of the date so I can use month

function and there I can give date as an

argument so what I'm saying here is

basically from the date you have to go

minus one star number of months which

you had so you will reach 10 months

behind in this case for October minus

one is September minus 2 is August and

same way you will reach - 10 means last

December and plus one means you will

reach the start of the year and as you

can see we are getting the correct start

of the Year date here and let's sort

ascending and check it out we are also

getting it so start date is correct now

end date how do I reach end it now how

do I identify how many months I need to

add because months are changing January

is different February is no to reach 12

we need to reach 12 month isn't it what

would happen when we give zero October

when we give two what will be happen

November when we'll give two it would be

December December is 12 what is the

current month 10 12 - 10 is 2 we need to

reach 2 months if we are in September if

you give zero September 1 October 2

November 3 December 12 - 9 is 3 it means

if we subtract the month from the 12 we

will exactly get how many number of

month we should go ahead so what we are

going to do here is we copy paste this

one we don't need to add the plus one

now simply go ahead and say end of year

EO month 12 minus the number of months

which is is already passed me that

include the current one and we should

get end of year date so start of year we

got using the month number end of year

we are also getting using the month

number enter and let's look at the date

perfect end of year date 2018 thought

descending check what we are getting for

the 1 of January 2024 31st of December

2024 we are able to get it now we comes

to the logic of quarter quarter is not

very simple because what happens is we

have these quarter which are ending

every 3 months we are right now

preparing for the calendar it's easy for

us because they are we can use division

by three as a criteria actually even if

the month start from a common date and

the quarters then there are couple of

ways one way is

for January what we can do month is one

so I subtract - 1 month from E month

I'll read December and then I can add

plus one to get the 1 January similarly

for February u monthus 2 31st December

Plus 1 day we'll reach January for March

minus 3 and plus one day we will reach 1

January but for April the formula little

bit need to change because now I need to

only say Min - one then -2 then minus 3

they say okay fine what we can do is we

can find out their remainder by dividing

by three but the challenge with the

remainder is when we take it from

January it is fine one means one

remainder is one for February remainder

is two for March remainder is not three

the remainder is zero so we say fine we

can adjust it so we use start of qtr and

you might have to actually think about

this logic little bit I have done quite

a few video and few people uh do get

this mathem ma matical equation how I'm

changing it so just pay attention you

might have to rebuild your own Logic on

that first is very simple if mod mod is

a function which gives me remainder so

it takes a number Division and gives the

remainder so we are learning a

mathematical function mod here mod

functions give us the remainder what is

the number we need for which we we need

the month number so month of date and I

could have used this inside a variable

so let me do one thing where underscore

r equals and I'll tell you when you

inside the add function when you use

variable how to use that now if the mod

of the month from 3 equals to 0er then

three if it is becoming zero it means if

it is third month the mod is coming zero

it means it is three otherwise it should

be same as mod or it could be same as

the it should be same as mod because for

four you can't say no no it is a month

number no in case of four I need one and

if you want to avoid this calculation

twice you could have created a variable

on this first and then used it so now I

got my calculation this is this is what

is going to give me 1 2 and 0 1 2 and 0

1 2 and 0 and then what it will convert

it the if statement will convert it into

12 1231 123 shift enter tab tab just and

I'm pressing tab so that you know you're

able to understand the code the code is

aligned better now I'll so when you use

variable you need to write down written

statement and in this case also you can

do this but and I'm going to write down

in the same line so now it is very

simple for us EO month of the date Min

-1 star this remainder what we got

underscore remainder and then add the +

one add the plus one to date now let's

look are we getting the correct one this

is start of quarter for descending let's

s it ascending let's sort it ascending

October after that we got January and

this is what we are getting on the 1

January seems correct let's look at

April and then we can go and simply

check the start dates this is quarter

number so don't go by this look at here

1 January so this is 1 April that's fine

and we can look at all the quarter start

dates all quarter start date seems

correct quarter end dat now if I so what

happens for January I need to go 2

months ahead February I need to go 1

month ahead and March I don't need to go

so there

are so what we will in this Cas is we

will say let's write down the formula

for this one I erased it EO month date 3

minus the remainder and we will reach

the end of month so we don't need

anything for that let's Commit This and

let me go down you can see this is

ending on 31st December end of quarter

let's scroll a little bit down and then

this one you can see a change of date

here on this line in the January let's

look at all the quarter end dates seems

correct and not dependent on the dates

which which are available on the

calendar so now we are able to get the

month start date year start date quarter

start date month end date year end date

quarter end next most important thing is

Week start date week end date so now we

would like to add the column start of

week and end of week I'm going to do is

while we can add in this table but this

table has too many columns one of the

ways that I remove some of the columns

or I add at the start but what I'm going

to do is I'm going to add those column

in date Auto where we only have couple

of columns and and now because it's a

script we can come back and add the

columns into the date table we're going

to do at the end so start of week end of

week no standard function we have to

create it now the logic the way we have

to drive it let's say Monday is your

start of week so Monday means you to go

zero behind Tuesday means you to go one

day behind Wednesday means you to go 2

days behind Thursday means 3 days behind

Min subtract simple number subtraction

will there is a function weekday

function also which can give us for

Monday 1 Tuesday 2 so every week which

you want to start first of all you need

to have a week day for that kind kind of

start so if I want a Monday start or if

I want a Sunday start what I'm going to

do is there is are arguments which can

help you and these are other than one

and two and let's try those out today so

to start with let me first of all start

by add column and I would like to add

here a weekday okay so and not weekday

number I would like to add a weekday

name here weekday name how do we add

weekday name we have learned just few

minutes before is that we can use for

format function for that format date

again calendar Auto also gives us a date

let's use DD d d four times give us the

complete one Alt Enter Alt Enter so we

got Monday Tuesday and S ascending is

the date so this start so any Monday

week cover the first week as a full one

now let's play around with one argument

here where I want to have a new column

which is nothing but week day as a

number and week day is a number week day

date first argument column return return

type 1 2 3 try 11 though it's showing an

error but as you can see here it is

giving 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 so

Monday is day one let's try the argument

12 so in case of 12 Tuesday is 1 and

then

mon other than that we have 1 and two

also as an argument one means Sunday and

two means Monday and one means Sunday

start so I'll tell you the formula and

you can use those argument as you

require so let's say I need I actually

need the Monday so I can use 2 or 11 so

date it's a very simple formula date

minus weekday we'll reach a day before

not reach Monday we'll reach Sunday

because on Monday I'll subract one day

I'll reach Sunday in Tuesday I'll

subract two days I'll reach a Sunday so

we'll say okay after that just add plus

one so this is nothing but Week start

dat what we got here is Monday as Week

start date then again the next Monday is

again the week start date and you can

check what is the date on the Monday now

if you need Tuesday is the week start

dat what you need to do no change in the

formula only Chang in this parameter

just do that commit come out Week start

date becomes the Tuesday start date same

way you can work for Wednesday this is

Tuesday this is next Tuesday this is the

entire week so get it we'll keep it

Monday you can keep it 2 or 11: what is

week and date week and date is six day

ahead of the Week start date I want to

add six more so I can simply go ahead

and add plus seven here and sometime

what we is 7 + 7 minus week day both are

going to give you same result so either

you do plus 7 here or you do plus 7 here

both in same and we cannot have to

column name with the week start date you

need to week end date press enter and

you get the end date now the start date

and that's your end date you're ending

on 7th which is a Sunday then you ending

another on Sunday this is this so now

any calculation you know 11 12 13 14 15

16 17 are what we are looking at so now

you understood the calculation I can

copy this and this is why I prefer this

manner I can go to the date table just

shift enter or Alt Enter back space

backspace back space in this case and

then I simply press enter here at the

end and I have Week start date and week

dat end date also available here and as

this is not starting from 1 January so

that's why you have the weeks which are

starting from The Middle of the month as

this is starting from 13th of October

based on that our weeks are coming

here now I want to create Financial year

start and financial year end now because

my months are standard months so the

calculation for the month start date and

month end date is not going to change

but the year month calculation will

change because let's say if my year

starts on April the April is the first

month and let's consider that case only

when April is the first month so again

my date table has a lot of columns as we

have done in the p we are going to

create these here and then we'll take

them to the other scpt now let we start

with the start of start of FY let's call

it Financial year started start of fi

where do here start the year starts in 1

of April years end on 31st March any

month like January February March they

have their year started in the last year

month which are after April which is 4

to 12 the month the year started in the

same year so this is the logic which we

are going to use and for that we are

going to use an statement so what I'm

going to do is I'm going to create a

date tape date using the date function

but and remember four and one are

constant right now the only thing we are

doing is keeping a little bit of hard

coding we say month number is four and

day is one that is constant here is

something which we need to change if the

month of the date is in the row now is

less than four then the year of the date

is not starting this year it's starting

in the last year so whatever year you

have it's minus one otherwise you can

continue with the year you had because

your ear is going to start in this year

only what we are saying is the in the

year part of this one is basically that

if the month of the date is less than

four the true condition then year is in

the last year the Year start and if it

is greater than or equal to then year is

starting this year and after that we can

simply hardcode 4A 1 what we got first

uppl as our start date now this is

starting in October so it will have that

now we have to travel till 31st March

and 1st April to see is there a change

happening so these are the two rows we

are looking forward and look at the

years so the years are changing in the

month of April now end date again we

will keep very simple Logic for the end

date but here what is happening if it is

before April it's ending in the same

year after April it isend ending next

year the Year doesn't end on this year

shift enter past this end of FY and if

it is less than then it's ending this

year if it is more then it's going to

end next year plus one either it ends

this year or it ends next

year where does it end it doesn't end on

April it ends on 331st we have to do the

adjustment and then enter or commit and

we got the date of 31st March as the end

of year and if you you can scroll down

again to the same place

March look at these rows March

April end of year is

changing so we got our financial year

now to get the month number and the

quarter number the formulas which I

wanted to use need start of the year

start of F5 now the challenge with us

here is basically that this table which

the current Table of the add columns

doesn't have that because they are

calculated in this table itself we

cannot use use them so now what to do

what I'm going to do is I'm going to put

this entire table into a variable that

we call that where underscore tab equals

and then what I'm going to do is I'm

going to go down it's a variable so I

need to return something I'll return

this table return underscore tab let's

do a little bit of alignment change you

better understand that enter nothing is

changed this the same table now what

happens is this new tab which is coming

down which is in the return have all the

columns what we need and now we can use

start of fi and end of f the reference

point now it is available in that table

so if I now add add column on this tab

here at this place if I add add column

it will have these two columns start of

FY and end of FY and using that we are

going to drive out our now our month

number Financial month number and

quarter start date and quarter end date

one of the most important thing in any

data analytics or business intelligence

analytics project is time intelligence

time intelligence is critical to compare

data Against Time you want to compare

this month versus last month this month

till date versus last month till date

this month versus last year same month

this year versus last year quarter

versus quarter QQ y y week on week these

are the kind of comparison you wanted to

these comparisons are really important

to understand are we doing good or bad

powera provide you huge list of time

intelligence functions and sometime you

have more than one option to achieve one

thing now there are ways and means you

can write down your own time

intelligence function using the other

functions or you can get the value let's

say MTD using the standard MTD functions

and then you can also get that using

let's say date between or maybe using

the filter function now for everything

there is a fit for purpose it is really

important to understand all these time

intelligence functions in powerb to make

sure the time intelligence works for us

the first step is to make sure the six

step which I'm going to tell you you

ensure that these six steps are done in

your powerbi setup or your schema is

following those six step or six rules

poose that we are going to check in our

own file that yes we are right now

following these six step while we are

going to do this time intelligence

journey in powerbi there are six rules

one must follow to make sure the time

intelligence work in powerbi if you

don't follow these rules the time

intelligence May Fail or may not give

the desired results so these six points

or rules are use date table you have to

always create a date table and use it

and you have to join the date of your

fact with the date of the date table the

date table is marked as a date table now

once you mark date table as a date table

or calendar table as a date table it is

going to ensure that you have continuous

dat continuous States is really

important for all powerbi time

intelligence functions use columns from

the date table when we will use the

visualization in powerbi you must

remember that you have to use the

columns from the date table like date

month year Etc into visualization into

slicer into filter and into measure all

these places the column should come from

the date table to make sure the time

intelligence work properly the date does

not have a time stamp now your fact

table date might have a time stamp and

sometime because you have just taken the

data type as date you might not be able

to see it so the best practice is to

change the data type as date time and

then choose a format where you can see

the time and then see you don't have any

time other than 00 hours or 12:00 a.m.

you must not have any time other than 00

hours or 12 a.m if that's how your date

is looking then you can use that if

there is any other time other than 00

hours or 12:00 a.m. like 2: a.m. 2: p.m.

1:00 a.m. 1 p.m. Etc then you should

create a date column that you can do in

power query you can change the data type

as date and if you change it in power

query it will lose the Tim stamp and if

you want to do it in Dex you can create

a new column using date value once you

have ensured that your date doesn't have

a Tim stamp you can join it with the

date of the date table and because we

are going to create date table using

calendar and calendar Auto function that

is going to ensure that your date table

will not have a time stamp in the date

column you have also need to make sure

that your date table has all the dates

because if your date table doesn't have

all the dates your time intelligence may

not work correctly if you are using a

date from the date table and you are

putting any measure from the fact and it

is started showing blank in the date

column then it means you don't have all

the dates when you're using calendar

Auto function it can make sure that you

have full coverage of date coming from

various other tables but when you're

using calendar function you have to make

sure that you do the full coverage this

is another important point you should

remember avoid bidirectional join if you

have a bidirectional join your fact

table will filter the date table what do

it essentially means is if there is a

date missing in the fact table because

it is missing in the fact table or

because you have applied some filter and

now the dates are less it may actually

reduce the date in the date table which

you are using in a Time intelligence

function and once there are not and once

the and once continuous dates are not

available your time intelligence May

error out or may not work properly if

you take

care so these are the six rules and if

you take care of these six rules your

time intelligence should work

properly we want to start time

intelligence now let's make sure all the

six rules has been followed or not let

start that with the model view do we

have a date table yes we have a date

table is date table marked as a date

table to ensure that we have continuous

dates right click Mark date table Mark

as date table select a date column the

date column should should be the one

which is a primary key or which is the

main date column it may be coming from

your sources it's not necessary you need

to create it in powerbi you can create

it at the source you can create it in

power query you can create it in Dex

make sure the dates are continuous so

the validation is successful press okay

and the moment you do the first thing

which will change here is it will now be

a key it will no more be a date and

there will be no more autod date

hierarchy Auto date time intelligence is

gone is it joined with our table no it

is not joined look at again this date

sales date and if I scroll down here

sales date will have a hierarchy so we

have a sales date with which I want to

join let me drag the date of the date

table on the sales date and the

relationship is created now I need to

make sure the two things which I should

have checked before one is the date the

say date doesn't have a time stamp I

need to make sure that and second is the

date table covering all the dates now

I'll go to the table View and inside the

table view let me go to the sales table

and here I have my sales date how do I

ensure that there is no time stamp so

usually what I do for that is I change

the data type to date time and I take a

format where I can see a time stamp all

the dates should have a time stamp of

12:00 a.m. all the date in my case have

a time stamp of 12:00 a.m. any date

having time stamp other than 12:00 a.m.

it means the join will not be successful

that is there I can change it format

back to date and I can keep it in the

short format so column TOS help Us in

that now let's go ahead and check do we

have the complete set of dates now we

may have multiple tables so the one of

the ways is that you take the Min and

Max of the dates and check it out one of

the easiest way to do that is create a

page bring date or some from the date

table a bring a measure or some

aggregated column from your facts one or

more fact the moment I bring in let's

create a table visual you should not see

any null date sending s dat I'm not

seeing Al date it means all the dates

are joined and I'll tell you one example

where if the dates are not complete what

would happen so let's go to our date

table and we are using the Min date here

let me use a date which is 2019 01 01

now I have data from October 2018 but if

I make it 2019 what would happen I'll

start getting a blank so this blank

means the dates are missing or there is

a time stamp join problem there's a date

time if you see this check out those two

things now let me complete my date table

I can make it from the starting of 2018

the moment I cover all the dates you

will see I do not have blank date when

there is no empty date or blank date it

means we are fully covered you may have

more than one fact add all of them and

check it out so time intelligence setup

is correct one more thing which we need

to ensure is going to come when we

create a Time intelligence major when we

create a Time intelligence major and we

want to use it we need to ensure the

major should use the columns from the

date table or the period the visual

right now you can see the visual is

using date from the date table and the

slices and filter should also be on the

date tape that's the way when it's going

to work best which we are going to check

after our first time intelligence before

I do that once again I'll click on the

date go to the column format change its

format to date and we'll also change it

to short format so that whenever I'm

creating visualization I get little bit

of space when I'm doing some work so

let's start with time intelligence now

as part of our journey we are going to

learn MTD MTD means month till date

means from the start of the month till

the date which we have selected or the

till the date which is available in the

context qtd quarter till date from the

start of the quarter till the date we

have selected or in the context and the

quarter start date would be decided on

based on the date which you have

selected also the quarter start date

will be dependent on your financial year

start date if your financial year is not

starting from the standard quarter

months like Jan April July and October

you might have a different quarter start

date than what you have for the standard

quarter similarly year till date YTD YTD

means year till date year till date

typically we call it when we are using

from standard calendar start date so

standard calendar year start date till

date from the start of the calendar year

till date is yd but in case of a

financial year the Year may start on

let's say 1st April then it is from the

finan year start date till date so let's

try to understand these till date when

we say MTD qtd YTD what does this means

month till date quarter till date year

till date assume my date is 15th of

September 2024 so for 15th of September

2024 what is going to be my MTD my MTD

is going to be from the start of the

month which is from 1st of September

2024 to 15th of September 2024 my qtd is

going to be from the start of the

quarter which is 1st of July 2024 to

15th of September 202 4 my YTD would be

from the start of the year in this case

the calendar year which is from 1st

January 2024 to 15th of September 2024

what happens when my year start from the

1st April now again 1st April is going

to have all the standard quarters so

it's not going to change anything for

quarter same way it is standard month

start so it's not going to change

anything for the month also so MTD would

be from 1st of September 2024 to 15th of

September 2024 QD would be from 1st of

July 2024 to 15th of September 2024 YTD

would be from 1st of April 2024 to 15th

of September 2024 this is because our

financial year is starting from the 1

April it is not starting from the

calendar year so that is why the start

date of YTD has changed and sometime we

call this as fytd Financial year till

date let us start with our first time

intelligence measure and the first time

intelligence major is MTD month till

date means from start of the month till

the date which is being selected or

present in the context the date could

have been selected in the slicer or

available in the row context based on

that date it should give us the data for

that for MTD there are many ways you can

achieve it but first of all we will

learn dates MTD and total MTD functions

Tes MTD function need to be used in a

calculate function total MTD function

might not require a calculate because it

can take a measure as well as the date

to give you the total MTD there are two

fun functions and later on when we

progress when we go to quarter till date

and year till date we will only start

using one of them so the function is

total MTD and dates MTD I'll start with

total MTD which is basically a

self-sufficient function it doesn't

require calculate let me click on the

measure table and I can see the table

tool as of now and inside the table tool

I have a new major option which I'm

going to use in this case let me click

on new major and here I'm going to

create my first time intelligence major

that is MTD net and I'm going to use

total MTD total MTD requires an

expression date and filter it can have a

filter and if you need more than one

filter then you can again use calculate

on top of total MTD otherwise total MTD

doesn't require calcul what is the

expression so expression date filter

what is the expression expression is

Major dates is the sequential date where

we are going to give the date column

from the date table and filter as of now

I'll not give I'll give my major net for

which I want the MTD then I'll give date

from the date table and no requirement

of filter as of now so I'll continue

with this I created my first time

intelligence major MTD net and let me

bring in here now it is from the start

of the month now on the month of October

2018 we don't have the data which is

starting from the first date is 13th

October 2018 and that's the date from

where the aggregation of the data would

start and till the last date of the

month you will see the data is keep on

adding as you can see these two dates

are getting added on the next so we got

36 on 3 days now it is 73 3 days getting

added and it keep on increasing till 30

1 which is the last date of this month

and on the 1 November the first date of

November you see there is a reset and

this is what we call MTD start point you

start MTD from the start date of the

month so the value of the that day and

MTD would be equal but on the next day

it will start increasing so on the

second you have sum of first two days on

third you have first 3 days fourth you

have sum of first 4 days and keep on

going till the month and date and you

will see another reset happening on the

1st of December till 31st is going to

end on first there would be a reset now

MTD Works based on the date in the

context now date here in the context is

basically the date in the row there is

nothing coming from Filter context let

me bring in month here in another visual

I'll drag it into empty space sorting is

correct and let me drag in MTD major

there in this case when we use month

here the MTD major is going to give us

the last dates value and it will act

like a monthly value if you're using at

the month level the MTD will act like a

monthly value at the month level From

First to Last that's the monthly value

it's a current month the month in the

context we have not talked about the

filter as now how does it behave with

respect to filters what happens when we

apply a filter so now the case when the

date is available in the row context and

even if you apply filter let's say I

apply the November filter now we know

the other visual can also act as a

filter when we apply you can see only

November month data we can't get more

than November month data unless we

follow the tricks and the data will

start aggregating for that you may have

a date filter specific very specific

date filter on that date filter how much

data will I get on that day's data or

the MTD data so let me bring in a slicer

for the date I'll bring the date in

between convert it into a slicer and let

me go ahead and change this slicer

setting using the format which is

available on the right hand side and

slicer I would like a drop down and when

I drop down I would drop down actually

go a little bit down I would like to

select something in November so let me

select fourth November so as you can see

the MTD value is for the 4th November

till from first to Fourth even if the

date is not selected you can remove the

fourth number context okay but the date

from first second and third no is not

selected but still it is going to get

that and give you the MTD value if the

value are available in your data the

fourth number is going to give me that

value now we understand that if you

select a month the dates in the context

is going to control that we selected

more than if we select a single date

that date is going to play what happens

and both filter and slicer context are

missing so let's make sure there is no

filter context and there's no slicer

context right now now there is nothing

selected on the slicer nothing select on

the visualization and we remove the

filter and the slicer context and now we

will bring in MTD into a card visual why

we are seeing a blank what is the date

is getting for us what happens these

total MTD and even the dates MTD

function going to follow soon it takes

the last date available in the context

of what the date which is supplied here

and what is the last date available in

the date column please remember it's

only for TD functions for the previous

they take the first date if you go to

our date table the last date is today I

don't have any data for today and for

even for today's month my data ends in

2020 we are in 2024 I don't have any

data for the current month what date

range exactly it is taking for that I'm

going to give you an example and let's

try to use dates MTD let me do a little

bit of visual adjustments

here so I'm going to create my second

major time intelligence major it's again

going to be the MTD major so this time

I've clicked on a major so Major Tool is

visible and from the major tool I'm

going to create a new major and the

major is MTD net1 and this time I need

to use calculate calculate net I'm going

to use a function dates

MTD dates MTD actually required only one

argument which is dates this is also

true with the next function which we are

going to use is dates qtd definitely

dates YTD we can have two arguments it

do cover the year and date which we'll

see later only one date and the date

date which you provide it's going to

pick up the last date from that and

based on that the last date so what it

is going to do is it's going to pick up

the last date from the context now the

context could be the filter context or

could be the row context or if there is

no context available it's going to go

till the last date of the calendar dates

which you are supplying here and going

to take that out dates MTD actually

return return me a table of dates or a

sequence of dates based on the date in

the context is going to return me from

the start of the month till that date is

sequence of date it's going to come up

set of dates month up to current date

date of date and never most of the

people understand it in the context of

today today you cannot pass first of all

it needs sequence of date you can't pass

today to a date 7 and date where what is

there is defined by the context so we

given date of date what is filter

context or what is row context otherwise

what is the last date in case of MTD it

could be first date in case of previous

functions so and this function will also

help us in understanding what we are

getting so again the same results so

dates MTD and total MTD their uses is a

little bit different but they're going

to give us the same result again we are

getting the month till date data using

this one and the same behavior at the

month level there's no difference so it

gives you sequence of date from the

first date of the month till that

particular date the set of date and to

understand that what we are getting and

what we are getting why we are getting

this blank and let me bring in the other

one also as a card visual let's create a

table and see what dates we are getting

so let's click on any of the table and

create a new table and in that table we

will see what dates we have using dates

MTD date of date now because cable is

static in nature it is pre-calculated

the only thing it can do is go ahead and

get the last date because it's not going

to follow any filter context any row

context is going to get the last date in

the calendar based on that is going to

calculate that and let's go to the table

view now and check what does this table

contains for us and as you can see the

dates table contains the date of the

current month from the start date and

this is because the calendar is editing

at today now let me change my calendar

don't think that it gives from today let

me change my calendar I'm changing my

calendar and now it is no more going to

end on today let me end my calendar on

date 202 1231 again have data till

October I'm ending it the 12th month and

now let me go to the dates table again

you see the data is from December 2020

and all the dates 31 dates are available

the reason for that it taken that last

date available in the calendar and

calculated it so these are the date

applicable and because of that you get

these blank values now you understand

now you know how to play around with how

to control that so this is what we have

to continue so now we have learned MTD

let me rename this qtd total qtd are the

functions to achieve quarter till date

you have understood by now that the

total qtd function is one which might

not require calculate while dates qtd is

going to require calculate to do the

calculation let's start with qtd

functions again total qtd dates qtd two

options are available I'll go to quickly

create that so let me add a visual here

date and this time I'm going to add date

because we know it Behavior how it's

going to behave after this one so we'll

quickly create the two majors and the

two major which I'm going to create here

is qtd Majors so qtd net first of all

with total

qtd again three arguments expression

dates and filter we are going to pass

only two as of now expression is net

dates is date of dates that's all

let me also add one more major based on

the UTD net 2 and here I'm going to use

dates QD is going to give me the set of

dates date of date two majors going to

return me the same results just

implementation difference what does it

this do start from the first date of the

quarter the first date is not available

first available date of the quarter and

go till the last date of the quarter the

last date of this quarter is 31st

December and it's continuously

increasing in this direction values you

can see the daily values are increasing

where they will reset they will reset on

the first date of the quarter so you can

see the November has started till the

values are increasing let's go on 31st

December and we have 31st December and

1st January together now you can see

it's increasing till this date and post

that it is changing now to understand

this increase let's also bring in net

into the visualization and as you can

see on the first date of the quarter the

values is same as that day's value and

this is going to be true prove with

every start of the quarter not start of

the month now if I go to February there

is no more a reset at the month's start

the value is not same as the value on

that day for the second month because

it's a quarter till quarter and date it

will keep on increasing so we got now

qtd for YTD we are going to use States

YTD and total YTD total

YTD might not require the calculate

because it to have a capability to take

a measure and provides you total YTD

along with the date column

provided for financial year in both

States YTD and total YTD we can provide

a financial year end date and they can

calculate the financial year till date

values now let's bring in YTD we are

going to bring it into the same visual

for that again two majors and you will

notice one difference this time when we

calculate YTD so YTD net let me start

with total YTD total ydd again we

require expression dates filter but

there is a year and date year and date

means if your financial year is not

ending on 1231 you can give any date on

which it is ending and based on that is

going to start the year end date is only

for the reference where it year ends can

get the year starting point based on

that and can calculate your YTD based on

that so here again for the first

starting I can avoid the year and

argument and I'm going to do that and

let me calculate total YTD and that's

going to give me YTD let me bring in the

YTD using dates YTD so net

YTD net 1 equal to calculate net dates

YTD and dates YTD required dates and

year and date it's required two

argument so date of date and second

argument I'm leaving let me add it to

the visual if the visual is selected I

can simply click on that I got the YTD

value now where would the reset happen

see because we are starting in a last

quarter so we will see the reset on the

first January itself here the quarter

value and the year value same doesn't

mean that it's going to be always the

case and there is only a reset happening

at this start of the year now in the

entire year you will see the

continuously values are increasing till

the time we reach the end of 2019 and

you can see here the max value reached

here and there is a reset which is

happening on 1st January 20 so whyd get

reset on that day now because it was

asking end date it does mean that we can

change where it should reset so let's

say you want a financial year ending on

331st we can do that so let's create a

YTD for FY and we can call it FY YTD net

and I'm only going to use one function

for that as of now both the functions

can do the same job for us and here in

the dates YTD we are going to use the

second argument now is year and date and

this is not available with other TDS

month and quarter only available with

YTD function and let me add this now

let's look the value looks same but we

have to pay attention on 1st January

because on the 1st January this YTD is

not going to reset so this this is

resetting this is resetting this is not

resetting because it will reset on 1st

April when we cross the year on 31st

first March so when we cross year it is

getting a reset and the value is same as

the start of the the quarter in this

manner we can create Financial year till

date from the start of the Year till the

that particular date now let's learn how

can we get the previous month value

previous month till date and previous

month why I'm talking about two things

I'll tell you in a short file let me

duplicate this page after I duplicate

I'll remove one one major from here I

don't need two TDS one TD is sufficient

for me now I would like to bring in the

last year month till date so definitely

I need MTD function for that but other

than MTD I need to make sure that I go

one month back and to go one month back

I'm going to use a function which is

known as date add function the date add

function is going to help again date add

function require continuous set of dates

so let me go ahead and create a measure

and tell you how do I let me add a new

measure from the table tool and this

measure I want is lmtd last month till

date so I want lmtd net calculate net

that's the same thing I'm doing now here

comes the

difference dates MTD that's same but

inside the dates MDD I want the entire

dates to move a month back I'm going to

use a function date add and please

remember the understanding of date head

that date head also require continuous

for dates please watch date as dated

video on my channel for that so dates

require the first arguments is dates

date of date this the second argument is

interval how many intervals I want to go

to last month so minus one plus one for

next month interval day month quarter

year I need month here what I've done

here is basically the continuous

argument which date argument which I

passed to my MTD has been moved a month

behind it is still the continuous date

but a month behind let me press and

enter here my major is created let me

bring it inside the visualization one

here and one on the month here so I

bought the MTD in the table which I have

dates and you can see exactly after the

1 month the MTD has started and it

increasing in the similar fashion now go

down and pay attention on 30th what

value we are getting on 30th I'm getting

the value not of the last day of the

30th October 7 547 K 547 is on 30th

October not 31st when I'm using date by

date it take the 30th value but look at

here what is happening at the month

level at the month level it takes the

complete value so MTD used with a

trailing date using date ad is going to

give me the last month value when I use

the full month value and corresponding

days MTD month till date of the last

month on that date whatever date I have

on that days of the last month what was

my value it's going to give me that so

this is MTD for me now I will tell you

one more function that function is going

to give us previous meth and the

function which I'm going to use is name

itself is previous month so let me

create a new majure meure tool is open

as of now I'll click on new

measure

calculate net and the function I'm going

to use is previous month previous month

required only one argument that is date

again when we use year it will require

more than one argument you can decide

the year and date date of date I'm

supplying and I'm completing this let me

bring in this observe the difference

which we are going to get here and you

might have realized the moment I dragged

it in the visual which contains only

date is actually not the single day

value it's the complete last month even

for each date the next month while on

the month level I'm fine with having a

value which is month and date value it

is not suitable for MTD and definitely

this is not a function for MTD this is a

function for previous month it gives you

complete previous month so now you

understand how the MTD trade triling can

be done and how can we use previous

month I would like to bring in something

here now let me bring in lmtd here and

as expected it is blank let me add thee

also

here both are blank you that's expected

isn't it should be blank let me go to

the last available month is October and

if I click on October what should happen

should give me the September value isn't

it yes it is giving me value this is my

value of the SE number that's fine now

let me do one thing let me play play

around with my date calend I go to my

data in my date calendar I will go ahead

now I don't want to pass a filter or a

filter context just want to go ahead and

change this date to Uber and as you know

I have data enough now there is no

filter there is no filter context and

the date is ending at the last month

where I have the data see I have the

data for October that was the last

available data and this is my previous

month data and I'm getting a previous

month also in my visual make it a little

bit bigger overlapping as you can see

see here I'm still getting the previous

month values both with the lmtd and B

previous but look at the the card is not

getting a filter because I have not

clicked on any of the values nor I have

used my slicer so there's no filter

context there is no row filter context

there's filter context here available

with this visual which is containing

month here so there is no filter context

for the card visual there is no filter

why it is giving blank why not September

because lmtd is giving me September MTD

is giving me value why previous month is

not giving the reason for that that

previous month and all the previous

function which we are going to use

whether it is previous quarter and

previous year they use first date into

context they don't use last context and

to understand that let me give you one

example here that it is using the first

date I'm going to bring in month year as

a slicer here and in this month year

slicer I'm going to go down and select 2

months January febrary January 2019

febrary 2019 the ones which I selected

what are you expecting January to get

the December value seems like it is

getting and February to get the like it

is getting what what value what value is

this lmtd is giving me January and

previous month is giving me

de this is because in the context there

are 2 months right now and the lmtd is

picking up from the maximum available

because of MTD and previous month is

picking up the first date available

because there is no filter context only

filter is available and filter is giving

2 months you need to be really careful

if you are designing a previous month or

the last month and you're using these

function and you select a range which is

crossing a month you're not using any

context then the behavior of these

functions can change so keeping in that

mind you should create these majors and

use them appropriately

the next thing which we want to learn in

the time intelligence is week or week

for week or week the challenge with us

is basically that there is no standard

function for that we need couple of

things in our date table so let me go to

the table View and in the date table let

me tell you what we need so in the date

table we will need a date rank which we

have created as a column here and the

date rank should be the ascending Rank

and it should be dance means after one

we should get two I have created that on

week start date you can also create that

on year week YY y ww second thing which

we need is the we need a week day as a

number and the week day when we use the

weekday as a number that should follow

the same week which start date is

falling so we don't have a week day as a

number so let me add weekday as a number

here I'm going to enter here let me call

it week day number and weekday number

should follow the same weekday which

start date is following so what start

date is following I'll let you know Week

start date is following this one so same

I will follow for weekday usually for

the Monday start what do you want so two

is for Monday 11 is also for Monday so

Monday weekday number one for Monday and

I'm starting let me sort this for

sending 1st January 2018 was a Monday so

that's correct and and we have a week

rank of one for that 1st January 2018 is

a Monday and it should be first week

also both the informations are correct

so now using this we will do our time

intelligence so let me add a new page

and what I can do is directly I can

start with first we will do week over

week and then later we'll do wtd week

till date so for that from the date

table let me bring in week start date

and using that only I'm going to bring

in my week or week so what is going to

be my formula so here I'm going to take

the help from the row context so this

week is the major which I'm creating

calculate net then I'll start my filter

now in the filter I'll use all now for

this week I can use all selected

assumption is that this week would

always be present but it's Finly

possible that I select a date and I need

the complete week then that's why I need

all so in all I can give table or column

name I'm going to give table name here

because I want to ignore all the filters

whether it's a day month year quarter

and then I want to use date of date

tables week rank equals to Max of week

rank now what does that means is when we

use the max of weak rank in the context

whatever week is available or a date is

available for that is going to find out

let's say even month is available aable

then it would be the last week of that

month here is available last week and if

the there's no context available last

week available in the date table it

would be picked up so this is how this

is going to behave and it's going to

give me this week measure and let me

bring it inside the visual and convert

it into date table and you can see that

the values have started from the very

first week the first week started on 13

so the week of 8th contain the 13 only

two days of data and then we have the

week of 15th and the week of 22 for

which we have the data and I can

showcase you it with along with the date

also so let me bring in another visual

with date and this

week value will repeat for a week

because we are doing this kind of

calculation now last week calculation is

very simple we have to use this week's

calculation but when so calculate net

filter all the date means ignore all the

filters on the date we rank should be

equal to the max of weak rank but minus

one it should be minus one and because

the entire date context is available

entire date table is available we'll be

able to have the last week also last

week the only difference is this minus

one let me bring last week also here and

as you can see the last week values are

now av la so we have learned this week

and last week how do we get week till

date for week till date remember you

have to use week number don't use date

you will use the same formula as this

week with the difference copy the same

formula of this week create a new

measure Major Tool is open new measure

is available there and now we are going

to create what we call as wtd be till

date again no standard power ba function

is available so we'll filter the date

table all the dates week rank equals to

the max of weak rank means whatever is

available in the context and weekday

number equal equals to Max of weekday

number so whatever is the weekday number

it should be equal to that number that

is what we are going to have in the

filter Clause week is equal to week and

weekday number is also equal to the

weekday number but that's going to give

me the week day I need to use less than

equal to so now it is start accumulating

so all the week days we have to consider

and let me add this this will give me

wtd and you see that the two days are

adding and this was the value for the

first week then there is a reset which

is happening let me bring in net and

when I bring in net you will understand

that these two days are adding here and

this was the same value which we got for

current week also then for the next week

these values are adding till this place

and this was the value which we were

getting these values are C for the week

is getting added so we got wtd now what

we need to do for last week till date

very simple this is the same last week

formula you need so I can copy the wtd

formula actually that's much easier I

copy this wtd formula create a new

measure measure tool is available new

measure is available there paste this

formula call it as last week till date

and the only difference is only where

the weak rank is there you just say weak

rank minus one and press enter you got

last week till date and what would

happen here is when you add this to the

visualization you will see after a week

we got on 13th so on 20th you will get a

value on 21st the next accumulated value

will come and whenever there is a reset

there would be a reset Whenever there is

increase there would be in now next day

is again Monday so you will see the same

value as the week start which is coming

and so on it will keep on adding post

that so now in spite of not having a

function we able to get week till date

and this week versus last week any

custom month whether it is half year

whether the month is 28 days whether the

month is starting from 15th of a month

as long as you are able to create a weak

Rank and day of period or day of month

the same mechanism will apply for period

versus last period month versus last

month and MTD versus last month MTD or

ptd versus last ptd so till now we have

learned you know we have MTD how get to

get last month till date you have

complete month data how to get the last

month complete month data similarly we

have done for quarter year and then we

created some custom formulas for week we

have not discussed very simple thing

what happens when I want last days data

what was my data 7 days before what my

what was my data a year before or a week

year before week year means 364 days

today's Monday what was my my data same

Monday last year how can I achieve this

so for that what we are going to use we

going to use the date add function and

we are going to create certain trailing

formula the name trailing is coming

because they are behind by certain days

or days behind formula as you can see so

I already a new page and in this new

page I'll add date from the date table

and this time I don't want aggregation

above the date level means I don't want

to aggregate for TDS till date I just

want this is my net what is my net for

last day before 7 days before a year

even it could be before a month so let's

quickly create some Majors so on the

Home tab new major is visible as of now

and I'm going to click on that and let

me create last date so this is going to

be a date add which I'm going to use for

last day but we do have a previous day

function which is available so here I'm

going to use calculate net date ad and

in the date ad there are three arguments

required the first argument is date of

dat second is minus one and third one is

day so it is going to trail by a day I

got last day values are just a day

behind now let's create last week last

week is basically 7 days behind last day

last week same day which is a week

behind so it's going to be behind by 7

days so Monday to Monday Tuesday to

Tuesday Wednesday to Wednesday

comparison we and let me add this into

the visualization and as you can see the

values are a week behind so this is 20th

this was 13th same way 21st 14th a week

behind now how do I get a month behind

value simple create a new measure and

instead of day use month and minus one

minus one month behind and same last

month same day you will see on 13th of

November I'll get my value on 14th of

November I'll get my 14th of October

value I getting a month behind value

same day I can do for quarter but I

would like go for year and last year

same day so basically what happens is

every year typically we end up adding

one additional day so if it is 13th next

year it is 12th if it is not a leap year

next year it is going to be the 12th

October which is going to have the same

weekday 364 is the combination which

fits in the proper division of weeks so

365 add one additional day so because of

that same week day last year if I need

so last year same week day I'm going to

call I'm not going to call same day I'm

going to call same week day and here

instead of subtracting a year I'll

subtract minus 364 days and usually on

the non-leap year you will find it is a

day difference when the actual data

comes in in case of leap year it could

be 2 days so remember the value for the

13th of October and 14th of October and

when I go to the

2019 I will start getting values from

12th of October and the reason behind is

the day and let's bring in week day into

the picture now now let's look at what

it is Saturday what this is Sunday let's

scroll up and see what we had initially

Saturday and Sunday now you understood

why we have done that now last year same

day basically it is 13th October I need

13th October isn't it in that case I am

not going to use - 365 I'm going to

Simply use -1 year don't use 365 or 366

nothing like that just subtract one year

and we will get last year and when we

scroll down you will see the data is

actually started coming from 13th of

October Sunday every year the date will

change so this year it was Saturday next

year it was Sunday this is how it is

going to happen so this is how you

create trailing formulas now these

formulas are a day behind again sometime

what would happen like if you have too

many dates available your grand total

may actually not be a year behind so if

you don't have a year in the context

then what would happen is let's say I

have a calendar which is still 2021 so

what happen my calendar is actually

Trail let's say for minus one year

formula my calendar even get trailed by

one year when no date is in the context

I reach 2020 and I have data till 2020

so my values could be same for the

trailing as well as this one and that

you will see for the last day the grand

totals are same because I have

additional day available for the same

week day it is again same for month

definitely because we ended on October

so that is why we have a little bit less

value but if I increase my calendar

dates you will you will see these dates

are you will see if I move it by to

December or let's say October 2021 you

will see that the values of grand total

is now same and the reason behind that

that when the context is not available

or the filter context is not available

it moved the day a year behind or a

month behind or a quarter behind but

still it has covered all the dates which

are available in such cases if you're

using make sure either the context or

the filter or slicer is adding a ear to

the page or to the visualization so that

we get correct values otherwise you end

up getting incorrect values in powerbi

we have many Dex function but starting

from December 2022 we got a series of

functions which are very similar to SQL

Windows function now the reason we call

them very similar to SQL Windows

function that they do also provide us

something known as order by and

Partition by and based on that we can do

certain calcul which were previously

difficult to do and now they are very

easy if we use these functions so what

are these functions let's have a look at

it in December 2022 we got three

function offset windows and index

followed by two more functions in April

2023 those are Rank and row number all

these functions are on very similar

basis they all have order by they all

have Partition by and they also support

access and reset now what are the key

highlights of these text functions so

these Tex function as I already told you

are very similar to SQL Windows function

performing performing calculations

across related table rows based on Dex

evaluation context but unlike Windows

function these Dex function do not

return a single value but a set of row

which can be used with the functions

like calculate and sumx to compute the

values means they are not going to

return single value so we have to go

ahead and use different function like

calculate or sumx to make sure in our

measures we are able to get single value

so these function execute in Dex engine

rather than being pushed to the data

source offering improved performance

particularly when sarting by

non-continuous columns so basically what

happens is their execution happens as

the Dex engine level so they will be

able to provide you better performance

so these functions are different and

they are executed differently to give

you performance gains key highlights as

I already told you these functions use

order by Partition by access and reset

typically they are used in pair order by

and Partition by one pair access and

reset access and reset are usually used

in visual level calculations so let us

start with the offset function offset

function is one of the functions which

has been released in December 2022 and

it's very similar to Windows function

and now we're going to use that so let

me start first by creating a visual on

category and I will take along with the

category

net let me convert this into a table

visual now here I would like to know

what is the value of previous category

now based on what based on the category

sequence or based on the net sequence

okay so in this manner we can comparison

means based on the last one which and

that's where the offset comes in play

where we can actually go up and down now

offset is not a table function where it

goes for a table row it still need the

context means by which you are it needs

that row or group by for which you are

going to move up and down inside the

calculation so let me add a new measure

and this measure is I'm going to call

offset one

calculate net offset now what are the

things we require for offset Delta

plusus one what is relation this should

contain the columns for order by and

Partition by with the enhancement you

don't need to add Majors now so if you

want to use a major into the order by

you don't need to add it then you have

order by blanks most of the time we are

leaving that blanks Partition by where

you can means let's say if I want to

partition inside category or brand see

the operation should happen within a

partition we can do do that then we have

Concepts like match by and reset which

can also be used now let's start with

minus one offset and we will use all

selected now all selected and all

depending on whether the data which is

present based on that we want to take a

decision or data which is also not

present but present in the values want

to take decision based on that I would

like to take based on the data which is

present so item category order by now

order by let's first start with item

category itself isn't it that what is

the value for the last category 1 2 3 4

5 rest I don't need I don't need Val

blanks Partition by match by and resets

so let's close the offset and let's

close the net by default here order is

ascending now in powerbi those of you

who have seen rank you know that the by

default order is descending but for all

the windows function the by default

order by is ascending so let's add this

mejor offset inside our our

visualization and let me sort it on

category because that's is how I've done

it so as you can see here the net is

trailing by one one values because I

given offset one same way you can give

offset 2 3 this is minus one okay now

either I can make it plus one or I can

change the order that is one of the two

things I can do so let me do one thing

let me go here in order by and let me

use descending what would happen instead

of trail by one now it is lead by one so

Category 2 is coming in category one so

next now same thing you could have

achieved by ascending by using plus one

so I removed the descending and let me

remove the minus one also so same result

I got so in this manner offset works now

this is one way variation of offset now

let's run on the second variation of

offset where now I don't want to sort on

categorical values now this would be

really useful when we do month-on-month

comparison but let's look for the

comparison which is basically for net so

I want to travel by net my top category

I should differentiate with second top

second top with third top now comparison

is happening between the top ranks then

how do I do that so then what would be

my order by in case of this new major

which I'm going to call offset new I

don't want to do by the categories I

want to do by net major and see I have

not added the major inside my all

selected in relation it is not added and

let me use descending and let now let me

bring this inside now I need to sort it

on net to understand this so category

now why I'm getting in category 4

because I used plus one I said in

descending order plus one but in

descending out what I need minus one so

now the topper would be trailed so

second topper will get the first topper

in this value so now whether you need

second with first or first with second

you can decide now this is really

helpful the offset is going to be really

helpful in month on month comparison

quarter on quarter comparison and year

on year comparison now let me do one

thing let me bring in a new visual for

you and in this visual what I'm going to

do here is I'm going to do a little bit

of trick so what I'm going to do here is

I will bring in year I will bring in

quarter I will bring in month and I'll

bring in

net and let me instead of month number

let me bring in month

here what I want here first of all I

want month on month so how do you get

off offet of month on month very simple

challenge month on month is a text it's

not going to work easily so I would like

M and offset month on month offset how

do I get calculate net offset what is

Delta minus one what is relation all

selected now here comes the challenge

month is a text and it s order is not

correct so how do I take this so here

what I'm going to do is date table month

year I need to take month year as well

as I'll take month year sort so let's

take both of them month year and month

year sort both we have taken now we will

go and so relationship is done how do I

sort I need to sort on or order by on

month year

sort do I need to partition as of now I

don't seem I need a partitioning but we

may or

may let's bring this m offset inside the

visualization so what we see here is

basically that we're able to get this

month or month and let's not look at the

quarter and this one because quarter

offset doesn't seem like this TW first

of all I should not have got anything

here in the Q4 I'm getting something so

we are not looking but here in the month

things seems to be correct but there is

a challenge I'm not getting this one for

first month so let me change this visual

a little bit and let me duplicate this

for this so Ive duplicated it and let me

delete this first visual I don't need

but if I use here this visual I

duplicated it and let me remove ear and

quarter from here you can see that this

measure has properly worked isn't it for

every month I able to get an offset

minus one offset easily m is working

perfectly fine why not here and this is

what we call the inclusion of all the

participant in the formula so what's

happening here is basically the quarter

and year are also the participants which

are not been considered so even though

we have not done the partitioning inside

the quarter and year Auto partitioning

is happening and that is something you

might have seen in the rank function

also so now what we are going to do is

we are going to include that so we'll

say Okay include the quarter also so

date quarter and include the year also

date year and the Sorting don't need to

change because the Sorting month year is

still valid across these month year sort

we have taken month year sort it is not

month sort now what you seeing here what

we see here is okay this is fine this

was previously also happing now this is

also Happening Now across year and

quarter we are able to get M and the

month year actually only month year

visual also retaining the same so in

both cases it is working now you might

have understood how I want to get the

quarter very simple I'll keep quarter

year and change the Sorting of quarter

year now quarter Year is already in

sortable format so I don't need a

sortable quarter here here is easy but

tell me will I take three measures and

then how would I ensure the quarter is

going to be at quarter's position and

month is going to be a month position

and so what I'm going to do is I'm going

to create little bit complex measure

this time around so you understood how

offset

work and now let me take this

calculation here and I'm going to take

this use this calculation inside a new

measure which is basically po period on

period what I'm going to do is in Period

of period I'll create a switch statement

switch true and in switch true I'm going

to use is in Scope when we use is in

scope we have to remember that the one

which is at the bottom of the Hier so

let's consider this Matrix in this

Matrix visual at the bottom of the H is

month here when we look at the row

columns followed by quarter and year ear

is on the top month is on the lowest

whenever you use is in scope you should

handle the lowest one first because

understand ear is always in scope other

than grand total quarter is in always in

scope other than the year total month is

only in scope for month column so here

year is in scope here as well as here as

well as here here is only not in scope

in grand total we can decide what we

want in grand total when nothing is in

scope so now we know our Scopes so is in

scope what should be the first one month

year and the column which has been taken

in the visual is really important so

month has been taken in the visual and

at that time which formula I'm going to

use I already copied that formula so

this formula is going to work now second

is is in scope which should be second is

in scope

quarter so date quarter is in scope what

formula you need I need almost similar

formula but I need this for quarter so

let's start changing offset minus one

all selected I don't need monthier

columns quarter and year what should it

order by it should be order by quarter

see start giving the error if you're not

using so minus one is my Delta my

relationship is all selected quarter

year and year everything which is

applicable to this particular row okay

relation order by water here I don't

want partition within here I want it to

go across here and that's why I'm not

taking Partition by and that's why I'm

including the complete combination so

that it can go across so very good you

can copy this formula now now you can

take a decision whether you want to

write down is in scope ear because if

you write down is in scope ear you have

a flexibility to write it down the grand

total also but right now I don't not

much interested in handling the grand

total but this is one of the way you can

handle the grand total okay now think

about it when we are comparing month on

month quarter on quarter year and on

what I'm going to compare on the grand

to do I really want to compare something

or not that is the decision you have to

take based on that you decide and

there's nothing in the context of the

grand total there's no year there

there's no quarter here so what is going

to trail that is also an important

question okay so what we saying

calculate now ear is in the scope or gr

R is in the so assume the year is in the

scope so I only need ear I don't need

quarter I don't need month and what it

should be order by Year my year is

number which is sortable so I handled

all three conditions so what we have

done is we have used this season scope

and using this scope we have now created

a calculations which is going across

month quarter and year and three

different level it is handling in three

different manner now we need to

understand these calculations so let's

pull in this measor inside this

visualization now you can see for the

first year quarter and month there is no

value it shouldn't be because I I don't

have anything before that isn't it month

we already tested let's look at the

quarters so this value matches with this

value of 2018 here quarter matches with

quarter now when I go to Q2 the value

matches with previous quarter I to

scroll down little bit or make this

visual bigger or what I can do is I can

move up so month is removed now I can

compare year also again easily at the

year values so we're able to now compare

month on month quarter on quarter year

on year in the same visual same Matrix

visual we are able to do is in scope has

helped us offset has helped so this is

how powerful offset function is and

there could be many things which you can

do with this it makes your travel easy

across the rows based on categorical

data or a major so go ahead and try that

out one of the most interesting function

in these functions offset window index

rank and row number is window function

itself now very similar to SQL Windows

functions but window function is really

interesting it allows you to create so

many things running total rolling totals

MTD qtd YTD lot of possibilities are

there all the function offers different

kind of possibilities but Windows

function has so many things which you

can do and it is because it provides you

those two arguments where basically you

can decide the position of traveling so

let's look at this function so let me

add a new page and in this new page I

will start with month here this time

because while we can do traveling on the

categorical variable other than the time

not going to make much sense unless we

have very specific example and time is a

very good example month year and along

with that let's have net table visual

first thing is I want a rolling so how

do we do rolling we have formulas in the

past so let me tell you the first of all

rolling formula without Windows how you

let me create a new measure so let's say

I want rolling two and rolling two is

easy to understand so usually we do

rolling tool like usually calculate net

dates in period is something we use in

dates in Period what we want a date

column basically the first argument is a

date column start date number of

interval and intervals so what we do is

let's say we give have end dat here so

we start giving intervals in negative

and then inter well basically month

quarter year what you can get this is

the date in Period so what first thing I

will use is a date column so date of

date second is start date so we usually

use max of date of date means whatever

is current Max date you take that then

I'll use minus 2 because I want 2 months

rolling usually we do 12 months rolling

but 2 months is easy to understand we

can easily compare the total so this is

rolling two okay we got rolling two let

me bring in Rolling two here now as you

can understand the first one is same

because there is no previous month now

this is total of these two the second

row November then December is total of

November and December you and see the

number which is 18 68 which is very

similar to some of these and similarly

you can see because if it's more then it

would not have survived if it is too

high then it would not have been 2

months total it is more than that so now

we understand that it is only totally

for 2 months so rolling is there second

formula which Windows also easily is

cumulative now today how do we do

cumulative without using Windows so

again I'll create a new measure and give

you an example of cumulative so if I

have to do a cumulative measure let's

say cumulative sales how do I do I'll do

calculate net filter all of date so we

have to ignore everything which is

coming on the date and then we say and

the reason is I I don't want to say that

if you have taken the filter of the year

then I'll not give cumulative if you

taken filter of the date I'll not take

give you a cumulative or if you have

taken filter of month I not so that's

why we are ignoring all the filters on

the date and then we say date of date

and this works even for month quarter

end that's why we start with the basic

unit of date that I'm doing cumulative

for each date and then it will roll up

to month quarter and Year date of date

is less than equal to Max of date of

date so in the context whatever Max date

is available I will take less than equal

that so max of date of date and then we

close filter and the calculate we got a

new mejor which is cumula sales let me

bring in this let me also bring in this

inside the now in this one you see the

total is continuously increasing until

the end of time it will keep on

increasing and even if you don't have

the data because your normal measures

will stop as soon as you get blank but

this will not stop because it's still

getting the data from the past from the

beginning of the date you want to

control then you have to give additional

filter so now we understand that you

know the basic way of doing these things

before the windows function now how to

do this using window function so let me

duplicate this Visual and remove

additional stuff now again we'll start

with rolling again new major Home tab is

open we can click on new major there and

the major this time again I'm going to

create rolling two but this time the

rolling to would be created from Windows

function so let's understand this

function so first calculate net and now

I'll use the window function in the

window function let's understand the

argument from offset type of offset two

offset type of offset then we have the

normal one relation order by blanks

Partition by match by and reset from

number type absolute or relative whether

it's absolute or relative What's happen

in case of rolling rolling is basically

relative minus one to0 two rows and what

is cumulative cumulative is partially

absolute partially relative from the

absolute Z row to relative zero relative

zero is current row so what happens in

this case is the relative position is

with respect to current row so my

current row is let's say December then

November is minus1 and January is + one

so now let's start creating this

function so -1 why not Min -2 because

from -1 to 0 two only we are considering

which position relative position

relative to the current one then what is

the next one I want zero what is this

zero this is zero is also relative

relative position the current rows

relative zero position comma all

selected or all we use all because even

if the data is not present I want to

some all month year so what we'll use in

inside this one all month year but month

year cannot sort so we'll use all month

year sort this is the relation we want

then what is the next order by order by

what we can order by only only month

year sort then that is why in the

relation we have month year sort do I

need anything else no I don't need

anything else rename this one and commit

it rolling to by window function let me

drag this inside the visualization you

can see very similar results here same

rolling to results so rolling to from

Windows and rolling to from the

traditional mathod whenever we can use

Windows function we prefer the way of

calc ation is a little bit different so

it should give us the advantage now we

want to create cumulative and this

cumulative measure is going to become

base of many other measures let's see so

how do we create cumulative in case of

window so let's begin a new measure

first of all measure tool is open and

under that I have new measure and I will

now create a measure cative net using

Windows calculate net window function

from where I should start from or one

one absolute till which place I should

go to zero of relative I want to go zero

relative position what is my relation

here I can give all data I want to

include the complete date table then

order by order by and because I have

included the table it should allow me

the order by date do I need anything

else I don't think I need anything else

right now I should be able to get a

cumulative net using the window function

let me add this to visualization and as

you can see see it is also showing the

cumulative results continuously

increasing and should give me the same

total at the end so on the last month

the total is same as grand total and it

will continue even if you don't have

data so similar behavior of cumulative

net with cumulative sales from the

traditional method so both traditional

method and the window method for

cumulative giving same results now what

we are going to do interesting thing is

we'll take this cumulative method keep

on partitioning it month quarter and

year and we'll get MTD qtd and YTD very

simple just set Partition by you get MTD

qtd YTD how so let me rename and

duplicate this window one duplicate

window 2 now let's remove something

which we don't need I don't think even I

need the first visual we have learned

using time intelligence how to do MTD

qtd andt I'll only going to keep

cumulative here in the visual and let me

copy this formula using the major to new

major let me duplicate

it net MTD window function remain same 1

absolute 0o relative All Dates order by

date but now we will add after the order

by leave the blanks Partition by what I

want partition I want to partition it on

date month here so MTD function is ready

by just partitioning the cumulative

Windows code on month does it won't work

seems like month total isn't it seems

very similar to month total how do I

differentiate and to do that actually we

need to bring in one visual with the

dates at least for MTD we need dates and

I'll replace the month here by date so

in the first visual now you can see that

the data is getting added up till the

end of the month and there is a reset

which is happening at the start of the

month same way when you and another

month totaling up till the end of the

month and reset happening at start of

theth month MTD behavior let's do for

qtd copy this formula again new major

from the Major Tool and just we need to

change qtd and Partition by what quarter

it should be quarter here actually and

my quarter is actually quarter here

let's add this to visualization and now

you can see the reset is happening after

the quarter so the first month value is

same and if I look at the day level also

you will see that on the 1st January

only the reset is happen happening if I

go to first FA there is no reset for

quarter now you would have understood

ear is really simple same formula Major

Tool is open new major just go ahead and

change the name and the Partition by add

this to visualization as you can see

reset only happen once a year Windows

function giving us MTD qtd YTD running

total ruling total there could be there

could be n number number of such things

which you can do using Windows functions

so keep on exploring let's start with

the index function the index function

can be used to identify top bottom

performer top first performer second

performer by value and name so let's

begin our journey by bringing in

category in a visual along with the

category I would like to bring in net

inside this

visualization table

visual now let me create a majure which

is going to give me the top category Top

by what top by the category names or top

by the net I need it by net isn't it so

top one cat and I'm going to use the

function which is known as

index index which position first thing

is

position then relation order by blanks

Partition by if you need the within

let's say within brand what is the top

category or within the year which is the

top month match by I need the topper one

what is the relation all item

category what is next order by order by

what net but ascending or descending

topper means

descending in case of net topper means

descending I don't need to give next of

the argument so let me bring this inside

the visualization

it's giving me the name of the top

category and as you can see the top

category is Category 2 so this would

remind you of a function top n which can

also give you the top category but the

challenge with the top end function is

if you say top n 2 N is two in top and

it's going to give you two categories

not one I want the second topper how do

I get that very simple here in the index

function uh to Second category and just

change index by

two you got the second topper category 4

is the second topper you need bottom

performer use minus one or ascending you

will get it if you even put this on the

card visual you will get the

results now you may be asking why this

is repeating can we control it and I'll

tell you how to control it let's use

calculate max

of item

category comma then we will use keep

filters we don't want it to repeat so we

use keep filters on the index keep

filters on the index and the expression

will keep it as it is so this will work

as values and

filter and we will now close the key

filters and calculate and bring that in

and as you can see it can now filter the

visual if require so we can duplicate

remove the additional

items and you will see the visual is

getting filter and the reason I use this

formula was a little bit different

because I actually now want the topper

value what is the value the topper had

so I'll create another mejor and in this

mejor I want the net value of

topper and for that I'm going to replace

this Max category by net so I want to

keep the formulas almost similar and

then index is

one let's bring this inside the

visualization this is the topper value

but if you want to compare with the

topper value how much percentage you are

of the

topper then what you can do is you can

actually avoid using this keep filters

if you Avid keep filters then this value

will repeat for all the categories only

when you are inside the category View

and you can compare how much percentage

you are of category similarly if you

want to know bottom

performer very

easy either use minus one or sort by

ascending one of the two thing will give

you bottom performer so instead of top I

now want bottom performer bottom first

bottom second bottom third everything is

possible just go ahead and change the

number in the index function and you

will get it so the bottom performer

is Category 5 with the value of 615 K so

offset function makes it really easy to

find it you can use Partition by to find

is it within inside a partition and this

function opens New Opportunities while

you're dealing with this in the

visualization now let's understand rank

function you already have a rank X which

is very similar to this function but

this function is different in its

Behavior the way it is used and one of

the biggest advantage of this function

is it can be used to give a rank for a

major by considering a column also and

I'll give you that by an example so let

me first of all find out what rank we

already created so if you remember in

the past we created rank on the net and

it was created on brand let me bring

that ins inside the visualization and

let me bring in brand also this rank was

created on net so let's add net into the

visualiz thought on net so you can

understand the rank patter so how did I

get this rank so we use the rank X

function now we use the another function

for the rank which is rank function rank

net one equals to rank ties first thing

it ask for ties second thing it ask for

relation which is something which I all

or all selected item brand order by what

order by you want to give blanks in case

you have blanks Partition by in case you

want to partition the rank within

something match buy and reset these are

the standard things which we have in the

any window type of function it's not

true SQL window it's type of that what

is my ties ties is dance Dance means

even if the rank repeat the next rank

would be the continuous rank so 112 it's

not 1 13 I can use all or all selected I

let me use all selected item brand now

order by something which has been

enabled only major so you don't need to

have it part of the relation I can

simply give order by net ascending and

rank X was by default descending rank is

basically the series of function which

uses these kind of order by and

Partition by all of them is by default

ascending so we have to use order by

descending because we want the net to be

sought by descending now this function

is also better for handling ties the

reason for that is basically in the

order by I can simply use item brand now

if I use the brand name it will

immediately break the ties if I have the

same number so breaking tie is really

easy in this function fun well that was

little bit complicated in case of rank

so rank breaks T now I would like to

take another case I go to my sales table

first of all I go to my customer I bring

in customer name t date and net IND

visualization I first sort it on

customer and second s with the shift

button on sales date I want to know the

first sale of the customer so here what

I want to do is I want to rank the

customer sales States I don't want to

rank them by net I want to rank them by

sales State can I do it in rank X in the

r rank expression where we use the major

you can't use a column if you are

creating a rank major in a rank column

you can do that but not in a rank major

and that's where the rank function comes

handy unlike rank X where you can use

only a major in the expression of a

measure rank functions allows you to use

a column also how let's try that out new

measure from the Home tab and I'll

create rank customer date rank what I

need ties then something is repeat

use dance relation is really important

here and I'm going to create this

relation using summarize all selected

sales because the things are coming from

two different table customer which is a

dimension to the sales and the sales

date which is coming from the sales that

is why I need and I need definitely the

all selected or the all data and that's

that is why I'm using all selected on

the sales inside the sumarize from

customer what I need I need name what

else I need from the sales from the

sales I need the sales date

now comes the order bu in the order by

what I need I need order byy of sales

date ascending I need ascending rank

blanks I can leave empty I need

Partition by customer which is customer

name Partition by customer name I don't

need match by and reset I can leave it

and let me bring in now this measure let

me bring this inside the visualization

now as you can see as you can see we

have a rank of part the Sal State inside

each customer

this is something which is not possible

using rank X function also you can

easily break ties here by including

additional parameter to order by let's

start with the function row number now

row number function can provide you the

continuous sequence of the number or a

visualiz now for quite a some time some

of you are asking let's say I'm creating

a table Visual and in that visual I

would like to give you know sequence

number how do I give that sequence so

this function is going to enable that

I'm going to take a little bit different

example and measure so what I'm going to

do here is basically I will bring item

name from the item table and I would

like to bring from the sales table the

sales State Sal State and now I would

like to bring one major NE now here I

want to create a row number what would

be row number based on row number can be

based on any of my condition let's say I

say first item and then order by sa

State and then if really I can consider

the net or it could be based on net of

item and Sal state so we can decide the

criteria the way we wanted to do it and

based on that we can create so let's

start a measure so I'll call this as row

num and use the function row number now

let's look at the syntax of row number

first of all it is asking for a relation

then for order by lengths Partition by

match and reset so relation means it

should include the columns which are

there in the visualization which want to

consider order byy how do we order that

byy and blanks so now let's start with

so I'll use all selected because I want

the item and sales date whatever is

available in the visualization to use it

but the challenge is item and sales date

are not from the sales table so for that

I need to change this code little bit I

need to use summarize function first

summarize all selected sales I whenever

we take the central table in the star

schema we should be able to use the

related Dimension item name comma is

date this is what I need order by what

so I'll use order by let's use that

Partition by I don't need any kind of

partition I want the continuous R number

so let me add the r now you seeing the

numbers definitely not making sense to

us okay so let's sort on the net so when

I done the sort ascending and because

the sort is by default ascending you can

see you are getting the r number now

here we did not talk about TI Breakers

it did not say order by net then item

then sales dat no it's automatically

broken those ties let me do instead of

order by net can I use item item name we

do that let me sort on the item then

higher automatically breaken taken care

it's acting as a WR number now let's

take a case what happens if we forget

something is there in the visualization

let me bring in the ID inside the

visualization you start seeing a

repetition isn't it why are you seeing

the repetition now the reason for that

is that the city ID is not considered

inside the relation so let's add the

city ID also here Sal City ID whichever

City ID you taken geography Sayes and

immediately you see the row numbers are

correct again and if you forgot some

something it may not give the correct

answer so whatever is participating in

the table basically those which are

getting grouped you need to use that now

if you want this row number to reset

let's say after partition let's say you

want this row number to reset after

every name then we can use Partition by

name and let me remove the city because

otherwise there are too many items on

that and remove this city from the row

number relation also order by and now

let me use Partition by and it is item

name name I Chang my formula now we need

quickly scroll down the best way could

have been we should have used Matrix and

now you can see item 10 and item 10 you

can see a reset happening in the rank

because it's partition inside the item

so row number is allowing you now it can

give you continuous row numbers it can

give you within a partition just give

the combination and you will get it it's

automatically breaks the ties you don't

have to explicitly do it but yes if you

want to do use order by to break in a

particular order so another function set

of five functions as of now which is

offset Windows index Rank and row number

which uses these order by Partition by

very similar to Windows function of SQL

not same that has a different objective

it has different objective execution

wise they are also a little bit

different but they provide you whole lot

of flexibility to create the Maes which

are really difficult to create otherwise

let me rename

this before I could have completed the

editing of my complete code February

2024 release has arrived and in February

2024 we have got visual calculations so

we are going to have a deep dive into

the visual calculations and going to

look at the various functions available

in the visual calculations these are the

Dex function which we can use at the

visual level to understand this we have

to also look at the release notes of

visual calculations of February 2024 so

unlike other functions we have not taken

you to the release node specifically for

the visual calculation functions I'm

going to take you through the

documentation I am on the February

2024 release notes feature summary and

if you scroll little bit down you will

see all the features and one of the

features which has been released in

February 2024 is visual calculations let

we click on that and go to the feature

so let's read the release notes a new

way of doing calculations has arrived

you can now add the calculation directly

on your visual using visual calculation

which are Tex calculations remember

these are T calculation that are defined

and executed directly on visual a

calculation can refer to any data in the

visual including columns measures or

other visual calculations means you can

refer the other visual calculation also

this approach removes complexity of the

semantic model and simplify the process

of writing Dax you can use visual

calculation to complete common business

calculations such as running sum moving

average Etc visual calculations make it

easy to do calculation where previous

the very hard or almost impossible to do

so very interesting feature how do you

enable it you have to go to options and

setting options preview feature select

visual calculation and click on okay I'm

going to Showcase you that and then

there are certain examples have been

given there has been a separate blog on

the visual level calculations also on

the blog. powerbi.com and it has been

explained in detail along with all the

visual level functions the documentation

of the visual level function is also

available and it has provided great

details so let's read few part of this

documentation to understand the visual

level calculations better visual

calculations is the tax calculation that

defines and executed directly on your

visual visual calculation make it easier

to create calculation that are

previously hard to create leading to

simpler Dex and easier maintenance for

better performance example of running

sum has been given you need to Simply

use running some sales

amount visual calculation differ from

other calculation index how visual

calculation aren stored in the model

instead are stored on the visual which

means visual calculation can only refer

to what's on the visual anything in the

model must be added to the visual before

visual calculation can refer it being

visual calculation from being concerned

with the complexity of filter context

and model visual calculation combines

the Simplicity of the context from the

calculated columns with the on demand

calculation flexibility from

measure compare to measure visual

calculation can operate on aggregated

data instead of detailed level often

leading to the performance benefit when

the calculation can be achieved either

by new measure or visual calculation

later often leads to better performance

it means in case you have an option to

create a major versus a visual

calculation you can opt for visual

calculation for better performance

because it is going to work on the

aggregated data at the visual level not

at the detailed data since visual

calculations are part of the visual they

can refer to the visual structure which

leads to more flexibility there is one

more article which you can refer to

which tells the difference between

custom column power query calculated

column measure calculated table and

visual calculations again how to enable

visual level calculation and some

examples has been given the first simple

example was Sal amount minus total

product cost then there are few things

which has been explained here like you

can hide the fields from the visual

these options have been given now to you

when you open the visual level

calculation at that time you can hide

Fields so let's read that out in visual

calculation edit mode you can hide

fields from the visual like you can hide

column and table in modeling view for

example if you wanted to show The Profit

visual calculation you can hide sales

amount and total profit cost from The

View then there are using templates so

there are already existing template

which you can use which is running sum

moving average percent of total percent

of R total averages of CHS versus

previous versus next versus first versus

last what are these functions running

sum moving average running sum you might

have understood it is going to give you

running totals or what you call as

cumulative moving average calculates the

average of the set of given values in a

given window by dividing the sum of

values by the size of the window

percentage of parents calculates the

percentage of value related to its

parent uses collapse function percentage

of grand total now become very easy

calculate the percentage of value

relative to its value using the collap

Sol function averages of children you

can use expand calculates the average

value of set of values uses expand

versus previous using previous means the

preceding value next subsequent value is

next first Value First value in the

window or visual last value last value

now there is something known as AIS many

function have optional AIS parameter

which can only be used in visual

calculation X's influence how visual

calculation traversing in the visual

Matrix AIS parameter set to the first

axis in the visual by default it's by

default set to the first axis for many

visual first axis is the row which means

the visual calculations is evaluated row

by row in the visual Matrix from top to

bottom what are the different axes row

calculates vertically across rows to

perform top to bottom column calculate

horizontally across column from right to

left rows column calculate vertically

across Row from top to bottom continuing

column by left to right and column row

means calculate horizontally across

columns from left to right continuing

row by Row from top to bottom then many

functions will contain reset many

function have optional reset parameter

which is available individual

calculations only reset influence if and

when the function reset its value to

zero or switches to the different scope

while traversing the visual Matrix the

reset parameter is set to none by

default which means the visual

calculation is never restarted reset

accepts there to be multiple levels on

the access so there to be multiple level

on the access access means your bar

visual can have like access like brand

or category so that is what we means by

access similarly when you are using year

month and quarter they are your X's

you're displaying a visual there you

have year then you have quarter then you

have month then you have days so these

are your X's something on which we are

grouping the data the categorical

variable used in the visualization if

there is only one level on the axis you

can use Partition by the following list

describe only valid values of reset

parameter none highest parent lowest

parent highest parent and lowest parent

means the parent which is at highest

example has been given like if you have

year month and quarter highest parent is

year and the lowest parent is quarter it

means the the lowest most X's value is

not participating as a parent it can

also be used like values like one and

two so in this case because there are

only two so highest is one and lowest is

two so if you want to restart like when

we are doing run running sum now you

want to transfer this running sum to

let's say YTD so you can use running sum

highest parent so it will reset at the

ear level and you will get YTD AIS and

reset versus order by and Partition by

AIS reset order by and Partition by are

four functions that can be used in pair

together to influence how the

calculation is evaluated they form two

pairs that are often used together so

AIS and reset on order by and Partition

by so with AIS you can use reset and

order by you can use partition by by and

Partition by are the calculation you

might have seen in the window function

offset function index function rank

function and row number function then

this has been explained how to use this

access and reset are only available

function that can be used in visual

level calculation and can only be used

in visual level calculation as the

reference to the visual structure order

by and Partition by are the function

that can be used in calculated column

and measor and visual level calculation

and can refer to the fields while they

perform the same function they are

different in the level of abstraction

provided refering to the visual

structure more flexible than explicit

referencing Fields using order by and

Partition by see in case of exis and

reset you may not be really explicit and

we will take this example when we do

running sum that even if I change access

it can still do the running sum so let's

say if I'm having a visual at the

category and if I change it to Brand the

running sum will continue to do the

calculation and that's the benefit of

visual level calculation so let's say I

have year month quarter and day and I

use previous function so my expectation

is that when I'm looking at the day

level it should show me previous day

when I look at the month level it should

show me previous month when I look at

the quarter level it should show me

previous quarter and when I look at the

year level it should show me previous

year we have to check that at the visual

level calculation but if you use the

order by then order by is very explicit

it is Day means it is J even if you

change your visual details it is still

order by day so order by is going to

call explicit when you need explicit you

can use order by Partition by when you

don't need to be explicit you can use

XIs and reset available functions you

can use many existing Dex function in

visual level calculations since visual

level calculation can work with confin

of the visual Matrix functions are rely

on model relationship such as

relationship related and related table

aren't available these are the visual

calculations available with you collapse

collapse all expand expand all first

last moving average next previous range

running sum limitations not all visual

types are supported the following visual

types and visual properties have been

tested and found not to work with visual

level calculations or hidden Fields tree

map map shape map Azure map slicer it

means it's not going to work on slicer R

visual python visual key influencer

decomposition tree Q&A smart narrative

matrices paginated report arjs map power

app power automate small multiple visual

calculation and hidden field can only be

added and edited using powerbi desktop

while you can publish the report

containing visual level calculation to

powerbi ser you can't edit visual level

calculation or hidden field in power

service so that's not available on the

service as of now to edit it you can use

it and publish it performance of this

feature isn't representative of the end

product as of now you should not be too

much bothered about the performance part

of it reuse of visual level calculation

using copying and paste or other

mechanism isn't available so you can't

reuse them as of now you can't filter on

visual level calculation visual level

calculation can't refer to itself on the

same or different detail level

personalization of visual calcul or

hidden field isn't available and there

are many other which you can go through

this article I will be sharing the link

of this article also into the

description I have added a new page

visual calculation on this page I'm

going to add a table Visual and

start showcasing you visual calculations

to start with that I will go down and

from item I'm going to drag brand and

create a table

visual a table visual is ready and I've

sorted it on the brand time to add a new

visual calculation and the option is

available under the Home tab new

calculation let me click on that opens

the window very similar to the focus

mode window and there you have a pain

where you can give your visual level

calculation the FX pan or the formula

pain now here the right now before I

started the visual level calculation

visual level calculation is hidden I can

hide the measure if I need I can't hide

the AIS or the group wise so let me

create the first visual calculation

nothing but running

sum the function which I'm going to use

is running some and I'm going to give

net parameter I'm going to leave

everything else and not going to give

any value for

those now I can use the

commit to commit the calculation or I

can also press enter I'm going to press

enter in this case the calculation is

added to the visual and as you can see

the visual calculation which has been

performed here it is adding up

the previous value in each rows all the

previous values if you look at here you

can see all the rows is the sum of all

the previous R if you want to edit the

calculation you can click on the arrow

and you have option to edit calculation

so we have done a very simple

calculation running sum and we have

given net as an argument there let's go

back to the

report now what's the advantage I was

doing that using majes okay maybe they

are faster

done on aggregated data but is there any

other

advantage to understand that let me do

one thing let me go here on the brand

and change it to

category can you still see the running

total working fine this would not have

been the case in case I would have

created this calculation by any of the

traditional methods now I do have tested

this with field parameters and as of now

I was not able to add the field

parameter to it but the moment the field

parameter is supported it would be

really amazing because the moment I'm

changing my field in the calculation it

is still keep on working now let's use

another visual function and the function

which I want to use is collapse all

again new

calculation and I'll use the function

collapse all but that is total or gt

grand

total

cpol what all cpol required expression

and X's the expression is net and it is

suggesting me to use the running sum

also but I just wanted the net and how I

want the direction rowwise down is the

direction which I want and let me use

collaps all and as you can see it has

given me grand total now I can create

two functions from here percentage of

grand total and percentage of running

total again they are going to be the

visual level

calculations so let me create couple

more so one is percent of

total which is nothing but

divide

net by TT

now I got the percentage of total or I

can add it and multiply it by 100

100 I got percentage of total so easily

no calculation worries just simply

taking chy and use it on the measure how

simple it is now let's go ahead and do

one more which is percentage of running

total so again click on the new

calculation and here we are going to use

the percent of running total and what

I'm going to do for that is divide so we

are going to use divide and we are using

the regular Dex functions here divide is

a regular Dex function by running some

which is a visual calculation divide by

another visual calculation which is

GT completely based on visual

calculations addit calculation multiply

by 100 as of now

so let's go back to the report and

understand these so first row 22% you're

fine because percentage of total in the

first row is going to be the same in the

second row the running total will add

and I'm not doing a running total of

percentage of total I'm simply have

calculated it on running sum I could

have done it on the percentage of total

also that is another way to do it and

then another 14% getting added another

23% getting added and 100% so such a

easy to do the these calculations now we

have already seen two functions but

there are many more so we'll continue to

look at those so let's do next

calculation and next calculation which I

wanted to do is moving

average so I go and clicked on the new

calculation and let's call it as move

AVG and the function which is available

with us is moving

average in the moving average I can give

an expression expression is nothing but

net

so expression

window do I want to include the current

AIS row column blanks and where you want

to reset so window is two I only want to

do for last two I want to include the

current as of now I want to include the

current so I'll keep it otherwise you

can have the values like true and

false but let's start

with only moving average so what it is

doing right now so basically the first

value is the self the second value is

the sum of these two which is 43

something and just you can see it is

divide by two now next would be the sum

of these two which is around 36 3.6

million divide by 2 and you can see it's

1.8 million next one is going to be some

of this which is going to be around 2.9

Million divide by 2 which is 1.47

million and again this is going to be

some around 2.4 2.5 divide by 2 which is

2.22 3 so in this manner you can see we

are getting moving average let's go

back so we have got net we have got

running sum we have got GT percentage of

total moving

average and as you can see we can go and

change it the XIs to something else and

this calculation is still holds true

that's the beauty of these

calculation why why don't we learn few

more

function I would now like to experiment

with few more calculation and the

calculation which I would like to now

showcase is previous and next which is

going to give us the value of the

previous row and the next row so to

begin that Home tab new calculations

back to the visual

calculations let me call it previous

function which I'm going to use is also

previous no previous month no previous

quarter no previous

here only previous and we have

expression steps X's blank and reset and

step means I can go beyond one so I want

to compare with previous month that's

fine I want to compare previous to

previous then I can use steps and do it

I want to go further down let's say 11

month or 12 month down the line that

also I can do by using these steps it

could be month quarter year whatever you

want to use based on the requirement and

it is visual level so sometime if you

have a disconnected data and you want to

compare with the last available month

think about how much big calculation we

have to do this should resolve that out

because it's just looking at previous

it's just a visual row and what previous

of what

net anything else we want to give step

yes definitely I want to give step one

step and because we have function like

previous and next it might not allow you

the negative integer it is only the

positive integer which has been allowed

here it should would give me every time

the previous row and the first row will

not have any previous

row because there is no previous for the

first one and as expected the first one

doesn't have a previous rest all as a

previous look up here and based on these

values you are able to see the previous

values here going one

down

trailing previous well understood very

simple let's do the next calcul

next the function is very simple

next

net comma One Step done and we got the

next calculation and this time it would

be a one row ahead and as you can see

the in this case the last row will not

have it because we are going one row

ahead we are looking into future values

and there is no value for the last

row in this manner

we are able to

do previous and next calculation let's

go back to the report and check this out

and as you can see we able to see the

next and previous

calculation and as usual if I change the

AIS to

category it's not going to make any

difference I will get previous and next

of the

categories let's add couple more

calculations the calculations which we

want to do right now is basically first

and last so before I do that let me

again change the AIS

to BR need a lot of values

to look at the calculation that's how

you know only five category first and

last are just couple of steps away let's

go ahead and try that out so again hom

tab new

calculation very simple

first think about is how you're going to

do it with the regular Dex index

function it's easy but even that would

require what is the order by and you

need to mention an explicit column for

that so function is

first let's look at the arguments

expression exis blank and reset we are

only going to give one argument as of

now net and that should be sufficient

let's check that

out calculation has been added and as

expected it is just giving me the first

row value for all the rows so I can now

find out per percentage of first now

let's calculate the last value again

click on new calculation from the Home

tab name is last and the function we are

also going to use is last simple net

only one argument but it can take

expression xes blank and reset we are

only going to give one argument as of

now net and as expected it is showing

the last value

let's go back to the table and look at

it now we have quite a few calculations

as you can see we have first and last

also but we have more visual

calculations so we'll continue to

explore

those so the next function which we are

going to check out is range and it's

little bit different function and I'm

going to tell you one different

operation which you might not have seen

till now in

powerbi okay so let's jump on to the new

calculations from the Home tab and I

want to do a calculation which is range

now range can give me moving average but

I want a moving sum rolling sum and that

rolling sum I'm going to do using the

range so let me

do rolling

two and little bit different function so

that's why I'm using

calculate and I'm going to use net here

but I'll tell you it might not work so

we'll come back to that later and and

I'm going to use function

range the range function as you can see

the arguments are step include current I

want that yes AIS which is rows blanks

reset the first argument step is minus

one means one step only last one step

include current I want yes that is

true what is the next X's which is

nothing but rows but when I give these

arguments and I enter it gives me error

and now to correct that I'm going to

edit this

calculation click down the arrow edit

calculation and I'm going to do

something which you don't do I'm going

to put sum on a major it's a major and

usually we don't put some on a majure we

go ahead and use some X for that but

here I'm doing that and immediately I

get the correct calculation it means you

will be able to use some average Etc on

your measure to get those rolling the

rolling averages and your life has been

made further Easy by this let's

understand these calculation are they

correct or not first row is going to be

the same the second row is going to be

around a million the sum of these two

the third row is going to be the sum of

these two which is around 1.5 million so

let's look at the calculations the

rolling here is same here it is the two

which is last two rows but this is 1

million this is 1.5 million and

similarly it is going to be 1 2 million

it's coming from here these two on the

top and you can relate just for your

reference let me put the arrow

here so now we have got rolling and you

have done little bit different kind of

calculation and let open up a all set of

new calculations which you can do

important function

range so let's go back to the table and

before we we move to the next set of

calculation we need a different kind of

a visual a visual where we at least need

to have couple of access so let's begin

the Journey of few more special

calculations visual calculations where

we are going to get few more detailed or

few more easy calculations just by using

these visual

calculations now to explore further the

visual calculation I have added a new

page because the set of visual

calculation I want to explore now is

going to require me at least to have two

levels so let me create a matrix visual

for

that and in that I'm going to add state

and city on the

row expand

it going to add a major

net and let's start the two calculation

expand and expand all again from the

Home tab new

calculation let's look at the

calculation

expand expand and it require expression

and XIs and basically expand is going to

work at the next level in the context so

the details would come from the next

level and we have to understand that I'm

going to have expand expand all and then

I'm going to show you the differences

and then you will understand how these

calculations are performed so let's give

here average

I'm going to use average function and

I'm using it on a major net this is what

we you can do in the visual level

calculation and the next thing which I

compuls need is rows XIs is rows so

expand and you might not see the

difference but when you scroll down you

will see an average happening at the

state level and simply and at the grand

total level this number doesn't seems

like an average of cities because if you

look at the number of the Cities the

number cannot average to

2 100 K this is actually the average of

state and that's what expand does it is

average of a level

below to explain this further let's also

bring in expand

all and expand all

function also required to argument

expression where I will be doing

average of a major here again I'm doing

an average of a major net and the second

argument is X's which I'm going to use

rows and here if you see you will see a

little bit of difference in the averages

yes it is the averages of City it is the

average from the leaf level it is always

calculating it from the leaf level not

from the next level or the level below

so let me go back to the report and try

to explain you this if you look at these

calculations

look at how the averages is happening

you should be very happy to see these

averages happening at the state level

from the city level no more those

context plate defining what's below I

can easily go ahead and change it and

add another levels or replace these

levels and they will continue to work

but what's the difference in the grand

total here to understand that let me

collapse it I'll drill up one level

right

calculation here remains same but now

you can understand looking at this data

where I have a million here I have a

400k here which are pushing up my

calculations towards

the

232 as an average of the states if you

further go down you do see some bigger

values I can sort on the net so that you

understand these values little bit

better as you can see quite a few big

values are there here

I changeed sorting back to the

state so expand is doing it from the

leaf level to understand it

further let me add one more level first

of all I'm going to expand it and I'm

going to add one more level which is

brand from the

item I have added brand from the item

immediately What You observe that this

number is not changed in the expand but

the expand all number has changed and

why even even if you look at the city

level calculations those calculations

are little bit different they are not

same as what we previously had they were

same when we didn't have the brand if

you go down you will see these are

nothing but the average coming from the

Brand level and even on the level above

it will continue to be from the leaf

level so this expand all is doing the

calculation at the leaf level expand is

doing at the next level and what does

that mean for you is

basically when you see at the city level

it is average of Brands when you see at

the state level it is average of cities

when you look at the grand total level

it is average of states in this manner

these two calculation expand and expand

all works so this will help you to solve

the common problem which we wanted to do

average of sum or sum of averages very

common problem and a very simple

solution in visual calculation

now we are going to look at the two

function which is basically cpse and CPS

I already shown you cpse all ones but

the time has come that we again look

those two things together I'll go to the

new calculation and I'll first do here

collapse and collapse requires

expression x's and N it's basically give

going to give you

the grand total or the parents total is

basically going to collapse it here I

can use net

comma

rows and as you can

see here is collapse is getting its

ground

total but the cities are getting the

total of the

state so to understand that look at the

state total this is my state total the

cities are getting the state total and

if you further go down brands are going

to take the city total collapsing from

the parent to child so I'm getting the

parents calculation at the child

level so that is collapse but if I do

collapse all which is going to bring a

grand total for me so let me add a new

calculation that is colol or I can call

it as GT but let me call GT1 I can

already calculated GT not in this visual

I calculated another visual so I can

have the same name

but just use Now call appol and the call

appol is going to do it all at the final

parent level I can use net

here and I can use

rows and this is nothing but grand total

so now you can easily calculate

percentage of parent percentage of gland

total again use them back into new

calculation or you can edit the same

calculation to get it percentage of

total or percentage of Grant

total cpse and CPS help help you to get

the parent values now go back to the

reports and let's understand these

things so here we have already opened

Arizona and we have open one of the city

of Arizona and their Branch under it if

you see here this is the total of the

city and this is given at the Brand

level now when the Arizona has been

opened Arizona has a total of 471 look

at the city totals all the cities are

getting the Arizona

total when you go to the states like

Arizona you get the total the grand

total which is above one level it

collapse is collapsing one level at a

time collapse all is collaps all the

levels as you can see we are getting the

ground total here for all the rows

irrespective of whatever level we are

at we already have a quick glance at

these calculation but we do would like

to explore the reset functionality I

would like to see how would it work in

case I want to create a running total

which is not going across the leap level

but can it reset itself to ear level so

let me add another page and here I'm

going to

create a line Visual and in this line

visual I'm going to bring in from the

date table

here I'm also going to bring in quarter

and I would also like to bring

in

month and I would like to bring in a

major

net so I'm all set already with my

visual this is my visual and how it's

showcasing the values for last couple of

years and let me do a sort on the AIS so

I have my visual ready and here I want

to have a running calculation let's

first of all add a visual level

calculation from the Home tab and the

new calculation which I'm going to add

using the Home tab new calculation is

running

some

net and let's call it

RT and as you can see the moment I take

an RT RT is going up and if I go back to

the report you can see it's continuously

increasing I don't want to add another

calculation I just want to go ahead and

modify this so I click on this arrow and

use edit calculation and now I would

like to look at the other parameters of

RT so

AIS is definitely row

only blanks and I want to reset I want

to reset at what I want to reset at the

highest

parent so highest parent is here and I

want to reset there let me try that out

and what do you see immediately you see

there is a fall happening in the month

of January let's go back to the report

and understand that as you can see here

there is a reset happening

and this means now I'm getting YTD no

more I'm getting running total RT can I

get it further down to the T number two

which is quarter let's

see as you can see now it is giving me

qtd not YTD every quarter there is a

reset so look at the January look at the

April look at the July look at the

October

let's add more complication let's add

date what

happens now the reset would still happen

at the level two the level two is still

quarter so the reset is happening

quarterly still and we do it and

remember this quarter is in the middle

and that's why knowingly I have added

here two and I added one more level to

Showcase you that the reset is is not

happening month level so there are more

levels available here and it has taken

care this is the second level so 1 2 and

3 is it three or is it one let's go back

edit calculation move the level to three

and let's understand this calculation

once more and now you can see the reset

is happening at the month level the

highest level is one the second highest

is two then three four and keep on going

we are not including the current level

the current level is not part of the

parent

your parent as a year is one quarter is

two and month is three and we have given

three as of now you are seeing MTD in

this particular Trend

chart now you understand how easy these

calculations are and how easily we can

use visual level

calculations to

create those complicated calculations in

a easy manner

we are just working at the visual level

the visual row is the row the visual

level is the level and that makes our

life easy it's just like Excel we are

doing it those who likes the Excel

calculation very much and very find it

easy to do those kind of calculation

this is one step near to that I have

shown you quite a few visual

calculations in detail but there is a

quicker way to do some of these

calculations using templates so where is

those templates available for that let

me add a new page and quickly add a

table visual with item brand and

net visual is ready and now let me add

new calculation from the Home tab new

calculation which is a visual

calculation when you come to the visual

calculation look at this FX

icon when you click on this FX icon you

get the options for some templates so

without doing much of the effort you can

simply get some of the calculation the

only thing which you have to do is just

click on any of these calculation let's

say percentage of grand total and go

ahead and add the required field now I'm

going to replace it with

net the field with the net another field

also with the net and X is with

rows so we immediately get percentage of

total same way I can click on the FX

icon again and use versus first again I

need to replace the field where I can

replace it by one of my major which is

Nat which is also present in the same

visual and I'm getting percentage diff

with first same way you can utilize

running sum moving average percentage of

parent percentage of grand total average

of children's versus previous versus

next versus first and versus last so not

only you can create these calcul ations

by using the functions but you can also

use some of these templates so go ahead

and try those out visual calculations is

not limited to the set of new functions

which has came along with the visual

calculation feature some of the existing

functions can also be used in the visual

calculation while we have lot of

functions which we can use we will be

focusing on few functions which are

released some time back these functions

are index offset Rank and row number

these functions have been released

during December 2022 and April 2023 now

while all these functions may not work

in visual calculations we will try to

see how can we use them in visual

calculation and what all functions are

going to work there so in the upcoming

videos we are going to explore visual

calculations with these additional

functions which are very similar to SQL

Windows function which are index offset

rank and row number those provide us

order by and Partition by I would like

to go ahead and see whether offset index

window Rank and row number can work with

Dynamic rows means xess so we need to

check can these functions work in visual

calculation and if they work can they

work in the visual when we change AIS or

row of the visual will they continue to

work like the other visual calculations

we have learned in the past like

previous next running sum moving average

Etc and why I'm thinking these functions

can work in visual calculation is the

part of the documentation which I'm

going to Showcase you I want to perform

them at visual level without using

explicit table or relation by doing so

we will be able to create more flexible

calculation which can still work even if

we change the AIS so friend with that

objective I would like to first of all

show you the two statements which were

part of the documentation which

motivates me to experiment this so one

of the statement which we have looked

last time is this exis and reset and

order by and Partition by and they are

pairs now the second pair is the one

which is used by the five functions

which we plan to discuss and usually

these functions need explicit columns in

spite of those explicit column can we

make them little more Dynamic the second

thing is when it talk about available

function it do say you can use many

existing Dex function IND visual

calculations let's go ahead and try the

existing Dex function and see whether

they can fit in into the visual

calculation the way we wanted the next

visual calculation which we would like

to explore is using the index function

now I'll leave this page here and we'll

further go to another page and there

again I'm going to create the same

visual what we have started with is

brand and net and the function this time

I would like to use is the index

function so let me click on the visual

and the new calculation and I'm going to

call this function as

index

calculate

net index what does index function

require position relation order by

blanks Partition by match by and reset

so what we are going to do is index is

first index I want the first one based

on the relation which is nothing but

rows what's the next thing I require is

order by and here I'm going to use an

order by explicit order by order by

at

descending and as you can see I got the

first

value I can go ahead and modify this

calculation to have the second value

also so second value as you can see it

is the second

value I can go ahead and use it as a

third value also

so this is the third

topper same way I can use minus here

which is not possible if you would have

used the first and

second so if you would have used the

first function you cannot get all these

but you can get with the offset and I

can make it minus 3 which is actually

going to give me the bottom third

same way I can have another

calculation

index one where I can use

calculate

net

index and here I can use position as one

again and rows and I can leave the order

by to take the default order by and as

you can see it has taken brand one the

first position

because that's the default X's order by

let me go back to the

visualization and as you might have

expected if I change it to category it

still continue to

work so this is my third topper by

net and this is also the

categorical first Total both are same

here that's why the number is coming

same but they are doing two different

calculations

same way I can add both of them together

brand and

category and calculations will still

work so one of them would be on the

bottom

third and one of them would be based on

the

top next visual calculation which we

wanted to explore is using the offet

function so to start journey I will

bring in brand from the item dimension

and I'll also add net mejor I would like

to do visual calculations so how do we

do that from the Home

tab new calculations click on new

calculation and the function which I

plan to use is offset what offset used

to do for us we can go to the previous

position or the next position by

providing an offset just like we have

got previous here now I'm going to use

calculate net which is required with the

offset function you can opt for other

options also now I use the function

offset what does offset function require

it requires

Delta relation order by blanks Partition

by match and

reset let's go ahead and try these out

minus1 is the

Delta then relation and here I'm doing

the first change so instead of using all

selected

item brand or all item brand I'm using

row and remember we are doing a visual

calculation so getting data outside the

visual might not be possible for us the

next thing is order by and because order

by might require a explicit column I'm

as of now leaving that as is and because

it's going to pick up the default order

by or the first AIS I'm expecting it to

sort on brand and as as you can see we

are getting values which are one row

behind the same as previous but what the

difference is going to make in our life

if I use rows instead of explicit table

call or explicit relation call in the

offset function let me go ahead and

change this brand to

category and you can see the calculation

is still

working it is still giving me the

previous row value it means I am no more

dependent on what is there on my Axis so

I got rid of that it makes offset

function much more powerful than what we

have used it

previously now let me change it back to

brand and I would now like to go back

and can I run this offset on net I will

add another new calculation here and I'm

going to call it offset one again

calculate

net

offset minus

one rows in the relation as we have

given previously also and this time I'm

going to use order by and order by is

still looking for a explicit column here

or can we give one and two we have to

experiment so here I'm going to give

explicit name net and if you remember

the there has been a change done after

this function has been released that in

the order by we can use major which is

not part of relation net is not part of

the relation but we can still use it and

how do we want to use it descending

sort so I have pressed

enter but after adding additional

parenthesis and it has worked now to

understand this we need to change the

Sorting of the visual as I've sorted it

on net you can

see that now it is is trailed by

net so I'm getting previous row based on

net

sorting it is not sorted on brand or the

default

access can you do that using

previous try that out and do let me know

in the comments can you do the same

thing using previous function if not

offset is your choice let's go back to

the visual and understand these calcul a

little bit so right now the Sorting is

on net so you can see it Trail by a

row but this function first offs

set how it is working it is actually

still working but it is trailed by the

order of brand if you see brand one and

after that if you go to the brand 10 you

will see that value because the Sorting

order is like

this R 10 11 they're still working but

they're working based on their own

order the interesting thing we are able

to use

offset now I already experiment with the

Partition by which did not work for me

but let me showcase you that can we use

the last reset option so I will use

calculate net

offset minus one

one relation is

rows order by I will leave blanks I will

leave Partition by I will leave match I

will leave and reset can I give highest

parent here I'm giving highest parent

here no order by has been

used doesn't seems to have make any

difference but we need more than one

parent for such a reset isn't it so

let's bring bring in more than one

column

here so let's bring in category also

here and we would like to see the

calculation of this offset versus this

offset is it making any difference so if

you see here it is already sorted on the

brand which is the highest parent and

pose that this is 1 4 so if you look at

the first

calculation the

offset and you look look at the second

calculation of the

offset it same sounds like doing the

same job isn't it now let's add one

more do you see a change

here to do that let's first of all bring

in these two things

together so I have the offset and the

calculation

together and I don't see any difference

let me convert it into a

matrix and now you can

see the moment I have a visual like

Matrix visual where the concept of the

parent Works remember the concept of the

parent has to work and the moment I am

on a matrix visual where we have this

concept of a parent because remember all

three of them were on the same kind of

axis in the table Visual and the concept

of hery is not too much valid in case of

table visual it is more valid in case of

Matrix visual now here you will start

seeing a difference so one of the

difference which you are seeing here

this is the first value if you remember

this is my first value to this

calculation this also get carried

forward to the first calculation we are

still in the brand one when I go to the

brand 10 this is my boundary of the

brand 10 and as you can see inside the

brand 10 it is not getting the value for

for the first

category and to make it easier to

understand let me first remove the

subtotals so let me hide the

subtotals now as I've hidden the

subtotals what do you see between offset

and the calculation what is the

difference between the two so to observe

that look at the brand 10 only inside

the brand 10 inside the brand 10 what

you are seeing here is here I'm getting

both the values but only I'm getting

here one because the reset at the one

has

applied so it means if you're not able

to use Partition by you can still

use reset so you have a reset option

which can work in such scenarios so now

we have understood that how we can use

reset in offset function instead of

Partition by and if you remember we do

have the

flexibility of using numbers here 1 2

and 3

depending on what parent we wanted to

have reset we can also try to experiment

with that but I'm not going to do that

experiment as of now I'll leave it for

you to go ahead and try that out the

next visual calculation we wanted to

explore is using the rank function and

now I would like to use the next

function which is nothing but rank new

calculation rank function I'm going to

use is rank not rank X this is the new

function function came in April 2023

what I want to use is ties which is

nothing but dense and what does dense

means dance means if you are using a

rank and the rank getting duplicated

like 1 one one one then the next rank

would still be two it is not going to

skip the rank so we'll get continuous

rank what is relation

rows do I want to do I order by yes I

would like my ranks based on

net but you know that you can do it

without that

also and the ranks are based on the net

as you can see the moment I sorted it

you are getting your correct

ranks and if you want to do the rank

based on the axis you can add another

visual calculation click here and in the

visual calculation give it rank

one rank function

dance

Rose leave everything else it is based

on the AIS as you can see

here let's go back to the visualization

what's the beauty as you know we can

change

it we can add additional one till the

rank should work based on the

net we have not explicitly called it for

category you explicitly called it for

net so that is what it is going to

continue to work for the net when we do

the visual calculation now the visual

calculations are also limited to visual

so whatever data is not present in the

visual it is not going to do a ranking

for that if you are looking for that all

kind of a scenario you might not be able

to replicate that here so you are able

to use now rank also in the visual level

calculation with the visual level

arguments like row can we do a reset

here

of the rank and for that let me

duplicate this page after

renaming here let me change it to Matrix

Visual and let me add

brand disabl row sub totals and expand

it as of now as you can see the ranks

have changed their order a little bit

because the thing is the moment I sorted

it on net the net is actually sorted not

for the brand and category it is first

sorted on the top brand and then the

second top brand and then inside that

for the category and that is why you see

this rank is not working in a particular

descending order but on a table visual

it is going to work as expected and but

we would like to add a new calculation

here which is nothing

but rank three and here I would like to

use rank

ties is

T relation is

row order by

is

net order by is

net

descending I leave blanks I leave

Partition by I leave match by and I want

reset reset as right now I'll use lest

parent but in this case lowest parent

and highest parent are same so let's try

that out so it is saying reset parameter

cannot be used with the combination of

order by and Partition by because I've

used order by so it is not allowing me

to use the reset so let's go ahead and

edit this

calculation and remove the order by does

it

work yes it does work as we have learned

only the combinations can work exis and

reset order by and Partition by let's go

back to the visual and as you can see

the we are able to partition it when we

are using the default access you can now

observe that the categories are ranked

properly inside each brand so there is a

reset happening for each brand and

categories are ranked inside that so we

know that the combination is there and

that combination is applied on this

visual the row and AIS and order by and

Partition by but we don't never want it

to to call it explicit so but still it

is very good that we are able to change

it for category and brand whenever the

access is changing it's still it is

working so that kind of rank is working

for us the next visual calculation which

we would like to explore is using the

row number function now next thing which

you want to experiment with is the row

number with the row number I would like

to create a table Visual and this time

I'm going to bring in something which is

having data at much granular level so

I'm going to bring in order number

number as non- summarized and I'm going

to bring in sum of quantity I no don't

have any measure here I would like to

sort it on sum of quantity and now I

would like to build a calculation which

is row number I want to give the unique

row number here in this visual to do

that I will start a new visual

calculation and I'll call it

row num one and I'm going to use the

function row number and in this row

number function I'm going to use the

relation which is

row next thing is order by and in this

order

by I'm going to use the something which

is we have in this visual sum of

quantity see I'm not created a measure

here I'm going to use sum of quantity in

this visual calculation which is only

present as a implicit measor not an

explicit mejor defined by me with the

help of that implicit one I'm using it

and as you can see on on the first one

you are able to see the row numbers

getting from 1 2 3 4 let's go back to

the report and you can see that we do

have the row numbers here 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8 9 10 can we create a multiple

combination and can it still work out so

let's go ahead and add City ID to the

visualization yes it is working but

order number is still giving the

uniqueness and anyway we will we'll

always get a unique combination so let

me add an item ID also

here Item ID and City ID still we are

getting the numbers and let me change

this combination now now it is based on

the combination of item ID and City ID

no more the combination is based on the

unique order number so based on the

unique combinations also it is working

and we have

not changed anything in our function the

row number function like we have not

done any explicit call here without any

explicit call of the relation it is

still working so that is what the

advantage of visual calculation the next

visual calculation which I want to try

out is on the window function and it did

not work out for me so let me showcase

you what I tried out and what did not

work for me but you can go ahead and try

and experiment and let me know in case

you are able to make it work so I went

ahead and added

brand along with net

now I will go ahead and add the new

visual calculation and this time I would

like to use window function I've done

few experiment none of them has given me

the desired success so calculate net

window as you know window require first

to argument the window position

something which we have experimented

with the range so if the window doesn't

work range is there with us to do all

these calculation we can use that

so from what from the minus one

relative position

to zero relative

position and the next thing which I

wanted to use is relation itself which I

was trying to give

rows and I don't want to give any order

by right now and try to experiment with

the window

function and it did not work as I was

expecting it to work because it is

requiring a unique context which I'm not

able to Pro here I went ahead and I said

okay let me edit the calculation let me

see if order by can help

us I used order by

net

DEC and I again committed this

calculation and it did not work out for

me so seems like for the window function

it is not working for me the other thing

which I can do is absolute to Absolute

this is something which

can work for us zero

absolute

to minus1

Absolute let's try from 1 absolute to

minus one absolute and let's see does it

work no it didn't so seems like we will

not be able to use window function as of

now in the visual level calculation

using the

rows as

X's Ive even tried the experiment by

giving here all

selected brand and item

brand so that calculation also doesn't

work for me but this is experiment for

you can you make the window function

work in the visual level calculations go

ahead and try that out but now we know

that we have made quite a few functions

working for

the visual calculation that include

offset index and rank noow number the

four functions out of the five functions

which are very similar to SQL window

function which provides us order by and

Partition by we are able to use in

visual level calculations one of the

most common function which you use very

frequently is rank now can we use rank X

in visual calculat because if we can use

rank X in the visual calculation it will

Pride a lot of flexibility when we are

going to calculate the rank so so I'm

going to go ahead and try out the rankx

function in the visual calculation and

explore how can it help us doing visual

calculation and how our ranks will

become more Dynamic when we use rank X

in the visual calculation so I'm on the

powerb file and here what I'm going to

do is I'm going to add a new page and

inside this new page I'm going to add

brand and

net make it a little bigger and convert

it into a table visual also now here I

want to add a rank so how do we use use

a rankx function and do it but this time

I don't want to use the rankx function

as a measure I want to use it as a

visual calculat let me click on the

visual that's how the visual

calculations are enabled go to the Home

tab and there I'm going to click on the

calculation new calculation is the

option to do that I'll click on the new

calculation visual calculations have

been opened now here I'm going to write

down a new calculation which is Rank and

rank I'm going to use the rank X

function rank X if you remember in the

rank X the first thing which which we

need to give is the table and that is

where I'm going to use rows expression

is basically our column where we are

going to thought third item usually we

keep empty fourth is order which is by

default descending and dies is the fifth

one which is by default so let me start

giving that so here I'm going to use

rows so I'm not going to use any like

all selected table column I'm the second

one is my net measure which I wanted to

use and third one is the values column

which I'm going to leave empty by

default it is descending but I can give

descending here and the dense because

skip is default one dense here as my

visual is already sorted on net you can

see it is showing you the rank one for

the maximum amount of net what we have

now question which you may ask is how

it's making a difference you would have

done this rank X function all selected

it would have behaved in the same manner

isn't it so let's do one thing let's try

to see if you already have a rank

function I do have a rank net which is

also on all selected item net descending

dance very similar major also I have so

I have a visual calculation I have a

major and you can see this is visual

calculation and this so while I have

both and both are giving the same but

let's we go ahead go to brand and click

on this arrow and I change it to

category the moment I change it to

category the thing which you will notice

here basically this rank got adjusted

but this is the one which is not getting

adjusted now why it is not getting

adjusted because it is talking about

item brand brand is not in the context

and that is where it all brand is not

get listed but here we are talking about

rows so here it is changed from Brand to

category and now it is able to adjust

the second case which we can test out is

basically let's convert this into a

matrix now I have category and inside

that let bring in brand inside the

category I have brand I added the brand

and I'm going to expand this Matrix

visual let's see what do you see a

difference here now here what is

happening here is this brand is 1 to n

so each brand is getting rank within the

category so there's a partitioning which

is happening but here when you see these

things this is not getting same way

partition there are different ranks and

if you see there is a one two here and

then there's a three here so remember

category 4 Brand two is at number three

and category two brand 8 and brand N9

now to understand this let me convert

this back into a table visual when I

convert it into table Visual and I sort

it on net which is right now the Sorting

you can see that it is actually sorting

it on the combination so in the second

level the Brand level when I is seeing

in The Matrix visual while the rank is

partitioning it by category this one is

not getting it partitioned now we we

have like you know rules how do we

partition and not partition in different

functions like we have rank function

where we can give Partition by and there

we can deal with but in this scenario

especially with the rank X function as

you can see now when I'm adding two it

is taking both of them as rows and you

know it is giving the rank based on that

now this is one of the challenge which

you had in the past like because if I

keep on adding how many ranks I'm going

to create and this is where you know a

visual calculations help helps us a lot

that my rank is independent of what I

have in the calculation I simply using

row and it can change based on the

visual so I don't have to specify a

particular column I get that

Independence that I can change my column

inside my visual or I can change my

group buys inside my visual and my rank

can adjust to that while in major

calculation that's not possible because

they are tied to a particular column of

field and they're going to behave in a

manner they should behave when this

column is tightly attached to that

particular measure so this is the real

benefit and now you would have

understood that you know what benefit

each one of them has now sometime I

would like to have mejor because I have

that kind of a scenario which is

basically the rank should get partition

as soon as I add something else and that

is what the case is and sometime you

know I have to explain that again and

again in many videos I've done that the

moment you add additional stuff the rank

is inside that additional column which

is not participating in the rank or get

partitioned by that other column because

we are limited by what column we have

put it into the rank X function in a

measure but that's not the case with the

visual calculation visual calculation

has been enounced in October 2024 so

let's have a look at what all

enhancements has been done into the

visual calculations in October 2024

there are few enhancements which has

been rolled out on the visual

calculation and one of them is using the

field parameters along with visual

calculations which we are going to

explore today so let's jump on the

release note look at what are the new

features which has been given for visual

calculations and we will explore them

onto the powerbi desktop I'm here on the

powerbi October 2024 feature summary and

in this feature summary one of the

feature which you will find under the

content reporting is visual calculation

update foreview once we click on that we

go down it talks about combo charts are

Now supported in theual visual

calculation now the combo chart are

supported so you can now use visual

calculation in combo chart such as line

and cluster column chart just you could

in the other chart types here is an

example of visual calculation reporting

moving average for 34s so one example

has been given for combo visual where we

can see the moving average has been

added on the line three quarters moving

average has been used on the line of

combo visual line clustered column chart

and the another feature which we are

looking forward mainly for today is

field parameters are Now supported this

month we have enabled the visual

calculation with field parameters you

can add visual calculation to the visual

containing field parameter or vice versa

field parameters can be used to quickly

switch around what's shown in the visual

for example you can create field

parameter to enable your users to decide

which attribute Dimension to show for

example field parameter called Product

attribute can be used to determine the

percentage of grand total you have the

percentage of grand total which is using

rows and you can switch the AIS using

the field parameter and it will continue

to

work another update is faster ways to

add templated visual calculation you can

now add templated visual calculation

with fewer clicks by clicking on the

button as part of new visual calculation

previously to get the visual template

you have to go to the visual calculation

and there you have the option to choose

the template from the calculation now

the template option is available

directly under the new visual

calculation under the Home tab and you

can use it from there you can also start

new calculation without template using

custom option so these are some of the

updates let me jump onto a power VA file

and showcase you these updates so I'm

here on the powerbi file this is the

file where I have already done some

visual calculations in the past also I'm

using the dark mode which is recently

released so you can see that my uis of

the powerbi are in the dark mode first

of all I'm going to add a new page in to

this UI and I will take you through the

features one by one first of all let me

add a table visual so I'm going to add a

table Visual and inside the table visual

let me bring in brand and the major net

I have a visual brand with the net and

let's say I want to add a visual

calculation how do we add a visual

calculation I to go to the Home

tab and inside the Home tab I have new

visual calculation and as you can see

the new feature which is already been

discussed that you have the access to

the template quickly you don't have to

go to the calculation and choose one of

them so let's choose percentage of grand

total as one of the calculations so

using that template we have come here

directly you can see we have percentage

of ground total and I can use net as my

major collapse all function is going to

give me the grand total net again and

xes is rows that remains Dynamic now I

got my percentage of total now you are

not seeing percentage and I'll tell you

the new feature which will enable you to

see it in the percentage format also

that came very recently few months back

let's go back now we would like to

format this percentage of total click on

this go to the format I opened the

format now inside the format go to

properties and inside the properties

data format choose the percentage of

grand total the data type is decimal the

format is percentage once you choose the

percentage format in the decimal data

type you will be able to see in the

percentage

format we have saw one more feature and

that the feature is it is supported on

combo visual so let's make this chart as

line cluster and let's try to move this

percentage of grand total from the

column of Y AIS line yis visual is now

showing percentage of total along with

the net what we can do now is we can

sort this visual on brand and observe it

again let's sort this on

brand we can observe the visual again

now we can see net as well as percentage

of grand total together now to make it

little more interesting where you can

differentiate what line is doing this is

what bar is doing let's convert this

line into percentage of running total

line so let's edit this calculation and

how do we get running total so we have

another template for running total but

we do have a function running sum on the

top I'll take running sum X is as rows

so let's divide running Su by total and

let me go back the report and let me

sort this on the brand

ascending and as you can see this is now

showing me running percentage of total

we are able to explore the second

feature also let me convert this visual

into table so we have a calculation net

we have a percentage of grand total

which is actually not percentage of

grand total which is percentage of

running total and I would also like to

add one more function offset function or

index function I'll add one more

calculation here that calculation is

last so what is there in the last so I

can use offset function calculate we

have previous here but I would like to

use offset here net comma offset minus

one relation is

rows order by is net D actually I wanted

to have specific order by and that is

why I used this offset function for last

row when I go back to the report now

this function for that I need the

Sorting on the net if you see if I do

the Sorting on the net it's giving me

the last two let's do one thing let's

duplicate this visual CU they both need

different sorting and now from the first

visual I can remove the last row from

the second visual I can remove percent

of running total sort first visual on

brand and second visual on net the

reason for this change is because one of

my visual calculation is working on the

axis another one is working on the major

sorting now what I would like to do is I

would like to make both these visuals

Dynamic by using field parameters so I

would like to change the a/ row and see

that the calculation is still holds true

for that I would now like to create

field parameter that is going to change

my categorical variable or access to do

that I will we go to modeling new

parameters Fields I'm going to create

access let me call it as access one and

here I'm going to select from item table

brand category subcategory from

geography table I'll select state and

city I will leave this option add slicer

to this page as is I would like it to

add and then I can now click on create

to create my field parameter field

parameter will add a table with a

special syntax which enables us to use

the field parameters this I have

explained in the past also now we got

the field parameter we also got a slicer

we would like to utilize it let me first

of all adjust it little

bit now we have adjusted our visual but

our visual are not following any access

isn't

it let's go ahead and change the visuals

to use access I go to the first Visual

and I will go to access drag XIs one and

remove brand I will do the same in the

second visual I'll click on the second

visual drag access and remove brand

visual is sorted on AIS or categorical

variable and second one is sorted on the

measor now let's change the access both

the visuals should change if I change

the access one I change it to category

as you can observe in the first visual

we are still getting the correct

percentage of running total it is still

rolling up to the

100% so you can observe in the second

vual that we are still getting the

correct prior with the help of field

parameters XIs has changed or the row

has changed or the categorical variable

has changed but still we are able to see

the last row value based on visual

calculation which we don't have to

change let's look at State when we look

at the state calculation again you can

see my percentage of running total is

still working as well as you can observe

that the prior calculations are still

working fine are still getting the

previous row value in spite of change in

the categorical variable /xs look at how

simple and quick calculation we have

done and those quick calculations have

not only worked with what categorical

variables or what axis or what row we

had in that visual even when we changed

it it continue to work and the last item

before we conclude for today let's have

more than one and does it continue to

work as you can see calculations are

still working and this is the beauty of

visual calculation and we can say visual

calculations are better to together with

calculation group so why don't you go

ahead and try this out so now let's dig

deep into the conditional formatting

details for doing that what I've done is

I've already created few set of visuals

where we are going to experiment with

I'll also tell you where you will not be

able to do the conditional formatting so

what do I mean by conditional formatting

so in every visual when you go to the

visual format you have a color option

now the color option under the bars in

case of bar visual in case of column

visual column in case of Matrix and

table visual you will have the colors

under same cell element various

conditional formatting options are

available table Visual and the Matrix

visual have a lot of option they have on

background font then they have datab

bars icons web URL lot of options now

let's start with first of all the

conditional formatting on a table visual

so conditional formatting has few

limitations like in case of the Matrix

visual when you click on the Matrix

Visual and you want to do conditional

formatting you go to series you will not

see anything for the rows and the

columns me you can't do conditional

formatting on R feeds and column feeds

on table visual on contary you will be

able to do almost on everything on the

visuals like bar and Etc you cannot do

it if you have more than one major or if

you have a legend in these kind of

visual the the sign is basically you see

this FX button and the moment you stop

seeing this FX button you do any action

and you don't see this FX button it

means you will not be able to do the

conditional formatting so let's say if I

drag category on the legend you will no

more see that okay so it means the

option is not available you can see the

color color for each series but you

can't do a conditional form similarly

when you use more than one major also

you will not get that option you don't

have the options for the conditional

formatting the FX is not there in case

you have a pi visual me create

one you don't have conditional

formatting options you go to the slice

you don't have the option same way if

you create a line visual you again don't

have a conditional formatting option

under the line so there is no option

under the color and at few places we

will be able to get this even without

having those options at other places

we'll not be able to get it so let's

start with the conditional formatting

and first of all I'll I'll quickly

explain you the two conditional

formattings options to you on the table

visual so in the table visual I can do

conditional formatting on any of these

but let me bring in a major so margin

major I want to do background

conditional formatting of form or data

bar or icon all are available here I can

go to the background conditional

formatting I click it you immediately

start seeing because when you click on

FX You Realize by default the gradient

conditional formatting already been

picked up in the gradient conditional

formatting you can use a major and it is

not necessary that when I use margin I

need to use margin measure I can use any

other measure then I can also I specify

when what should I do for empty values

don't summarize treat it as zero or

specific color so this option is

available in the gradient condition form

I can use the minimum maximum color

gradient and I can choose it now if it

is a reverse like discount it should be

reverse the minimum value is good

actually I can have a middle color if I

want and once I use the middle color uh

it will give me a try color gradient and

I can use any color in that manner I can

actually build in my gradient

conditional formatting it can apply to

values and total and total only right

now I'm keeping it only as values and

I'll apply gradient conditional format

the other options here are rule base and

value base which we will explore in a

while you are now getting gradient

conditional formatting the same option

would be available in all the visuals

now here in the table visual we have

more options like we have option for

background we have option for uh font

color datab bars Etc but this font and

background color so this option would be

available in in the color option of most

of the visuals now cable visual is the

only visual where you can actually

create a row conditional formatting

because if you can repeat this I can go

ahead and you know I I chose my margin

percentage I can go and repeat this on

discount percentage repeat this on net

repeat this on brand so I can actually

create a complete row conditional for

same conditions I have to repeat the

same logic I have to repeat and it is

not necessary then when I'm I'm doing

conditional formatting on Brown it is

not necessary when I do conditional

formatting on discount percentage that I

have to use discount percentage I can

still go ahead and use margin percentage

and I can still use the same logic so I

will have similar kind of colors and if

you repeat this you will get a color

draw then comes the font formatting

let's complete the different kind of

formatting and then we will go to the

rules and the field value in the font

condition formatting you actually color

the font so let me color the font this

time based on the rule values only value

gr total I want to Value usually what

happens value rule based conditional

formatting let me apply it on based on

the I'm applying it on net but I will

apply based on the margin percentage I

should be knowing what are what is the

values I have because values will change

based on the group wise now even though

I'm doing it on percentage column and

this is something you should remember

that even though I'm going to do it on

percentage kind of a column it need to

be done on number everything should be

number and it it should be between 0 and

1 so these are basically. 13.13 .14 so I

have 10% 11% 12% 133% 14% that's the max

range I have so what I can do I can say

okay it need to be red when it is

between 0

to12 okay everything should be number

now because it is strictly less than

here what I can do is I can go ahead and

say greater than and equal to again

point

.12 and then not percentage I want a

number and from there strictly less than

.14 percentage 14 percentage and this

color I can keep it as

orange so again everything is number not

percentage now let's add one more rule

again we have given the last condition

which is basically till

14% 12% to 14% strictly less than 14 so

now it could be greater than 14% .14 and

it could go till one or it can whatever

number you wanted to give the best way

is to give it at one and here like if

you have negative values the first value

you can go ahead and change to let's say

minus1 or - 100 whatever you want minus

one could also do the job so what are my

conditions now my condition is from

negative to positive 12% number

everything it's going to be red from 12

to 14% it's going to be yellow and from

14% now let's change this from 14% to

anything which is till 100% should be

green so we use green color so now this

is the color what we want let's click on

okay and see how does it apply and as

you can see it has applied the color now

the first color is not visible let's

make it little bit bold so that we can

see it so we can make the values bold if

we want like this to look at the color

so these are the condition now we have

applied and now based on that condition

the colors are coming I'm reverting back

the Bold right as of now

so this is Rule based conditional

formatting the rule which you have to

remember percentage means allocation

based and number means you have the

exact value which you are planed to use

even if your column is a percentage

column you need to use number because

you are giving a range you are giving

the exact number range and for that you

need to use numbers not percentage so we

are done with the font conditional

formatting now what is this data bar so

basically what happens when you click on

the data bar I'll keep it on net it will

add a bar The Filling of the bar if you

go to the FX the option you have is the

lowest value highest value which you can

give you can get the values or by

default it will decide by itself you

have for positive bar and negative bar

and X is color now there's no

conditional formatting further on it you

can choose left to right or right to

left also you can choose it will start

from the other direction also there's

one option if you want to only want to

show the bar you don't want to show the

number you can choose that in that case

you will only see the

bar so these kind of stuff you can do

now comes the icon conditional

formatting in case of Icon conditional

formatting you can click on FX and there

are always a rule again when you are

using the percentage base please

remember this is

allocation so allocation of net value

from 0 to 30.3% 33 to 67% and 67 to 100%

and that is why I was warning you that

we are not going to use the percentage

when it is actually percentage so here

you can have based on the percentage and

you can use different kind of icons

and you can say

okay I got conditional formatting I can

also do that on the brand one not that I

can't do it in brand I can also go ahead

and do the icon conditional formatting

on brand I can choose a major here or

actually we have a support for a text

now we can say is brand one is brand 2

is brand three and we can choose

different one okay let's choose the four

one so brand one is this so we can do on

the based on the text also brand one

brand 2 brand three brand four brand

five only we have five so will'll get

five there's no option to add here but

we can add more rules and more icons so

add let's say is brand six so we can add

more rules but let's stick with these

things and as you can see whatever

Brands we have given some icons we are

getting those icons now other than that

what you can do is you can create a

unique a measure and then can you you

can do conditional formatting on that

that is another way to of doing a

conditional form what is this web URL

condition formatting for the web URL you

need to have the URL basically so let's

see do we have a URL I actually have the

image URL but I'm trying to use that so

if you use the URL then it will start

showing you underline here you want to

use the underline so if you do the web

URL conditional formatting it will start

showing you the URLs underly URL so if

you want the underlying there is option

for URL icon and what happens when do

you use that for that let me take one

example let me open a new page and in

that page let me bring in brand and

brand URL and now let me go to this icon

value value for a moment I'll change

this image URL as web URL and now you

can see the URL here now I'll go to the

brand URL apply setting and in the icon

I'll click on the values and the moment

I switch this on you start seeing this

icon small icon and this is how you use

this URL icon so you want to show that

small icon when you have actually the

URL field you can do that but as of I'll

for a longer run I'll just revert it

I'll just shown you how to use that this

is actually a image URL and the moment I

make it image URL it will actually turn

back and then you can go ahead and play

with the size of the image you can go

ahead and say okay I want to have 250

you can have that much image one the

limit of 150 has been removed as of now

you can have much higher size of image

so now back to the conditional

formatting so now we have understand

different kind of conditional formatting

now I would like to use the Third Kind

of conditional formatting which is the

value based conditional formatting which

is the major based conditional

formatting which we can use in the field

value so let's say I want to color these

things based on category or brand say

okay we'll go rule based conditional

formatting also these days allowed text

values isn't you can do that what I want

is a little bit different so I want to

create two majors here brand color and

there is a reason why I'm creating so I

create a new major from the table tool

so let me create first major brand color

I will also create one more major which

is category color so let me again click

on new major this time from the Major

Tool and this major I already created

and let me explain you this major and

same way I've created the brand major so

I'm also creating one category color and

now let me explain you both have created

in the same manner by using the switch

true instead of switch true I could have

used switch Max of item category or Max

of or selected item category so when it

is category one I'm giving one color

when it is category two I'm giving

another color when it is category three

I'm giving blue let's say category four

yellow and category five orange so in

this manner I'm getting colors and

there's other instead of other I can

make it let's say

black there's no other category so I can

keep it anything I want it should return

color otherwise it will give error now

this is a color Mage it returns a color

you can also use the Hax code the six

digigit Hax code if you remember with

the hash sign so if you it may be hash

ff00 something like that you can also

use so right now I'm using the names now

what I'll do here is I'll go to this

brand by net visual I go to bar and

inside the FX I can go ahead I can use

the field value I can go to the major

and I can search for the brand major I

can search for brand color I can do a

condition now you can see each brand has

got its own color Okay so the color is

basically by brand and this helps us

when we want to keep the consistent

color so we'll go to this category

Visual and apply the category color to

keep it

consistent now in The Matrix visual I

have option I can have the color by

brand or by category so let's use by

brand here so we want to do the

background color

FX field value by brand

color and that's where your max is going

to play a role now

so let me use brand

color and as you can see other than the

not null values we getting color in that

particular

row and as of now the conditional

formatting value based conditional

formatting don't color the blank values

you might have to handle the value

itself to get the color now we will use

the other one and this category one now

you will ask how would you use it into

the I visual there's no option I'll tell

you the way first of all I'll convert it

into cluster column

chart or bar chart I go to the FX I go

to field value I can do the gradient

conditional formatting as well as rule

base but the easier for me as of now to

explain to you is field value I use the

color I created the colors I'm going to

convert it back remember the colors take

the values because I'm going to do this

now on this visual which is actually a

column visual which where the

conditional formatting is available so

we done it on a column visual convert it

into a pi now we are doing it on a

column visual again field value we

clicked on FX came here field value

color category

color now if you see the two visuals

have the same

colors what happens when we filter

something so let me bring a page level

filter brand one till category 4 and

category one retained those colors till

they are red and yellow and this is the

thing which we can do using this one we

we can have colors which retained it but

only challenge is across multiple

measures or with Legends it will not

work also we can't color The Matrix head

and row but how do we color line we

can't color line only we can show

additional colored marker and this is

other than the marker color switch so

what you can do here is again convert it

into a cluster column

bar go to the effects do whatever color

you want I want to do field conditional

formatting I can search the color major

and

colors and then I convert it back to the

line I get these

markers colored markers and these are

not same as the marker which we have in

the line so if I enable the marker now

you will say no no it is looking like

this let me showcase you let me make

them bigger you can see the background

the bigger markers are coming back so

they are not same as the marker what we

have they are different separate markers

but yes definitely you can show theor

you can't color the line but you can

show the colors so you've seen the

advantage of field conditional

formatting now when we have the field

conditional formatting let's say if I

need to do it in table visual I can

quickly replicate it in all the columns

and you know the same kind of

conditional formatting and I can get row

colors now I have done it on the

category and brand but it doesn't mean I

can't do it on measure I can do it on

measure and we'll take up that example

now before I do that I'll go to this cd2

and I knowingly created this because now

the colors are going to give a different

meanings to this visualization so if you

remember I suggested you instead of

using Legends use to access when I use

twox I don't have two colors now we have

because we are going to going to go to

the conditional formatting and from the

conditional formatting now this is the

first one is brand I'm going to use

field value and the brand

colors brand color I'm going to

use and you can see the different brands

have different color now you could have

used the category colors and different

categories could have colors and you can

use other table visually where you can

only have the categories now where from

where I will get the legend definitely

you can't get a legend here what you can

do is create a very small cable

Visual and this is brand isn't it so

I'll put brand

here and you can put the colors to the

brand background or font whatever you

want I'll put the background color we

value

brand and you can say these are the

color of the brand so there a color of

brand one brand 10 on all those now

definitely you make it as thin as

possible you can hide the total all

those things you can

do now in the second visual I'm going to

use it on category it's not going to

make much difference but I just wanted

to show you how different is going to

look like

you have the category color I could have

used brand color here and each brand

could have the same color so you can

create these kind of visuals using field

value conditional formatting also rules

support the name colors you can use do

do you can also use rule based

conditional formatting that supports the

color that also support text now now the

final which I going to do here is based

on a measure and for that I would like

to have a scatter visual I'm going to

create the scatter visual again so I'll

add a scatter Visual and this scatter

visual I will have on the x-axis

discount

percentage on the y axis I'm going to

have margin

percentage I will use city as my values

remember I can't use

Legend I got so many dots I'm going to

switch the

x-axis I will invert I want the lowest

values on the this side because I want

to create a fourth quadrant here which

is low discount High margin which is

green how to create the quadrant so go

down you have the lines reference

lines and here you going to add constant

lines not the average

line constant line xaxis constant line

and in the XX is constant line you have

this FX and in the FX use the measor

what you

want it switches then go to the add line

again use the type as Y axis constant

line and in the y axis constant line in

the FX now choose margin

percentage you have to use the major

because major is automatically going to

take care of the grand total because it

is a divided by B when you have the

grand total is going to do and when I

use the constant lines or when I use

these reference line they are calculated

at the grand total level now what I need

here this see these are the average line

our ba is given those this quadrant is

high margin low discount green but how

do I get this middle margin I need to

now this is still high margin but High

discount blue low discounts are red and

yellow low discount low

margin now for low margins I have two if

the discount is low I can keep it orange

if it is low margin High discount I will

keep it red so I need a measure for that

I'm going to create this measure and

I'll tell you how I'm so let me create a

new measure and I already have a script

for

that color scatter first of all for that

we need gr to so using calculate

discount percent for Discount all

selected is going to give me the grand

total or the average overall average

same way overall margin calculate margin

all selected why I'm using all selected

so because if you apply the filter still

it find the middle number with those

filters then what we are saying is if

margin is greater than the average

margin and discount is less than the

discount average discount overall

discount than green margin is still

greater but discount is also greater

blue for both lower margins if the

discount is low then yellow if the

discount is greater then red this is

what I wanted these are the four color I

wanted I have a major now which can do

that so I use switch through and created

this measure now I would like to use

this

measure so I'll go to the

markers inside the marker color I will

use FX and inside the FX field value

search for the color color skatter okay

and you can see the four colors green

blue yellow or orange if you want it and

red the four colors have come we have

got the four quadrants of different

different colors so conditional

formatting is a powerful tool to

communicate the message the message

could be done in terms of value or it

could be done in terms of categorical

values to enhance the visual experience

you can use whenever you require to make

impactful visualization so let's

understand visual interactions to

understand visual interactions what I've

done is I actually created created a few

visuals which include table visual Pi

visual map Visual and bar visual to

explain you what are the different kind

of interactions which happens between

the visuals I also added a slicer so

that you can understand it better let me

close rest of the panes and give you a

space on the page so that page has a

larger canvas available now I'll click

on any of the visual and then I can go

to format and enable the edit

interaction edit interactions allows you

to change the interactions between the

visuals what do you mean by interactions

first of of all between the visual so

let's say if I click on any of these

slices all these visuals are changing

okay why these visuals are changing

these visuals are changing because they

are interacting with this slicer if you

go to this brand visual it will only

show one value because only one value is

applicable because of its interaction

with the second brand slicer now the

moment I erase it you will again see the

values are removed now if you click on

any of the visual let's say if I click

on Category 2 you will see a different

kind of impact which is happening here

now I'll explain what is happening on

the P later but you see this is

highlight which is happening in the

brand visual actually there's a

highlight also happening in the pi

visual but because it's on the same

level only category 2 is getting

highlight now I click back and I click

on any of the brands in the P visual

what do you see here the T table visual

is getting filtered but in the pi visual

there is a highlight which is happening

again this visual is basically getting

filtered the map visual now if I go and

click again it will deselect and here if

I click on any of the city you will see

again highlight at few places and filter

at other places but is slicer getting

impacted no so visual is not changing

the slicer unless the joint is

bidirectional so visual is not going to

filter the slicer and we don't see any

interaction side with the filter pane so

even if I click on any of the filters we

don't see any interaction changes so

filters can also filter the data inside

the visualization but the interactions

with the filter cannot be changed while

it can be changed for other what do I

mean by interactions can be changed so

now I will click on let's say one slicer

and I go to edit interaction and I click

on that immediately you start seeing

these signs these signs means filter and

don't filter so whenever I click on the

slicer all other visuals we get this

filter and not filter because the

interaction with the slicer is either

you going to filter with that slicer or

you're not going to filter with that

slicer only two type of interactions can

happen every chart is a driver chart and

all other chart will become the driven

chart when you click on the edit

interactions and you try to edit the

interaction so every chart will become a

driver for edit interaction so if I

click on on this visual you will see the

Dr are you know now asking for whether

they want to get filtered or not and at

some of the visuals you are seeing three

options not two options the third

additional options which you're seeing

is the Highlight option so what happens

if this is a brand if I click on this I

can disable its interaction with this

chart I can disable its interaction with

this chart so now when I click on brand

one you see that the other visuals are

getting updated but these two visual

where I switch off the interaction they

are not interacting so let me erase this

now let me select brand 10 here in this

visual when I select brand 10 and if I

go here the brand 10 is getting filtered

into the other visual why because from

this visual when I click on this visual

the interactions are on for this one so

when this chart is driver chart there is

interaction which is still happening the

filter is which is still highlighted so

each slicer or each visual can filter

other visual unless stopped default

behavior is filter or highlight in which

case it would be default highlight I'll

let you know mean know let me erase it

let me click on any of the filter You

Don't See see any interaction happening

with the filter so see the Highlight is

still on the slicer so filter can we

cannot change interaction with the

filter we can only change with the

slicers filter is not part of

interactions now let's go ahead when I

click on category here you see that

there is a highlight which is

happening now why does this highlight is

happening because there's a method

available when I click on this chart

there is a method which is available as

highlight if I change it to filter and

if I click on any of these categories

you will see see now the visual is

getting filtered so the behavior is

filter same way when I've clicked here I

can go ahead and change this Behavior

also to filter so now this chart will

only show the category which is clicked

on this table visual so there are chart

where we can show The Fill Behavior

which include the bar chart pie chart

tree map these visuals can show The Fill

Behavior but chart like table cannot

show fill Behavior so let's say if I go

to the pie chart and when I filter the

default table can only get filtered or I

can disable filter or I can filter

there's no filpa so we cannot do it so

using the edit interaction under the

format you can change the behavior let's

quickly take one use case the use case

of dividing a page into two parts so

what I'm going to do is I'm going to

copy these two visuals from here and

I'll take them to a new page let me

paste them let me see don't syn also I

copied three let me make it two or let

me keep them three only so I got these

three visuals and let me instead of two

I got three I put them on one side now

what's happening if I select a br

everything is interacting now let me say

CR a contrl c contr v i get two sets of

visuals now even if I select brand here

it is filtering across now for this use

case let me go ahead and insert a shape

and the shape I plan to insert is a line

let me make this line bigger and thinner

and I I'll change its orientation now

let me enable the formatting and inside

the format I'll go to rotation and let

me rotate it by 90° so I got a full line

a y drawn a line here I want the left

side to only work with the left side I

want right side to work with the right

side they should not interact with each

other then how do I change this Behavior

so click on this visual now edit

interaction is already available from

the format pan we have enabled it last

time if it is not enabled go to the

format pan and enable it now disable its

interaction with all the three visuals

let me make it a little bit smaller

because it's overlapping now what would

happen here when I select brand one it

is going to filter the first two visual

not the visual on the other side so you

can see this visual is filtering this

visual is filtering but these two

visuals are not interacting and that is

the reason why they are not getting

filtered but it will not stop here I

have to do the same thing for here and

have to repeat it for all the visual so

I click on this I disable its

interaction with these visual now I

click on this Visual and I disable its

interaction with the other side I click

on the bar Visual and disable bar

visuals interaction with the right hand

side visual on the right hand side I

click on the p and I disable it

interaction with left hand side visual

click on the bar and disable its

interaction with left hand side visual

now let's check it out so if I filter

brand one here only right side is

getting filtered so I filtered on right

side right side is getting filtered when

I click on category and let me change

the impact to highlight let me click on

the pi on the left and change the impact

to highlight see left hand side

interacts with left hand side right hand

side interact with right hand side there

is no interaction between left and right

in this manner you can change the

interaction and create different kind of

interactions Behavior where you can

decide which visual is going to filter

which other

visual let's learn the feature bookmarks

bookmarks is a feature which allows you

to create snapshots and using those

snapshot you can create more interactive

power VI Pages now what happens is there

is a facility to show and hide the

visuals so if you go to view and enable

the selection pan which is right now

enabled here so you to enable the

selection Pane and for every

visualization you will get option to

show and hide and you can capture that

stage because sometime the visual is

showing sometime the visual is not

showing so you can capture such kind of

situations and using such kind of

situations you can actually create a

really interactive page what are the

uses there are many uses before field

parameter came in place this was also

used for switch AIS so basically if a

visual is on brand and I want to change

it to category so bookmarks along with

Buttons used to help in that then

sometime it helps us in creating a b

basically a slicer pan so what happens

you can have a slicer pan and that

slicer pen can show and hide so let's

take these two examples of bookmarks and

try to implement that and understand the

bookmark feature in detail what I'm

going to do is I have another page where

I have this two slices let me bring them

in now these slices are not interacting

with each other right now I'll say don't

sync so let me change the column on the

second slicer so on the second slicer

instead of the brand let me use category

so I have a visual which is on brand I

have a visual which is on category brand

and category and let me bring in one

visual also I bring a visual here I put

this visual here below now these visuals

are filtering this one let's check that

out round one

category interaction is happening now

sometime for the space requirement what

you want is I want to hide this region

or you can have it on left hand side so

how do I do that so let me first of all

create a pain kind of impression by

using a shape I put a

rectangle so let me remove the color and

everything from this one shape and Style

no fill I think we are fine with the

boundaries let me bring in the category

on top of it so let's go to the format

Tab and let's send this backward so we

will say send to back so this is now on

when to the back one

now this is here and this should again

let's bring this forward bring in front

this is also bring in front control or

shift press and right click group so all

these visuals are group so we have one

group so what can happen is I can hide

this this is hidden now this is one

stage where this is hidden this is one

of the stage I want to show so this is

the one stage which I would like to

capture and in that stage I would like

to use the bookmark

pan and this is the bookmark pain which

is already

enabled and using the pan switcher let

me bring it

in so now this stage I add a bookmark

and this bookmark let me call this

bookmark as

hide enable and what is this stage when

it is showing this this is show stage so

there are two stages hide and show so in

this stage it is hidden this stage it is

show but what happens if I select

category one I removed all the

categories in the show stage I go to

hide stage do you see this a category

still filtered so what has happened when

I created this bookmark actually the

data got saved though the filter is not

appearing so if I go to show I uncheck

it but if I go to hide and I come back

to show you again see the category one

because the category one was sa so let

me erase this category one let me erase

the filter and update this bookmark now

let me hide this so I unhide it first of

all erase erase this one now I hide it

right click and update now both the

bookmarks are saved without values but

let's say if I put Category 2 here let

me put Category 5 here and after keep

creating Category 5 in the show view I

go to the Hidden View now if you

remember I cleaned up and saved it again

now it is is still showing me everything

so can I pass the values because when I

show and hide this menu I still want the

values to pass so for that we right

click here and we say disable data we

say don't save the data same thing on

the show we go and we say don't save the

data now we go to the show go to the

category and put Category 2 come to the

hide view still Category 2 come back

show now let's choose a category where

we have lesser values like Category 5

this is the show View and we go to the

hide view we still get the category 5 it

means even if I hide my menu I will be

able to do that now what I'm going to do

is I'm I need a button here isn't it so

I give a small button for show or hide

so I want to hide or show then I need to

give a button so I will go here in the

insert and I go to button so let me add

a very small button here blank button

I'm plan to add let me move it on the

right hand side I'll go to the button

style enable the text and give it as a

name show whenever I click on this the

menu should show now I go further down I

go to the actions in the action in The

Bookmark I'll first of all type action

type is bookmark what action it should

show it should show so whenever I click

on this it should show right now it's

already showing okay so we need to do a

little bit of adjustment and then I put

another button and I put hide button on

top of the menu itself and I need to

group it so let me group this together

so merge I merge it with the group one

so when I go to height the button itself

is hidden with that if I go to the show

it is there now but this should be

renamed as hide and what action it

should do if I click it should take me

to The Bookmark hide so now let's do a

go ahead and click on this how do we

click a button in the powerb desktop

control click hide control click show

shows can we apply a filter yes category

two and we go and apply brand and filter

yes brand and filter has been applied

let's hide it till the same thing is

there click on show same thing is there

okay so we are in short this using the

not saving the data with the bookmarks

so these are the stages which are saved

and we are able to create slicer menu

which we can show under it you can

create it on left hand side sometime

what happens is when you create such

kind of menu you do adjust your visual

so BBE the visual is see this big and

when it is shown on the visual is this

big so this kind of adjustment also we

do so with this kind of adjustment you

can try that out now the Second Use case

which actually I wanted to go ahead and

do is I want to create a impression of

access slicer using the bookmarks and

button so we have used bookmarks and

button and created the menu show hide

menu now what we want is now we want the

behavior of access slicer now access

slicer bookmarks cannot work in a slicer

so what I'm going to do here is

basically I will go ahead and create

buttons for those and going to create an

impression of exess slicer and when you

learn field parameter you will find that

the new method is really easy the field

parameter method is really easy while

bookmarks can use for both access slicer

as well as major slicer for major slicer

traditionally also there are many ways

available including the calculation

group now calculation group has very

recently become part of the Microsoft

powerbi desktop without going to tabular

editor or external tool you can create

it so calculation group is another easy

way to explore that so calculation group

was previously there and major slicers

we can create with the help of

independent table that was also

available previous viously so unless a

very specific case used to come we never

used to use bookmark for major slices

but definitely for the exess slicer we

were using it so let's quickly take an

example in this example again what I

want here is basically let me bring in

this visual by category to this new page

let me duplicate this contrl C control V

now there are two visuals and what I'm

going to do here is the second visual

I'll change the second visual to Brand

so what you want is if you click on if

you click on a button you want brand if

you click on a button you want category

so if I hide this is only category

Visual and if I unhide and this this is

a brand visual so when category is

hidden it is brand Visual and when brand

is hidden we can have category visual

these are two stages and I want to cover

these two stages in two buttons so I

create a hidden brand and I can add a

bookmark and what will this bookmark be

known as this bookmark will be known as

category bookmark then I unhide the

brand and hide category what this

bookmark will be known as because brand

is visible I'll add a bookmark and that

bookmark double click and rename will be

known as brand bookmark you you can have

few more versions and you can have this

so category brand now I can ship but

definitely there would be no bookmark

pain for the users so how you're going

to enable that we are going to bring

button insert buttons there are already

bookmark button which I doesn't like

there is a navigator also bookmark

Navigator so I'll add two buttons blank

button but what typically I do is I add

the first button and then I start

editing the style and then I can easily

edit it to the second button so what is

the button Style I want I want text

first of all so let me enable and let me

call this text as brand so brand is

there and then I go to the action and

inside the action I enable the action

what action I need I need a type action

is bookmark and I want to show brand so

whenever I click on this button I want

to show brand then contrl ctrol V now

this second button is going to do the

same stuff but here the action I want is

basically category and this means that

it need to be renamed so I will go to

the button text and rename it as

category so we have brand as well as

category buttons now control and click

on brand it is brand control and click

on category it is category what is

happening the AIS is switching or the

lay legent is switching now if this

would have been the bar visuals it had

been excess switching these are P

visuals Legend shifting you want to

change the visualization type one time

it is bar one time it is table one time

it is pi again bookmarks you can use so

many such use cases can be done with the

bookmarks these are very common use

cases which you can do and bookmark can

in increase the interactivity of the

page and it can create a different

impression of the page it looks like

much more professionally handled page

when you use bookmarks

so now let's learn what is calculation

groups calculation group is a power ba

feature which will allows you to apply

common calculation across multiple

measures so you don't have to create

measure for each and everything so this

is particularly useful to simplify the

measor management but the feature allows

you more than that so if you simply

combine the majors you can create a

major slicer if you use selected value

and you then create a major let's say

for MTD qtd YTD you can create time

intelligence measure by just using

selected measures and then I don't need

to create separate measures for Cog MTD

Cog YTD Cog qtd next net YTD net qtd all

those measures I don't need to create so

what we are going to do is we going to

take an example of calculation group

where we are going to create two

calculation groups one which will

provide us time intelligence using

selected major which can take a measure

which is in the visual and give the

value for that as MTD qtd YTD and the

second calculation Group which we are

going to create its item would be same

as what we have net gross cogs margin

Etc but the objective of that would be

to give you a dynamic slicer both will

give slicer that would be equivalent of

major slicer we have also seen in field

parameters so to do that you have to go

to the model view and inside the model

view very recently in the data pane on

the right hand side we have been given

this option model semantic model and

using this semantic model you can now

create calculation groups right now if

you click you don't have any calculation

group so we are going to create a

calculation group the first calculation

group to convert measures to slicer and

second calculation group for time

intelligence so click on the calculation

groups New calculation group and this

will give you a message this change will

discourage implicit measures now you

can't use implicit measures implicit

measure means when I use a quantity

column and I say it is sum okay this

kind of stuff would be discouraged from

now and that is why you might have seen

every time I'm using something I'm

creating a major this is the something

which I know at some stage I'll need

calculation group and I'm doing it we

just discussing two use cases of

calculation group but it's much more

powerful feature it can be used at

multiple places so one of the things

which we can also use is basically to

use this in small multiples to shift the

measures that is also one of the uses so

now let me create yes this will change

this will discourage implicit measure

yes let it

discourage our first calculation group

has been

created and we are directly landed onto

a calculation item okay so we can come

here we can call it as major slicer we

I renamed it now I go to the calculation

item and there is already one item which

is created with selected Imes right now

I don't want to use selected Mees what I

simply want is I would like to create

gross gross as gross one item I added

and I'm quickly going to add few more

items

now net

net one more new calculation item

so left hand side is a name right hand

side is a definition cogs

cogs three is sufficient and this will

act as a major slicer so we can use it

as a major slicer it is just the

collection of measure now we again click

on the calculation group and it there is

a button for new calculation group we

are going to use

it new calculation group

and this would be our TI okay time

intelligence calculation group so

calculation item calculation group and

name it as TI time intelligence

calculation

group and now let's go to the

calculation item and rename it as MTD

left hand side rename and right hand

side look at the calculation

calculate selected major dates

MTD date of date this is how we created

time intelligence measures in the past

also dates MTD date of

date let's close MTD let's close

calculate we got an MTD

measure in the same manner we are going

to create two more qtd and YTD in this

calculation group now I'm using selected

major so I would need a major inside my

visualization to supply to this selected

major to get MTD qtd and YTD let's

create qtd and YTD click on the

calculation items on the right hand side

you will get this new calculation option

click on that and create

more this time we will use copy paste

and couple of

changes qtd

qtd using dates

qtd let's add one more

so we got YTD we got qtd and we got MTD

so now let's go ahead and use this so

I'll go to report View and inside the

report view I'll create a new page and

first of all I'll tell you how do I

create a major slicer so I can see this

calculation group I'll bring this

calculation item to this is showing me

three names I will change this to

slicer now I will go ahead and create

create a matrix

Visual and inside the Matrix

visual what I'm going to do here is I

will bring brand on the

row brand on the row calculation group

on the

column it will not show anything because

it need at least one major I'll go to

the majors on the

top and bring in net it doesn't mean

it's going to give only net it's going

to give me all three now I can check and

uncheck or do multi select using control

and get the measures so measor slicer

this is what you have

seen and this is same thing we are able

to achieve using calculation group now

now what we are going to do here is now

let's bring in the second one TI time

intelligence one again first of all

using the time intelligence one let me

create a

slicer so we got a slicer now here what

I'm going to do is I'm going to add this

calculation group on the

row

PI right now you don't see any

difference and I'll expand it the moment

I expand it you don't see a value and we

know time intelligence we use MTD qtd

YTD so unless there is some month where

we have the data we not get it so let's

bring in a slicer for month

here so I got a slicer and here add data

on the

date

table month

year and let's go and select a month

year where we have

data I'll select

July so as you can see I got MTD value

qtd same because in the month of July

MTD and QT saved and YTD different now

if I go to June I will get different MTD

qtd YTD and for all three of them I'm

able to get it see I have not calculated

it for cogs gross and net I just

calculated it for the selected measure

and there are three selected measure

which are coming inside this

visualization and it is able to use

those in this manner we are able to

utilize calculation groups to reduce the

measures now think about cogs gross net

three into three nine Majors I needed I

actually did not create nine Majors

three Majors were already created which

I utilized inside one calculation group

and in that manner I've done it you can

do some of those calculations under

calculation group items you don't need

to do all the calculations here as

measures so this is one example now we

will use one more

example of calculation

group where I want to use the small

multiple so if I have this brand wise

net

visual me create a brand wise net

visual what would happen here is you can

usually create a small multiple using

let's say category but I want want to

have the small multiple using measures

can I have it no because measures you

can't drag a measure here and how do we

create multiple measures can I use a

field parameter here let's try out so we

go to measor slicer we put major slicer

here it takes the major slicer does

nothing now let's drag the calculation

Group which we have created the

calculation group major slicer we put it

into the small

multiple and the moment I do it you see

cogs gross and Nets three different

visuals coming in place now let me go to

the small

multiples how many rows you need I will

need three rows how many columns only

one

column each of them is on the different

different rows cogs net gross do I need

the titles yes I need the

titles but I can go to the Y

AIS and disable this shared y axis

so now the Y AIS would be able to adjust

itself so I removed the shared y- axis

so that these values can adjust inside

the each Visual

and I will remove the y-axis title now

cogs gross and net three different

measures we are able to use using small

multiples small multiples is a feature

which allows you to have multiple visual

using the categorical variables but

calculation groups allows you to convert

measures into Dimension means into

categorical variables and then you can

use it into the places where you could

have actually used only categorical

variables and one of the example is

small multiples so these are the few use

cases of calculation groups you can

experiment with more such use cases now

let's look at the feature field

parameters field parameter features

allows you for to create access slicer

as well as major slicer before May 2022

for Access slicer we used to use

bookmarks or we used to unpivot the

table and use to create slicers for

major slicers we were using independent

table and a major and then we were also

using calculation groups now because of

availability of all these options I am

not showing you how could have you

created a major Slicer in the older

fashion but let's start this journey of

field parameters with access slicer I

added a new page and in this new page P

I would like to change the access of my

visual and let me bring in one visual

using copy paste so I have this brand

visual I'm bringing it brand and net

visual is there I I'm bringing it what's

happening right now it is displaying

brand I can go to Home tab and change

the type to column showing brand can I

change it to category go here and you

know bring the visualization pan and

from there you change it to category but

this is something which you're not going

to enable for for the end users so the

how end users will make it how do we

make this visual more Dynamic so field

parameters allows you to create Dynamic

visuals By changes both A's as well as

measures how do we create field

parameters and how do we use it so let's

start with the first thing which is XIs

slicer under the modeling T we have this

new parameter previously we only used to

have numeric parameter something we have

used in top end to make it Dynamic and

there are many other use cases the

second option which came in May 2022 is

fields and this is what we call field

par parameters let's click on that so

what your variable adjust to Fields name

is access I want to create access slicer

so I'm giving a name as access now when

you drag the fields remember when you

are dragging categorical field only drag

categorical when you are dragging Majors

only drag Majors don't mix and match

that's not the purpose here brand

category subcategory and I can drag from

across Dimension state and city also I

can

drag add slicer to the page I can click

on this if you don't add then you have

to go to to the data Pane and from there

you have to add it so let me add it and

showcase you what is happening here what

this does is it creates a new table and

this table is a little bit different

type of what you have seen till now so

if you go here on the pane you will see

one table name as XIs and this table has

this kind of a code which is previously

not known to us brand name of item brand

category name of item category

subcategory name of item subcategory

state name of geography state city name

of geography City there is order which

is 0 1 2 3 4 You Can Change you can even

change the names like brand and category

subcategory names you can also we got a

slicer now if I click on this slicer

it's not going to do any change to your

visual because we have to use it so now

what we are going to do is in this

visual net by brand first of all build

my visual and here instead of brand now

I will go ahead and use access access

and the moment I do it you still see it

on brand sorting has Chang that is

another thing you might have observed

I'll tell you what to do with this

sorting now What's Happening Here is

basically now if I click on the brand it

is brand if I click on category it is

category if I click on subcategory it is

sub category if I click on state it is

state if I click on City it is City it's

changing when I leave everything then I

get this expand icon the expand icon

will allow us to now expand drill next

icon to go to the drill Next Level drill

next icon drill down icon all these

icons are available because now there

are five levels which are available so

if I expand it you will be able to see

those levels okay but if you just wanted

to keep it for the purpose of slicing

the axis you can make this as single

select if you have multi select you can

also select more than one so now this is

access slicer one of the problem with

the access slicer and for which you need

a solution so if you go and sort it on

brand let's say now it is sorted on

brand okay brand 110 but if I go to

category it's not sorted on category if

I go to City it's not sorted on City

okay a a s l it started sorting on the

major so to overcome this what you have

to do is you have to take help of a

major and this is the trick to make it

work so axis sorting is not happening

properly because axis is changing the

moment axis changes it lose the sorting

and it start sorting it on major so if I

go to category then I go to category

then I again go here and I say sort on

category so now you go to Brand it is

sorted on brand you go to category it is

sorted again on net it is losing how do

we correct it let create one major so

the new major which I'm creating now

what happens is first of all we need to

understand how do we get the selected

value because getting the selected value

of field parameter is not easy so we

will use sort AIS but in the S AIS first

of all I'll let you know the way to find

out what is selected so where underscore

cell equals to selected value X's XIs if

I use this and if I try to return this

and let's use it on the visual card

visual does it work we go here and we

try to bring it it actually doesn't work

now to overcome what we do is in instead

of AIS we use AIS sort selected value

and then what I'm going to do is Max x

filter XIs XIs do order equals to

selected value then give me AIS access

and now let me return this so now you're

getting category I'm only talking about

the case when you do single select if

you do multi select we have to do few

little different things but getting this

category is not sufficient for sorting

so what we have to do is to create a

major switch switch uncore cell so what

happens if the cell is brand you will

say Max of item brand remember item

brand is already on AIS what happen when

brand is brand I take a Max of it what

value it is going to give me brand only

that brand brand one is brand one brand

10 is brand 10 brand two is brand two

all those and in this manner I need to

add all of them so brand category

subcategories state and city for all of

them we need to add so let me quickly go

ahead and modify these

category so what I have done here is

brand I Max of item brand categories Max

of item category subcategories Max of

item subcategory State Max of geography

State I have created a major like this

now I'll tell you one trick go to this

visual go to its visualization pane

scroll down and in the tool tip go and

add this major sort AIS now when you go

to three dots it will show you one more

option to sort that is sort access click

on that okay now you go to Brand

category subcategory state city all are

descending sort if you might have

observed let's go here click on this

visualization sort it is descending

right now ascending sorted on a state

sorted on a subcategories 1 10 11 12 13

14 16 and then we go 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 this

is how it sorts category 1 2 3 4 5 brand

110 11 12 13 no if you want to change

this sort like you'll say no no this

brand doesn't see seems one we do have a

brand ID let's do that okay and

subcategory also we have ID isn't it

category our five but we can use ID now

let's try what happens if I do this so

I'm now using the numeric equivalent

measure of that one so categories 1 2 3

4 5 subcategories now you see 1 2 3 4 5

6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 brand is 1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 so what has

happened is we have not even set as sort

column here itself we are able to do

this and now this sort AIS doesn't

matter because it's going to give some

value which we are returning something

else so what's happening here is we are

able to sort it correct access sort is

it done we also talked about that it

gives the flexibility to change the

major and how do we change the major

major is still fixed it is only net not

coded major here for that we will create

another slicer using the field parameter

and that we will call as major slicer so

we will again go to modeling new

parameter fields and in the field this

time we will call it major Majors is a

reserve or major table I already used so

I'm going to call it as a major slicer

when you do that please make sure that

you are only taking measures don't try

to bring in columns which are not

summarized it's not going to work

great what happen sometime you say oh I

take the quantity column here now

quantity column is not summarized not

aggregated is going to create a problem

here that's why I'm only taking measures

here I've taken all the measures add

slicer to this page yes I want to add a

slicer click on create again a new table

would be created with the name as major

slicer and a slicer would also be added

to the

page we got a table major slicer with a

similar kind of code again if you now

want to rename some of these you can

rename into this table you can call it

net sales if you like press enter it

will become net sales but still keep on

working on that now again this is not

going to change anything unless we go

ahead and add it into the y axis we go

to this visual we bring in the pan the

build visual Pane and there we now go to

the major slicer and from major slicer

we bring in the field immediately the

things have shifted margin s taes by

City cogs cogs by City discount by City

And one of the things which you might

have observed when you were actually

using that major slicer the traditional

major slicer with disconnected table it

has a lot of problem with changing the

different type of measure now it's a

percentage measure immediately it

adjusted to the percentage exis normal

measure I go to brand category all X is

getting adjusted pretty quickly on

different kind of data types so now you

have fully flexible visual which you can

change based on the slices you want to

add two you want to you can add two or

add three you can do that or if you want

you can have all of them you can make it

as a single select you can create two of

them and have one of them online and one

of them as bars you can create combo

visuals so in this manner field

parameters allows you to create flexible

visuals and these visuals can be really

interactive where you can change the AES

as well as measures so add this

flexibility as per the need in your

powerbi reports and dashboard to get a

really Dynamic experience now let's look

at the feature drill through so drill

through is the feature which allows you

to drill from one page to another page

by passing the filters drill through

feature is also controlled for what you

can pass from one page to another page

means you have the controls and also you

have to decide on which Fields you will

allow drill through so let's go to one

of the page here and let me copy this

visual to start

with on this the page one let me call it

as main M1 and let me create another

page where I have the visual I'll again

go back to this particular one and I'll

bring in D1 which is detailed one this

visual now this visual I copy paste the

category wise net visual is there I'm

copy pasting this Visual and converting

it into table Visual and in this visual

I will also add

brand okay so when we drill from the

first visual we will be able to know

what brand we have filtered also let me

select both these visuals and create a

page D2 and also paste these visuals and

in this D2

page let me have three

visuals and in this visual I'm going to

add one more stuff let me add State

here so when I go to the first page let

me add a bar visual here

also on the first page category separate

bar is if I right click on any of the

visual you don't see any option for

drill

through if I click here I also don't see

any option okay now go to the D1 page

and inside D1 page at the page level

go to the page information and Page type

you can use drill through the moment you

enable the drill through now this is the

newer version of power Behavior it

happens like this if you are on a little

bit older version actually under the

visualization pan itself you will get

drill through option you can use that

now how you want to drill through I say

okay only I want to drill through from

Brand so whenever there is a brand

available I want to drill through so I

go to item and I pick up brand I can

pick up category or whatever I want now

how does it going to make a difference

if I go to page M1 or any of the pages

for the sake wherever I have brand if I

right click I will now see option drill

through D1 but if I go to the category I

still don't see now as of now you can't

restrict this feature mean once you

enable you can't say it's enabled for

this page and that page so now what

happens is you are in any of the page

let's say whenever you have brand and

this happens for single value because

what ideally you can do with the control

you can select two values and then you

can right click then you don't see it

with the control and click we can select

more than one value if you have only one

value selected like brand 13 is selected

and you say drill through D1 the values

get filtered and you can see only brand

13 here you can see the categories

related to Brand 1 if you further right

click here though there is a brand we

can't further drill from category which

we can't drill okay when you drill

through you will automatically get this

button back button on the page where you

have drill through and you can click on

this control click on the desktop stop

click on the powerbi service you can

come back once you come back you can go

to another brand and again you say drill

through and D1 that will get filtered

and again come back so we are able to

drill through now from D1 to D2 I again

further want it to drill on the D2 I

click on the empty space on my

page I go and make it s Del through and

this time what I want here basically is

let people drill from category Whenever

there is a category in the visual people

can drill

so what would happen from M1 now from

this visual I can drill through to D2

now here in the drill one I only get D1

I go to D1 now in D1 all both the

visuals have category so either from

here I can drill through now here it is

not showing me brand 8 but brand 8 is

there and if I go to D2 now brand 8 do

got filtered out so brand 8 is also

filtered it means anything which is

filtered by some mean will carry on that

filter to the subsequent page of the

drill through now let's go back here and

we can further go back on the first page

I'll go to D2 now from where these

filters

are you go to the filter pane you will

start seeing these filters on this page

you can remove these filters if you want

so these are the Dr through filter which

are now sometime you don't want to pass

everything so now what I want is when

I'm coming to this page I don't want to

pass the brand filter then how can I do

that so you disable this keep all

filters now before everything getting

passed whether the brand was there on

the drill through list or not everything

whether it was available in the list or

not it was getting passed the moment you

switch off this PE all filters now only

you can drill through using category and

category will only pass all other values

will not pass so you have to add

everything you want to pass you want to

pass City you have to add it you want to

pass State you have to add it you want

to pass brand even you have to add it

now how different it is now let's go to

D1 and here we say brand it and Category

2 now right click here drill through

D2 what happens here only category 2 has

been drilled through there is no drill

of brand8 in this manner you can control

what you want to drill through also so

you can do multi-level drill you can

control what you want to drill through

drill through feature helps you for

creating Pages which can take

information from other page there is

something known as drill through button

also so you can go and insert a

button you can name it go to button

style in the text you can name it as

let's say drill now when you go down in

the action you can use action to drill

through and important thing to note not

only you can select a page let's say I

can select a page you can have FX

function what does this FX function does

it depending on a condition you can

change a page what does that mean so let

first test this button and then let me

tell you how to use that conditional one

so click on one of them you will get

this button enabled if you control click

to it is disabled only one of them then

control click on the button on desktop

and click on the powerbi service will

take you to the drill page so we said

okay go to page D1 what I want is for

some of them I want to go to D1 and some

of them I want to go to D2 can I do that

yes I should be able to do

that now if I right now go there is a

restriction D1 and D2 on the brand and

category okay so now let me go ahead and

do one thing let me create a

major so I go ahead and create a major

and in this one what I'll do is

let's use it like this if is

filtered item

brand then we go to

D1 as we go to

D2 so if item brand is filtered then I

go to D1 else I go to D2 if it is

filtered or not we want to check that

let's let me call this major as drill

page let me go to the button

and in the drill

FX I'll call the drill page

button I'm saying I'm going to decide

the

page so text is going to show us D1 or

D2 and in the action

also in the action I'm again going to

choose a page drill page D1 and

D2 so I click on the brand the brand I

filter on brand single brand is filtered

now brand is filtered if I click control

click I go to D1 press the back button

come back I click on category it is D2

control

click this time I went to D2 so I

checked if it is filtered then I go to

one page if it is not filtered I go to

another

page okay come back now the first time

it is showing D2 because we what we have

said in our major drill major is

that if it is not filter show2 we can

further improve upon this one you can

say

switch

true is filtered item Rand then

D1 is filtered comma is filtered item

category

D2

else

select value you say display select

value now it is saying select value let

make it a little bit bigger so what we

have done here is in the text next we

have used the same mejor so which is

giving the message and in the action

also we have used the same one right now

there is no action anyway it is disabled

now I when I click it got enabled and I

can go to

D2 come back so in this manner you can

use Dynamic drill through button you can

control the text of the button you can

also control where it should land you in

this manner you will be able to use

drill through and you will also be able

to control Pages where it goes and the

values it pass now let's discuss tool

tip page or report tool tip page so what

happens typically whenever you go to any

visualization let me go to a page where

I already have some visualization you

get this default tool if I go here I

also get a default tool you can add few

measures here but sometime what happens

is you want more interactive kind of

stuff what I want is basically this

category Pi should be shown when on the

tool tip of this BR how do I do that so

for that what you need is basically a

tool tip page so add a new p page click

on the empty space and in that one you

can go and Define a page as tool tip

page when you define a tool tip Page by

default it takes the tool tip page size

and it you get a small page so if you go

to the canvas setting you will see it's

a tool tie page you can change the size

if required as of now I'll keep of the

same size what we can do is we can add a

visual here so I can add let's say Pi

visual we give the complete space you

can add whatever kind of visual you want

now in this visual let me add few items

so build a visual enable build a visual

so I'll go to Legend add item

category and then I'll go to values

major base net okay we can do some font

adjustment and all those as per

requirement so we have little bit

smaller or something or I can go ahead

and on this Visual and I can say I don't

need a title I can go to Legend and text

size and I can reduce the text size okay

and similarly I can go to detail labels

and values and I can reduce the size

okay because on tool tip we will be

having a smaller one so we can reduce

that so we able to adjust this visual

now if I go to a page let say I go back

to that first page in this page how do I

bring that tool tip page our tool tip

page was enabled so click on this Visual

and when you get to the format go to the

properties tool tip should have been

enabled so enable the tool tip and here

by default it is report page and auto

here now you can select a tool tip page

once you select a tool tip page on this

particular visual you will be able to

see that and look this is changing based

on the information okay now if you go

here there is no change if you go here

there's no change because we are not use

the tool tip page there now we have used

tool tip page here so it will give me

tool tip now let's go to another page I

go to a page where in this visual I have

both brand and category let me clear

this off so now what happens in this

page let me on this table visual I'll

add tool tip I'll switch it on page page

one is a tool tip page now it will only

give category because the visual is on

category and the category is in the

visual it will pass that I don't want to

pass category one thing I'll do is first

of all let me call it as tp1 tool tip 1

so I rename it I go to this page and I

want to do certain changes so very

carefully I need to click on the page

properties the canva property and here I

have option keep all filters I uncheck

this now what should get pass to this

page all things which you want to pass I

don't want to pass category here I can

give all other things which it should

pass so I can give a brand here I can

even give a city and state whatever I

want to pass so State Should pass City

should pass all the things which I want

on this page to pass I can give here so

these things will pass to this page now

if I go to this D1 page and I click here

you will see multiple categories the

brand is getting pass but the category

is not getting passed very good now

let's test it on other things I go to

this interaction page I do have this

page where I have cities I go to the

properties I go to report page and I

enable tp1 for this and you can see with

the cities the categories are changing

it means the cities the are getting

passed it's getting passed and brand is

getting passed but category is not

getting passed in this manner you can

create a tool tip page now while adding

the tool tip page you should be really

careful the moment you go on the

something it will start showing this

tool tip so sometime the user go and

want to read a value it will create a

hindrance so very carefully add tool tip

page because it suddenly pops up a big

value and user may not be able to pay

attention to the detail when the mouse

is moving so as per the need add it on

the required visuals let's quickly have

a look at the AI visuals so I'll add a

new page and inside that new page I will

add the first AI visual which I want to

discuss with this Q influencer now in

the key influencer I need analyze and

then I need to explain it by something

things so so in the ly let me add

brand and in the explain by let me add a

major margin

percentage it goes ahead and analyze and

the filter is there on the brand one

right now so margin percentage goes up

by 0 2% the likelihood brand being brand

one increase by this is the likelihood

the brand one going inre you can change

it to let's say brand 10 and it's going

to generate the ideas for that same way

you can also add discount percentage

here

net and it will keep on generating the

key influencers for those this is one of

the AI visuals now the next AI visual is

decomposition tree now decomposition

tree expands you to do the root cause

kind of analysis and here what you can

do in the analyze by let's add a few

things in the analyze by let me add

major I would like to add let's say net

sales and then in the explain by let me

add item brand category subcategory

geography City now here what I can do is

I can go to this plus button and I can

say you know I want to see the high

values or the low values or I just

wanted to see Next Step by let's say

category it shows me how my category

division is there then I want to say

okay how my categories are doing like

say by high

values okay I get the subcategories the

next level in the next one I can say

okay what is the low values of the brand

inside that one the these are the low

values of the brand in this one so in

this manner you can go ahead and you

know keep on expanding and find out more

details so let's try this let me

duplicate this page remove this let me

try to use M percentage measure here so

I'm going to create M percentage measure

here I'm going to Simply use M

percentage which is nothing but divide

MTD net minus lmtd comma denom minator

which is again

lmtd we make it as a percentage column

let me use this measure here now

definitely M need a month filter it

can't work without that because I don't

have data in the last available month so

I'll put a filter for the month here

here let's use December so now the

change percentage are coming so category

so we are having negative here so we now

would like to analyze with this negative

how this is performing where it is there

again we see it's doing

good let me remove these levels me

remove this so Category 3 is doing

negative let me go to the low values of

Category 3 where I'm losing so I'm

losing in these this is a 100% I'm

losing okay so let me go ahead and check

the category one remove the this one let

me see in category one where I'm losing

very small what are the low values uh

here I'm losing

93% so what I'm losing

here okay so these are the brand where

I'm losing so in this brand what are the

subcategories where I'm what I have so

only one subcategory now we know M we

are not doing good so what is that

causing this m not doing good so you can

do a root cause analysis using this

visualization next visual which I want

to explain is Q&A visual really

interesting visual it creates questions

for you and you can ask so I can and it

is already suggested one of the things

which I wanted to create top customers

by net I say okay give me top customers

by net sales it has given me top 10

customers by net sales and the good

thing which you can do with this visual

is not only you can ask the questions

you can actually go ahead and convert

this into a regular visual so here you

have a sign here turn this into a

standard visual it creates a visual for

me I add another one and I'll ask

another question or top five Brands by

margin percent top five Brands by margin

person and we got it we can convert this

into a visual there are few settings

here person SN names review question

teach Q&A and suggest you can go and

Define additional synonymes like net I

wanted to call sales I would definitely

go ahead and somewhere mentioned that

net is nothing but sales whenever I use

sales use net so here if I go down you

can see it's already the net is

basically sales so sales is used for net

already it's no name if not I can add it

so in this manner you can modify the

setup for Q&A and can make it more

effective and you can leave it for your

end users to ask questions and get the

answers other than that there are a

couple of interesting visuals like Power

app in case you are using power app you

will be able to embed and you will be

able to write back you will be able to

start a power automate flow using the

power automate for that you need to have

power automate you can also embed page

native report inside your powerbi

desktop report or powerbi report and

also publish it and then you will have

the page inated report also part of this

so these are the various kind of

visualization other than the normal

visualization which are aailable which

you can use you want to use a custom

visual you can click on the get more

visual make sure you are signed in and

your organization has allowed that and

one of the very common custom visual

which I use is the text filter again it

is from Microsoft Corporation and let's

add it now the good thing with this

visual is the text visual is that this

visual you can search let me add to it

so basically I don't need to go and say

New York I can search new it's filtered

now what all cities have come let me

showcase you using another visual where

I create a table visual so these are the

three cities which I got or where I use

or all these cities I use or so this is

the way you can use text there are other

few visuals and one of the interesting

visual which you can also try out is

basically play access Visual so play

access Visual is another good one which

you can try out let me add this this is

by some third party not from Microsoft

but what you can do is you can put this

play access Visual I can put month year

on

this and in this visual I would also

like to have a visual level filter that

whatever month year I want I only want

those month here where net is not blank

only those months and what I'm going to

do here is I'm going to create a visual

on which I will use margin

percentage on brands or I can use

cities so my Brand's margin percentage

will keep on moving in a direction let's

see let me play this how does it behave

and the reason for this behavior is

right now the interaction is highlight

and let me change this interaction I

click on the visual and I go to format

edit interaction and I change it to

filter one more thing I do is I go to

the column and under the FX I go and

write down a rule the margin which is

basically from minus one number to zero

as a number it should be red plus

greater than

zero number to one as a number should be

green it will give you a little bit more

variety right now everything is green

now let's play

around every month is showing the brand

how they're behaving and you can start

seeing the negative values now so how

each brand is changing now you can see

that so in this manner you can use the

AI visuals and custom visual as per your

requirement let's learn about the card

visual so let me go to a new page and in

this this page I will add this new card

visual now this new card visual came

very recently in 2023 it has feature of

card visual along with some Advanced

feature like you can add images you can

have multiple Majors inside the card

visual so let me make it little bit

bigger and I will start adding content

to it so let me add net gross discount

and calls on that so I can add these

different kind of measures here so this

is one simple way now it has lots of

formatting properties let me click on

the format and inside that size and

style is common title is if you want to

add a title you can add as usual we have

seen we have title and then we have

subtitle then we have divider I don't

think we require a title unless we want

to give it I don't want to give some

Title Here let me disable that shape yes

the it is rectangular shape I like

rounded rectangular shape so I'll do

that but yes I can change the rounding

or I can use some custom style custom

style means I need to decide what I want

for each and every corner I don't want

to do that but I just want to decrease

it so I will decrease the rounded then

comes the layout what kind of layout you

need single row multi row grid and

sometime you might not want single rows

so you can have a grid and once you give

grid it can ask you how many rows and

columns I need I can let's say two rows

and two columns just right now for the

testing purpose let's do that then the

next is go to call out values inside the

call out values if you switch it off you

will stop seeing the values so and on

which series you want to take a decision

you can take a decision of font color

the conditional formatting all those

decisions can be taken on based on the

values you can want to align them

centrally right align left align display

unit Auto or none you want to display

completely then you can say none then

decimal places I can set up to zero I

don't want any decimal places if there

is no value then what should I show na

or blank I can do that then comes the

label which is on I can switch off the

label and I will not see any names there

right now I'm seeing the names so this

one name I want to make these name

Bolder I can do that I can want to do

conditional formatting on the name I can

do I want them above or below so the

names could be below like this it was

above previously I likeed this one if

they are bigger you can use text strap

and align Baseline if you want to align

to the Baseline on and off then comes

the reference label reference label for

what net for cogs or what let's try to

add a reference label for net we have

lot of reference label so we have MTD

net lmtd net let me add net MTD net so

first of all let me add a slicer here on

the page for month here let me select a

particular month now I have certain set

of values now let me go ahead and add

some reference labels so for net I

wanted to add a reference label let me

try to add MTD major and as you can see

I'm able to see the MTD I can enable the

title so that I see the MTD value now I

can also enable details details will

give me one more major I can have here

let me add m m measure I can add here in

the details now to add this measure what

you have to do basically is here when

you have added this MTD you have to go

ahead and select this MTD and then when

you come down you will be able to add a

major a without that you can't add

unless you selected now this value is

something which is you know you might

not be able to format it here so what I

need to do is I need to create a

formatted major for this one so I'll go

and create a new major I'll call it m

icon and let me first do without icon so

format M percentage comma hash do 0% I

want that and let me use M icon now here

if you want to use M then you can go and

use the display basically none so now

let me replace this with M icon so I'm

able to see the percentage change here

and or I can change it to percent so it

is showing the percentage I was using

the one decimal place so it was showing

that much so this is now 9% now in case

you need some icon so then what we can

do is we can use certain uni a

characters let me bring in a uni a

character for you and modify this mejor

I had a previous code which I want to

bring it here I want to append icon so

so I'll use M perent to string now

there's a change percentage for which I

have identified few uni a I'm going to

use this m percentage there so if it is

greater than zero I'm using a particular

kind of uni if it is less than zero I'm

using a particular kind of enar so let

me see what happens now I'll commit this

UniCare gives us small small icons which

we can use it's giving me these kind of

icons now I want to change the color

also isn't it based on my M chain

percentage I can go to the font color

and I can click on FX and I'll use the

rule based color I'll use M percentage

if M percentage is less than minimum to

less than zero it's red plus M

percentage is greater than Zer or equal

to Zer and less than Max we can write

down Max here then I want to show it a

green here and let's click on okay it's

red because it's coming negative I can

change few months and check it out here

it is positive negative so you can see

and similar manner I can add a few more

additional details here to make it

little bit more attractive one thing

which I observed if your reference

labels are giving blank value the

properties might go away seems like uh

there is a null value handling issue now

let's go further down you have option

for background on or off so if you don't

need the background color you can do it

and then there are certain properties

which may be applicable at the all level

so if you select all the labels and you

come down then you have few properties

which you can basically it's always on

that but you can use the transparency

stylish solid width is 1 pixel ignore

padding all those things you can you can

change then background you can change

the background color you don't want the

gray color you can have some other color

now one more thing you can do is you can

add images now again images are

individual to the major so for

particular major you can have add a

image you can browse the image and can

add it or you can go ahead and add a

image from the URL so let me add a image

from the desktop

I have some images let me just take one

of these image nothing represent new but

let's take one of them this is a real

big image so fit we can decide let's say

use a fit or we'll use a fill and then

we can go and decide the

size I use 150 pixel side but it's

reducing my font and giving the problem

so let me use 100 100 pixel is perfectly

suitable so same way for others I can

also give icons so this new card visual

offers you lot of flexibility lot of

options which you can use and make it

really engaging and using this you can

add lot of value to your visualization

and powerbi is continuously improving on

these kind of visualization whether it

is new card visual or new slicer so you

can go ahead and try these out inside

your Microsoft powerbi report pages and

create really give a new level of look

and fee to your

pages new card visual was released

sometime back and in November 2024 small

multiples for new card visual has been

released these features allow you to

have small multiples for the new card

visual this feature is in preview as of

now and let's look at the details of

this

feature so let's have a quick look at

what we plan to discuss in this video

first of all we will go ahead and look

at the release notes of November 2024 to

understand what is small multiples for

new card visual then we will go ahead

onto the power ba dtop and we will

enable the new card visual under options

and setting and options then we will

explore small multiples on the new car

Visual and finally we will play around

with various settings available for the

new card visual small multiples

so let me jump onto the release notes of

November

2024 so I am here on the November 2024

powerbi feature summary and in this

feature summary when you scroll little

bit down you will find the feature which

is small multiple for new card visual

review Once you click on that you will

find the details about that with this

month's update we are announcing the

card visual with a new version that

retains all the familiar features and

update while adding the advanced

functionality and improved user

experience with all multiple this

feature is currently preview and the new

card visual offering is an excellent

opportunity to experience the

capabilities of the feature small

multiples are a series of similar card

ties displayed together in Grid format

each representing a category or

dimension of data allowing for

easyr comparison and analyzing multiple

feeds you will be able to use the small

multiples means the cards will Repeat

based on categorical variable which you

will to provide the newly feature in has

the data organization visual Clarity and

performance making it easier analyze and

present data fact to try it navigate to

options and setting options preview

features new card visual and make sure

it is enabled that is something which we

have enabled in the past and the car

visual has arrived if you are not using

the new car visual you have to enable

that another advantage of new small

multiples feature is extensive

customization it offers including small

multiple layout and choose from single

column single row or grid and customize

the number of small multiple r or column

displayed Advanced formatting option

featur such as font styes color coding

and traditional format borders and grid

lines the enable individual controls for

border and grid lines permits the

customization of style fit and

transparency overflow style options

include continuous scrw or pagination to

smoothly navigate through the multiple

card without overwhelming the visual

space headers toose from the horizontal

or vertical orientation top or left

position customizable alignment F color

transparency padding plus background

color and image these are the few of the

features which we going to explore into

the powerbi so this is the summary of

the notes now time has come that we jump

onto the powerbi

desktop on the power ba desktop first of

all let me showcase you my schema under

the data model view it contains my usual

sales model which contain a central

sales f

joined with item Dimension customer

Dimension geography Dimension and dat

table all the joins are one too many and

mostly single directional me go back to

the report View and add a page to start

today's demo but before I start today's

demo I would like to tell you the

setting to enable the new card visual in

case you have not enabled it previously

ly file options and setting

options and in the options under the

preview features inside the preview

feature I have already enabled new card

visual in case you are doing it for very

first time it was uncheck press on okay

and continue in my case I can press on

cancel and continue when you press okay

you might have to close and open your

file again in case it is asking for that

back onto the power VA page and let's

call this new page as C

is on this page I'm going to add a new

card visual so first of all I'll open

the build visual P from my right hand

side where I have see all the panes and

from here I'm going to add a new card

visual or in this card visual I can add

multiple measures but I want to add one

measure to start with I have added the

one major and as you can see the net

value is displayed on the new card

visual I will go ahead and add brand

onto the small multiples and you can see

option of small multiple has also been

provided into the new car visual as I

add that you observe that my new car

visual is showing brand but because of

the space limitation it's not showing it

properly time has come to provide this V

visual more

space make it little bigger now you're

able to see the brand and the net it's

only showing the three rows as of now

and we are going to adjust it using the

new format properties which we have got

for small multiples let's click on the

format and you have got two properties

here small multiples layout and a small

multiples header first of all let's look

at the layout so single column layout

let right right now we can continue with

that and we use five multiple for

displaying the multiples when the reason

I'm not showing 10 because I would like

to show you the scrolling as well as the

vertical headers here it's single column

I could have gone for single row which

will look like something like this I

need to do width adjustment in that case

and I can make it a little smaller if I

want like that that's the G or I could

have made it as a grid once I made it a

grid so the values like this brand one

brand 10 Brand 11 brand 12 brand 13 I

can choose the layouts like how many

rows and columns I

want I can make it a 4x4 matrix by

choosing four rows and four

columns now depending on the values and

the font size you can make it little

different so let's go back to the single

column layout keep it five we have the

borders you can see I can add the

additional bord if I add the Border I

can change the color or I can change the

width Etc if I add the Border I can CH

the width and if I start changing the

WID we'll be able to see the B grid

lines in case you want grid lines go use

grid lights pay attention

here you don't use gr grid lines what

happens overflow AG inated

orous scrw so let me change it to

continuous scrw now you can see on and

if I make it paginated you see small

icon here and then scroll down and you

can scroll up using the pagination

pagination could be vertical and

horizontal that what you can do the

background in case you want to change

the background I'm not interested in

changing the background as of now and

the shape shape could be a little bit

rounded Corners here you can observe the

rounded Corners now it is column wise

with single measure so I can reduce the

width Cas we add more measure we have to

increase the width according to that so

these are the properties which I have

inside the small multiples and the

various stuff which I can change out I

can make the single column single row or

grid layout and I can play around with

when I go to the small multiple headers

I have you know whether I want the this

for one series or for all the series as

of now I wanted to do the changes for

all the serieses so let's me go ahead

and change the orientation to orient

ation to vertical and this is something

you were asking for long now that we

need to display it vertically you have

option in the small multiple header for

the

orientation position is left or top

right now it is left and I when I make

it top you will stop seeing the data and

this top position will for suited if you

go to let's say the single Row the top

position is more suitable for the single

row rather than the single column option

depending on the requirement we can play

around with the single row single column

as well as left and top it is just

basically based on the need what suits

most for your

requirement it doesn't look so good so

let's change it back to the five and

let's go down and make it from the top

to left there are scenarios where single

row will look better than the single

column when you have lot of values it

may be little better to have the single

row along with the left this is giving a

different look and feel and if you want

you can continue with that but let me

make it little smaller we'll go down and

change the position to the top now for

the top display I have to again do

little bit of visual size adjustment

vertical orientation let me change the

number of small multiple from 5 to 8 is

not the most suitable UI for what I'm

displaying right now but I just wanted

to Showcase you the properties let me

play around little bit and go back to

the single column View and back on the

single column left

layout now on the headers what we can

also do is do the change of the color so

background is on off I can have a

background color and the background

color a little lighter color I can

choose a background color or I can

choose a background

image one can play around with the call

out value enable and disable that to

disable the values also we can play

around with the label if you have only

one major you might not want to display

the label but yes if uh I have more than

one value if I add other major which is

gross along with net

now in such case I would definitely like

to have a label I'm having gross and net

now so I need to go ahead and change the

layout position to single Row in this

case now this is the layout position of

the card you have a multiple card visual

this is not the layout position of small

multiple this is only layout which we

get with the card Visual and we can

change it when we use more than one

measure to display it correctly can

choose between the style card and table

and when I choose card you will see the

small differences of individual card

display in

this you can try out the various

properties and the option which has been

provided with this small multiple option

of new car visual powerbi is putting lot

of effort these days to enhance your

visual experience so keep a eye on every

month's update what powerbi has stored

for you in the future why don't you go

ahead and try this

out now time has come that we understand

what is power query so power query you

can say is one of the PowerHouse in

Microsoft powerbi power query is the

data transformation and data preparation

engine so basically when you talk about

you know how do I manipulate the data

how I do I going to make it into shape

we talk about that you know in power ba

we need to have a star

schema then if it is not in a star

schema how do we transform and put it

into a star sign if our data is not

clean how we are going to make it clean

and going to put it into a format where

powerb can understand it easily or the

Dax engine can work better so that is

where the role of power query comes in

everything which you are bringing in

into the powerbi is typically coming in

via the power query layer so we have the

power query layer post that the what

transform data we got from the power

query layer that comes to the models on

those models we create relationship

create Dex measures and then create

visualizations power query comes with a

graphical interface for getting data

from the sources and a power query

editor for applying the transformation

so you will see that you know it has a

UI interface basically which is going to

help you to do various operations so

those operations are pretty easy but for

everything what you are seeing there

there is a basically code behind that

which you can open into the advanced

editor and can check it out because the

engine is available in many products and

services the destination where the data

will be stored depends on where the

power query was used basically power

query is not only use in powerbi in case

of Microsoft fabric we have data flow

Gen 2 in case of Azor we have Azor data

flow there is a data flow in the powerbi

service also so there are different

places where you know you can have a

destination like Microsoft fabric power

data flow Gen 2 which is also using

power query to provide a destination

option to you using power query you can

perform the EXT transform and load ETL

process for data so basically in powerbi

if you wanted to do ETL it's natively

power VI ETL then you have to use power

query so let's talk a little bit about

power query experience the power query

user experience is provided through

Power query editor user interface the

goal of it this interface is to help you

apply transformation you need simply by

interacting with the user friendly set

of ribbons menus buttons and other

interactive components so you have set

of menus like home transform data custom

column Etc using that you can do tons of

operations all these operations are

pretty intuitive they have been given a

name by which you can understand them

and there are step which perform quite a

few complex operations like when you go

to pyot data or unpivot data they are

performing real complex operations but

for you it's just one click power query

experience you will get it two Place

definitely one is you are getting in

powerbi desktop another one you are

getting powerb online so powerb online

you will found the integration such as

powerb data flows Microsoft fabric data

flow Gen 2 Microsoft Power Platform data

flows AZ data factory rangling data

flows and many more that provides the

experience through the online web pages

these are online experiences and as you

know your favorite power query for

desktop found integration such as power

query for Excel and powerb desktop so

both in Excel and powerb desktop we do

have the power query

experience what power query use

internally so power query use a language

which is known as M language which is

basically for the transformation so the

power query engine uses scripting

language behind the scenes for all power

query transformation the power query

formula language it's known as m m

language is data transformation language

of power query and anything that happens

in the query is ultimately written in m

so basically if you're doing a operation

pyot Operation so there is some function

of M which is getting execute and then

you getting that so what will happen

when you open the Advan editor you will

be able to find out the code so right

now at this stage we'll not discuss is

what is inside this Advanced editor as

you become the advanced power VI

developer you will be able to see that

code inside that one and in our beginner

series we have discussed quite a few

functions all the power query functions

which you can use has been discussed in

the beginner series all the table

function the list function all these has

been discussed in detail there so please

go ahead and also watch that series

means once you are a little bit

comfortable with this one there are

quite a few videos in the beginner

series which you will be able to watch

so let's move ahead if you want to do

Advanced transformation using power

query engine you can use Advanced Editor

to access the script of the power query

and modify it as you want as I said you

know Advanced editor is there and we do

manually write down the script if needed

you can modify the script as per our

requirement is all we can do it it is

not only the graphical user interface

which is going to do everything for us

if user interface function and the

transformation won't perform the exact

changes you need use the advanced editor

or the M language to fine-tune your

functions and transformation we can go

ahead and you know change these things

and sometime we solve the complex

problem at that time we realize okay

it's really difficult if I simply try to

combine some steps so we go ahead and

you know write down manually the power

query code and so now what we are going

to do we going to go ahead ahead and

look at basic operations of power VI

which you must know as a beginner and

then from there you can pick up and can

do more and more complex transformation

you can combine transformation and solve

some problems you can go ahead and write

down you know nested functions of M

language and you know create your own

Solutions around it let's understand

data transformation and which is also

known as power query so what happens is

when we start data loading especially in

the import mode in the powerbi the data

when it get imported the first place

where it LS it is into the data

transformation mode but what happens is

most of the time we just simply load the

data so we are not aware that the data

was actually passed through the power

query layer or the data transformation

layer power query transformation or the

transform data layer is really strong

and we can do a lot to improve the

quality of the data it is kind of a ETL

data quality improvement data

transformation engine so let's begin by

using the power query typical way to

reach power query is transform data so

when you do this you will reach power

query layer but when you load a new data

also you can instead of loading the data

you can use transform data and in that

manner you can also reach to power query

and we will use the same method for this

part of the video what we are going to

do is we are going to use this file pyot

data. XLS which is again available on my

GitHub account and you'll get a link

right click on the raw copy link and go

to Power query click on get

data web

give the URL click on

okay you got a popup there are quite a

few things which are available in this

file and what I'm going to do is I will

take most of these things and instead of

load now I will use transform data

transform data will take me to the power

query module and power query module

which can be used to transform data also

sometime when you have huge amount of

data you don't want to load it directly

you can come to this module and reduce

it the data not in final shape just like

the data we have loaded right now you

can come to this place transform it and

then start loading it you have option

here for close and apply which you can

use once you done with the

transformation apply stay here and

continue close and apply means close and

the changes would be apply and you can

go ahead and analyze that various tabs

and the most important tabs which you're

going to use for the transformation is

Home tab the tons of transformation

available here then the transform tab

this include lot of transformation add

columns not only you can add The Columns

but other than that there are

transformation which can be done while

adding the column you can do that then

inside the view you have the column

quality column distribution column

profile if you are now looking at the

data you might be seeing that you know

it is showing the column distribution

right now distribution means how many

distinct value you have and how many

unique value you have might ask what is

the difference between distinct and

unique distinct means how many distinct

value I have like a b c d nine values I

have distinct values then what's the

difference between distinct and unique

the dis distinct value which are non-

repetitive if you look at the second

column it is saying there are only two

values which are basically non

repetitive so if you see 78 it is

actually repeating okay if you look at

56 it is actually repeating so one of

the value distinct value is 56 but it is

repeating if you look at 90 it is one of

the values which is disting but

repeating 80 and 45 are the values which

are the distinct which will become part

of the distinct values but they are not

repeating so that's how unique and

distinct are different then you can also

add column quality column qualities give

you valid error and empty so the data

which I have is empty but if you have a

data like this one you have the empty

rows 25% of rows are empty for this

particular column then then comes the

column profile now column profiling is

pretty strong it provides you a lot of

information like count error empty

distinct unique empty string min max and

if you have a number column let's go to

a table where you have a number column

also so here in this one we a number

column so in the case of number column

it will also give you min max average

standard deviation odd even so so many

things it will tell you so if you want

to know more about your data then you

can use column profiling column quality

and column distribution Under The View

tab now you learned about these column

profiling column distribution let's also

pay attention to the panes on the left

hand side we have pain where all the

queries has been given on the right hand

side all the steps have been given

whatever you are doing here here every

step is getting captured other than this

observation of profile so how this data

came in what was the source the Excel

kind of a source we had then how the

navigation has happened you selected a

sheet fail sheet then promoted the

headers the headers have been promote

change type type has changed now any

transformation you do any column you add

other than the rename queries everything

is getting tracked and what would happen

all these steps you can look what was

previous stage what is the current stage

and these can be reverted middle steps

can also be deleted provided the next

two step can adjust to each other

otherwise it they will give error so

everything what you're doing is

trackable here unlike Dex where you

create a formula you know the formula

but you don't know whether you created a

formula a before or formula B before you

don't know but here anything you do you

do rename you do transformation like we

are going to do pivot data unpivot data

merg data append data everything will

get tracked here so it is not process

where you are not aware of the steps

every step will be captured and will be

shown to you now let's look at this data

the pyot data is it in the final shape

and ready to be analyzed no it is not

the data is basically pivoted in the

Excel somebody has moved the subjects on

the columns and this is a pivoted data

and to make this data more suitable for

analysis we have to unpivot it so we

have to go to transform data and there

we have option for for unpivot unpivot

columns unpivot other columns means

other than what you have selected like

right now I can do unpivot other columns

I selected name I can unpivot other

columns unpivot selected column unpivot

columns First Step can decide whether it

need to do other two unpivot selected

columns whatever I select let's say if I

select from here to here math to English

then I will have to go and say unpivot

selected columns when do I use other

columns or when do I use selected column

what happens if you have something known

as month on the top it is possible that

number of months are going to increase

so you will get more months in the

columns in such cases select the name

kind of the column or the fixed

categorical column and use unpivot other

columns now you may come back and say no

no no the column which need to unpivot

remain same but the attributes may

increase so with the name I can get age

tomorrow I can get some other property

the subjects are going to remain

consistent in such case we will use

unpivot only selected column so here

we'll click on the name and use unpivot

other column once I unpivot it it is

going to give me attribute and value

column and these attribute and the value

columns are the one which has made my

data now more suitable for analysis what

I can do here is basically in the last

step of unpivot other columns I can go

ahead and change the name to subject and

marks but don't do this in all the power

query steps unless you understand that

you can change them

let's have a look at this data is there

something wrong with this data now this

data you can work with but there's

something wrong actually the majors

which I have they should be the columns

but they are on the rows so sales and

the margin both editable this is margin

number not percentage they're actually

in the rows instead of column and that's

the problem with this data so basically

this data is something which is already

unpotted and I want to pyot it and to

correct this data what I'm going to do

is I'm going to select m and value I'll

go to transform and I'll use this pivot

data option I click on the pivot data it

will ask what is the value column which

is the column you want to Aggregate and

then what is the kind of aggregation now

here I have one value which is doubled

up so if you don't have any value which

is doubling up you can use don't

aggregate but there is one value which

is doubled up and that's why I wanted to

First select don't agregate and want it

to show you that is going to show me an

error for that so if I use don't

aggregate it will going to show me error

because there are two values for this

particular combination so it says this

it's getting a list so what I'm going to

do here is I can go to the gear icon

here at the last there is a gear icon I

can click on that I can go to the

Advance option and instead of don't

aggregate I can use some or you can

delete this step and edit again let me

do the sum and now I'm getting the

correct pivoted table the data was UN

pivoted from The Source I pivoted it I

can use now close and apply to use this

data but we'll continue to do more

transformation

what's wrong with this data quite a few

things the header is not placed

correctly there are full blank rows and

sometime what happen you are bringing in

Excel data you may get full empty rows

at the end somebody might have traveled

through that Excel sheet created those

empty rows so how do we remove those

completely empty rows the problem

doesn't end here in this data I see

complete duplicate rows the rows are

completely duplicated so I want to

remove by data doesn't have complete

duplicate rows that's kind of data I

want it to have and these are few

transformation which I need so let's

start doing these transformation so

First Transformation I want to do is I

want to make the first row as the header

under the Home tab we option use first

row as header let's do this

transformation promoted headers

transformation has been done along with

the change type now the second

transformation which I need want to

remove the blank rows so under the Home

tab we have remove rows and keep rows

this time we are going to use remove

rows under the remove rows you have

removed top row remove bottom rows you

can give the number of rows you want to

remove sometime what happens you have a

report where some additional stuff is

there and then you are using that you

might have additional R than the top

there is a report where bottom something

is written you don't want so remove the

top and the bottom rows remove alternate

rows remove duplicates which is the next

step you want to do remove blank rows

the step which you want to do right now

and remove errors if there are some

error rows let's remove those so remove

blank rows completely blank rows we are

going to remove and it removed the blank

rows now the next thing which so now

there are no blank rows now I want to

remove the complete duplicate but when

you are doing this operation you need to

be little bit careful because if you

select a column and try to do that

operation it is going to be little bit

different than the operation which you

want to do using the complete table so

here because my rows are exactly

duplicate what I need to do here is

basically click on this so that no no

rows is selected and then go to remove

rows and use remove duplicates look at

what it is done table do distinct remove

blank rows this is the step I want when

I want to remove complete blank rows but

let me go to another one here if you see

in this row I have 9 90 duplicate there

are few null values if you go here

remove rows and use remove duplicate you

see what has happened just taken a

column name the duplicates are not the

row duplicate it is the particular

columns duplicate which has been so you

know the difference between two the

column would be column duplicate it may

happen that there are no row duplicates

but when you delete it on the column the

duplicates get removed so the column

duplicates because of that the complete

row got deleted so be careful about that

I don't need that right now and the

beauty with power query is remove the

step back at the previous position

so now what's wrong with this table

actually there's nothing wrong this is

perfect table but there is something

which you want to learn it's not the

best example of the table what we can

have here I want to learn something

known as in the transformation fill up

and fill down in the maths if you see

after 90 I don't have any marks and what

I wanted to do is sometime you have what

happens in Excel you create those five

kind of a table 90 is repeating so only

one 190 will come now I want to do the

fill down so it should fill in the 90 so

under the transform tab you have this

fill fill down so 90 will repeat now in

the case of physics there's only upward

movement means there are blank rows and

then we have a number so here I will use

fill up under the transform tab again

fill up now in this column I could do

any of these operation in this I can

also do any of these operation so fill

up and fill down it takes the value on

the top if there is anything which is

blank it's going to replace those value

with the last available value and very

useful transformation very difficult to

do otherwise but Power query made it

easy so this kind of transformation is

something which enables you to improve

your data quality they available inside

the power

query now let's come to this table and

in this table we wanted to learn the

feature of replace value now first of

all this table is not in the proper

shape so what I'm going to do here is

now instead of going to those options I

click CLI on this table icon and there

are options here and the one of the

option which is there is use first row

is header and I'm going to use that now

I want to learn replace values and the

objective is twofold how do we replace

null values how do we replace any other

value and how do we replace some value

with the null value so we have this

replace value option on the right click

we have replace value but it is going to

replace in this particular column only

what I can do is I can select multiple

columns also with the shift and under

the transform tab I also have replace

values or right click replace values so

you can go go to replace values what I

want to replace here in both the columns

what I want to replace there is a value

called known as GG I want to replace

this value with a b c it's available in

both the columns if observe that here

and here now there are Advanced options

match the entire cell content replace

using special characters so I can use

the first option now but I don't want to

use let it replace so you will see there

was Triple G here and because there was

a triple G here and it replaced the only

2 G's you can go to the back previous

stab and see this is Triple G where only

two G's were replaced the first match

was get

how do we replace the null values or how

do we replace something with a null Val

if you see here this column also have

null values this column also have null

value click on both of these column with

shift replace values and for null you

have to write down Nu L and then you can

replace it with the value na but if this

null is n l null text then I'll tell you

the one quick fix for that so once you

do this fix and you can see the null

values are replaced with na now if this

null is a string you can do the same

step and come back here and put this

null into double quotes you will see the

formula here and this is the step in

that step you can go ahead and replace

if I do here right now this will not

find any null value not replace it the

null text value go ahead and change this

now what I would like to do here is this

hyphone I want to replace this value I

clicked on that and I say I want to

replace this value with what I want to

replace this with n null replace with

null click okay so it's again giving

replace table do replace value in the

last step see every time it use the last

step Hyun with null replacer do replace

values item category column only in that

particular column we have done it but if

you look at the previous steps you find

that it has been executed on multiple

columns you can give n number of columns

and then you can execute on that so this

is replace value for

you so what is wrong with this data the

data itself is transposed so the rows

are on the column The Columns are on the

rows the date should have been in the

rows they are in columns the major sales

and margin should have been the columns

there in the rows so we need to

transpose this so click on this table

icon so that nothing is selected supp

that go to transform Tab and use the

option

transpose the data will get transposed

but still it is not correct or the final

shape of the data the first row contains

the header and to overcome that you will

go to the Home tab and inside the Home

tab on the right hand side you have an

option use first row as header also when

you click on the down arrow you have the

reverse option also use headers as first

row sometime it may happen that you

bring in the data and you don't have

headers it may create the first row as

header we want to revert it so as of now

I'm going to use the use first row as

header so the first row which I have the

row number one should become the header

and this is add an additional

transformation for promote data and

after the promote data powerb do try to

change the data type to correct your

data types automatically and as you can

see in this step it has automatically

detected the correct data type so this

is the additional step which has been

added and because of this step you now

have the correct data type and you have

the correct format

Also let's now learn the operation merge

which is basically the operation merge

what it does it it can join the two

tables you can use any kind of joint

like inner joint left join right join

and anti joints also I'll explain you

what those are and can combine two

tables so I have couple of tables which

I want to merge basically and the merge

is basically the you matches the rows

and then you merge it's not up and one

below each other that's not the merge

here so merge here is basically you join

them so what you call in the SQL joining

two tables using the joins here actually

we going to create a new table or new

query when we join them in the power

query you usually call it query when we

join and execute so I basically have two

tables here the first table is master

table it's not true Master it has couple

of duplicates and I have knowingly kept

those duplicate that what impact

duplicates can have pay attention to the

category IDs which we have 1 2 3 and 5

the second table which I have is the

detailed table along with which I want

to merge this pay attention to the

category IDs 1 2 3 and four so five is

there which is not here and four is here

which is not there and I have kept it

for a purpose and category ID 1 is

repeating here or couple of rows

category ID 2 is repeating but not going

to play such a major role because it is

expected in the detail it is repeating

but the one is repeating in the master

also so now let's start our journey we

can click on any of these tables I'll

start by clicking on Master go to the

Home tab and use merge queries I will

use this down arrow because it giv me

two options merge queries and merge

queries as new if I use merge query it

the data would be merged in this current

table but I would like to use merge

queries as new this will allow me to

create new tables and I'll keep on

explaining you different kind of joints

merge queries as new master table we got

it let's click on detail table how do we

join click on category ID and go and

click on cat ID if you have multiple

columns assume you have then Control

Plus click will give you the options so

here again Control Plus click you want

to remove again control and click so I

only want to do one so I'm doing only on

one column but you can do it on multiple

columns the first join I want to do is

inner join and what does the inner join

do only matching columns whatever rows

are matching it is going to do that once

after selecting this I'll click on after

selecting this I'll click on okay it is

showing how much is matching and

definitely not everything is going to

match because we have some missing IDs

on both sides so let me click on okay

and as you can see it has given me a

table and right away in the table table

first is going to be complete and table

two we need to expand but you can see

the missing id5 here let me expand and

see does it make it any difference so

when I expand it it ask me what all you

want right now I can choose to get

everything and also I'll uncheck this

because this is going to prefix the

table name otherwise so I'll uncheck

this use original column name as prefix

so I got this data now if you see here

observe this the cat ID one is now four

rows two from the header and two from

the detail so it became four cartisian

product is happening 2x two so that is

why we our master table should never

have duplicate we could have done remove

duplicate before this now this is inner

join and because of the inner join we

have lost four and five four in the

details and five in the header now let's

go back and let me rename this table

first of all double click or right click

rename inner join as you might have

observed that this has not added a step

it means this thing cannot be reverted

now let's go back to the master again

follow the same flow merge queries merge

queries as new master table is already

there select the detail table category

ID cat ID and this time we are going to

do left joint what does left joint means

all from the first and matching from the

second so whatever is matching and if

there are multiple rows getting

generated because of that it will

generate that but whatever is left out

which is not joined if it is part of the

table one it will bring that and all

those corresponding value from the table

two would be null for that so that's

left joint from you all from the first

and matching from the second it is

showing how much match you're going to

get and let me click on okay now again

we get the first table columns and

expansion for details I'll expand it and

let me click on okay it has unchecked

that because last time I unchecked so it

will remain unchecked and let me click

on okay now and as you can see we got

category ID five from the header for

which we don't have any corresponding

data in details but because of the left

join it is coming in let's rename this

table as left join right click rename

left join let's go back again to the

master table merge queries merge queries

as new master table let's take the

detail table category ID cat ID the join

and right join right join means all from

second so the missing ID so the

additional ID four is going to come now

but we will miss five because five is on

the left hand side but what we are

saying all the matching things will come

from the details plus additionally

whatever the details contain that will

also come let me click on okay now this

time you start seeing a null row already

it means there's something which is

coming for which we don't have a value

in the left hand side of the table table

on the top is here in the left I expand

the details using this expand icon I'll

include all the column just press okay

and as you can see we have one row where

we have category ID 4 which was not

present in our table the master table

let me rename this right join let's do

the journey again merge queries merge

queries as new master table detail table

category ID cat ID and this time we'll

use full join from both matching will

match and whatever is not going to match

from both the tables is going to come

and again it showing what is matching

what is not matching let's click on okay

you see a blank row you see category

five also expand once you expand you can

get all the column in and you will see

now both the rows one from the left side

having blank because category ID 4 only

exist in second table one having Blanks

on the right hand side no blank on the

left because Category 5 does not exist

in the detail table so this is full

outer joint for you or full joint for

you let's rename this as full joint

double click rename let's continue to

now two interesting kind of joins click

on master table merge query down arrow

merge query as new master details

category ID cat ID and the most

interesting join which we could use is

left ENT and right ENT let me use left

ENT this time row on only from first

something which exist in the table one

or the table on the left hand side which

is not present in the right hand side

table is typically category id5 which is

not matching is going to come that two

for the left table so non-matching rows

is come if you remember we have

something known as except or minus set

operation something which is present in

the table one or table a and not present

in table two or table B so you will see

we are having the category 5 row is

coming in and we know there's not going

to be any match data in the details but

anyway we can expand and check it out

actually after this join there is no

benefit of expanding but to understand

this we have expanded it so this is left

ENT now let's go back to the master

again and try the last join we wanted to

have in the Marge queries Marge queries

as new and we are going to try write ENT

with the detail table so master in

detail category ID cat ID right and join

only the rows available at the right

table the bottom table here in this case

whatever is only available in this table

which is not matching with the master

table is going to come here let's click

on okay it shows one row with a blank

and when we expand the detail we will

see category ID 4 coming in here and

there is no data on the left for that so

the row which is not having a matching

data which is on the right hand side is

coming here and that is right anti joint

for you let's

rename you can use these Marge to

combine the tables in powerbi we prefer

start star schema and sometime you may

come across a situation where the tables

are not in Star schema in such cases you

can use power query to create star

schema if required sometime you may want

to duplicate the tables to do that

because in the star schema facts are

self-sufficient so let's say you have a

header table header act as a dimension

as well as it need to be merged with the

detailed table in such cases you can

duplicate the table and use it so how do

we duplicate click on any of the table

let's say I have this detailed table I

want to duplicate it right click

duplicate don't use reference it going

to reference that so you can call it as

detail 2 it's getting duplicated and

then you can do your Marge

operations we had this detailed table

and we duplicated and created another

detail table to let me go ahead and add

one more column here how do we add a

column we can simply add some formula or

I can split it or to add a column or I

can duplicate it so you can right click

and duplicate a column and let me call

it as a name Tool and why am I'm doing

this I want to show you something known

as operation upend Operation now upend

operation is typically you want to Union

the data you want to combine that so the

operation which is upend here is kind of

a union all mean it's just going to

append the rules second is unlike the

SQL Union or the Dex Union where you

need the same size of the table or the

same number of columns in the table it's

not necessary and that is why when I had

a detail and detailed I just

additionally added a column in the click

on any of the column click on any of the

table and then go to append again you

have two options upend queries and upend

queries as new so what I want to do here

is basically I want to use the append

queries as

new so let me use append queries as new

now detail is the first table if you

have three or more you can use this

particular UI for two tables you can use

this UI first table and you can select

the second table and the second table

which I wanted to select is basically

the details table details table and

details two table let's click on

okay and as you can see that the both

the tables are appended one after

another one they just comb just

combining the tables with all the

possible column there's no deletion of

duplicate here and definitely I have now

created a new additional column so it's

not going to delete any duplicates as

you know we have removed duplicate

option in case we wanted to do a union

all kind of operation we can do that now

in this case you can see that the

additional column do have come which is

part of only one table and the rows are

blank for the table for which it was not

available and the other table where it

was available it has come now post

this if you want to delete duplicate now

the delete duplicate can happen based on

ID column or based on the complete table

now here I would like to delete the

duplicate based on the ID column I can

click on the ID column I can go to

remove rows and remove duplicates so I'm

trying to do kind of a union operation

in the SQL world where you actually

don't have duplicates now in this case

definitely it has taken a decision to

take some set of columns from the of the

tables when there are multiple values

available so in this case this has taken

the name to where the null values are

there you can append you can remove

duplicates and create a union or Union

all kind of a scenario based on the

requirement let's learn how to create a

custom column in power query and for

that what I'm going to do is I'm going

to add the same file here the sales file

which we have used and the reason for

that is basically because I want to show

you the same formula which we created

there so let me go to the github.com and

in GitHub this is the file which we are

using say data used in video right click

on the raw copy link come back to the

powerb and now I'll tell you directly

from the power query under the Home tab

if you click on the new source you will

be able to add new sources from here go

to new sources click on web which is

available directly into the menu give

the URL click on

okay and I load only the sales

here and now you don't see the button of

load data and transform data this is

only okay button because when we opened

it from Power query it's going to put us

back onto the transform data mode only

because it has put us into the transform

data mode it is not asking for the

option whether you want to load the data

or transform the data so we have to

transform the data sometime we may get

this kind of error you can simply

refresh now if you remember we created

few columns there so same column we

wanted to create here we will take one

or two example of such columns and also

create some different kind of new custom

column so once you are on the table you

can go to add columns and inside the add

column you have column from example

custom column invoke function

conditional column index column now the

first of let's learn index column what

is the index column sometimes what

happens you are bringing in a table and

you don't have row numbers and row

number is required sometime because I

want to create it as a dimension means I

I went ahead and I remove the duplicate

and I created a dimension I need a

unique number then how do I do that I

can add index column sometime you

require row number just because in a

visual you want to display and power

always summarized so you need one unsm

column so in that case you can add index

column so you can add index column from

zero or from one or you can even modify

it so I added an index column it is a

unique rule number column for me I can

decide from where it should start how

much increment it should have so if I

want let's say two to increment I can

make it two what would happen here is it

will become odd numbers I want to start

it from let's say three I can make it

three and it will start from

three these changes I can do let me make

it one and one now this is one type of

custom column let's go ahead and add

another kind of custom column which is

basically custom column B what I want to

gross what is my definition of gross is

quantity multiply by price now here uh

we have no option to select the data

type but in the power query online

version the data flows we are getting

that option to select the data types

here we don't have so let's click on

okay and you will see it doesn't take a

data type here so what I can do is

whatever data type I want I can give

that as a last argument so be on that

step put a comma and use type let's say

I want in 64 or decimal so here I can

give type number on numeric and let's

try this out and it has become the

number data type so in this manner if

you remember the type you can give the

type otherwise you have to use the

option here you click on this number

column or ABC what was written and you

choose the data type and it will add a

step for that to avoid the step I simply

written type number because I remember

that it can be added like a number same

way you can add another custom column

for cogs and that is nothing but

quantity multiply by cost now you can if

you use this here you click on this

number column or ABC what was written

and you choose the data type see it add

additional step but that is why just to

avoid this additional step I had this

script I can remove

this and go ahead and put a comma and

put the third argument which is not

available

here now the new column which you

created you can again use them in

creation of columns like discount amount

you can go here and create discount

amount you can use the column which is

previously created which is nothing but

gross multiplied by discount percentage

divide by 100 if you remember

the discount percentage is absolute and

that is why we need to divide it by 100

again I can change the data type now if

you want to create a conditional column

you have option here to create a

conditional column so you can click on

that and you can write down a

conditional script so if let's say sales

date equals or less than equal to or is

after we say before what date we say

okay it is before 2019

let's go by

years now go by month Double Arrow take

years is before 1 January 2019 then one

else zero so Data before 2019 and after

2019 so you can create a conditional

column so it will give you values and

what all values we have if you they are

not loading we can click on load so we

have both one and zero values depending

on the dates we will have value it will

always load a sample side of hous and

rows and based on that it will do the

column profiling here at the end if you

see but if you want all the rows you can

actually click here and you can use on

entire data set it is especially useful

when you go to the view and you do this

column distribution column profiling

then you can use that now again I can

change the data type but right now I'm

leaving that now I can add this column

manually also actually I can go to the

custom column and I can write down the

condition of my choice so let's say test

if quantity equals to one then unit one

else many so I'm saying if quantity is

equal to one then one else many this

kind of condition I can give and I can

have multiple if else to create complex

conditions so one and many one and many

usually I have quantity one two and

three so I'll get one and many for many

for two and three I'll get in this

manner you can create quite a few custom

columns now some cases you have this

additional column which you can create

you can add a column um so you want to

measure a length let's say you want to

measure the length of this column but I

don't want to use a transformation I

don't want to change this column I want

a new column you can go to extract and

say length so it will actually give you

the length of this column same way other

operation on length like first character

last character range text before delimer

text after delimer text between delim so

what happens in all such cases it will

actually go ahead and add a new column

so instead of transforming the current

column sometimes you don't want to

transform the current column you

actually want the information in the

next column so this is really helpful

here same way for parsing if you have a

XML or Json column you can par and other

one you can like format like I want this

upper case or lower case but I don't

want to transform this column I want a

new column so I can go ahead and use

this so this will add a new column just

for an example let me use this lower

case and this time instead of making

this test as lower case it actually

created a new column lower case in this

manner you can add custom columns in

power query so most of the column where

you require multiplication kind of a

stuff you can add them in power query

conditional column you can add them in

power query other transformation which

are needed at row level you can pretty

much do all such columns in power query

there are formulas which can only be

done on the aggregated data for that we

cannot use this one they are better

suited on measure so there is a option

of colum by example you can create a new

column by example how that I'm going to

give you one example now there could be

more us is have little complex data also

you can use it what I'm going to do is

I'm going to go to this text operation

table and in this text operation table

I'll go to a column is my column key to

I'll right click on that and then there

is option add column from exam now I'll

click on this option add column from

examples and here it is asking example

let's say I put one one what does it it

identify it that I am asking for text

before delimiters and based on that it

is creating everything like text before

delimiter let me go ahead and replace

this with 333 now what is happening it

now identified that I need text after

delimiter after which delimer it is

identifying that I need it after the

third delimer and that is why you are

see in the second row it is using

33355 now the same manner you go and

type 222 what it will realize is that I

need Tex between Eliminator hyon and hyp

creating the next also it is creating to

and one to one Etc in this manner it is

identifying that I need X between

delimiter and it is creating data like

that now let me click on it would be

added as a new column and then you can

look at the formula this formula which

has been Tex between has been used hyph

and H So based on the example I try to

do that operation and based on that

operation you will now get taex before

delimiter or Tex after delimiter or

there could be any other operations

which has been identified we done here

these are the various way in which you

can create a new column in power query

and once once you are done with those

columns from the home you can go and

click on close and apply or simply apply

and those columns would be added at part

of your query which will be known as a

table when we visualization part the

next operation which we wanted to learn

is under the transform and that

operation is basically Group by now the

group by operation is something which

can create a group col basically you

have a complete table and group a data

at a particular level use this group by

so basically summarized table or

aggregated tables if you you can take

help from group by now you have

summarize in tax which can do the

similar job there are other functions

also like summarize callums the job grp

by can also do the job so now here in

power query we are going to use group so

what I'm going to do is I'm going I'm

going to click on the sales table and

after that I'm going to click on group

buy once I click on the group buy it

gives me two option basic and advanc in

basic it is asking for one group buy and

it is only asking one column now what I

can do here is basically I can go to the

Advance the advance I can add grouping

of my own choice so I can say Okay I

want to group this data let's say a city

and then here in the count columns I can

give a name of the column where the

count has been written here then I can

choose the operation sum average median

min max count rows count District all

rows Etc we start with a simple example

we'll say we want to sum here and what I

would like to sum I want to sum actually

quantity here now here I'll say sum uty

so this is the first kind of aggregation

I want to create now I would like to add

another then I can go ahead and do it

let's say I want average price now

average price is not the best thing to

have it here but let's go ahead and do

that so we say average and then we'll

use so you got a aggregated table now or

grouped by table now which is now giving

you g ID sum of quantity and average

price now you can see the code here

table. Group by at what it is

doing so C ID it is grouped on that and

based on that we have list. sum which is

used on the some of quantity has been

done and a of price I can click on the

setting icon back again here and I

reached back to the setting again and

what I can do here is I can say add

grouping and in this add grouping I can

let's say I add item ID I want two group

by is not one group I want aggregated

table which is based on city ID and Item

ID and how I'm getting my data based on

the city ID and Item ID in this manner I

can get it now there is one more option

which is there and that would be helpful

when you are going to do something like

you know sub index or sub rank that kind

of operation that would be helpful and

for that what you have to do let's go

back to the setting again now here in

the ad grouping let me remove this and

here I instead of some operation I'll

say all rules I can give it any name

whichever I want Let Me Call It All Pro

only when you go here so City ID and

item id the data is grouped and what

happens is is going to have a table here

so now there is a table which is at the

city ID and item id level and if you add

a column here let's say add index here

in this table and now we have to write

down the formula to do that not going to

be that I simply go ahead and write it

here add index for that we have to use

the M language and using the M language

we have to create a custom column and

there we in this table itself the table

which is inside we have to add a index

column and then you have to expand it

back again you can expand this table to

get all the data so you will expand and

then you'll get the complete sales table

again and then you will get the sub

index these kind of operations I have

explained on the channel so you can

check that out so in this manner you can

group all the rows and then you can do

operation inside the group to data so

this is Group by for you we I have shown

you a few options but there are further

more options which you can explore out

to create aggregated or what we call

summarized

tables we will come across a scenario in

power query where we would actually like

to split a column we have quite a few

option to split a column so we can split

by D limiter we can split by number of

character we can split by position lower

case upper case digit non-digit

non-digit and digit now I come up with

this one data where I'm going to show

you split by Del limiter but this data

is really interesting because it's

nquire double split and you will not

realize unless I do it so for first of

all even before I use do use first row

as header I need to split this data okay

because name and ranks are two different

column but I need to split this data and

how do I need to split it I need to use

under the Home tab split column and buy

delimiter and space is my dmit it is

automatically identified for each

occurrence in this case it is the left

most occurrence or that's the only

occurrence but you can decide if you

have more than one occurrence leftmost

or rightmost or each occurrence and then

you can go to the advance and decide

whether you want columns or rows in this

case I want two columns and that's

correct it has automatically identified

that but in case you want to check you

go ahead and check that out in case of

rows there's no limitation it can split

and give any number of rows but

definitely columns we have to specify

let's press okay now we got the two

columns so now at this stage I can use

first row as header so the moment I do

first row as header you might have

realized that this change type has

changed the game for us it actually has

detected it as integer and removal of

comma that's what we don't want so what

we have to do is we have to go to this

step transform columns either we remove

it or go and copy this type text and in

the rank also you use type text so that

it remains as a text now it is a text

now we can continue to use it now the

rank column is something which we

further wanted to split we again go to

split column split by D limiter and this

time for each occurrences of the D

limiter it has correctly detected that

in the advance option I'm going to use

rows no more columns I want multiple

rows for that I don't want columns this

time and in the rows it is not going to

ask you how many rows create that many

rows which is required columns the

number is limited and let's press on

okay and now the data is in the shape

where we can use it for analysis we've

taken a case where we actually applied

the same function twice in two different

Manner and get the data into the shape

now there are other ways to split also

and for that what I've done is I have

this table text operation which you can

use I can show you some of those

operations so let's say you click on

this key one and you can say split by

number of characters I can split I can

get the ear first four are ear so by

number of characters I can say once far

as left I only want the first four

characters and rest I want into the

second column I don't want the

repetition number of columns here is

going to be two because I only want once

if it repeatedly you need to tell how

many columns I only wanted once I'll go

ahead and press I'll select once as far

left as possible the left hand side and

multiple columns and there going to be

two columns this time so we are able to

split and take out the ear from this one

so this is split by number of character

now then there is a split by position so

split by position position from 0 to 6

so power query start with indexing start

with zero and then there are Advanced

option columns or rows you say okay fine

0 to 6 let's split that so now you got

another split based on that and now this

change data type on the First Column we

don't need actually we need type text

only and because of that only it's not

showing what value we actually got this

is the value we actually got then you

have the upper case lower case and all

those combination I will just show you

one of them so this is uppercase and

lower case so you can go and split by

column by lower case to uppercase or

uppercase to lower case so let's execute

one of them lower case to upper case so

when the things change from lower case

to upper case at that time we will split

so this was lower case and post that

there was an upper case so it got split

there is upper case and after that

there's a lower case there's nothing got

split this is these were three were

lower case and after that we got upper

case so it got splitted similarly digit

and no digit split you can go ahead and

use by non-digit and digit or by digit

and non-digit so let me use one of them

let's use the second option non-digit to

digit so you will only see split where

first there was a non-digit and then

digit in this manner there are multiple

things which we can do there are next

set of operations basically here we have

lower case upper case capitalize the

word trim clean add prefix add suffix

now let me go to this table and I'll go

to column two and let me try to now to

understand this format options now very

easy to understand this lowercase and

uppercase you click on any any of the

column you go here and say lower case I

go to this column everything is already

in uppercase so I can go here and say

format capitalize each word so first

letter would be Capital now this is all

in lower if you see here the the column

name the first row is in the lower case

I can go and click on the format and

uppercase it will do an uppercase now

let me use first row as header and then

do other operations now I can go here

again and under the transform format I

can use add prefix it will add a prefix

to the column let me add Hy and in case

I want to add a suffix I can go to the

format and I can add a suffix also let

me add at theate here and it's not doing

that operation on the null value please

remember that now what is this clean and

trim trim you might have understand what

what is this clean to understand the

clean let me go to the Home tab and

create one enter data script and here

let me and a shift enter enter enter a

SP b space c d d d enter enter enter B A

FG now next one I'll go here and space

space space a space space space next one

I'll space space space b c v VC and then

here no space b and space space space

space and let me say let me rename this

now and edit I got some data you can see

the values here lying here and there now

there is cleaning required so first

operation which I want to do here is

basically I'll go to transform format

and I'll do clean operation the clean

operation removes the non-printable

character especially the the enter you

can see now the data has come into the

one row but it has not removed the white

spaces before and after it they are

still white spaces like here if you go B

and do have white spaces okay vbb do

have white spaces in the beginning now

I'll go on this column and I'll use the

format trim operation and once I do the

trim it removes the white spaces from

left and right and I'll get the trimmed

version of this one now you see there's

no nothing before and after it's only B

and only vbb so these are the operation

which allow ows you to improve the data

quality so the transformation the data

quality improvement all these can be

done after that you have some operations

to take out the date part and all those

if you go to this date time table and

you want to take out the time only it

will give you time only you want to take

out the date only you will get the date

only you want to take out part of the

day year month quarter you will get

those also you can extract the date

Parts again these kind of transformation

you can do here so these are the various

kind of transformation you can do in

power query once you are done with all

your transformation or maybe don't

always wait for all the transformation

to happen you should keep on doing this

in between you should keep on applying

the changes so that it doesn't take too

much of time at the end to do it but

right now the time has come that I'll

you use close and apply and once I do

close and apply what it's going to do is

all the tables is going to process again

the complete data will be loaded and

processed again and that is something

which power query does it basically

actually go to load the data model and

go to process by each step by step and

go to do it and it has processed

everything now the tables are now

available for analysis and if you go to

the table view you will see the data

into the final shape so if you go to the

pyot table or unpivot table you will not

see the data in the initial shape what

you had you see the data into the final

shape so power query helps us in

creating transformed cleaned data data

which can be used for data analysis so

the next set of transformation which we

actually wanted to learn is basically

how to do multiple unpivot or double

unpivot here what happens is you don't

have a single column which is repeating

actually there are more than one column

which are repeating so let's say there

is a set A1 A2 then there is a set B1 B2

then there is a set C1 C2 but that is

the set which is repeating it is not

that I have A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 and I just

want I that such scenario how we are

going to unpivot that is what we have to

learn so let's look into this example

and see how can we do double and pyot or

multiple and pyot so let me showcase you

my data which I'm plan to use for today

uh so I have added this to the P data

file and I will been loading this file

to the GitHub so here as you can see I

have item on My First Column and then I

have state and value combination

in the column so I have state one value

one state two value two state three

value three state four value four state

5 value five this is the combination

which I have now this is not a simple

unpivot user case where I have the stage

and I simply unpivot it and then I can

use the data so this require a special

treatment or maybe I first unpivot the

data and then P it so let's go ahead and

see how we convert this data into the

best suitable data for data analytics or

for powerbi so I have already open

powerbi and let me jump out of the that

and I'll say get data and inside the get

data I'll bring my Exel sheet and that

Excel sheet is nothing other than pyot

data and you will be getting this on my

GitHub account

and here you see that I got this unpivot

pyot data so just take this sheet

unpivot pyot data sheet and that instead

of loading use transform data why would

use transform data because this data is

not in a shape where we wanted to use so

why to load and then go to the transform

data and do the transformation why don't

we directly go to the transform data so

so I'll click on the transform data at

the bottom of the popup and it will

directly take me me to Power

query let me bring in power query window

on this screen so the power query window

has opened and now we have this data in

front of us so what action we wanted to

do so first of all I'll select item and

I'll go to transform and inside the

transform I'll use unpivot columns and

I'll see unpivot other columns once I do

you can see I have state value in rows

but I don't want like this the best way

is state

as a column and value as a column now to

do that I need to do a next step in the

next step I would use one more

transformation and the transformation

which I plan to use is split column and

in the split

column split column is again available

under the transform tab I want to use

split by dor in this case you may have

little bit complex case so you have to

find out how you would plan to split

that and here I'll click on the advance

option and I'll say I want to split into

two columns that's the most appropriate

for this

data for each occurrence yes or sometime

may you may have to use leftmost

delimiter so first delimiter which it

gets on that and you have to say okay

now what you see here is state number

has been separated out now you can give

it as a separate name there but that we

will do later but you can click on now

attribute and

value and you you can go to P what

column again under the transform

data and which column is the value

column yes value column is the value

column Advance option what I wanted to

do is I'll say don't agregate but I

would prefer to do max if required so

you can take a count

here and once you load this data instead

of list count you click on

the the bar where we are seeing this

formula you send this. Max and now you

can see State and value we could we

could have used to aggregate but in case

don't aggregate doesn't work you can use

max like this so I got State I got value

and this could be state number or type

let me call it type now this data is in

a proper shape for analysis now so this

is how you deal with the data where you

think it require multiple

unpivot now what we would like to do

here is we like to understand how can we

do cross join in power query now you

have seen an example where we have

actually done cross join in Dex now how

do we do cross join in our query because

there's no function cross join if you

remember we had merge which can do

different kind of join like Left Right

full and full is not cross join and then

we have and joins also but how do we do

cross joint cross join means every row

of a table will get populated against

every row of another table one has three

rows and table two has three rows end up

getting nine rows so this is what the

cross join is and we would like to

understand how can we do that in our

query so let me take you through powerbi

and let me explain you the function the

cross joint function which is there in

the DXs and then the question is how do

we do that in power query so let me do

one thing is basically in

powerbi desktop I'm going to use enter

data which is under the Home

tab and I'm going to create two

tables and in the table one let me have

that say number I'm going to have some

numbers let's say 1

2 3 and four and let me call it D1 the

table D1 I'm renaming it and I'm going

to say

load very a simple table once this table

get loaded we will load another

table so now let me add another table

now the table which I'm going to add is

basically having the let's say text so

let me call it

value and let me add value let's say

a b

and see only three values and let me

call this table as D2 and let me a load

very simple stuff two tables having one

one

column now I go to the table View and

I'll show you these tables so D1 as 1 2

3 4 D2 as a BC now how do we do a cross

joint so in the Dax in we go to the

table tools when we click on any of the

table we'll get the table tool and in

the table tool you have new table click

on the new table

and say cross the name left hand side is

the name and then we have function cross

join we can give tables so I give D1

comma D2 two tables and I just press

enter now what you see is uh 1 2 3 4 A A

A A 1 3 4 bb bb 1 3 4 c c c c now I want

same thing in power query how do I do

that so I go to my report view or I

could have done from there also and I go

to transform data which is in the middle

of the Home

tab and there I have another option

transform data which will take me to

Power

query let me bring in the power query

window

here now how do I do it in power query

so if you remember we have something

known as merge queries under the Home

tab of power query on the right but here

when you go to the merge queries

you don't have any option for cutan and

even if you do full outer join it's not

going to serve a purpose especially

there is no joint column here so how do

I do that but to do that what I can do

is I can take any one of these

table and go ahead and create a new

column add column I call it custom

column and let me call it tab two and

let me simply give here D2

D2 is a

table so it starts showing me the

table my once I get a table in a column

it start giving me an expand

icon I'll expand

this and it ask what all column I say I

will say value column I need and I'll

uncheck this use original column name as

prefix

then we press okay now as you can see

the moment I expand it gives me AB C ABC

ABC ABC because I done it with D1 that's

how it's going to happen so for Value

one A B C or then if you see for a it is

1

2 3 and four anyways I I could have done

the same thing in D2 it would have given

me uh a 1 2 3 4 b 1 2 3 4 c 1 2 3 4 so

this is how you do a cartisian product

across join in power query so when I was

trying to save this it given me some

error so what I've done is basically I

change it to Value one the reason it is

giving error because D1 and D2 we are

again using in the cross joint they the

value column and so because of that it

was giving errors in power query it is

possible to do much more complex

operation than what we have done so far

right now what we are doing is we are

combining certain set of operation and

try to achieve the complex operation but

once we are able ble to understand all

the complex M function we can do much

more powerful operations than what we

have done so far so let's understand

basics of M for now m is a case

sensitive language what do you mean by

case sensitive language in case

sensitivity what happens let's say you

write down sales and in one of the sales

you write down S capital that is

different from the sales where s is

small as m is case sensitive so your

column names with the title case or

small case or upper case are different

from each other same is true for the

tables so when you are using them into

your formulas or into your calculation

you need to take care of them what is

the process of working on M language

what is the syntax every language has a

syntax let's say you are working with C

or Java in case of C you create a main

function where you write down the code

in case of java you start with a class

and then you have the main function so

every language has a particular kind of

syntax so what is the syntax we have for

m to create an M query in the query

editor you have to follow these basic

process first is create a series of

query formula steps that start with let

statement so let is the first statement

each step is defined by a variable name

so every step you will have a variable

name and L variable can be included by

space using hash character as HH double

codes step name so basically what

happens if you don't have the space in

your variable names it could be simply a

name but if you want to give a space

then you have to use has hash and in the

double codes you to give the name with

the space so let's say my name of the

step is rename columns so I'll give hash

double code rename space columns this is

how I will give the variable name if it

requires space a formula step can be a

custom formula please note that the

power query formula language is case

sensitive so power for query formula

language is case sensitive it means if

you write down let's say rename column r

capital c capital is different from R

small and C Small in case of M query

each formula steps buil upon a previous

step by referring the step by its

variable name so what happens when you

look at the code which is automatically

generated by power query you will find

that each step is referring to the

previous step that is not necessary when

we start the coding I'll showcase you

that it is not necessary you refer it to

the immediate step you can do some

calculation and post that you can also

refer it but typically what happens in

power query when we are autogenerating

most of the steps are generating tables

and the table in the step one is getting

referred by the step two and so on

finally what we do is we output a query

formula step using the instatement so

basically you will give a variable name

finally after the in generally the last

step in used in the final data set

result so what happens whatever is the

last step you actually try to return the

result of the last step however it is

not compulsory but in a logical flow

that would actually happen so let's take

an example code in this example code you

can see the code start with the let

statement and in the next line you have

variable name equals to expression means

you are assigning the expression to the

variable name in the next one you have

hash variable name equal to expression

two which you are assigning to a

variable name which is basically having

the space and finally you end up

returning the variable name here see we

are not returning the last step we are

returning a step before so that is also

possible just like every other language

we have the data types here we call it

primitive values A Primitive value is a

single part value such as number logical

text or null a null can be used to

indicate the absence of any data me if

the value is not present that's what we

call null so let's say binary is

something like 0 0 and something like

that date is your all your dates date

and time date along with the time date

time zone it will also include date time

as well as time zone duration now

duration is not same as time duration

will have Day hours minutes and seconds

then you have logical which is true and

false null means you have null value

number you can have 1 2 3 4 or you can

have decimal numbers text you can have

ABC or any kind of text which you want

text can have numbers also and then time

and time is different from dur time will

have only time for of 24 hours it will

not have the day component which

duration

has in power query we can use functions

a function is a value that when invol

with argument produces a new value means

you have to give the argument and when

you invoke it it will produce a new

value functions are written by listing

the functions parameter in the

parenthesis so in the parenthesis you

have to give the parameters followed by

goes to symbol means this equal to an

arrow is known as goes to symbol

followed by the expression defining the

function for example to create a

function called my function that has two

parameter and perform a calculation on

parameter 1 plus parameter 2 so this is

an example which has been given so first

statement is let my function equals to

the parameters parameter 1 and parameter

2 you can have more than two parameters

that's not limitation that's just an

example and then the goes by or the

arrow symbol then you have in the

parenthesis parameter 1 plus parameter

two means we are first adding them and

then dividing it by two so this function

is going to return the combined half

value if when we invoke it and then in

my function you are returning the value

which

is finally returned by my

function we have some structure data

values that include list record table

and some additional structure Now list

is something which is uh like a column

so basically a set of values is known as

list so a table column is also

considered as a list record is a record

which where we have a column name and a

value column name and a value it's

basically like a row so you can consider

a table row as a record and a table

column fully qualified table column name

is considered as a list now there are

differences we cannot always use the

same term but this is just an example

what we will do when we actually go

ahead and do the coding we will use the

table column as a list also and we'll do

the list operation on that so these are

the few data types which are really

important and there are tons of

operations around list record text

number and dates and if you are able to

practice those functions you will be

able to solve many complex Logics and

most of these functions are already

discussed on my YouTu YouTube channel so

you can take advantage of that in this

series and video we are going to

consider some of them so that you can

create foundation for using other

functions let's jump on to the new Power

ba file I already opened a new power v

file and how do we reach power query so

we click on the transform data and under

that we again have the transform data

and from there we will reach the power

query once we open the power query you

will find nothing is there it is empty

what we have to do is we have to add a

new source for that we are going to use

the new source option under the Home tab

and from there we will go to blank query

and add a blank query what happens when

you create the blank query it creates it

with default steps and we have to modify

those default step how do we reach there

reach either you can use right click

Advance editor or there is an advanc

editor option in the Home tab also I

will use the right click advanc editor

Let me open that now here in the source

let's say I can write down an integer

one then we click on done now you can

see it is returning one every time you

return return anything other than table

it gives you an option to convert that

to a table if it is not a list it can

give you convert to a list or to a table

but the list it will only give you

convert to a table it is returning right

now one which is of number data type

every time you do an operation based on

that operation's return type it is going

to return that particular data type I

can go here Advance editor again and I

can make it let's say double

codes a b c and if I return now now it

is rning a string and the moment I

return the string I have different

option like format it identifies the

written type and based on that it gives

the different options to us same way we

can perform some operation right click

go to advance editor and this and it is

not necessar the name need to be source

so let's create a variable a = to 1

comma next line B = to 2 comma e = to a

+ b and let's return return C let me

click on done to close the Advan editor

and get the results just like any other

programming language I'm getting the

results of C which is a plus b equals to

3 same way again we can go ahead right

click advance editer and we can modify

it let's say to multiply this but for

multiplication let's take little bit

different numbers let's take a is equal

to 3 balal to a mtip by B and let's

click on the done and we are getting the

expected result 6

it is not that we can do the operations

on number only we can do it on text also

so let's go back again using the Advan

editor let's change these two strings

now hey I'm going to give in double

codes Microsoft without space second one

we'll call this power B turn on let's

try to add them so a m% base m% B let's

written P so C is appending Microsoft

and power B in the space click on the

done and let's check the result the

result is Microsoft powerbi and it is a

text and we are getting option to edit

the text in this manner you can do some

basic operation so let's name this right

now as q1 query one I can double click

or rename right click or rename these

are various options are there and as you

see every step has been given here

applied steps and these steps can be

deleted or added between steps can be

added as per right let's understand in

more detail what all steps we have

created so let's go back to the Advance

editor again and in advanced editor you

can see in the step one we have assigned

a value step two we assigned a value and

step three we appended this value and

finally in the end we have given back

that value so how we have done it let

variable and the data variable and the

data variable and the operation and then

finally in the in we have the variable

which we plan to return so this is what

we have done let variable variable

operation and R and then finally press

done now let's go ahead and try more

stuff so what I would like to now here

is let me try to create list so for list

let's start again by creating a new

query we go to the open

tab we'll take a blank query right click

and want editor let me create a list

list is something where we give data

into the angular brackets now it's a

list of mix 1 2 3 a that's a mixed list

I wanted to create I to return the same

but you can see list of mix which have

created create one more list go back to

the tab new source BL

query again right click

adance and let's create list of

numbers so Source equals to list of

numbers how do we give a list in the

angular bracket if you give the comma

separated value that is list if you are

giving numbers read of double code if

you want to give the text then you have

to give them in double code we creating

a list angular brackets when we use it

creates a list press on done and let's

return this we got a list 1 2 3 again

now this time if you look at here you

have option as it is a list there is

only one option two table there is no

option to list here let's take one more

example this time we are going to create

a list of list again new source lank

query right click Advance editor and

here inside the angular bracket what I'm

doing is angular bracket 1 2 3 angular

bracket 4 5 6 and then again angular

bracket list of list I'm creating click

on done and you can see there's a list

if you click on that look at below you

will get the data and this do allow you

to expand so once you convert it into a

table this will allow you to expand the

list and further do more operations

let's create list of text also new

source land query right click Advance

editor in the envelope brackets a b c e

e fi and let's click on now we got a

list of text now we would like to create

something which is little bit more

interesting we want to create a how do

we create a record let's go go to the

Home tab new source blank query let's

right click andan enter now in the

square bracket we to write down the

record the square bracket you can write

down the record and the record what you

name of the column and the value name of

the column and the value name of the and

the value this is how you write down in

the square bracket now there is no

currently here give square bracket click

on done how you going to record Now

record when we convert to a table it

let's take example here actually

converts it into like four record we

have to actually ask whoose it now who

knows

it and this is the step which is

automatically added and let's look at

here advanc editor and now you will

understand that you know how the

previous step is refer this was the

previous step and when we convert it to

the table here if you look record to

table this step has been referred here

we have referring source is refering to

the source of the last step and then in

is referring to the last step name this

is how we refer steps in subsequent

steps now let's take one more example

and this time what we are going to

create is list of record new sports

blank query right click Advanced editor

here now square ones are the records and

comma separated list of Records inside

the angular bracket creating the list

click on done you got records you can

see your records here let's convert it

into two table okay you select the

option then you can see you got two

records and now you can expand the

record expand the record and you will

get a table like this in this manner

these are the steps so now remember

these functions are automatically added

by menu let me show you those into the

advanced editor but you can also

manually write down these steps if you

know the function like table from list

table from expand record you will be

able to write down all these and in the

beginner tutorial series I covered most

of these then go ahead and try that out

now everywhere you see the reference of

the last

step returning the last step in this

manner the entire flow is happening now

let's take an example how do we create a

table now there are multiple ways to

create table table from record table

from list but let's take one of the

example when you wanted to create table

and the function which we are going to

use is Hash table the new source blank

query right click Advance editor and

here we are going to write down hash

table now after the hash table what is

the syntax you need to give first a list

a list which will contain the column

names and then you get need give a list

of lists which will contain your each

row the list then list of list the two

arguments one is list and then list of

list these are the two argument hash

table requires putting his hash table

into the SCE and we are rning click on

done and you will get your table and you

got a table directly we got a table

let's try one more example this example

again we are going to use hash table but

with a little bit different again blank

query new source blank query right click

editor here in the hash table first we

say type table then we give a record the

record contains the data type also now

here previously we have not mentioned

the data type here we are mentioning

order ID is number customer ID is number

item is text price is number and then

giving list of list so the only thing is

first argument we have changed and the

first argument we giving type table we

are telling the record where we are

telling the column name and the data

type and then we are giving list of list

let's click on that again you got the

table let me add one more query here

land query in this query let's take an

example of list of Records so new source

blank query right click Advance editor

The Source equals to

list and inside the list we have records

so list of Records what we are trying

and inside the record as usual the

column name the value column name and

value let's click on done we got list of

Records we can convert this into table

will expand the records and can get our

full

table now we will look at example where

we wanted to create table from Recon so

let's create one more query home new

sources L query right click Advan editor

and so here what we are doing is in the

source we are getting table from records

this is the function and inside this

function we are giving a list of Records

that's what we have to give every list

has records every record has columns and

the values different data type and

different names can be there then

another record then one more record we

can have as many records as we want then

you click on that now you have learned

how can we create numbers text list

records table table from records table

from list and so many things now we have

to learn few more things for few things

you cannot simply write down a value let

let's take an example of date how are

you going to write down dates let's add

a blank query and right click advance

editor for some of those we have

shortcut hash functions like for date we

have hash

date you seen hash table we have hash

date here

2024 0101 click on

done you got a date similarly right

click Advance editor you can date time

are you going have six argument 14 Z

click on

done you have date time and you can see

check the data type it is showing now

date

time and then it is giving option for

date separation time separation now

let's create duration

also new

query right click Advance editor as

duration and these are all small

typically it is case sensitive and you

will always find the functions names are

in title case like table do record and

all those but here is all small when it

is coming with hash hash table hash date

hash date time hash duration and

duration you can give first day then

hour minutes

seconds click on done and you got a

duration now you before to create a list

of duration or list of time you can

right click do Advance editor if angular

bracket and in the angular bracket one

of that click on done get the list of

duration we can create table from it

these are some of the basic functions

and operation you must remember

now before I tell you little bit more

about some of the functions which could

be really useful I would like to import

one file again and show you what are the

steps which file creates and again for

that I'm going to take out our favorite

file T data used in videos by bringing

this file we would like to understand

what all steps is going to create I'll

bring in the sales data us video again

so new source B give the URL click on

okay and we don't need to bring in all

the sheet can bring in one sheet let's

bring in customer click on

okay and there was no load button or

transform button this time because we

are in power query so we are going to

each here only we are not interested in

what is coming here on the table view we

are more interested in right click

Advance editor and what is happening

here is basically there is a let this is

the first step where we are getting the

Excel sheet now from the Excel sheet

these ports we are getting the

data of sheet customer sheet item

customer kinda sheet data so we are

getting the sheets data after that

promote header and look for what promote

header is refering it is referring to

the customer sheet what customer sheet

is referring is refering to for the

function which has been used on for then

we have change type change type if you

see it is referring to the promoted

address which is the last and finally

the page type is the one which is

getting R in this matter what is

happening is basically each step you

getting a data and next step is that

transformation to the next level what we

think in such cases that every time it

is referring to the last step but if

that is not completely true sometime it

may happen just like we have done in our

older example that it can refer to the

previous step or previous to previous

step we might have a couple of step and

after that the output will be used in

another step so those combinations are

also possible most of the time what

happens it is T table at the each step

so what we think is it is table in the

first step it is table which is carrying

on the next step next step it is table

and then further more table table is

referring to the last step which is

table and again giving us table but that

is not completely true just like any

other programming language we can have

steps which can have different kind of

variables and those can be combined to

create a result T and because finally we

want a table for analysis that is why

most of our power query final output

would be a table now there are functions

where we will be able to Loop the

function funs which will allow you to

Loop through each row of the table there

are functions which allow you to Loop

through the each element of the list and

using those functions you will be able

to create Loops or able to process row

by row data so just like any other

programming language we have lot of

things which we can use here but in this

series and video we'll might not be able

to cover everything but we'll try to

give you a overview which would help you

to use other functions let's also

understand what are Power query

functions

so to understand that let's go back to

the file which we are right now already

in progress and in this file what I'm

going to do here is I'm going to go to

the Home tab new query blank query and

inside that blank query let me create a

function let me do go ahead and do right

click Advance editor you want to create

a simple function function which is

going to do is my function or I can give

it as any name I don't need Source in

that case I need to return this my

function so let me call it addition FN

addition function what addition function

equals to the parameters X and Y and

what the operation they should do X and

Y are actually summing up this can do

any other complex operation now let's

return return this addition function

done let's rename this query also now if

you want to test you can give here let's

say three and four and those invoke and

it will give you answer as s and it has

actually created a new query if you see

when you use invoke right click advance

and return it has actually created Force

addition function this is the query name

please remember if your query name is

different from your function name you

have to use the query name query name

not the function name so whenever you're

creating the function make sure your

function name and query name is same so

that you don't get confused with two so

addition function T comma 4 and integ

instead of I go ahead and doing that it

has created that so in could have done

that bland query tested it or you can

use this function now in any other query

which you are doing so in this this

manner you can create functions which

you can actually use in your other

operations so let's take one more

example of the function go to BL tab

Force blank query and in this blank

query advanc editor let's use source as

a function equals to a comma

B goes to a m per p m per B so if you

remember what we have written in the

past and let's call this aend function

aend a Capital fnend function let's

create an append function c contr v WR

append in the in now we got an append

function we name this query as a pan

function let's give a as Microsoft b as

power B let's use it the Microsoft

powerbi it has it has created a query

for us and which is giving us the result

in this manner you can create power

query function which can do some complex

transformation and or solve some kind of

operation and you can you call those

functions into other queries this is a

brief overview of power query functions

power query offers you tons of functions

which you can use to improve your

transformation these functions include

list function table function record

function text function number function

Etc now it is not possible to cover all

of these functions in this series and

video so what I'm I'm going to do is I'm

going to cover some of these functions

uh in this particular video I will cover

some basic list function which can help

you understand how to perform list

operation and based on that you can go

ahead and perform more operations by

looking at the documentation of

different

functions most of these functions are

covered on my channels in the beginner

tutorial series you can go ahead and

learn from there

every function is fit for a purpose and

if you are able to learn most of these

functions you will be able to perform

many transformation with

ease let's jump back to the powerbi and

the first thing which I would like to do

here in power ba file is I would like to

click on close and apply and once that

is done means the data is loaded I will

save this file and once this file is

saved we will go back to the power query

and start doing some list

Transformations data loading is done now

time has come that we save this file let

me click on the save icon on the left

top give this file name as N2

n14 and click on the save button to save

this file so let's go back to the power

query using transform data transform

data and here now we will try to learn

some list operations Home tab new source

blank query right click on the new query

open Advance editor and in advance

editor we are going to create a list

inside the angular brackets let me

create list of numbers by giving 1 2

5 6 7 3 and 4 don't want to give it in

the order so that later on I can

showcase you list. sort let's click on

done I got a list what I can do is I can

open this Advanced editor again here on

this step or on the next step I can do

this list

dot there are so many operations this

dot I have sum I have count I have min

max all those functions are there let me

use list. sort to sort this

list first let's try list. sort and in

this function I have to give list only

one argument it takes that's a list list

is something which we have in the

envelope bracket let's click on done and

as you can see the list is sorted in a

proper order now instead of going back

here I'm seeing the list I can use list.

sum and you will see I get a sum now it

is wring a number it's not no more a

list similarly I can try list dot Max

here will give me maximum of the is

7even in Max you Dy Min list do Min Min

function you come

here the list. Min it is list IFA as any

comparison criteria all those arguments

you can give we will get the minimum

value from the list that is one so we

are getting one so if we have something

known as count also we can use count

list. count let's see what all

argumented need the list argument and it

will return return us seven now let's go

ahead and add one more list item so that

it gives us eight and we are able to

differentiate between the Max and the

count now we are interested in couple

more operations and those operations are

one which will allow us to Loop through

the list and do additional operations

let we add blank query for that new

source blank

query right click open Advance editor

and we are now going to learn the

function list. number list. number needs

three argument first argument is

basically start so from where you want

to start so I want to start with one how

many numbers you need 100 and increment

by which is I want one in this case so

it will give me 1 to 100 numbers so this

is a continuous number series in case

you want a odd number series what you

can do is you can increment by two and

it will become a odd number series and

it is going to give you 100 number it is

Count total numbers you need not like

your generate Series where 1 to 100 is

start and end limit this is not the

limit this is the count now in case you

want even number series then you can

start with two for odd number series you

can start with one let's start with the

first argument two comma 100 100 numbers

I need and then increment by two and

this will give me now even number series

a list of 100 even num starting from two

there are more such functions so let's

go to the new source blank query

rightclick Advan editor and here we are

going to now use list. dates it can

generate list of dates that will help us

to create calendar but we do have the

functions like list. dat time we do have

list. duration that can give us

continuous duration but at this time we

will focus at list. dates so list. dates

would require three arguments the first

argument is date for that I'm going to

use shortcut hash date it again required

three argument here which is 2022 month

01 and day 01 comma the count of dates I

need 365 dates almost for an Year and

that the duration again I'll use the

shortcut function hex duration and in

the duration the first argument is day

and because I require a date table I'll

use one then hour minutes and second I'm

going to use zero and I'll click on done

and this will give me a series of dates

which will help me in creating the date

table so I am now getting continuous

dates to create a date table we also

have another powerful function list.

generate which we can also use so let's

start again with a new query Home tab

new source blank query right click Advan

editor and here we are going to use the

powerful function list. generate list

dot

generate and it requires three arguments

and all three are functions the initial

function the condition function and the

next function so what is the first

argument the first argument is a

function without any parameters goes by

means the arrow and the value which I

want to give to this function is a

static value of t to start with the next

argument is condition and the condition

is each underscore greater than zero

here generate is creating a loop and

each is giving us each value to compare

and take a decision third argument is

increased and how we will give it each

underscore minus one means from each row

supp the one one value it will give us

reducing

list so generate function generate a

list of values using provided function

the initial function generates the

starting candidate value which is then

tested by the condition if the candidate

value is approved then it's returned as

a part of the resulting list and the

next candidate value is generating by

passing the newly approved value to the

next so we have a initial value of 10

tested every time for greater than zero

and every value is reduced for minus1 to

generate a list of values and let me

click on done and now we are getting

values from 10 to 1 decreasing by one in

each row if you want a increasing number

list you can start with one and say

underscore less than 100 and then we can

change the increment by + one each

underscore + one here the underscore

represent the value in each time we are

calculating it each time we are looping

that value is the underscore value where

we are adding the one we got a list of

number using list. generate function

this time so we have understood few list

functions we have tons of list function

that include list. sum mean Max count

contains contains all distinct date date

time duration intersect distinct last

last 10 matches all there are so many

functions which we can discuss but it is

not possible to discuss all of them as

part of this video or series what you

can do is you can watch beginner

tutorial series on the channel and can

take advantage of all of these functions

discussed there there are other power

query functions which deal with date

number text table record

Etc let us learn some text function in

power query and to do that let's go back

to the the same file again the file N2

n14 and I have already opened power

query in that in that file we have

created the list of dates using the list

functions which I've explained in the

previous video already what I'm going to

do is first of all let me call it as

dates list

and now let me convert this into a table

to convert this into a table will

automatically add a step and that step

is nothing but list from table

this is the table function which use

source which is basically a list

splitter. split by nothing null null

extra values or error these are the

things which has to be provided table

from list power query function help us

to convert a list into table with

required arguments this list has been

converted into a table let me rename

this as dat also let me change data type

by clicking on the left top of the

column where ABC is written and change

it to date you can observe that the data

type is date now to start this journey

first of all I'll convert this date into

the text and we will use some text part

functions to get different parts of the

date we have text function which are

text.art text. middle and text. end to

take out different parts from a text so

let's start this journey by creat

creating a new column using the custom

column so add column new custom column

and let's create a text date column to

achieve this we are going to use the

function date. to text so that function

will convert the date into a text date

and the first argument which we supposed

to give is the date column comma and the

second argument is the format which we

are going to give into the double quotes

y y y y four times double M that would

be in the capital and DD in the small so

this is the format we supposed to give

our query is case sensitive so check out

the documentation when to give capital

letter and when to give small letters in

the format click on okay and check the

data so let's scroll down into the data

and check it out let's scroll down to

another month and check yes this format

is correct so the format which we have

used here is 4 y in the small 2 m in the

capital and 2D in the small and this has

worked for this use case data type is

any as of now and we need to change it

now to change what I'm going to do is

this add column function itself I will

go and give the third argument so comma

the third argument needs a type so here

I'm going to give text Dot type so it's

going to give the text data type and

once I give this argument I will press

enter this argument has corrected the

data type in the same manner you can

give number. type or in 64. type to

correct your data type as per the need

for the required column we will start

the process of converting this text into

date for that we will require a date

function and we will also require the

test function to take out the start

middle and the end part we might also

require conversion of text into integer

click on ADD column custom column to

create a new column and I'm going to

call this new column as date one so let

me replace the name with the date one in

this one I'll use hash date function

first of all which takes three argument

year month and

day first argument is here for that we

need the first four characters so for

that we are going to use the function

text Dot start now the first argument in

this function we need to give the text

date so we will give text date as the

first argument comma we need four

characters so we need to give four and

then we can close the parenthesis so the

next argument which we are going to use

is text. middle and in the text. middle

we need three argument so the first

argument which we need to use in the

text. middle is the text date then we

need the starting point which is five in

our case the four characters of ear and

hyphen and then the the next character

to start because it start from zero so

five we need two characters of month so

two close parenthesis comma need day in

the last argument so the function we are

going to use here is text Dot and to get

the last two character in the string so

the first argument here is going to be

the text date and then we need two

characters from the end so we are going

to give two and then we will close the

parenthesis and then we got the date now

we can click on okay to check it out it

is giving error the reason it is giving

error is because we need the three

arguments as whole number or integers

but all the three arguments what we have

given are the text so what we need to do

is we need to convert this text into the

number the start the middle and the end

for that we have function number from

text let's use the function number from

text on all the three arguments I have

knowingly given as space after the

parenthesis because when we try to

select the function sometime it replaces

the existing function if you don't give

the space so this function number from

text we need to use on all the three

arguments to convert them into the

number so that the date function can use

them once we completed our formula you

can see that we got all the dates

correctly now the dates are displayed

currently my format is the US date

formats and based on that format the

dates are displayed in case you are

using the UK or Australia format you

will get the date into that default

format are some of the basic text

function which we have used here but

there are lot many text function and I

have covered quite a few of them on my

channel in different videos which you

can go ahead and explore some of the

functions which were available at part

of the menus are also available as

function so that we can do complex

transformation by using those individual

functions and we will continue to

explore these functions in different

different

videos we have created a date table

index in the past now time has come that

we create the date table in power query

we have learned some of the power query

function and time to learn some new

functions to create the date table our

Dex power query table is pretty

comprehensive and we can create such a

comprehensive table using power query

also or even more comprehensive by using

additional functions so let's begin our

journey of creating the date table in

power query I'm going to jump on the

existing file which we have created and

to n and14 I'll go to the transform data

which will open the power query module I

would like to add a new query so I'll go

to Home tab new query blank query and

this will add a blank query I would now

like to rename this so right click and

rename is one option double click and

you will go inside the query and you can

rename it I will rename it as date table

and press enter and let me open the

advanced editor now first of all we will

Define two dates because we wanted to

have a calendar between two dates but

the function which we plan to use list.

dates does not take two date arguments

it take a date argument and number of

days so we need to learn how do we take

the difference between two dates to

provide to this particular function so

first let's start with the start date

start date as a variable equals to a

value this is how you define a variable

here so start date equals to Hash date

hash date function requires three

argument the first argument it require

is year second is month third is day so

first argument I'm going to give is 20

2018 which is year 01 is the month 01 is

the day close parenthesis give a comma

and go to next line to start new

variable now let's define underscore end

dat equals to HH date

2012 is the year comma 12 month comma 31

as a day the next step is to get the

list of dates for that we are going to

use list. dates function so let's define

variable underscore date equals to list.

dates now list. dates function requires

three argument first argument is the

start date second argument is Count

means number of days third argument is

Step means how many days it should jump

between each list

items I am going to give the start date

as the first argument which we have

created some time back so the first

argument is underscore St start date for

the second argument we need number of

days the count and that can come from

the difference of end date minus start

date which is pretty easy in power query

but that's returns as duration not dat

so let me Define a new variable

underscore diff which will contain the

difference of these two dates so

underscore diff equals to underscore and

date minus underscore start date and

this will return me the difference

between two days in duration now I need

to use a function duration. days to get

the days out of this duration now I will

get number of days between these two

dates using this function plus one to

cover up the subtraction difference to

get the exact days back to the list of

dates let's give the second argument

which is underscore diff number of days

or count third argument is the step

which is required in duration so we are

going to use a function hash duration

which can provide us the duration so

function hash duration require four

argument the first argument is day and

that is what is most important for us so

one day 0 hours 0 minutes and 0 seconds

and now we are done this is the last

step in our course so copy this and

return it using the in so inore date is

going to return return the list of dates

let's click on the create to complete

this query now we got the required list

of date we can scroll and check it out

all the dates are available here we can

sort it descending to see what is the

end date which we wanted but every time

we do anything it adds an step as we

don't need this step app I'm going to

remove it by pressing on the cross

button let's convert this list into the

table so right click Advan editor and

then we will enter here underscore date

table was the last step it was giving

error means last step was not closed so

now let's use table from list

function what I've done is actually

copied it from the last one so table

from list now last step is dates list of

dates which I need list of dates then

splitter do split by nothing that's

because we don't want to split null null

extra values. error there the argument

which need the main argument is list and

then splitter. split by nothing there is

a way we need to split this list we want

to give that we can use but here we

don't want to by anything we are giving

other two arguments we are giving

nothing and then exra value error and

let's return this now if I still return

the date it will not convert it into a

table let date table click on create few

things we have to change so first of all

using the left top Corner change the

data type to date so data type of this

column should be date so let's convert

that into date now double click inside

the column to rename it rename it to

date date table required many columns

which I'm going to add now one by one to

do that we can use the add colum tab

inside the add column we have custom

column that I'm going to use again and

again to add new columns whenever I need

a new column in this table so let me add

the First Column by clicking on custom

column the column I want to add is start

of month means I want to get the first

date of the month we have a function

available for that the function is date

do start of month and this function

start of month require only one argument

that is date and based on that it can

give us the start date of the month one

argument is needed to give us the start

of the month or the first date of the

month let's press okay so we got a new

column start of month which is giving us

the first date of the month we need to

correct the data type of this so we can

add the third argument to the add column

and there we can use date. type it

requires a type to convert it into the

correct type and let's press enter to

get the correct data type let's quickly

add one more column and the column this

time I would like to add is end of month

I want to get the last date of the month

very simple function date dot end of

month which requires only one argument

that is date which I'm going to provide

it close the parenthesis and now I can

get end of month date let's press okay

to get it the data type of this column

is also not correct and as you know we

need to add the third argument let me

copy it from the previous column and add

it as the third argument comma date.

type to get the correct data type so

data type is corrected time has come to

add more columns add the new column and

the new column is start of quarter means

the first date of quarter is what we

need here so function we are going to

use is date dot start of quarter very

simple function it also required only

one argument at that argument is date so

we'll provide the date argument close

the parenthesis and this function will

going to give us the start of the

quarter date click on done to get the

new column the new column is the start

of the quarter date and now I would like

to add one more column and the column

will be end of quarter means the last

date of quarter let's quickly add a new

column end of qtr means end of quarter

and we are going to use a function date

do and of quarter again this function

require only one argument and that

argument is date so let's provide the

date argument and click on okay to get

the new column so now let's look at the

data look at the very first row we are

getting the start of the month and end

of the month start of the quarter and

end of the quarter for that particular

given date we scroll down go to another

month we are getting different start of

the month and end of the month but as of

now we are getting the same quarter

start date and same quarter end date if

we scroll down further till the April

month we will be able to see a different

start of the quarter and end of the

quarter so for the two dayses you can

compare the quarter is also changing

let's go ahead and add start start of

year and end of year so first I'm going

to add start of year and the function

I'm going to use for that is date dot

start of year unlike the Dex function

which can take a second argument for the

financial start date the date do start

of year function only takes one argument

that is date and it always give you the

calender year start date it doesn't take

the second argument let's press okay to

get the new column you can scroll and

validate the different ears which you

have got but the easier way is the click

on the down arrow and see all the values

you can use press cancel to come out

let's add one more column and this time

we are going to add end of year the

function which I'm going use here is

date do end of year so date do start off

here I copied I'm going to change it to

end again this function also take only

one argument

it doesn't take end of year

argument so let's press okay to complete

what end of year you can just click on

the values and use load more all the end

of

year uh for financial year we have to

write down a manual code so can write

down final code so I will tell you how

to write down FY start want a financial

year that starts in April what does that

mean that means that if the date of the

month is less than four than the year is

started in the last year otherwise the

year has started in the current year and

I'm going to use all these things inside

the hash J function so in the first

argument I will have the logic for the

year the second argument would be month

which is four and the third argument day

which is one this means any date between

1st April and 31st March of the next

year will have the same start date of

first April of this year so let's start

coding the formula with if now after if

we don't record parenthesis date the

month I want a financial year which

start from April so if it is less than

four it means the year was started in

the last year then my year started in

the last year isn't it so date do year

of date only one argument it takes is

minus one as the date of year is the

date of year so if it is four months and

above it is the same year where the year

started only year logic how would I

convert this into date for that I'm

going to use the hash date function in

hash date the first argument is here

which we already sorted out form of four

fora one and we copy this and click on

okay now you got the year which is

starting Financial year how do you get

the end it almost similar formula go to

the custom column and

FY and date of the same formula but the

thing here is here if it is less than

four it is ending in the same year but

if it is greater than four or greater

than or equal to 4 + 1 it is going to

end in the next year and that is not 41

it is 331 so it is going to end in the

next year if it is 4 month or onwards if

it's April which is my start of year I'm

going get my financial year end in the

next year March before April whatever

months are there they are ending in the

this year only March of this year let's

click on okay to get the new column time

to focus on we columns we will create

start of week and for that we also have

a function let's start with a new column

start of week and we are going to use a

date function date do start of week it

takes two argument the first argument it

takes is a date column and the second

argument is how do you want to start

your week zero means Sunday one means

Monday and so on

click on okay to add the column so you

got the Sunday as the starting point

let's do Monday because first January

2018 is a Monday and when we go give one

it's for a Monday start I would like to

add another column and this colum should

provide me a week day number so let's

add a column and this column I'm going

to rename as day of week I'm going to

use the function date. day of week week

and this function can take up to two

argument the first argument it take is a

date as of now let me create this column

with only one argument so it is giving

me the values one means Monday and zero

means Sunday if needed I can go ahead

and change this by providing the

additional argument into this function

so it wrs as zero as Sunday one as

Monday and if you don't want you can

actually go ahead and change it by

providing another argument but I think

we have find it with that but what we

can do is we can gave the names also so

there is a function to get the name also

we'll go to add columns custom column

just create the column weekday name this

column is going to return us weekday

name the function which we are going to

use is date dot day of week name and day

of week name function takes one argument

that is date and using this argument it

is going to return the weekday name so

let's click on okay and now we are

getting the weekday name like Monday

Tuesday Wednesday and as you can see 1st

January 2018 is starting from Monday

same way end of week is also very simple

so let's add a new custom column for end

of week add column custom column and

let's rename this column as end of week

and the function which we are going to

use for this is date dot end of week and

this function can also take two argument

the first argument is date comma the

second argument is one means the week

will start on Monday and end on Sunday

so it is ending on the Sunday the 7th

January this means we have having a week

from Monday to Sunday this was little

difficult in Dex sometime back but now

we have arguments which is making it

simple index

also now we are all sorted on the start

dates and end date of month quarter and

year as well as week time has come that

we start creating the formatted column

and I'm going to start with a column

which is going to give me month year in

the text format so month year

and I'm going to use date dot two text

function and it can take two arguments

the first argument is date and the

second argument is the format and here

the format is going to be mmm in capital

3M and then 4 y y y y y this is going to

give me a format like J hyphen

2018 so let me click on okay and we got

January February March April this will

lot sort because as we know we need a

sort column if you have a month year in

a format gen from March it doesn't

understand that so we always need

sortable format so we'll go to the

custom column again we month year sort

also so month year sort how do we get

that now we need date do year we'll get

the year of the date we multiply it by

100 to that we add date dot month again

this one takes one argument that is date

and it's going to provide me the month

number this combination is going to

create a sortable month year which can

be used as a sort column for the month

year name which is in text format the

same manner you can also add the quarter

details using the functions available

for the quarter in power query so you

have seen you know how easy it is also

in power query if you know these date

functions you can simply go ahead and

create it table now there are many other

things which are available in date

functions like is current day is current

month is current quarter and those can

help you in creating this quarter this

month this year those help you to create

the columns which help you in defaulting

the current month qur quarter and

current year into the slicer now you

have learned some basic date functions

using which you can create the date

table but the date function does not

stop top here power query provides you a

lot of date functions which you can use

to enrich your date table and do many

other operations which are required I

have discussed quite few of them on my

channel in different different videos so

you can go ahead and watch those videos

and enhance your skills around the date

functions and solve many other power

query problems using the date functions

we had a lot of formulas with deck and

one of the things which we have

discussed in the past is there are

scenarios where you will not be able to

achieve few things using the connected

table especially when you want to go

beyond the boundary of what you have

selected what happens in case of power

ba what you selected becomes your

boundary these if you have filtered

something from slicer or filter that's

your boundary and you are not able to go

beyond that boundary within that

boundary you can get all the value so

let's say if I select a month I can't

get 12 months as a trend I can get

within the same month the 12 month value

but I can't get a TR of a 12 month so

how to handle that now to handle that we

have something known as disconnected

table now the disconnected table can

give you a solution and also the table

with the inactive joint can also give

you a solution so there are two ways you

can achieve this problem one where the

slicer is on disconnected table and

second where the AIS or the group by is

on on a table which is disconnected or a

table which is joined on an inactive

joint means definitely you require two

tables in a scenario so what I've done

here is basically to do this I would use

this file which we are using in end to

end and the 12r with visual calculation

is something which I want to use now in

this model if you remember we have

connected our date table the date table

is already connected with the sales

table but date Auto is not connected and

what I've also done here is in the date

Auto I added the monthier column and

monthier S column and I also sorted the

month year correctly I made sure the

monthier is sorted in the date table

also because monthier is a text column

the Sorting need to let me add a new

page and tell you what I need is I'll

take a slicer from month year I'll also

create a visual on month year let me

create a line visual on month year and

let me bring a measure net now you can

see I'm getting all the month if I go to

the slicer and select any particular

month let's say December 19 I'm not

getting 12 months after November 19 I'm

not getting 12 so you say okay why don't

you go ahead and create the rolling

formula you'll get it so let me do one

thing I have already have a rolling

formula so rolling two is there let me

copy the rolling two and create it into

rolling well for dates and period we

have learned this in time intelligence

how can we do that oh I have only two

formula I copied that and let me past it

into a new Maj and call it rolling 12

and what I'm doing here is net dates in

Period date of date the first argument

Max date of date is the second argument

from where should I start how many

period I should go I'm saying minus 12

because I'm starting with the Max 12

months this is 12 months of formula

rolling 12 but rolling 12 what it is

going to do here is when I add it here

it is not going to give me 12 months of

track for that particular month it is

going to give me 12 months of values and

you as you can see this value is pretty

high compared to n you might have

understood it is summing up the past

this is the 12 months of TR so one of

the solution which we tell for this one

is basic you don't have this slicer on

the connected table so let me remove

this you have this slicer or a

disconnected table so disconnected or

independent table we also call it

sometime independent I'll go to the

disconnected table date AO and in that

auto I'll again bring in this slicer

monthier and this monthier slicer let we

select any value as of now when I select

any value let's say December 2019 you

don't see any impact because it is not

connected with the table so it's not

going to impact let me duplicate this

visual let me remove the majors now what

I want here is I want this lier to be

considered by this visual but for that I

need to create a new major so I'm going

to click on new major from the Home tab

and in this new major what I'm going to

do is I'm going to consider the range of

this slicer now this slicer is not

connected so it's not going to impact so

it's not going to restrict my date range

because it is disconnected so I can take

a date of reference from it and it is

not going to restrict me 1 month or 2

month or 12 months because it is not

joined with my sales table so it is

having no impact there so let me do one

thing let me create a formula red 12 and

first thing which I want to do is I want

the date which has been selected here so

beore max equals to Maxx all selected

this is how we got the max date of date

Auto table all selected date Auto and I

need date of date Auto I get the date

Auto date so I got this into a variable

now what I'm going to do is based on

this date I want to create 12 months Str

so I need a state which is also a

minimum date so I got a Max date how do

I get minimum date EO month is a

function EO month and I can take Max uh

1 minus one will take one month Backus

12 minut should take me 12 months back

and plus one it should give me 12 months

of trend or so we got a minimum value we

got a maximum value now this date range

is having no impact on my calculations

right now so what I want to do is return

calculate net and remember there is no

other filter required on the date table

right now so we assume there is no

filter and we don't need to ignore any

filter right now so now what I will to

do is I will push my fter on the date

table date of date is greater than

equals to underscore minimum and date of

date is less than equals toore Max so

date of date is greater than equal to

Min and date of date is less than equal

to and we are filtering we are not

putting any all or something which is

restricting so trend of 12 so let's get

this trend of 12 I have pressed enter so

that the formula get committed I could

have also pressed the commit button so

let me drag this trend 12 into the

second visual now I'm getting a 12 month

Str as you can see I'm getting a 12

month Str this is going to work only

when you filter from the Independent the

moment you filter something from

connected table it will not give you the

12 months Trend but you always L us one

challenge the rest of the visuals and

the majors are getting filtered from the

connected table and this one is only

getting filtered from the disconnected

table so it is really difficult to

manage it on the page so how can we get

it filtered from the connected

table and if I make this in sync then

this visual is not going to obey so then

I will again have a problem so then how

do we do that so to do that what we are

going to do here is basically so we need

to make sure that the slicer is on the

connected table and axis is on the

disconnected table right now it is

reverse the slicer is on the

disconnected and the AIS is on the

connected table

to make this happen we will add an

additional inactive join in our data

model so let me do one thing let me join

the sales date of the date table with

the date Auto and this will to create a

join we are going to create a single

directional join the date table many to

one join with the Dat Auto table but

that is

inactive there is a join but that join

is not filtering right now that was the

inactive join means and it should be

shown as dotted dotted means the join is

inactive

now we come back we don't see any issues

so it means that I can keep my

disconnected table with an inactive join

also now what we want we want this

slicer the above slicer the month year

slicer to work and to just to understand

this better let me go back to the date

Auto and rename this column month year

indd double click rename and enter let

me come back to the realation so right

now things are working let's rename the

page as disconnect Ed slicer as we are

using a disconnected slicer here and Poe

that I'll duplicate a page to take the

next case so now we have disconnected

slicer page on which the disconnected

slicer is working let's duplicate this

and now we want the connected slicer now

we don't want disconnected slicer so

what I want here is basically on this

page a connected date slicer I don't

want disconnected date slicer so I can

delete it and only keep the connected

one okay so what I'm going to do is

because you want a connected slicer and

in the connected slicer you SEL let's

say November and you need a 12 months of

trend which is not coming on the visual

let me first of all remove this major

and also remove this AIS now what I'm

going to do is I'm going to bring this

AIS from the Independent table so

monthier independ now when I bring this

AIS from the Independent table and let's

say if I try to bring in net the major

which we have here on the y- axis you

see a flat line the reason for that

because joinor is not going to work so

now let's we do go ahead and create one

more measure from the home t I'm going

to create one more major very similar to

what we have created few minutes back

but this time we are going to calculate

our date ranges based on the connected

date table not based on the disconnected

date

table I'm going to create friend well

disconnected the AIS is disconnected let

me be very clear on that now again I'm

going to create variable Max and the

variable Max is going to be Max X all

selected date date of date I'm going to

again have a variable where underscore

Min and Min is going to be EO month

uncore Max -2 + 1 return I going to

return I'll use calculate net how I want

to filter filter let me filter date Auto

date Autos date of date is less than

equals to underscore Max and dat autos

date should be greater than equal to

underscore Min let's try this out there

is still one problem you might have

identified that where is the joint

disconnected isn't it so date Autos date

of date is less than equal to Max and N

double M perc date of Auto is greater

than equal to minimum okay let's Commit

This formula and let's bring this inside

the visualization now still it is giving

us a flat line how to get rid of that

Flat Line we have not activated the

relationship so that it can work on the

axis so let's try to use use

relationship use relationship is a

function which can help us in activating

an inactive relationship so let's take

use relationship the table date Autos

date date Autos date with the sales date

of sales table should get activated we

are asking it to activate the

relationship now and the moment we do we

are seeing only one dot why so this

formula needs modification the what

modification this formula need is that

this date table is still need to give me

the 12 months of value the date table is

still giving me one month of value so

there is no benefit of you know putting

this used relationship in action what I

need here is basically rolling 12 months

when I rolling 12 months do I really

need because now I'm getting 12 months

of data do I need need this filter so

let's check it out without this filter

so now we have a rolling 12 which is

based on 12 months of rolling and then

we are saying activate the relationship

of independent table and now if you can

see we are getting the 12 months of data

let's move it to December and we are

getting data of December let's move it

to August September we have data from

October so as now you can see the AIS

which is coming from disconnected or

independent table is getting so you need

a rolling formula now that rolling

formula you just create a use

relationship with a disconnected table

and use that disconnected table on the

axis and then you can have the

relationship so disconnected is

basically inative disconnected it's not

completely disconnected so inactive

disconnected table you activate that

relationship and then your rolling will

become your 12 months of trend and in

this case what would happen basically is

that you have the exis which is on

disconnected table so it is your same

slicer your connected slicer or your

joined table slicer which is working so

you don't have to change everything on

your page you order to create many major

it is only for the visual where you need

this 12 months you can use the

disconnected or the independent table in

the axis with with such a small formula

and this formula is going to help you

out just to compare the the values of

the September it is 245k and the value

of September is 245k the numbers are

matching it means it is displaying the

correct values so you can go ahead and

try this out and there are different

permutations and combination which are

possible because of disconnected tables

like accept is one of them whenever we

have a value and we don't want to use

that value want values other than that

there are so many use cases around that

which can be done because of this

disconnected or independent table you

can watch all of those in the previous

video of the channel just search for

independent or disconnected keywords on

the Channel videos and you will get the

list of the videos which are talking

about disconnected table or independent

table how can we convert a single table

into a star schema now this single table

is the very common file which is

available on my GitHub account which is

beginner tutorial series file which I

also used in my beginner tutorial this

is the retail file which is having the

entire data in one single file and you

wanted to know how can we convert into a

star scha in this video what I'm going

to do is I'm going to give you the video

which I've recorded for that particular

Series so that you can take the

advantage here also on the YouTube the

purpose of this video is to convert the

single file into a star schema so first

of all Let Me Explain you that Excel

file which we have so this is the file

which is known as retail data on

beginner tutorial file this file

contains order ID order number order

date which are the order attributes then

it has a dimension which is a part of

this table only which is item id item

number category subcategory sub

subcategory and brand then I have unit

price which is the sales price quantity

how much we have sold discount

percentage it is actual discount

percentage so we don't have to divide it

by 100 then we have gross sales discount

net sales which is known as sales unit

cost the cost which you are paying for

this item then we have requested date

delivery date this also contain the

geography item attribute which is city

state region and location ID but not all

four can be a part of a single Dimension

it also have some single column

Dimensions like order type payment

method and customer ID so using this

single Excel sheet we can do the

complete analysis on powerbi but we know

the star schema works best on powerbi so

what we are going to do is we are going

to convert this single file into a star

schema and I'm going to Showcase you all

the steps for that what we have done so

far is we have learned some basic power

query transformation now time has come

that we apply those transformation onto

a data set and this data set is

basically a single table and this single

table we wanted to break into a star

schema so how to do the various

transformation to convert this table

into a star

schema and to do that what I'm going to

do is I'm going to go back to the GitHub

and from the GitHub I'm going to take

this file for Winer tutorial series

youtube. XLS again I already opened that

file and I'm now going to right click on

the raw copy link I'll take this link

and I'll go back to Power VI power ba I

click on get data web H this URL click

on okay it will show me only one sheet

and I'm going to pick up that particular

sheet and after that I will click on

transform data this will open the data

onto the power query mode and we can

directly transform it without loading it

this data is a very special data because

all the attributes whether they

Dimension or measures are available in

one single table I want to create fact

and dimension out of this single table

I'll tell you what all this table

contains this particular data is having

order ID order date item id category

subcategory sub subcategory brand unit

price quantity discount percentage unit

cost

state region location ID order type

payment me and customer I want to create

multiple Dimension tables out of it but

how can I do that what happens when I

want to create a dimension on a single

stuff like order type or payment method

then I do have options like you know add

as a new query or a single column but I

do not have similar option for multiple

columns for that we need to explore the

option of duplicating the table to do

that I can right click on the sheet and

I have two option duplic D at and

reference duplicate will duplicate and

it will take whatever steps have been

performed till now it is just duplicate

this code and after that there is no

connection between the two table but

what would happen in case of reference

it's going to create a reference but it

will add the reference to this table

which sheet one whatever it is the

advantage of referen is to not the data

for once and then it's going to process

rest of the things but in case of toate

because it's going to not the data again

and again so every time you take it it

will lower the data for all the

duplication you have created so if you

have created four duplicated is going to

load the data four times let me show you

what happens when I created a duplicate

copy so if you see the duplicate copy if

you see in the sheet one look at the

steps in the sheet one and go and look

at the steps in the sheet two also they

are save and if you click in the source

you will see it is getting data from the

same place but now if I right click and

use reference you will see that it is

reference in the sheet one but the

disadvantage with that is if I go ahead

and do let's say one operation here

let's say if I go back and create the

gross column which we always creating so

I go and create a custom column and let

me call it as gross amount for this

gross amount equals quantity multiply by

unit price click on okay to add gross

mode is available here in the sheet one

but if I go to sheet three and you

scroll you also see gross am it's a

reference table it's going to get

everything so to avoid this what I'm

going to do is I'm not going to do

anything with the sheet one so let me

delete whatever I've

created so I'm deleting the queries I go

to the sheet one I'll also delete the

edit column let me rename it as sales

undor base I'm not going to do anything

with this table I want to create item

table so but for that what I'm going to

do is I need this field item category

subcategory sub subcategory and brand

that constitute my item table what I'm

going to do is I'm going to cck a

reference table our reference table is

created now let me rename it as item

item query has been created which is

going to become item table I'll select

item id category id subcategory id sub

category ID and BR if and click all

these columns are selected I'll right

click and I'll use remove other columns

remove whatever other columns are there

other than what I've selected po that I

click on Item ID or I click here on the

corner and after that I can use remove

duplicates now it will remove duplicates

for the table and now I need to check

here is am I getting the listing item

IDs or not because if Item ID is not

disting then it's not going to become my

primary key so what I'm going to do here

is I'll go here to The View and here let

me add colum distribution and you see

thousand distinct and th unique let me

click on the bottom and use entire data

set and you can see 264 264 is unique

and distinct it means Item ID is my

primary key or unique key I don't need

index column for uniqueness I can use

item ID to join with my fact table let's

add another dimension now again I go

back I duplicate this using reference

and let me call it as geography and inph

I want to bring the column city state

region and location I selected all of

them right click remove other column I

click on the top col and I'll use the

option R duplicates and let's wait for

the location ID stats here you see there

is a problem and the problem is see

there are only 75 unique but there are

299 distinct it means not a primary the

cities are 71 unique there is some

problem and the problem is caused by the

region column it is not allowing us to

get the location as unique column let's

go to the remove other columns Tab and

from there we will remove region as a

column and once we remove this region as

a column we can press enter and check

for the results and once we go to the

remove duplicate step we will see that

now location ID will become a primary

key or a unique key and now you can see

299 distinct and 299 unique it means

location ID can be used as a primary key

or unique key and it can also be used as

a joint column to join with the fact

table two Dimension tables are done and

now I can go back and look at the data

now I'm not B bothered about order ID

and Order date but I would like to

create some single column Dimension so

let's go ahead I'll tell you how to

create dimension for order type and

payment method for order type and

payment method now these tables don't

have their own IDs also so I need ID ALS

and region also one of the contender is

region so right click on this add add as

a new query now again when I add as a

new quer query is going to take all

these steps so this is what I don't want

I don't want this this is one of the

best method to do it but again you see

that all the steps are repeating this is

what we don't want so we go ahead and

remove this and instead of that we will

only go to the reference and there we'll

select one column let's say region in

this case remove other columns and then

simply because it's only one column we

can remove duplicates by clicking on the

column duplicates are removed now here I

want to have an ID column and that idid

column I again want back in my fact

table when I going to create a fact so

what I'm going to do for that so I'm

going to add index column go to add

column and there index column starting

from one I added an index the same

exercise I need to repeat for order type

and payment method but right now I'll

just keep it till this example let me

call this table as region so now what I

wanted to do is now this region has a

new ID and I would like populating back

and then I'll get the payment ID then

I'll get the order type ID I would like

to populate those all let let's start

working on the fat table so first of all

let's go to the sales base you click on

the sales base you go to the Home tab

you'll use much queries much queries is

new and I'm going to create a fact table

now and here I'm going to join with the

region base join would be the region

column region to region it would be a

left outer joint always prefer outer

joint in the favor of the base table

ideally it should match everything

unless we have null values so let me go

ahead and click on okay now when you

scroll on the right you see there is a

table now expand that uncheck this use

original column and we should have

renamed this index column we have not

renamed so we are going to rename it

here now so let me add this index column

and let me call this index column as

region ID now this I can use to join

back with my region table I will go back

into the region table and also try to

rename index as region ID now once I

rename it as a region ID the step which

you have already added into the merge

table might not work as expected so we

might have to edit the merge step I

click on the setting and I replace it

with region ID it is giving me a

question mark so I don't want that

question mark to continue here and I'll

delete this rename column and now you

can see the question mark has been

removed I got the correct name region ID

now I would like to rename this merge

one table as my sales fact table how do

I add the other things let's say if I

want to have payment how do I'm going to

add the payment ID here am I going to

create another version of this table or

I'm going to merge with this so I'm

going to merge with this so let's take

one example I will go back to the sales

based table right click and create one

more reference of it you go to the

payment method right click remove other

columns then again right click remove

duplicates then go to add columns add

index column from one and let's call it

payment method

ID now I need this ID in my T fact

before that let's call this table as

payment method now we want to merch the

payment method with sales fact so what

we are going to do here is we'll click

on the sales fact go to the one tab now

instead of much queries is you I'm going

to use merch queries inside the merch

queries you we will bring in the payment

method query also and we'll click on

payment method payment method and this

again is going to be left join click on

okay scroll to the right now you can see

payment method uh appearing as a column

and the column C is table which we need

to expand expand that we only need the

payment method ID we're going to take

that click on okay our fact is ready now

our facts and dimensions are ready and

I'm going to click on close and

apply and it is evaluating all the

tables so you can see it started on the

query for sales base item geography

rating connections loading data to the

model and the sales base table is

loading and respective other tables

which are dependent on that are also

getting the data the sales fact is still

not loaded because it is dependent on

all other tables like payment method

region now it started loading and you

might have seen that you know sales base

is not moving at all and dependent fact

table can load you might have also seen

that other tables were not loading as

many rows as the sales based table

and this is the advantage of taking the

reference now we'll go to the model view

I would like to show you how to create a

model in such scenario so because we

have the setting of detecting the

relationship it has detected the

relationship but those relationships are

not correct what I'm going to do here is

I'm going to delete those relationships

and going to create all the relationship

again one thing which I'm also going to

do here is I'm going to hide the sales

base I don't want to see that table now

I'm not needing that so I close the eye

here so it will be hidden now sales fact

is my main table payment method

geography item are around it so how do

we want to connect Item ID with item id

where is our item table so item id Item

ID on the item ID is is fact item id

equal to item id many to one single

directional join it is already

suggesting that so let's do that then we

will create region ID to region ID again

man to one single directional then we

have payment method payment method to

payment method this should be one to

many single Direction because we direct

from the payment method site

and now we want to connect with location

ID so location ID to location ID one too

many single directional click on save so

now we got all of our joints sorted out

this is the schema which has been

created let's save this file so this is

the star schema we have created from a

single file and this is very similar to

what we were creating using sales data

used in video or sales data used in

fabric file that was a perfect star

schema and the four tables were given

but here we have transformed to create a

star schema it has almost similar kind

of column the discount percentage here

is actual discount percentage so you

don't need to divide it by 100 you can

create column in power query you can

create column index you have the

additional Dimension which are coming in

order type customer you can also enhance

those like in customer you can add the

customer name as appending of customer

ID like customer space the ID that what

you can create either index or power

these are few of the things which you

can do and create the schema and try out

everything which we have done during the

this series or video and repeat that on

this particular data model and this data

is much better data and just to give an

example in visualization if you go here

and bring it from the item brand you see

some of the actual brand names which has

been created in this data and that is

why I always say this data is much

better data than the data which we have

it do have lot of variety I do have a

better version of this data which

contain little bit of more data and for

that you can ping me in the comments I

can give you a Dropbox link from there

you can take this file and load so this

is the way you use the power query

transformation to create a star schema

we had one table and from there we

created star schema there are scenarios

where you might have a snowflake schema

or a relational schema and from there

also you can merge and create star

schema so go ahead and try out those

different combination in this video we

are going to discuss how can you append

all the Excel sheets available into one

table so the case here is that I have

Excel where I have multiple sheets and

all these sheets I want to append into

one single table even if a new sheet

comes in I would like to put it into the

same table now how to get data for this

one so data for this example which I'm

going to discuss is available at my

GitHub account github.com Amit chander

pv/ powerb you can get the upend sheet.

XLS in this video I'm going to use the

download version of this file but I have

told you many times how can you directly

connect to this Excel sheet without

downloading it what you have to do is

you to click on this upend sheet.

XLS and I'm going to give this URL to

you which is the raw URL not the on the

top so I'm going to post the URL which

is right click on this copy link address

so in case you're directly reaching to

my GitHub account you have to open this

file and on the ra right click and copy

the link and this is the link you can

directly use as the web link in your

powerb desktop or web API Link in that

manner you will be able to directly get

this data onto the powerbi without

downloading it into your

desktop so let's understand the use case

with an example in the Excel sheet and

then we will try it out on the powerbi

desktop so basically what I have I have

these three item sheet and I want to

combine them and tomorrow there could be

a fourth one and if there is a fourth

one my requirement is that fourth one

should also get combined so in this case

what happen is if I try to get the

append idea the normal append idea where

I append the table how do I add the

fourth table do I need to modify the

code again and again so I need to have

some generic solution which can actually

help me so let's go and try out what

actually we do in powerbi so I came to

powerbi and powerbi what I would like to

do is basically I want to import this

exess sheet so in the center of the

power VI screen I have this option

import Excel I do have import Excel

option here also in the Home tab and

under the get data also again I will get

it the option I will use this import

option from the middle and select the

sheet upend queries and click on open

now once I do that I'll get all the

sheets and what is the usual ways that

click on all these three check check

check so when you check you get the you

are taking that inside the system and

when you simply click you just R the

data in instead of using the load data

or load I'll use the transform data

because I want to go to Power query and

combine this data isn't it that's what I

wanted so let me go to transform data if

I go to transform data and what usual

apparent method is there and let me

bring the power query on this screen if

I want to combine these three I need to

take that usual append method isn't it

so I need to go to you know append

queries append queries as new or upend

queries and then I need to say two or

more table and then I say item two and

item three

I click on the ADD and I do that and it

is going to append all three sheets SL

queries into the item one query or table

that's not something which I wanted

because let's go ahead and add something

here let's go ahead and add a new sheet

here I also want the header so let me go

back and take the row from the top and

paste it here on this sheet now I have

the header let me change the values 41

to 56 and 40 47 to

57 we can use this sheet let's keep

everything as same now I got one

additional sheet now if I go and refresh

this

data I don't get the sheet for so it

means there is no benefit of this so let

me do one thing let me discard all these

changes and do it again so I discard all

the

changes I come out I say discard all the

changes and I'll do it

again and now also so what I need to do

is I also need to delete the sheet let

me delete this

sheet and save it let me go back and

import the upend sheets Excel workbook

again and this time I'm only going to

select item one and I'm going to leave

out the other sheets with only sheet one

I'll click on transform data to reach

power query and start the transformation

again because I press transform data I

reach power query in power query I also

remove these steps now you can observe

that I'm seeing all the three sheets as

my source and the data is available

inside the data column if I go here you

can see that I see a table and that the

challenge with this table here is

basically the headers are not

promoted so I have the table which is

having the data but headers are not

promoted I can expand it I I can expand

it here and you will be very happy to

see that all the data is together but

what is happening here is this headers

are NSC then you will say okay we can

search the column name and then they

remove those rows and then do it but

what happens sometime you might have a

scenario where the column name which you

are taking might also exist in data so

for that what we are going to do is if

you are follower of the beginner series

you might have remembered we learned

function promote

headers and using that function promote

header we can actually do a promote

header in a table we are going to do is

today we are going to use that power quy

function so to do that what I'm going to

do is I'm going to go to the add columns

and I'm going to add a new column

remember here my complete data is

available as a table in the data column

in each row and if I click on the empty

space I can preview the

data always click on the empty space

don't click on the name otherwise it

will add an step let me add a new column

data 1 and inside this data one column I

will use the function table do promote

headers this function require one

argument and that argument is the table

for which it is going to promote the

headers means going to make the first

row as the header let me add data column

as the argument for this function I

double clicked on the name so once I

double clicked on the name it also

appear I can also type it will also come

in that case either I type I double

click in both the cases it will work so

now it's going to create one more Colum

column I created one more column now

look at this column for this column

headers are already promoted for each of

the row as of now there are too many

columns here and I can delete them I can

even delete the data column so let me

select the column which I doesn't requir

other than the name of the sheet which I

might require for the future references

I have selected all the columns which I

don't need and now I can use the option

remove column and remove all these

columns from the

table now I'll go and expand it is

suggesting me all these columns and I

say okay and then I can detect the data

type and change it so now I'm able to

expand and get the data together and my

all data is now lying together the

question arise will it take a new sheet

when we add it into the Excel so let's

go back to the Excel and try to add a

sheet and see what happens let me copy

couple of rows for the new Excel sheet

and click on the plus button and I will

call this as item 4 sheet and this item

four sheet I will add those couple of

rows and modify the data so item id 56

and item id 57 I'm adding here in the

sheet 4 save it and go back to the power

query and now we need to refresh this

data so let me click on refresh preview

you can observe immediately that item

four and its related data has come let's

go to the source and now we can see item

four there item 4 is getting processed

in each step after that it means the

data of the item four is carried forward

without doing any changes in the code of

power query if needed I can correct the

data types or I can simply go ahead and

click on close and apply and I will now

get this data into my powerbi desktop

and I can save the file and move on in

our journey to learn power query let's

learn power query by taking an example

and in this process we are going to

learn few power query functions so what

we wanted to do here is we have a text

which has certain number comma separated

and we want to create another text where

these numbers are sorted so let me take

you through an example so I have this

string where I have 7A 5A 6A 10A 11a 2A

4A 3A 8A 9 one so these are just

randomly placed here but I want

ascending sorted text 1 comma 2A 3 comma

4A 5A 6A 7A 8A 9A 10A 11 in a sorted

ascending order but it is a text in the

given order I want want these numbers so

how can I do that and to do that what we

are going to do is we are going to go to

Power query and solve this problem now

to solve this problem again from this

series learn powerbi I'm going to take n

to n14 bbx file and I am here on the

powerbi in that file in that file I'll

go to the Home tab then I'll go to

transform data transform data I have

reached transform data and in inside

transform data I want to add those

numbers which I have told you so I

already copied those number to get those

number inside a table I'm going to take

help from enter data now enter data is

something which is also available

outside power query you might have seen

that inside the reporting view

also let me click on the enter data

inside the Home tab it opens up a popup

inside that I'm going to give that

string and I'm going to name this column

text one and the table is thought

text I'll click on okay now this table

will get loaded inside the power query

and will be shown on the left hand side

as a query now the moment it get loaded

you can see it is showing a number and

we were never expecting a number and

this is because there is a change data

type step which has been added by power

query thinking that it's a number but

it's not a number we know it's a text we

don't want to perform this change data

type step I'm going to delete this step

from the right hand side and now I got

the way I wanted the number without a

data type number so it's a text data

type and this is the correct thing I

have what I wanted to do first of all to

sort this text into a string I need it

into a list format because in list I

have a function list. sort maybe in a

table format but here it is easy to do

all the operations in the list what I'm

going to do is first of all I'm going to

add a

column in the tab add column I click on

custom column to add a new column and in

this column I will first of all convert

this into a

list so I need the sorted text column as

a first step I will do this op operation

which is text. split text. split

function can take two argument and

convert a text into a list by splitting

it based on the separator so argument

one is a text argument two is a

separator and the outcome is a list so

what is my first argument text one and

the second argument is comma which I'm

going to give inside the double Cotes

and let me click on okay to get the

result results now you will see that I

got a

list and you can see this is the list

which I wanted and always remember

whenever you get these list or table and

you want to view them or preview them

into the bottom always click on the

empty space don't click on the list

because if you click on the list it will

add a step and it will become part of

your query and then you have to revert

it to come back so now it's created that

list so let me delete so I'm back to the

same place this is my list now I can

sort it using list. sort and once I sort

it you will realize I have one problem

now onwards I will keep on putting a

function on top of another function to

get the nire output so let's put on top

of it the function list dot sort I got

the function list do sort it requires

two argument the first argument is the

list and the second argument is the

optional comparison criteria

and you might have realized I have given

a space the reason for giving a space

before I selected list. sort is that it

should not replace the text. splits and

let me click on okay so we got a sorted

list let's have a look at

it so now what we have done is we have

used this list. sort function which can

take a list and it can sort it but you

can see this list is sorted in a text

format it is not being sorted as a

number because the list which you have

inside is actually a list of x x. split

converts into a list of text then how do

I convert them into the number so it

means before I sort it I need to convert

them into a number how do I do that

let's open the formula using the right

hand side setting icon to do that I need

to use another function and the function

I need to use is list dot transform

list. transform function and transform

the list based on a function the first

argument of this. transform is a list

and second argument is transform

function so what I need to do is I need

to use this transform function and for

that I need to Loop and for to loop I

need to use a keyword which is each and

I can use this each on underscore but

what I want on this underscore I want to

convert this text each text which is

underscore into a number so we have

function number from text and inside

that I can use this

underscore which will get converted into

the number now so let's look at it what

we got now so we got list. transform the

first argument is a list which we

created so the second argument is each

mean which is the looping function

number from text so from the text I'm

going to get the number and what is that

text which is underscore which is the

each element of the list we are closing

the list and let's try to close the

list. sort also no syntax error let's

click on okay now we got the list again

there's no error so let's click here now

you can see it is 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

so now the list is properly sorted in

the numeric order now we got a list so

we need to create a comma separated text

from that so now we need a function

which can concatenate this list let's

edit the formula once

again so let's look at one function text

do combine what does it do text. combine

can take two arguments first argument is

a list which is a text list and the

second argument is a nullable separator

it means the sep operator which is going

to be used when we combine and create a

concatenated text this function returns

text but there is a challenge it need a

list of text let me showcase you what

happened if I don't transform this list

as of now for first argument is a list

which is right now a number list and

second argument is a separator comma

which I have given here and let's try

out does it work does text. combine work

on the number list click on okay and it

start giving error and the reason for

the error is the type is not correct

right now it's a list of numbers so we

need to do the same operation in the

reverse manner which we have done some

time back the list. transform previously

has transformed this list into a number

list now the same operation need to

transform it into the XT so I have moved

down a code little bit so that I can

only understand this function so now

here I need list. transform again so I'm

going to use list. transform and on

list. transform now I need to do

operation which is basically again this

each

operation but not from text I now need

to convert into two text so number two

text is the operation I want to perform

and that should close my transform after

transform comma so that I give the

second argument of text. combine so what

is happening here is now this list.

transform is going to convert my list

which is already sorted which is coming

from list. sort into a list of text

elements and then the text. combine can

combine it into a comma separated string

let's click on okay and check it out

does it

work so now what has happened is we got

a comma separated text in which the

previous text Elements which were comma

separated are now sorted you can see I'm

getting 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 as a

text which is a comma separated number

text but it is sorted version of the

text one so this is what exactly we

wanted to achieve but while doing this

example we have learned text function

and list function which we can use we

also learned how to take advantage of

list. transform function which is very

powerful function which allows you to do

many transformation and this is just one

example of the transformation where I

want to transform each element into a

different data type but you can do many

other operations using list. transform

and I have covered these functions as

part of my beginner tutorial series

with some other examples also so you can

learn more about all these functions

using that particular series try out

this exciting example how do we make

sure that these changes are saved so we

can go to home close and apply so that

all our changes are part of now powerbi

and we can save this file by pressing

control s or by clicking on the save

button so let it load the data of the

sort text table and post that we can

save it so I'm saving it and you have to

try this example out you can create any

comma separated text for this video and

try it

out one of the best way to learn powerbi

or power query is to take up some

examples and try to solve them we are

going to take one example in this video

which is split and distinct why the

example will look very simple to you but

most of the time I found when people try

to solve this problem they take one

small step wrong and then they try to

solve it by a little different way which

is not so effective so let me first of

all tell you the problem the problem is

basically I have these comma separated

text like a comma B comma c a comma B

comma C comma D and so on I have many

like

what I want is across all these rows I

want the distinct codes which are

available like a b c d EF so basically

what is happening this is going to be

splitted and after splitting I need

distinct once I reach power ba I'll tell

you where when people answer this

question they commit the mistake so

let's try to solve this problem on

powerbi and to solve this problem I'm

going to use end to end4 file which we

are using for the learn power B series

and I am on that particular file right

now in the Home tab let me click on

transform data and inside the transform

data I will again click on transform

data and I'll reach to power query as

this is a very simple data this can be

created with enter data so let me enter

this data so I'll go to the Home tab and

click on enter data I will be able to

enter this data a popup is open and here

I'm I'm going to rename the column as

codes and I can call this table as codes

plate let me start creating the rows for

this table by entering the data let me

start typing a comma B comma C and in

the next row let me type a comma B comma

C comma D it is not necessary that you

type the same stuff what I given to you

you can have a little different version

that's absolutely fine

so this is the data I have and let me

now click on okay to get this data in

power query it will add a query which

I'll be able to see on the left hand

side the list of queries where I have

and I will explain you the

transformation needed to do that so I

got the table as soon as I told you this

problem the first answer comes to you

okay we will split it by delimiter yes

that's correct so you can right click

and do split by delimiter or inside the

transform tab you have the option split

column by Del limiter so from any of

these options click on that split column

by D limiter on this popup you have

various options the first option is how

you want to split it the default option

is comma and we have comma separated

string so we are going to use that but

you can change it you can even choose a

custom one second is split at leftmost

rightmost or each occurence in this case

we need each occurrence but depending on

the need you can choose next option is

Advanced options and inside the advanc

option there is a choice if we choose

the wrong one we may get little longer

solution we may still be able to achieve

it but that's not the optimal

solution in this Advanced option I have

option split into columns and rows but

usually people tell me that we'll split

by columns and then they tell you know

we will do unpivot and do that you don't

need to do that actually you have a

better option split into rows because

that will actually convert it into rows

and when you do split by column it do

ask you number of column so you're

limited by number of columns in case of

row you are not limited so if there are

four five six any number it will take

care of that split because it's going to

create new rows after you do that you to

click on okay now we got all the codes

into the rows and the next option is

very simple so I to right click and use

remove duplicates option let me click on

that and we got the desired outcome as

you can see this is the problem which we

can sort with what we have learned so

far there is nothing new but it is just

a use case to pay little attention how

are we going to achieve this I have kept

this use case for your reference you can

solve many other different Problems by

combining various power query operations

so try this out in this video we will

continue our journey of learning power

bi and power query with some examples

the example what we want to take here is

the split column but there is a Twist

The Twist here is that in the column I

have two set of values the one value is

a single value then there is a space and

then there's a comma separate value I

want to split them but the final answers

should contain them in Combined manner

so if you look here the best 1 comma 2

comma 4 is going to become best one best

two and best 4 similarly good one comma

4 will become good one and good four so

how can we achieve this again we are

going to use some of the things which we

have already learned in power query but

try to fit in this use case for this use

case also I'm going to use pyot data.

XLS which is available on my GitHub

account and that is the same file we

have already loaded in end to end 14 PB

so we can continue to use that

particular file those of you who are

directly jumping onto this part of the

video you have to go to my GitHub

account github.com amitchandak PBI

powerbi

you have to go down you will find a file

pyot data. XLS click on that one thing

is you can download this and use it or

the second thing is right click on the

raw don't take the URL from the top and

copy link and that is the link which you

can use as web URL in your powerbi to

load this data in this case I have tried

out this operation on a little different

file but you can continue with the file

you are already having the pyot data.

XLS file let's try this out on powerbi

desktop data. XLS has undergone many

changes over a period of time but for

this use case you should be able to get

the data inside the file but if you

don't get you should be able to create

this data easily using the enter data

option in power

query you should be able to get this

data inside the combined Split Sheet and

as we have discussed the best space one

2 and four I would like to split like

best space

one then I would like best space

two they would be in the continuous row

so let me move it up and best Space 4

same manner I'll get the data for nice

and good also so this is what the final

outcome I want but as of now let me

clean it up and let's keep this file as

is for our

uses this is not going to be a simple

split problem first of all we have to

split the name and the rank into

separate columns then we have to further

split the rank into multiple rows and

then we have to combine these again back

into one single column so two operations

going together split and combine let's

jump on the powerbi desktop I'm going to

load this data again but you can

continue with the file where you have

already loaded so I'm going to use

recent source and from there I'm going

to take pyot data. XLS and in the pyot

data. XLS I have all these sheets which

I have showcased you in the past from

here we would like to take the combined

Split Sheet which has the desired data

and directly go to transform data so we

will reach power query as our data is

complete text Data it might not detect

the first row as header so we have to

manually go and use first row as header

from the menu first step is to split the

column by space into two columns for

that we need the operation split column

by delimiter so split column is

available here I'm going to click on

that and in that we have many option I'm

going to use bu delimiter option let me

click on that it will open a popup in

the select delimiter it has correctly

detected the space as the delimiter

otherwise we can change it we have to go

to the Advance option and inside the

advance option we'll choose column and

we'll keep the value two which it has

detected correctly now we can click on

okay to complete this operation so we

got now two columns but when we look at

the second column we found that the text

which we are expecting is not correct it

is not comma separated value and the

reason for that is the auto conversion

you can see the data type is 1 2 3 there

is a step added change type two which is

converting it into the numbers previous

step has the comma separated value so we

need to delete this step once we delete

we'll reach to the last step where we

see the correct comma separated value

whenever you do power query operations

sometime the change type step is is

automatically added in such cases you

can delete such a step whenever you are

working on power query if something goes

wrong please check it step by step by

looking at what is happening on each of

the

step we need to split the second column

into the rows so again we are going to

use the split column option so let's

select this column and use the split

column by delimiting

and once we get the popup we can see

that it has correctly detected its comma

separated and in the advance we need to

use rows not columns for this time let's

click on okay to complete the operation

as you can observe that now we have the

values required but they are not in one

column they are in two column we are

getting best in one column one in second

column best and two in two different

different columns but what we need to do

is we need to combine them into one

single column so we need to perform

another operation for that now we need a

option merge column merge column is

available under the transform tab we

were on the Home tab that option is not

available in the Home tab that is

available under the transform Tab case

of merge columns the order of selection

is really important so first I'm going

to select the first column and then I'm

going to select the second column colum

if you change the order you may get a

different

result so let's select the first column

click and control and select the second

column from transform tab let's choose

merg columns a popup will open and here

we'll choose separator as space and we

will give a new column name which is

name rank and let's click on okay so now

we got the desired outcome the desired

outcome contains best space one best

space two best Space 4 and so on so this

is what we wanted and as you can see we

have used the standard power query menu

options only to achieve this power query

can solve many complex problem using

these menu options or the power query

functions the only thing is you need to

learn power query in details to achieve

that my advice would be to also look at

all the functions which we have

discussed in beginner tutorial series to

make sure that you are able to take full

advantage of power

query in this video we are going to

discuss subcategory index or subcategory

rank we call Ned rank or nexted index

there is a video from Kerbal on that

that is the inspiration for this video

yeah going to use the technique shown

there to get the subcategory index and

subcategory rank the function required

for subcategory index and subcategory

rank the rank and the index function I

have explained you already in the

beginner tutorial series you can watch

it there I will give you a brief

overview of those function here also let

me show you the two functions I'm

planning to use today the first one is

table do add rank column and the second

one is table. ADD index column both of

them we have already discussed inside

the beginner tutorial series now the

challenge which we are going to get here

is this function works at table level so

I cannot give a kind of a partition to

give me subcategory Rank and that is

what we have to learn how can we make

them to work for a particular portion of

the table or partion of the table or

category or subcategory for example

let's say my table has Brand I want

everything to rank inside a brand from

one to any for subcategory index and

rank what I'm going to use is I'm going

to use the pivot data XLS which is

available on my GitHub and that is the

same file we have already loaded in end

to end 14 PB so we can continue to use

that particular file those of you who

are directly jump jumping onto this part

of the video you have to go to my GitHub

account github.com amitchandak PBI

powerbi you have to go down you will

find a file pyot data. XLS click on that

one thing is you can download this and

use it or the second thing is right

click on the raw don't take the URL from

the top and copy link and that is the

link which you can use as web URL in

your powerbi to load this data in this

case I have tried out this operation on

a little different file but you can

continue with the file you are already

having the pwot data. XLS file let's try

this out on powerbi

desktop I'm on to the powerbi desktop

now let me go to the Home tab transform

data and transform data in power query I

already have multiple queries or tables

and one of the table I have is this pyot

data I have called name subject and

marks and here name can become that

logical division inside which I can rank

or index my subjects so let's first try

out to add the subcategory index by name

so for that we need to use the group by

function first to group this data so I

click on name and I'll go to transform

inside the transform I have option Group

by operation Group by and its functional

I have already explained in this series

and in this video also I have explained

same thing in beginner tutorial series

and I'm going to click on that option

Group by in the popup I will see name as

Group by also observe a new column name

as count and the operation as count

which I'm going to change to all rows

that will disable the column option

let's understand what we are trying here

we are trying to group this data by name

and we want a column which contain all

the rows so the operation is all rows

and now I would like to click on okay to

get this transformed table I do that I

see a column name and a column count

with the table inside each row if I

click on the empty space I can see what

data each table contains table has name

subject and marks for each name the next

step is to add column from add column

custom column so let me first of all

name this column as index the function

which I'm going to use for this is

table. ADD index table. add index can

take table index column name start

position increment and the data type to

give us the index argument would be

count which is a table comma second

argument is the name of the column which

I wanted to give which is sub index

comma now it is not showing because

table is doubled out here so I'm going

to remove the table and now it will

suggest me after the comma so I want to

give the start position which is one

increment which is one and it is asking

for a data type as the last argument

which I can give index 64. type so we

have to return a type and here I'm

returning index 64 close parenthesis and

click on okay try to look into the data

of each table now I can see sub index

inside it and now what I can do is I can

delete this count column it is no more

required and then I can expand this

index column and I can uncheck the name

because I no more need that and let's

click on okay once we expand that you

can observe that the indexes are inside

the name and after that they are

repeating inside the second name and

that is what we want wanted to achieve

index is typically based on the order of

loading it is not based on the marks or

the subject or anything else and that is

where we need the rank column to Define

order based on a column to Showcase you

subcategory rank we are going to do a

little complex operation and I'm going

to Showcase you how can you add another

table inside the same code so first

let's delete these steps and reach till

the step we have edit column where we

have the table let's remove the steps

and reach to the table and we are going

to open that step Again by click on the

setting icon I will now showcase you how

to do complex operation in a column for

that first of all let's move this table

down and write down let and after that

we need to create variables for the

table so let me put this table inside

one variable and put comma after that in

next line I'm going to put another table

name and here I'm going to do the

operation table. add rank column so tab

one has index and in tab two I'm adding

rank to the same tab one which is having

index let's remove the duplicate table

and now understand the syntax of this

one so we require a table which we are

getting from the last step the next one

is the column name which we are going to

give the rank column name and the third

argument is the one by which we are

going to decide how we are going to rank

and to do that I Gove back to the

documentation and bring in what all

values I need to give so I'm going to

copy this and I'm going to change it

once we reach back to our code so let's

take this and put it inside our code

onto the power query we need to provide

our own column name in place of Revenue

which is the rank column and the column

which we plan to use here is the marks

that is what is available in our data in

the double quote then the order is fine

I can keep order. descending next thing

we need to Define is the rank kind and

we are going to keep the values what we

have got from the code so rank kind is

equal to rank kind. competition we are

going to keep it same what we got from

the documentation as of now now we need

to return it because we have used let so

we need to use in and we need to use in

in small and after that we need to

return the underscore tab two click on

okay to complete this custom

column now if You observe the table you

can see the index as well as rank

instead of adding the multiple step what

we have done in inside within the same

custom column we added both of them now

you can see rank is based on the marks

while index is based on the order we

loaded the dat

and when you do the rank column it does

change the sort order of the table so

that is why first you should do the

index operation and then you should use

the rank operation in case you need both

of them together in the rank we have few

more options which we can explore so

let's go back to the formula and here in

the rank kind I can choose different

options competition dance ordinal and

type so those of you who have already

worked on the rank knows that the dance

rank is little difference in case of the

dance rank we get the next rank whether

the rank repeats or not so if you look

below here you have a rank which is one

two and then we have the two again and

then we have four so basically it is

kind of a skip rank but what we want is

dance rank it means one two and three so

even if there is a skip we should be

able to get the next Rank and that is

what happens in case of Danse rank so

let's make it dense Rank and try it out

so now let's look at the data so we have

the different different kind of R let's

look at some different Row in this row

itself if you see one is repeating but

we still have two after that then in

this one also we have one two two but we

have next rank is three so basically

even if the rank is repeated the next

continuous rank is coming the count

column we created using the group by is

no more needed we can delete it now

let's expand the data by using the

expand icon on the right top we can

remove the name and click on okay and

now we are getting rank as well as index

inside our table the subcategory rank

and the subcategory

index so here we have used the table

operations and table operation is

something we have not discussed in this

video or series a lot but you can go

ahead and watch the beginner tutorial

series to understand in depth how to use

table operations and if you want to

execute those operation at the grouping

level or subcategory level you can

utilize the trick I have shown you in

this

video we have learned a lot of powerbi

stuff and now we are ready to create the

pages report pages on the powerbi

desktop which we want to share with

other user to sh share it with other

user we need to publish the file publish

the file to powerbi service powerbi

service is nothing but app. powerbi.com

and from there we are going to share it

with other user we'll have a quick

overview of powerbi service in powerbi

service the report has to go to a

workspace and that particular workspace

is something which we should create and

in that workspace we are going to

publish this file after we publish this

file the file will get divided into two

part right now it's a single file here

in the case of import mode there it will

be divided into data set semantic model

or data set and the visualization file

ideally speaking we don't want to create

any visualization in the file where we

have the data model and the measur we

want to publish it and use the data set

as a live connect and create the

visualization there and because of the

same reason what I've done is I've

deleted all the pages because I don't

want to create visualization on this

file I want to separate out my model

development from my visualization but

before even if I publish this empty file

and this empty file because it has one

page it's going to create a

visualization file which we may not want

it to use we can come back use the data

set and create a file now before I

publish this I need to make sure that my

Majors should get organized in proper

manner I should clean up unnecessary

stuff so definitely I don't have any

unnecessary table because what we have

done during this entire video we have

made sure that we Crea different

versions of the files and whatever is

not required we have not added to this

but we have different places where we

have Majors so some of the majors are

lying here and there in the customer

table we have so many majes so

definitely would like to restructure

that and to restructure we already

learned that you can go to the model

view and into the model view tables this

is the best place to move the majors

across so let's say I have these brand

gross brand net brand brand net to Brand

all these you can control and click or

shift and click you can do that isn't

it and I'll not collect the brand color

because color major I want separate so

all these brand color where should they

where they should go already there are

in the major folder these are my filter

measures I filter this so I can create a

folder filter I can add them there so

they will be moved to a sub folder now

brand color category color they are

color measures so I can put them into

color folder and whatever folder I

create I need to remember the name

because if a new thing come in I I need

to move that in now I have gross two

gross three gross this gross Max sales F

sales I need to move to others now what

I'll do I'll similarly create few

folders like time intelligence this that

and reorganize all my majors

also the majors which are in the

customer table I would like them to move

to the major table and put them

somewhere inside the

folder I moved them into the major

folder then I select all of

them and then I can move them into

display folder which is TI time

intelligence these can also move into pi

so I am almost done with CLE cleanup I

have mostly organized the labels inside

the major folder other than one or two

exception which I wanted to keep in

different tables now one of the

preparation which you also required on

the desktop is to install on promise

Gateway but what I've done is basically

I have used the files which are on

GitHub which is basically online so I

don't require on promise G but if you're

using sources like Excel sheet SQL

Server which is on promise you need to

install on promise Gateway and typically

on promise Gateway need to be installed

on a machine where it can be up and

running always and it should have access

to Excel files those local databases

which you have and that will help you to

refresh your data set on powerb service

which we'll understand in a short while

once everything is ready we are ready to

publish the file now but before we

publish the file let's understand what

is this powerbi service and how do we

create a workpace where we can actually

publish our data so we will go to

powerbi service understand its component

quickly create a works space where we

can publish this file after publishing

this file we have a data we will get the

data set back and create a report now we

can create a report on powerbi service

or we can create a report on powerbi

desktop both are possible once we do

that let's save this file go to powerbi

service understand it component create a

workspace come back and publish this I'm

on powerbi service powerbi service is

nothing but app. powerbi.com make sure

you have created your login as I

explained earlier either you have been

assigned a license by your admin and you

have got the login for app. powerbi.com

you're using that or you create the one

now app. powerbi.com which is also known

as powerbi service or the web version of

the powerbi is for collaboration it's

for sharing whatever content we create

we share that content using powerbi

service with other user now to share the

content of powerbi you need licenses you

need Pro licenses you need PPU licenses

or you need capacity Pro users can share

with Pro users PP users can share with

PP user so that is user based licenses

but if you buy a premium capacity which

is either P1 P2 or P3 in these

capacities first of all you get

exclusive capacity to run your powerbi

which is needed for large organization

application but in the premium capacity

only for designers you need license and

you can use Pro license for that before

premium capacity every user whether it

is a designer report designer or report

Creator or report viewer everyone

requires a license but after you get

premium capacity not everyone require

license viewer doesn't require license

in powerbi service workspace you can

create app and you can assign that to

unlimited number of users when you come

to powerbi service you will see few

sections and let's understand these

sections I'm right now at the Home tab

and where I'm seeing this recommended

recent favorites and my app on the left

hand pane I have create for new report

browsing the content one leg data Hub is

for the Microsoft fabric which is again

accessible using app. powerb

and I've enabled the trial so you will

see the content of Microsoft fabric then

app in case we create the service app we

will have the apps here in case you have

created matrices you will have them here

monitoring Hub in case you have access

to monitoring Hub you will have it

workspaces which are essential for data

sharing are available here and my

workspace my workspace is the workspace

even if you're a free user you will have

your own workspace that is known as bike

workspace Now to create your own

workspace you need to be a pro user and

you also need to have permissions from

your admin to create these workspace now

workspace in power powerbi world it's a

container of resources like report

paginated report dashboard we have

something known as powerbi service

dashboard which is different from report

most of the time for practical purpose

what we call report in powerbi is as

good as dashboard in the bi world but we

have a powerb service dashboard where we

can put in the content from various

other reports so all these components

can be put into one thing which is known

as workspace from workspace I can apply

Ro level security RLS I can distribute

the content to the selected set of users

all these is possible using the

workspace so first of all what you are

going to do Under This workspace there

is a button below new workspace I'm

going to create a new workspace I'm

going to give it as a name and because

we have created end to endend video so

we are going to give it as a name end to

end description is also end to end I

have not created any domain so I'm

leaving it I'm not also giving an image

under the advance instead of trial I'm

going to use it pro I have a pro license

or PPU license I can create that Pro is

basically minimum license required for

sharing or PPU so we can create a

premium per user workspace and and when

you create a premium per user you can

use large semantic model also format

also we are using the powerway reports

so PPU workspace or premium for user

workspace we are creating and now click

on apply the moment you click on apply

it will open your workspace which is

empty and when you click on the new it

will show what all components which you

can create in powerbi service report

pated report scorecard dashboard

semantic model data flow it is also

known as now data flow gen one data M

and streaming data sets the more options

contain these as as well as what you can

use in Microsoft fabric you can watch my

series on Microsoft fabric to know more

about these you have so many things I'm

leaving that explanation right now we

are only focused on the powerbi content

so Microsoft fabric you can watch the

videos on Microsoft fabric let's go back

to the workspace you can upload certain

content from one drive SharePoint on the

workspace you can create a app app is

for the sharing we will learn that you

can manage the access you can share this

workspace with the other people you can

give the name and share it and there are

four types of role admin having access

to everything member having access to

app but not having access to admin

whatas contributors having access till

reports but not having access to app and

viewers only have the viewer access you

can look for an article powerbi workpace

roles and always get the latest on what

a particular user can do and as you can

see here various capabilities has been

defined what each user type can do and

remember the RLS or the RO level

security only applies for viewers so all

the users mostly are going to be viewers

so then we have workspace settings we

are right now only interested in couple

of settings that are related to powerbi

general setting and in this one the

important setting which if you want to

allow your users to update the data set

then you need to allow this model

setting they will be able to update the

model online using this so you need to

check that and allow contributor to

update the app if there was a feature

where it was written if allowed this is

that if allowed you want to allow the

contributor to update the app then you

can allow that okay so now the

contributors can also update the then

data connectors no changes embed code

right now no changes rest I'm leaving as

is now we don't need for our initial

learning that one so these are the

setting for the workspace now if you are

a powerbi admin you will also be the

settings which are under admin portal

under the admin portal most important

settings are lying under the tenant

settings definitely if you have capacity

then you you would go to premium per

user and capacity settings also then

there are organizational visual settings

which are separately available if you go

there you have the visuals then you can

add them there workspaces and custom

branding Etc is there in the tant

everything which you do on power B

service can be controlled you want to

give the help information you can give

and most of the settings if you enable

them they have two to three options for

entire organization for specific

Security Group and these are emailed

enabled Security Group anything which

you want to use on powerb service it

should be emailed enabled and accept so

most of the time you will get these

three setting sometime you may get one

or two but that depends on that

particular setting this is basically to

get the help I disable it and cancel it

email notification if you want to

receive your custom messages now

workspace want to allow to use the

create workspace or not I have allowed

it for the entire organization use

cementing model across workspaces means

I create a workspace I create a model or

data set in one workspace and I want to

use it in another workspace so what

would we will do is we'll create the

data set in workspace and reports in

another workspace so that particular

users of that workspace will not see the

data set in that particular workspace so

these kind of stuff we can do block user

from reassigning personal workspace my

workspace so we have disabled that they

can't reassign the personal workspaces

Define workspace retention period you

can define a workspace retention period

so basically deleted workspace can be

recovered after that there you have n

number of feature like every export you

can do like publish to web is controlled

copy paste visual is control on service

export to excel from service is control

export to CSV is control download report

is control all the features which which

are available on powerbi service most of

those menu items are controlled from

here including which SSO is enabled

which is not enabled there are certain

visuals which are allowed or not allowed

including your map visuals all settings

are available here developer setting

admin API setting gen one data flow

people can create it or not template app

and you want to create the app Q&A

settings semantic model security block

republish and disable refresh package

that setting is available advanced

networking using a your private link

metries setting user experience

experiment share data settings inside

setting data Mar setting data model

setting quick major settings scaleout

setting one leg setting G integration

setting so many settings are there we

can spend days in explaining those but

this is all for admin user but right now

we are learning basics of powerbi so we

are more bothered about our workspace

and what we are going to do with that so

we have a workspace ready and once we

have the data set here we will be able

to create report online now we have

given in this workspace to edit the

model we will be able to edit the model

also the only thing as a pure play

powerbi user which you cannot do is you

can't create a data set on powerb

service most of the other thing you can

do you can create report you can modify

report you can edit data set but you

will not be able to create a model or

add new content here you can't create

connections and bring it so what we are

going to do here we going to publish a

report we will also learn data set

dashboard and app here in the powerbi

service which are basic feature one must

know so let's go back to the powerbi

desktop publish a report come back here

and see what we are able to

create we are back on powerbi desktop

and here we have a report where we don't

have any visualization we have just

created one page because we wanted to

implement the pattern of having

visualization only to be used on a data

set file after it has been published

this is a file which doesn't have any

local database all online database it

will not require on promise Gateway for

refresh I'll go to the Home tab of this

file and I'll press on

publish I have made sure that I have

logged in using the same user which I'm

using on app. power.com so let's click

on publish and it will ask me to save if

the report is not saved and post that it

will showcase me the

workspaces my workspace available for

everyone every kind of user even for

free user usually not used for sharing

so we should not keep a report into the

my workspace which we want to share it

is for personal content and we should

avoid using the content which you want

to share so we are going to put the

content into end to end which is the

workspace we have created for

sharing let me click on end to end and

click on select and this action will

publish the

file it's giving the message that it is

publishing end to end file to powerbi

which is nothing but powerbi service

meet or

collaboration so file has been published

success sucessfully onto the powerbi

service and now we can go and check out

our file on powerbi service I clicked on

got it and let me jump onto the powerbi

service quickly on the powerbi service

I'm able to now see after the page has

refreshed two things one is report which

is only have one page anytime you

publish a PBX you will get a report and

the semantic model or data set the

semantic model is a new name we usually

know it by the name data model or data

set in the case of import mode it will

contain both data and meta in case of

direct query it will only contain meta

in case of live mode we are going to use

the data set which is published already

so the report will contain the small

information about the majors which we

are going to create so now we have our

semantic model and using this semantic

model we can create the report either in

powerbi desktop or on powerbi service so

first of all what we are going to do

here is we will check this semantic

model what we can do out here if I click

on that it will open this UI for the

semantic model where I have file

download this file means I will be able

to download the data set manage

permissions on this data set who can do

what on this then I can refresh refresh

now schedule refresh history it means if

I want to refresh the data I can refresh

it from here I can share it I can

explore this data I can create a few

visualization here just exploring

without even creating a report then in

the explore data I do have option for

autocreate report create create blank

report create paginated report I can

analyze in Excel by clicking on this so

if I click on this it will create an

Excel file for me and there my data set

would be attached and using this data

set I will be able to create pyot tables

and analyze it you want to see lineage

lineage means from where this data is

coming on which report it is going all

this is going to you are seeing this

open data model button because we have

allowed data model editing on the

powerbi service in our workspace setting

and because of that it is showing this

option and if you click on that it will

open the data model and you can change

few things out here you can create new

major new column new table you can

create using the Dex formula you can

create new calculation groups you can

manage roles manage relationship and

create new report on powerbi service

that many things you can do in the

semantic model on the online version

once you allow to edit it calculation

groups has been added very recently on

power our bi service let's go back to

the UI so these are the things which we

can do so what we are going to do is we

will quickly now have a look at few of

these things like creating a report here

and desktop and creating a dashboard uh

we will avoid editing of data model we

have done a lot of work on the powerbi

desktop and things would remain same

here we have published our file without

any visualization on powerbi service and

we got a centic now we would like to use

that centic model and create the

visualization file and this is going to

the file which we are going to use for

creating the end user reports or Dash so

go to the Home tab and inside the Home

tab now you need to go and grab the

powerbi semantic model now this

connection which you are going to do

with the CCH model is known as live

connection and live doesn't mean it's

kind of a direct query on the database

it is as good as what you have refreshed

your data set but this particular file

is neither going to on the data or not

it is going to on on the model the model

is coming from the SCE so RLS and

everything is controlled at the

cementing model level so what I'm going

to do here is I'm going to take this end

to endend model and going to create a

report out here with the all the kind of

visualization I have taught to you till

now you have to click on semantic model

which you want to bring in and connect

and it will create a live connection

once you create the live connection you

will not be able to add new table new

columns all those are not allowed the

moment this model is loaded you will see

you only have have access to the report

View and model view the access for

everything else is gone the data View

and everything you can see the model

here but if you click on any of the

table you don't see option for new

column new table new calculation group

manage Ro view rooll everything is

disabled you can't do that so you are in

kind of a view only mode for this model

it means it's the best condition to

create the visualization so what I'll do

is I will create this report I will try

to have one or two pages in this one and

while I'm creating this report you just

observe you I have already taught you

all the features how to create different

kind of slicer Pages visualization Etc

what I have done uh which I realized

after starting this file is that uh the

images which I have used uh brand image

brand URL and image URL as columns has

not worked so I added measures for that

just by taking Max of those columns and

I'm going to use them here so I'll

quietly build it and I'll speed this up

when this video will get displayed what

you can do is you can build report of

your choice and later on those

visualization can be used inside your

dashboard on powerbi

service

e

e e

so what I've done is I've created a

single page and I'm going to publish

this uh and you can create a page which

you would like to have more details

usually we will have multiple pages and

communicating the message I just created

one example here how what kind of page

we can create uh but based on the design

and requirement you can create the page

and now what we are going to do is we

are going to publish this but before

publish it's going to ask us a name so

I'm going to save it and I'll call it

and to and visual file this is visual

file you can give a name of your choice

or as per your organization standard I'm

right now giving this name because I

want to just differentiate that it's a

visual

file and we going to publish it to the

end to endend workspace only we are not

going to create a different workspace

for this the file is published now we

will go on powerbi service and check

this file we would also like to create a

new report there and let us see how

things are different in powerbi service

compared to powerb

desktop I'm back on powerbi service and

let's go to end to end to check the

newly published report end to endend

visual the report has opened and as you

can see in end to endend visual report

we got our report which we have created

on the dashboard we got the slicer which

we can click and filter the

data so this is the viewer View and this

is how viewer is going to use it

remember I am an admin admin viewer

means I have the admin privilege on this

workspace so what I'm getting in my

menus could be a little bit more than

what and user is going to get here so

I'm able to filter then same way like

desktop we can slice and dice using the

visual interactions and data will get

filtered across as I have a single page

as of now I'm not seeing the page menu

but here once you have more than one

page you will be able to see a small

Arrow icon to take you to the different

pages if you click on the file you have

option save as a copy again I'm admin

because of which I'm getting but viewers

might not get it depends on the

permission which we are providing to

them download this file manage

permissions print this page embed report

generate QR code settings these

permission all depends on which kind of

access we have given to the end user I'm

admin viewer so I'm getting all these

again export option analyze in Excel

PowerPoint PDF depending on the viewer

access now if you go to the visual there

are these filters which are available

then there is a set aler option then

copy this as an image again copy this as

image if you remember we have this

option control which all users can do

and then you have this pin visual which

we will be using while creating the

dashboard you have option to share on

the top you have chat in the teams

explore this data get inside subscribe

to the report set alerts and edit and as

I'm having permission on this workspace

to edit the report I will be able to

edit that report and again these are

some additional permissions which I can

see here now as a viewer you will also

be able to see filter pane now the

filter pane you will only be able to see

if the filter pan is enabled we can hide

the filter pan while creating the report

then users will not see once user click

on any of the visual just like I've

created on this tag bar visual they will

be able to see the visual level filters

also few more things which they can do

is view we they can view as a full

screen cape and come back then they have

this fit to page

fit to

width and actual size all these option

they can also explore then there's a

comment users can give give a comment

out here you can click on got it and

then you can start writing down the

comments this is for the

collaboration we close the comments then

you have this Mark as a favorite if you

click on this this report will be marked

as favorite so what I'm going to do here

is I'm going to click on edit and I will

try to modify this report what I'm going

to do here is I'm going to create a

little bit of space and for that I'm

going to delete this card Visual and

also let me do one thing I'm going to

make this slicer as a normal button

slicer so I'll create it as this kind of

a slicer and then I'll go ahead and go

to the slicer setting and I'll create it

as tiles now with these changes let me

go ahead and further do more changes in

this report in the edit mode and

showcase you what all we can do in the

edit mode I can even modify the model

because of my setting I can add a new

page and create additional visualization

here so let's I can plus a a page and I

can call it as detailed page and I can

add additional visual to that page let's

say I want to add a trend I can bring in

month year here and I can bring net and

then can I can convert this into a line

visual I can add additional visuals

here so so here I have added a page in

this manner you can edit a report on

powerbi service and you can save it now

there are various options in a powerbi

service report so if you go to the file

you can save save as new copy print if

you want to print the current batch you

want to embed this then you can generate

embed code this is the embedded code

which you can use then embed in

SharePoint online you can get the code

for embed SharePoint online publish to

web now publish to web is a permission

which we need to give and once we give

this content would be available publicly

now my content is basically learning

content so I can publish it to web but

your organizational content you should

not publish it to web you should instead

use uh the other secure ined method

export to PowerPoint you can export it

to PowerPoint with the current value or

with the default values two options

exclude hidden Pages only export current

pages and in that manner you can export

it to PowerPoint it will generate a

PowerPoint and you will be able to use

it also in PowerPoint we have a

connector for powerbi which can be used

to connect with the pages of the powerbi

report live then export to PDF and

download this file means it will

download PBX in the view we have fit to

page fit to width actual width and all

these options uh we can see different

page like if the selection pain is not

coming I can see that if the bookmark

pain is not coming I can use that if the

SN slicer pane is not coming I can

enable that insides pan I can enable

that so all these things I can enable

right now I'm disabling those reading

view we will come out of the edit view

let's go back to the edit View and then

open data model then you have options

for ask a question data drill text box

you can add shapes you can save this

report and chat in teams and generate QR

code analyze in Excel you can download

and analyze this report in Excel these

things you can do now let's go back to

the reading mode and check out more

options let me give you quick recap of

the menu items we have here so the file

options now has save a copy download

this file manage permissions embed

report QR code and settings so these are

the setting for the report the report

name the description if you want to

promote endorsement if you want to

promote this report to the users you can

use that and there are a few other

options which you can use export analyz

in Excel PowerPoint we have already

checked out PDF you can share this

report with the others user I can assign

it to the others users in the

organization I can share the link mail

or teams or PowerPoint I can chat with

the others user regarding this report in

teams I can further explore this data by

opening the explore data I can get

inside subscribe to the report I can

create a subscription for this report to

come to me on a given time I'm

discarding that I can set a alert alert

can be set on a major for a value high

or low so threshold greater than or less

than on which major I need that what

kind of notification I need and I can

start my alerts once that setup is done

and then we have C related contain

lineage view means from where this

report is coming pin to a dashboard so

pin a dashboard here will pin the

complete page on the dashboard on the

individual visuals we do have a option

to pin them to the dashboard that we can

use to pin the individual visual on the

dashboard other than that we have option

view semantic model which we have

already seen it will open the santic

model and then there we can go ahead and

open the catic model again so means this

is going to led us to the first screen

of the semantic model then there is an

open semantic model after that we can go

ahead and edit that and as you have seen

we have enabled the option to edit it in

the powerbi service so we'll be able to

edit that now other than that in case

your organization have the f64 capacity

onwards or P1 capacity onwards you will

be able to use this co-pilot option to

ask various question both in the viewer

mode as well as in the edit mode and

then you have the bookmarks option you

can add the personal bookmarks or you

can click on the show more books marks

to see what all already existing

bookmarks are there so now what I've

done is I've covered basically most of

the options which you have in the

powerbi service report in the edit mode

as well as the viewer mode so you have

to go ahead and explore all these

options these option keep on changing

and they keep on increasing also as in

when we get new features so continue to

look towards what features are available

onto the release which is available at

at that particular moment of time now I

would like to create a dashboard

dashboard can only be created on powerbi

service remember powerbi report which we

created on the desktop is not the

dashboard in powerbi World dashboard is

something which we create on powerbi

service and to do that what I'm going to

do is I'm going to open my report which

I have recently published and in that

one I have pin icons and using those pin

icons I'm going to create my dashboard

remember powerbi dashboard cannot have

slicers unless we pin the complete page

so once we pin the complete page then

only we will have the slicers individual

visuals will not have slicer we cannot

pin the slicer and even if we pin the

complete page the slicer with that page

is going to impact the section in the

dashboard which is coming from that page

not the other visualization so remember

these difference between powerbi service

report and dashboard and take a call

whether you really want to create a

dashboard or you want to create a report

I'm back on powerbi service and let's go

to end to end to check the report has

opened let me go to the detailed page

and as you remember we have these three

dots on three dots we have this option P

to a dashboard that can pin the complete

page to the dashboard including the

slicers remember when in powerb service

dashboard you cannot add slicers so if

you go to the individual visuals if I go

to here on the main page if I go to this

visual you don't see a pin icon but in

this one you see a pin visual so pin

visual will add it to the powerbi

dashboard but powerbi dashboard cannot

have slicers you can't pin the slicers

so if you want the slicers you have to

pin the complete page so in this manner

you can pin the visuals to a dashboard

and create a powerbi service dashboard

you can pin the visuals from multiple

reports on powerbi service dashboard and

you can use that and instead of pinning

individual visual from the first page

I'll pin the complete dashboard and let

me give this dashboard as a new name is

main Dash Pin live so I have pinned this

it's giving me go to dashboard option

but I would like to pin a visual and

then we will go there then I go to the

detailed report and from there I'm going

pin this line visual main Dash as well

as I'll pin this P visual main Dash and

now I'll go to the dashboard now when I

click and go to the dashboard you can

see that I have my page as well as my

two visuals which are coming here I can

change a little bit of layout if I want

then I can ask certain questions here

within Q&A it will generate the Q&A I

can ask top customers by Citys Nets and

it will generate a visual so that is the

advantage of giving a dashboard to the

end user that they can ask questions and

using those questions they can get

additional answers if I want to edit

this dashboard I can edit I can

subscribe to this dashboard I can chat I

can comment on this dashboard by adding

additional comments here I can click on

any of the visual and analyze the data

now because I bought a complete page it

is doing the interactions also now in

the case of the single visual the moment

I click on that visual it will take me

back to my report let's look at the edit

mode you can add the tile dashboard

theme mobile layout these things you can

do with the dashboard now subscribe to

dashboard I can create a subscription

for dashboard to deliver to me at a

particular

time and on the right hand side if you

pay attention whatever reports and

dashboard we have open you're getting

the icon for that and you can close it

so I close the dashboard my report is

open I can close my report my data set

details is open I can close those data

set details once you are done with this

entire exercise of you know creating a

powerbi report and dashboard and

everything the next thing which you need

to do is schedule your data refresh now

to schedule your data refresh what you

have to do is you have to go to the

setting of your semantic model and then

there you have option for scheduling the

refresh cementing model is available in

your workspace and using the three dots

you can go to the settings and there

from there you will be able to schedule

the refresh also in case you are using

the on premise data then there is an

option to configure your on promise

Gateway settings and connection settings

you can edit as per requirement inside

the semantic model settings only so

let's jump onto the workspace once again

and try to refresh the data set and see

what all things we can do in my case I

have a online data so I would not

require on promise Gateway simply

refresh should be able to refresh my

data and also I can schedule it in my

case because the data is static there is

no benefit of scheduling it but in real

time scenario you have to schedule a

refresh now in case of pro you can get

refresh as many as eight times in a day

in case of PPU and premium you will be

able to schedule refresh 48 times in a

day if if you want near realtime data

then you have to choose for direct query

mode I can go back to my workspace which

is already open and here what you can do

because it's a online version I can

actually refresh my data set to bring in

the data schedule refresh has been

disabled refresh as failed let's look

white as failed so first of all let's go

to the settings and check out everything

is fine here so I go to the setting here

when I scroll down and go to data set

setting there is error here edit

credentials and we will use anonymous

organizational and we'll say sign in

let's see does it work out yes it has

worked now let's go back again and see

do we require a permission or this time

it's going to refresh it's refreshing

right now if you see and to check the

refresh history you can go to the

settings again three dot settings

refresh history it will show you the

refresh is in progress and once it is

refreshed it will give you a message

that refresh is

completed and the refresh has completed

while we were checking that out and new

data has come so in this manner you can

refresh the data but before you refresh

the data what you have to do is because

I was only having up one data source and

my data source was online data source it

does not require Gateway otherwise you

have to configure on promise Gateway

right now it is the cloud connection but

you might have to configure on promise

Gateway if you're using on promise

sources once you configure your on

promise Gateway you have to configure

your data source credentials after doing

that if there are certain parameters

required M query parameter if you used

we can to set those query cacheing in

case you want so you can turn on the

query caching refresh this is the

scheduled refresh I can schedule it to

refresh daily on a particular time so

once I click on on I need to add a time

and then I can apply and now it will get

refresh daily at 1:00 a.m. right now I'm

disabling it because I don't want it to

happen server settings this is my server

data connections then Q&A features all

these are data settings which we can

change let me go back to my by workspace

so now you know how to refresh your data

set also now whatever Gateway and

connections we have where do we monitor

those so in the setting icon you can go

to manage gateways and connection and

here you will be able to see all your

connection under the connection if you

have set up on promise Gateway you will

be able to see on promise Gateway in the

past I have set up a on promise Gateway

that you are seeing if there are virtual

Network gateways you will be able to see

it here so in this manner you will be

able to see your connection details and

Gateway

now let's quickly understand how can we

create a allog together new report on

powerbi service using a data set so

there is an option on the Home tab or

there is a create button here on the

left hand side top once you click you

can paste data manually or you can pick

up a publish data set I'll pick up a

publish data

set end to end autocreate report or

create report from blank you can use

autocreate report and powerbi will

create a report for you I'll create a

blank report just to explain it to you

and I am on the very similar UI what saw

in the

edit report now here I can quickly

create a visual I'll just go to create

one visual for giving an

example I have created a visual and now

I can save it so when I save it for the

first time it will ask me a

name and let let me call it service

report and click on Save the moment I

save it for the first time it will take

me to the reading mode after that when I

go to the edit mode and now save it it

will remain in the edit mode so in this

manner you can edit your reports or

create new report on the powerbi

service service we have a version of

power query online where we can

actually transform our data centrally

that is known as data

flow now the reason why we have data

flow here on the powerbi services

basically what happens sometime multiple

teams use similar kind of power query

transformation and that is why we want

to centralize those transformation that

is why on powerbi service we can create

data flow data flow can centralize all

these

transformation in the fabric world we

also call it data flow gen one now data

flow are for data prep data cleaning and

data transformation you can use data

flow just like you use power query on

the desktop once you do the

transformation you can use it as a

source on power ba desktop to create

your new report in a Ideal World we will

create a data flow for our Dimensions

where we need lot of transformation or a

small table where we need need a lot of

transformation we can centralize all

those transformation in the data flow so

we can have a dimension in the data flow

then we will use this data flow along

with our facts directly coming from the

sources into a data set we will publish

that data set which is a powerb desktop

file we'll publish that data set without

creating a visualization and once that

data set is published we'll use it again

and would create a visual file I'll just

go to give you how do you create a data

set so press new and data set you will

be landed on powerbi data set here you

can define a new table link table from

other data flows import mode means you

can import a model attach common data

model folder okay so I'll use this add a

new table it will L me to the UI to

bring in the data and here I will use

this web API in the web API I will bring

in my data from GitHub so let me go to

the

GitHub and bring in my file says data

used in video I click on that right

click on Raw copy link go back to the

powerbi service give this

URL I have already used it so it is not

asking for any further details press

next and I can add all of

them and then I can click on transform

data it it will add the data to the

power bi data flow and here I can do the

transformation clean data prep

everything now if you remember in the

sales table I added some column index

the same columns could have been added

to the powerbi data flow or power query

also I can go here and can use add

column and can add a custom column let's

call it

gross and gross is nothing but quantity

multiply by price and I can give it as a

data type decimal number okay in the

same manner I can use other columns and

then I will be able to complete my

transformation once I'm done with all my

transformation I can go ahead and use

Save and close to save the all the data

in my data

flow it's going to check and it will ask

for a name I'll will call it sales data

flow and I'll give the same

description I'll save it how it is

really important that the data flow by

default doesn't load data so the very

first time you need to refresh it now so

you have to click refresh now now

typically on D Gen 2 which is on

Microsoft fabric Auto refresh kick off

immediately after publish but this

doesn't happen in data flow gen one we

have to manually kick it on every time

you do changes you need to do a

refresh you can close it and when you

come here on your workspace you should

be able to see this data flow and you

can go to the refresh history to check

if the data is loaded or not in our case

the data is already loaded here now what

we need to do is we need to go to the

powerb desktop and use this data

flow so I'll open up a new

file on powerb desktop I'll open a new

file the new file is opened and here now

I want to bring in data from powerbi

data flow so I'll use get data more and

there I need to go to data flow I can

search for

that I got option for data flow power ba

data flow Legacy data

flows so they are coming from different

different places so let's use powerbi

data flu Legacy and use

connect let me try to sign in

let me use

connect and in the end to end I able to

get my data flow from here I can pick up

all the four tables and load the data

from here I have to do all the steps

which I've done during this exercise

creating the model measures all the

calculations field parameters

calculation group Etc and then finally

publish this and once I publish this

file I'll get a data set and I can use

that data set again to create my

visualization as you are already aware

of all those steps you can try that out

I will simply share it as a new and to

and

file in this manner you can use powerbi

data flow to centralize all your

transformation data preparation and data

cleaning

in powerbi workspace we have app this

app has a really important role when we

want to share the content with the users

and we don't want to give these

workspaces kind of a look to them so

what we typically prefer is we give them

an app access so what we going to do is

we are going to use this create

app and we can give it as a name let's

say bi app can give a

description we can choose a color for

our app and and we can upload a logo for

that then we can go to the content and

add a

Content so we can add the reports which

we have end to end and service report

okay all these reports we can add

multiple reports we have so we can add

those

reports now inside each report if there

are multiple Pages it's going to show

those pages and we can see those pages

so we have multiple content which

is now how do you differentiate content

for different people so when you go to

the audience actually you have these

show hiide buttons using these show

hiide buttons you can create different

kind of audiences so you can say new

audience you created a new audience now

see this is bi app this is new audience

now this new audience I can refer as

let's say service only I want to give a

service

report so I'll give a service report to

that audience and I can hide other

things let's say I can hide these only

will have service report then I can give

the users who will be audience of

service report in powerbi app I can give

the audience who will be audience of B

app if you want to give it to entire

organization you can choose entire

organization but there's no benefit of

creating multiple audience if you are

giving this report to entire

organization now there are Advanced

option like allow people to share the

data set in this app audience allow

people to build the content with this

data set in the app audience so you can

give those permission as per requ

requirement usually what we do is we

assign it to users or to the emailed

enabled list and then finally after we

decide our audience decide the reports

so in this workspace I can have n number

of reports out of those reports I can

decide which I want to add in app and

out of those reports I can decide which

reports will go to which audience so

once I'm done with that I can publish

this app and this will be shared with

users in the content I can add some

headers sections and all those I can

divide these reports inside the category

and all those I can do so I can create

different sections also so let me

finally publish this app and it will be

published it will show a URL which you

can copy or you can click on go to app

you can share this URL with the users

and this will now open powerbi Service

app and you can see with the chosen

color we are seeing the app and this is

the better way to give it to the end

users they can have access to multiple

reports at one place and we don't have

to share each and every report they have

very similar options what we had in the

powerbi service so they have print this

page embed report QR code

share export and remember all these are

controlled from the permission what we

have given at the tenant level so in

this manner you can create and share an

app if you remember when we were

analyzing the data on powerbi service we

have downloaded one Excel for analyzing

EX ex this is the same Excel I have

opened up and also enabled the content

and I'm getting now all my data which I

can analyze here and here also I can

create a pyot table you can already see

there is enablement of pyot table H so I

can go here and choose certain things

let's say I can bring in brand on the

row and then I can bring in certain

majors for

analysis and I can start my analysis in

this manner if you are a Excel user you

still like to be an Excel user but you

don't want to you know download the data

and analyze it you can simply connect to

this data set you need to have

permission to for that and once you have

permission you can do that it is not

that you can always have to do analyze

in Excel you can go to the data and in

the versions depending on what version

you have inside the get data you do have

option to connect Power Platform and

there you can connect with powerbi and

you can again create similar kind of

visualization so you can initiate

process from here also so now I can save

this and keep

it another thing which we have done is

we have downloaded this PowerPoint so as

you can see this PowerPoint has been

downloaded it has been created as

image so what we can do here is we can

add a new content and try to use the

powerbi plugin so we have a powerbi

plugin to connect live and get the data

from powerbi directly so I'll add a new

slide here a new blank slide and inside

that new slide let me add this powerb

plugin in the newer version which is by

default available in the older version

you can go ahead and add it from the

adding now it needs a URL to get this

URL I need to go to the powerbi service

report and in the powerbi service report

this is the report I have which is right

now open so I can go to share copy

link copy this link come back and paste

it inside our PowerPoint

click on insert and this is inserted now

into the PowerPoint and if you go here

in the data option you have the refresh

option you can get the new data you have

the Data Insights you have filter

section you can filter the data you can

hide the filter section you can enable

the filter section there are few more

options like clear data learn then

outline all these options are available

so basically you can connect live you

don't need images now when I downloaded

it came with images now I can have a

PowerPoint with the live connection and

in that one I can embed the my

visualization and I don't need to go

back to powerb service while doing the

presentation itself I can slice and dice

the data so let's look at this first

page now it is a static image I can't

slice and dice isn't it but if I go

ahead and add this page let me bring in

that particular page so close this go to

the main page share copy link copy copy

this let's go back to the PowerPoint add

the power VI plugin give it a space

paste this URL insert and now I have my

page is it working look at this I

analyzing data here on

PowerPoint I'm no more going back to

Power I can go here filter the data here

the data is reflect changing based on

interactions I can go here and select

States whatever I

like and the data will keep on filtering

so in this manner I can have a dynamic

slide on on my PowerPoint and I can

analyze the data directly from powerbi

service page which is embedded here and

to give more space you can hide the

filters as I shown you you don't need

that section what happens when you're

doing the presentation you have lot of

content but your power ba content is

static now you can make that content

that Dynamic by using this powerb

plug-in in PowerPoint instead of

downloading this static image you can

use this and create Dynamic slides on

PowerPoint friends you have reached to

the end of this video you have covered

20 hour of detailed video along with me

in learn powerbi full course I'm hopeful

this video would have enhanced your

powerbi knowledge to the next level and

now you are a pro in

powerbi powerbi is a journey it's just a

beginning friends this is just a

beginning with this video you are now

appr pro powerbi professional to become

expert take full advantage of 600

another videos on my channel also go to

community. powerbi.com and try to solve

some of the problems by solving

Community problem and providing solution

is the best way to take your powerbi

journey to the next level this is the

same thing I have done for years serving

Community will help you in deep

understanding of the powerbi concept and

will help you to solve real time

problems there would be no lack of

realtime problems once you reach to

powerbi community so friends I would

like to thank you for your patience of

watching this 20 hour video please like

share and comment on this video share it

with your friends and relatives and

anyone who is looking to start the

powerbi journey thank you have a

wonderful 2025